Sīlakkhandhavaggaabhinava复注
458 段
戒蕴品新疏显示巴利原文
Sīlakkhandhavaggaabhinavaṭīkā
著作起始之论显示巴利原文
Ganthārambhakathā
那位宣说了深奥、难见、殊胜之正法者,
具远见者,长久以来,建立了教法。
善巧调伏所化之心意,具大智慧、大悲心;
礼敬已,彼与正法僧俱、堪受尊敬者。
历经三次结集所传,属殊胜长部经典者,
其注释,以及对它的善美注释。
虽然它确实如此,但经由传承而来,
无论在文字还是义理上,都存在诸多疏漏之处。
那位众多白象之主,众多国土的国王;
于教法净化中坚定,恒常策励其心。
依靠他,心中思惟:“或许我也能于阐明导师教法之时,
成为一点助缘。”他这般思惟着。
能令希求法轮增长之智者,心生欢喜,
名为《善妙庄严》者,诸位当专心聆听。
显示巴利原文 Yo desetvāna saddhammaṃ, gambhīraṃ duddasaṃ varaṃ; Dīghadassī ciraṃ kālaṃ, patiṭṭhāpesi sāsanaṃ.1. Vineyyajjhāsaye chekaṃ, mahāmatiṃ mahādayaṃ; Natvāna taṃ sasaddhammagaṇaṃ gāravabhājanaṃ.2. Saṅgītittayamāruḷhā, dīghāgamavarassa yā; Saṃvaṇṇanā yā ca tassā, vaṇṇanā sādhuvaṇṇitā. 3. Ācariyadhammapāla- ttherenevābhisaṅkhatā; Sammā nipuṇagambhīra-duddasatthappakāsanā.4. Kāmañca sā tathābhūtā, paramparābhatā pana; Pāṭhato atthato cāpi, bahuppamādalekhanā.5. Saṅkhepattā ca sotūhi, sammā ñātuṃ sudukkarā; Tasmā sabrahmacārīnaṃ, yācanaṃ samanussaraṃ.6. Yo’nekasetanāgindo, rājā nānāraṭṭhissaro; Sāsanasodhane daḷhaṃ, sadā ussāhamānaso.7. Taṃ nissāya ‘‘mamesopi, satthusāsanajotane; Appeva nāmupatthambho, bhaveyyā’’ti vicintayaṃ.8. Vaṇṇanaṃ ārabhissāmi, sādhippāyamahāpayaṃ; Atthaṃ tamupanissāya, aññañcāpi yathārahaṃ.9. Cakkābhivuḍḍhikāmānaṃ, dhīrānaṃ cittatosanaṃ; Sādhuvilāsiniṃ nāma, taṃ suṇātha samāhitāti. 10.
著作起始论释显示巴利原文
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
这位大语法家阿阇梨,善能深入自宗他宗之稠林,在注释开端,为礼敬三宝等,说“以慈悲清凉之心”等。于此,注释开端礼敬三宝的用意,诸师于各处多有广说。即如此说:显示巴利原文
Nānānayanipuṇagambhīravicitrasikkhattayasaṅgahassa buddhānubuddhasaṃvaṇṇitassa saddhāvahaguṇasampannassa dīghāgamavarassa gambhīraduranubodhatthadīpakaṃ saṃvaṇṇanamimaṃ karonto sakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhanasamattho mahāveyyākaraṇoyamācariyo saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmapayojanādividhānāni karonto paṭhamaṃ tāva ratanattayapaṇāmaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādimāha. Ettha ca saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇappayojanaṃ tattha tattha bahudhā papañcenti ācariyā. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti –
“于注释开端,礼敬导师,是为以法之善说性,令于导师生起净信;及通过显示导师之无虚妄说,令于法生起净信。由此二种净信,能成就大义利。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe satthari paṇāmakaraṇaṃ dhammassa svākkhātabhāvena satthari pasādajananatthaṃ, satthu ca avitathadesanabhāvappakāsanena dhamme pasādajananatthaṃ. Tadubhayappasādā hi mahato atthassa siddhi hotī’’ti (dha. sa. ṭī. 1-1).
或者说:“宣说三宝礼敬之语,是为了表明自己对三宝的净信;而表明净信,是为了令智者心生欢喜;令智者欢喜,是为了使他们信受注释书;信受注释书,则是为了成就一切功德。”或者说:“在注释开端礼敬三宝,是为了表明所释之法的来源、依止与清净;而表明这些,是为了令智者于法之注释中产生尊重;产生尊重,则是为了他们能依正确无倒的受持等次第而获得正行道,成就一切利乐。”或者说:“因为礼敬是吉祥的,是一切所作之先行,是诸贤者所行之道,以及为了令后人随见而行,故于注释中作礼敬三宝之行。”或者说:“欲注释具足四种甚深之法律者,虽具足智慧辩才,亦如同入于大海之人一般,会有大怖畏生起;而此礼敬供养之仪,由忆念三宝功德所生,能除彼怖畏;因此于注释中作礼敬三宝之行。”或者说:“为了令执非师为师的世间,能如实于真正之师——正等觉者生起师想;为了令他们舍弃于非师之师想;为了远离‘学习如来所宣之法律后,便自谓是我所悟’(波罗夷195)的过失,故于注释中作礼敬之行。”或者说:“以礼敬佛陀世尊之仪,为了令行佛乘者生起求证正等觉之精进;以礼敬正法之仪,为了令行独觉佛乘者生起求证独觉佛之精进;以礼敬僧伽之仪,为了”
},
{显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘ratanattayapaṇāmavacanaṃ attano ratanattayappasādassa viññāpanatthaṃ, taṃ pana viññūnaṃ cittārādhanatthaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya gāhaṇatthaṃ, taṃ sabbasampattinipphādanattha’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahaṇadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanattha’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘maṅgalabhāvato, sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi samācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘catugambhīrabhāvayuttaṃ dhammavinayaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmassa mahāsamuddaṃ ogāhantassa viya paññāveyyattiyasamannāgatassāpi mahantaṃ bhayaṃ sambhavati, bhayakkhayāvahañcetaṃ ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇajanitaṃ paṇāmapūjāvidhānaṃ, tato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘asattharipi satthābhinivesassa lokassa yathābhūtaṃ satthari eva sammāsambuddhe satthusambhāvanatthaṃ, asatthari ca satthusambhāvanapariccajāpanatthaṃ, ‘tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’ti (pārā. 195) ca vuttadosapariharaṇatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato paṇāmavidhānena sammāsambuddhabhāvādhigamāya buddhayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ, saddhammassa ca paṇāmavidhānena paccekabuddhabhāvādhigamāya paccekabuddhayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ, saṅghassa ca paṇāmavidhānena paramatthasaṅghabhāvādhigamāya sāvakayānaṃ paṭipajjantānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘maṅgalādikāni satthāni anantarāyāni, ciraṭṭhitikāni, bahumatāni ca bhavantīti evaṃladdhikānaṃ cittaparitosanatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘sotujanānaṃ yathāvuttapaṇāmena anantarāyena uggahaṇadhāraṇādinipphādanatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ paṇāmakiriyā. Sotujanānuggahameva hi padhānaṃ katvā ācariyehi saṃvaṇṇanārambhe thutipaṇāmaparidīpakāni vākyāni nikkhipīyanti, itarathā vināpi taṃ nikkhepaṃ kāyamanopaṇāmeneva yathādhippetappayojanasiddhito kimetena ganthagāravakaraṇenā’’ti ca evamādinā. Mayaṃ pana idhādhippetameva payojanaṃ dassayissāma, tasmā saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva ca payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘iti me pasannamatino …pe… tassānubhāvenā’’ti. Ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇañhi yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthaṃ ratanattayapūjāya paññāpāṭavabhāvato, tāya ca paññāpāṭavaṃ rāgādimalavidhamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“大名!于何时,圣弟子忆念如来,彼时其心不为贪所缠,不为嗔所缠,不为痴所缠,彼时其心正直。”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ mahānāma samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; a. ni. 11.11).
因此,藉由礼敬三宝,以洗净垢染的智慧成就慧的善巧。或者说,由于礼敬三宝是慧的近因,亦即定之因,故而成就慧的善巧。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Tasmā ratanattayapūjāya vikkhālitamalāya paññāya pāṭavasiddhi. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya paññāpadaṭṭhānasamādhihetuttā paññāpāṭavaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
《增支部·六集·第10经》与《增支部·十一集·第11经》中说:“大名!圣弟子心得正直,便获得义利的觉受,获得法味的觉受,获得与法相应的喜悦;喜悦者生起喜,意喜者身得轻安,身轻安者感受乐,有乐者心得定。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ujugatacitto kho pana mahānāma ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammopasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedayati, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10; a. ni. 11.11).
而“定是慧的近因”这一点,正如“有定者如实了知”这句经文所说。由此,以如此显现的智慧,克服了疲厌,便将完成先前所承诺的注释。因此说:“礼敬三宝之作……乃至……因成就慧之善巧故。”或者,由于礼敬三宝能增长寿命、容貌、快乐与力量,故应知能无障难地完成。因为以礼敬三宝,寿命、容貌、快乐与力量便得以增长。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Samādhissa ca paññāya padaṭṭhānabhāvo ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99; 5.1071; netti. 40; peṭako. 66; mi. pa. 14) vuttoyeva. Tato evaṃ paṭubhūtāya paññāya khedamabhibhuyya paṭiññātaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samāpayissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇañhi…pe… paññāpāṭavabhāvato’’ti. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavaḍḍhanato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ratanattayapaṇāmena hi āyuvaṇṇasukhabalāni vaḍḍhanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“常行恭敬问讯,恒修尊敬长者之人,”
四法得以增长:寿命、容貌、快乐与力量。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhivādanasīlissa, niccaṃ vuḍḍhāpacāyino; Cattāro dhammā vaḍḍhanti, āyu vaṇṇo sukhaṃ bala’’nti. (dha. pa. 109);
由此,因寿命、容貌、快乐与力量的增长,事业必定成就,故说:“礼敬三宝……乃至……应知。”或者说,由于礼敬三宝能带来辩才无减,故应知能无障难地达成圆满。因为礼敬三宝的确能带来无减。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Tato āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavuddhiyā hotveva kāriyaniṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattayapūjāya āyu…pe… veditabba’’nti. Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya paṭibhānāparihānāvahattā anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aparihānāvahā hi ratanattayapūjā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,有七种不退法。哪七种?敬重师、敬重法、敬重僧、敬重学、敬重定、善友为伴、易受教诲。”由此,因辩才无减,必定能如所承诺的那样圆满达成,故说:“礼敬三宝……乃至……应知。”或者说,由于在对净信所依处行供养有殊胜功德,故应知能无障难地达成圆满。因为在对净信所依处行供养确有殊胜功德。正如所说——显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattime bhikkhave, aparihānīyā dhammā, katame satta? Satthugāravatā, dhammagāravatā, saṅghagāravatā, sikkhāgāravatā, samādhigāravatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sovacassatā’’ti (a. ni. 7.34) tato paṭibhānāparihānena hotveva yathāpaṭiññātaparisamāpananti vuttaṃ ‘‘ratanattaya…pe… veditabba’’nti. Atha vā pasādavatthūsu pūjāya puññātisayabhāvato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Puññātisayā hi pasādavatthūsu pūjā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
若人供养应受供养者——诸如来或声闻弟子,
他们已超越戏论,度脱忧愁与悲泣,
若人供养如是寂灭、无所畏惧者,
此功德不可计量,纵以任何方式,亦不能称量。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadiva sāvake; Papañcasamatikkante, tiṇṇasokapariddave. Te tādise pūjayato, nibbute akutobhaye; Na sakkā puññaṃ saṅkhātuṃ, imettamapi kenacī’’ti. (khu. pā. 196; apa. 1.10.2);
而殊胜功德,也正是达成所期之圆满的方法。如所说——显示巴利原文
Puññātisayo ca yathādhippetaparisamāpanupāyo. Yathāha –
这是人与天人的、能满足一切欲求的宝藏;
凡是他们所希求的任何事物,一切皆由此获得。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Esa devamanussānaṃ, sabbakāmadado nidhi; Yaṃ yadevābhipatthenti, sabbametena labbhatī’’ti. (khu. pā. 8.10);
行道者若依方便而行,事业必定成就,故说:“于净信所依处……乃至……应知。”如是,礼敬三宝,因觉证了无上福田,具有无量的威力和殊胜功德,故于充满种种障难的世间共住中,亦能摧破一切与障难相连的杂染,并遮止怖畏等灾祸。因此,善说:“注释之初,礼敬三宝,是为令所承诺的注释无有障难而完成,应如是知。”显示巴利原文
Upāyesu ca paṭipannassa hotveva kāriyaniṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘pasādavatthūsu…pe… veditabba’’nti. Evaṃ ratanattayapūjā niratisayapuññakkhettasambuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhāvo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Tasmā suvuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabba’’nti.
然而,欲作如是有利益的礼敬三宝之人,因其余二宝以佛宝为根本,故先对佛宝行礼,而说:“以悲心清凉之心……乃至……已脱诸趣。”因为法与僧二宝以佛宝为根本,其中僧宝又以法宝为根本。此理当依注释书中所出的譬喻而了知,如:“世尊如满月,由彼所说之法如月轮之光,僧伽则如因月光而生起喜悦之世间。”或者,因佛是一切众生中的最上者,故先说佛;因法从彼而生、由彼所教示,故次说法;因僧与彼法相应、依彼法而修习,故次说僧。或应依注释书中所说次第了知:“因是引导一切众生入于利益者,故先说佛;因法利益一切众生,故次说法;因僧已行道,获得了利益、已得利益,故次说僧。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pana sapayojanaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmaṃ kattukāmo buddharatanamūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ paṭhamaṃ tassa paṇāmaṃ kātumāha – ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ…pe… gativimutta’’nti. Buddharatanamūlakāni hi dhammasaṅgharatanāni, tesu ca dhammaratanamūlakaṃ saṅgharatanaṃ, tathābhāvo ca ‘‘puṇṇacando viya bhagavā, candakiraṇanikaro viya tena desito dhammo, candakiraṇasamuppāditapīṇito loko viya saṅgho’’ti evamādīhi aṭṭhakathāyamāgataupamāhi vibhāvetabbo. Atha vā sabbasattānaṃ aggoti katvā paṭhamaṃ buddho, tappabhavato, tadupadesitato ca tadanantaraṃ dhammo, tassa dhammassa sādhāraṇato , tadāsevanato ca tadanantaraṃ saṅgho vutto. ‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ vā hite viniyojakoti katvā paṭhamaṃ buddho, sabbasattahitattā tadanantaraṃ dhammo, hitādhigamāya paṭipanno adhigatahito cāti katvā tadanantaraṃ saṅgho vutto’’ti aṭṭhakathāgatanayena anupubbatā veditabbā.
在礼敬佛宝时,他以“慈悲清凉心”等词句,显示了以赞叹为先导的礼敬,而非单纯的作礼,以此彰显功德殊胜。因为以赞叹为先导的礼敬,能显明世尊的功德殊胜相应,进而彰显他无与伦比的堪受礼敬,由此彰显自己此一礼敬已成殊胜福田,由此又彰显已入良田的礼敬是所求如愿之因。在显示以赞叹为先导时,他想要注释的那部经教,正是以慈悲与智慧为主导,不似律教以慈悲为主导,亦不似论教以智慧为主导,故他开示了兼具二者的赞叹。这确是阿阇梨的惯例,即与开端相应的赞叹。正因如此,在律藏的注释开端,他作了以慈悲为主导的赞叹:‘那位虽历经无数劫……的大悲者’;在论藏的注释开端,则作了以智慧为主导的赞叹:‘如同慈悲……随其所乐’。因律藏是世尊出于不顾及根器等的纯粹大悲——令本不应听闻者听闻,询问本不应询问者,宣说本不应宣说者——而制定的学处,故以慈悲为主导。例如,世尊虽具足最极惭愧,但为大悲心所策动,仍在大众中宣说‘尖显示巴利原文
Buddharatanapaṇāmañca karonto kevalapaṇāmato thomanāpubbaṅgamovasātisayoti ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādipadehi thomanāpubbaṅgamataṃ dasseti. Thomanāpubbaṅgamena hi paṇāmena satthu guṇātisayayogo, tato cassa anuttaravandanīyabhāvo, tena ca attano paṇāmassa khettaṅgatabhāvo, tena cassa khettaṅgatassa paṇāmassa yathādhippetanipphattihetubhāvo dassitoti. Thomanāpubbaṅgamatañca dassento yassā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā suttantadesanā karuṇāpaññāppadhānāyeva, na vinayadesanā viya karuṇāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānāti tadubhayappadhānameva thomanamārabhati. Esā hi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ ārambhānurūpathomanā. Teneva ca vinayadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipi…pe… mahākāruṇikassa tassā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) karuṇāppadhānaṃ, abhidhammadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇā viya…pe… yathārucī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1) paññāppadhānañca thomanamāraddhaṃ. Vinayadesanā hi āsayādinirapekkhakevalakaruṇāya pākatikasattenāpi asotabbārahaṃ suṇanto, apucchitabbārahaṃ pucchanto, avattabbārahañca vadanto sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesīti karuṇāppadhānā. Tathā hi ukkaṃsapariyantagatahirottappopi bhagavā lokiyasādhujanehipi pariharitabbāni ‘‘sikharaṇī, sambhinnā’’tiādivacanāni, (pārā. 185) yathāparādhañca garahavacanāni mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso mahāparisamajjhe abhāsi, taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññatti kāraṇāpekkhāya ca verañjādīsu sārīrikaṃ khedamanubhosi. Tasmā kiñcāpi bhūmantarapaccayākārasamayantarakathānaṃ viya vinayapaññattiyāpi samuṭṭhāpikā paññā anaññasādhāraṇatāya atisayakiccavatī, karuṇāya kiccaṃ pana tatopi adhikanti vinayadesanāya karuṇāppadhānatā vuttā. Karuṇābyāpārādhikatāya hi desanāya karuṇāpadhānatā, abhidhammadesanā pana kevalapaññāppadhānā paramatthadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhasamatthāya paññāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanā pana karuṇāpaññāppadhānā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayādhimutticaritādibhedaparicchindanasamatthāya paññāya sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanāya hi mahākaruṇāya samāpattibahulo vineyyasantāne tadajjhāsayānulomena gambhīramatthapadaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Tasmā ārambhānurūpaṃ karuṇāpaññāppadhānameva thomanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, ayamettha samudāyattho.
以下是词的分解:‘kirati’意为‘散播’,故‘悲’指通过施与所缺乏的资具,去除他人之苦。或者,‘悲’意为在受苦者中‘被散播、被扩展’。又或者,‘kiṇāti’意为‘摧破’,故‘悲’指当他人有苦时,它伤害、折磨悲悯者,或指去除他人之苦。又或者,‘悲’意为当他人有苦时,令善士之心颤动、生起忧戚。又或者,‘kam’意为‘安乐’,‘悲’意为‘阻碍安乐’。因为此悲以欲除他人之苦为相,不顾自乐,故而障碍、系缚悲悯者之乐。于一切处,应依声明论来理解词义。‘清凉’意为被遭受热恼者所依止,即热恼的平息。‘清凉的’意为‘体验清凉’。在‘我将把你的心掷出,或将你的心脏劈开’中,‘胸’被称为‘心’;在‘肾脏、心脏’中,指心所依处;在‘我以心善知心,如实了知’中,指心识;此处亦依据内在义,指心识本身为‘心’。或者,‘心’意为‘保持自己的本性’。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana avayavattho – kiratīti karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati paccayavekallakaraṇena apanetīti attho. Dukkhitesu vā kiriyati pasāriyatīti karuṇā. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādhati, paradukkhaṃ vā vināsetīti attho. Paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ kampanaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Atha vā kamiti sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibandhatīti, sabbattha saddasatthānusārena padanipphatti veditabbā. Uṇhābhitattehi sevīyatīti sītaṃ, uṇhābhisamanaṃ. Taṃ lāti gaṇhātīti sītalaṃ, ‘‘cittaṃ vā te khipissāmi, hadayaṃ vā te phālessāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. āḷavakasutta) ettha uro ‘‘hadaya’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘vakkaṃ hadaya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.110; 2.114; 3.154) ettha hadayavatthu, ‘‘hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāya tacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.63) ettha cittaṃ, idhāpi cittameva abbhantaraṭṭhena hadayaṃ. Attano sabhāvaṃ vā haratīti hadayaṃ, ra-kārassa da-kāraṃ katvāti neruttikā. Karuṇāya sītalaṃ hadayamassāti karuṇāsītalahadayo, taṃ karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ.
诚然,在此,由于慈与喜具有向他人施予利益、不舍安乐等的思择自性,且是嗔恚等的正相违,故能令有情相续中的热恼断灭之行相生起,由此慈与喜亦可视为心生清凉之因;然而,唯有悲——以去除他人痛苦为行相、以不忍他人受苦为味、其本质即是无害——才特别地成为世尊心生清凉之因,犹如心之轻安一般,故唯独称说悲为心生清凉之因。或应理解为,是以悲为门而兼说慈与喜亦为心生清凉之因。因为并非在一切处都开示无余之义,而是依据主要、俱行、不相离等理趣,随宜取义。且在此处,与彼相应的智慧,由于摄属六不共智,成为不共智差别之所依,故悲具有殊胜性;而悲已达至犹如一切知智遍于其所缘般无余且殊胜的大悲状态,成为他人所不共的极为殊胜者,故唯独以悲为心生清凉之因。再者,虽然慈与喜也因向他人施予利益、不舍安乐等的思择自性,殊胜地成为心生清凉之因,且为一切佛陀功德差别之因,但正因其亦以悲为因,故唯独说悲为心生清凉之因。因为一切佛陀功德皆以大悲为根本。实则,世尊以悲之力息灭轮回苦热,因欲拔除他人之苦,虽于无数无量劫中,以显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha paresaṃ hitopasaṃhārasukhādiaparihānijjhānasabhāvatāya, byāpādādīnaṃ ujuvipaccanīkatāya ca sattasantānagatasantāpavicchedanākārappavattiyā mettāmuditānampi cittasītalabhāvakāraṇatā upalabbhati, tathāpi paradukkhāpanayanākārappavattiyā parūpatāpāsahanarasā avihiṃsābhūtā karuṇāva visesena bhagavato cittassa cittapassaddhi viya sītibhāvanimittanti tassāyeva cittasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttā. Karuṇāmukhena vā mettāmuditānampi hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi sabbattha niravasesattho upadisīyati, padhānasahacaraṇāvinābhāvādinayehipi yathālabbhamānaṃ gayhamānattā. Apicettha taṃsampayuttañāṇassa chaasādhāraṇañāṇapariyāpannatāya asādhāraṇañāṇavisesanibandhanabhūtā sātisayaṃ, niravasesañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya savisayabyāpitāya mahākaruṇābhāvamupagatā anaññasādhāraṇasātisayabhāvappattā karuṇāva hadayasītalattahetubhāvena vuttā. Atha vā satipi mettāmuditānaṃ paresaṃ hitopasaṃhārasukhādiaparihānijjhānasabhāvatāya sātisaye hadayasītalabhāvanibandhanatte sakalabuddhaguṇavisesakāraṇatāya tāsampi kāraṇanti karuṇāya eva hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttā. Karuṇānidānā hi sabbepi buddhaguṇā. Karuṇānubhāvanibbāpiyamānasaṃsāradukkhasantāpassa hi bhagavato paradukkhāpanayanakāmatāya anekānipi kappānamasaṅkhyeyyāni akilantarūpasseva niravasesabuddhakaradhammasambharaṇaniratassa samadhigatadhammādhipateyyassa ca sannihitesupi sattasaṅghātasamupanītahadayūpatāpanimittesu na īsakampi cittasītibhāvassa aññathattamahosīti. Tīsu cettha vikappesu paṭhame vikappe avisesabhūtā buddhabhūmigatā, dutiye tatheva mahākaruṇābhāvūpagatā, tatiye paṭhamābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya tīsupi avatthāsu pavattā bhagavato karuṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“了知”故名为慧,即如其自性,以种种方式通达之义;又或,“令了知”故名为慧,即令彼义显现之义。此慧,因断除所知障而以种种方式照明法之自性,故为灯,即慧灯。具慧者即便独坐一处,一万世界亦遍照光明。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,有四种灯。何等为四?月灯、日灯、火灯、慧灯。诸比丘,此即四种灯。诸比丘,于四种灯中,慧灯最为上。”被彼慧灯所破、殊胜而根除者,即慧灯所破;其殊胜性将于下文阐明。令有情昏昧、或自昏昧、或仅是昏昧本身,是名为痴,即无明。此痴,因遮蔽所缘自性,与黑暗相似,故喻为暗,即痴暗。虽“暗”字不作譬喻亦有“无明”之义,然此处与“痴”字相邻,故以譬喻显其差别,亦是合理。慧灯所破之痴暗,具足于彼人者,即慧灯所破痴暗者;彼即是慧灯所破痴暗者。显示巴利原文
Pajānātīti paññā, yathāsabhāvaṃ pakārehi paṭivijjhatīti attho. Paññapetīti vā paññā, taṃ tadatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karotīti attho. Sāyeva ñeyyāvaraṇappahānato pakārehi dhammasabhāvajotanaṭṭhena pajjototi paññāpajjoto. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkenapi nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekapajjotā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave, pajjotā. Katame cattāro? Candapajjoto, sūriyapajjoto, aggipajjoto, paññāpajjoto, ime kho bhikkhave, cattāro pajjotā. Etadaggaṃ bhikkhave, imesaṃ catunnaṃ pajjotānaṃ yadidaṃ paññāpajjoto’’ti (a. ni. 4.145). Tena vihato visesena samugghāṭitoti paññāpajjotavihato, visesatā cettha upari āvi bhavissati. Muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhanamattameva vā tanti moho, avijjā. Sveva visayasabhāvapaṭicchādanato andhakārasarikkhatāya tamo viyāti mohatamo. Satipi tamasaddassa sadisakappanamantarena avijjāvācakatte mohasaddasannidhānena tabbisesakatāvettha yuttāti sadisakappanā. Paññāpajjotavihato mohatamo yassāti paññāpajjotavihatamohatamo, taṃ paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ.
难道不是一切漏尽者,皆以慧灯破除无明暗吗?那么为何以他人亦共通的功德来称叹世尊?答:因世尊断除习气而有他人不共的殊胜性故。虽一切漏尽者皆以慧灯破除无明暗,然正如信解脱者与见至者之间,声闻、缘觉与正等觉者之间,由断除习气而有烦恼断除的差别,此为实有。或者,世尊不依他教,于自身相续中圆满了无明暗的彻底灭尽,且于其中证得一切知智与诸力之自在;又于他相续中,以说法之殊胜威力,如理令无明暗灭尽。故唯有世尊,特别地应以慧灯所破痴暗者的身份被称叹。在此义释中,“慧灯”一词,或以总称,或以余一法摄受,包含了破除自相续中痴暗的通达慧,及破除他相续中痴暗的说法慧。应知并非如前一种义释中那样,唯指通达慧。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sabbesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ paññāpajjotena avijjandhakārahatatā sambhavati, atha kasmā aññasādhāraṇāvisesaguṇena bhagavato thomanā vuttāti? Savāsanappahānena anaññasādhāraṇavisesatāsambhavato. Sabbesampi hi khīṇāsavānaṃ paññāpajjotahatāvijjandhakārattepi sati saddhādhimuttehi viya diṭṭhippattānaṃ sāvakapaccekabuddhehi sammāsambuddhānaṃ savāsanappahānena kilesappahānassa viseso vijjatevāti. Atha vā paropadesamantarena attano santāne accantaṃ avijjandhakāravigamassa nipphāditattā (nibbattitattā ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1), tattha ca sabbaññutāya balesu ca vasībhāvassa samadhigatattā, parasantatiyañca dhammadesanātisayānubhāvena sammadeva tassa pavattitattā, bhagavāyeva visesato paññāpajjotavihatamohatamabhāvena thometabboti. Imasmiñca atthavikappe paññāpajjotapadena sasantānagatamohavidhamanā paṭivedhapaññā ceva parasantānagatamohavidhamanā desanāpaññā ca sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā saṅgahitā. Na tu purimasmiṃ atthavikappe viya paṭivedhapaññāyevāti veditabbaṃ.
另一种理趣:由于世尊之智以所知为边际,故以能充分通达一切所知法自性、称为无碍智的慧灯,破除了遮蔽一切所知法自性的痴暗;因此,应知世尊是以成为无碍智的、他人不共的慧灯所破痴暗者的身份而被称叹。在此义释中,由于在痴暗破除之际证得了无碍智,故应知无碍智以因的转用而称为自身相续中的痴暗破除。因为由愿力成就而断除习气,即是烦恼的所知障断除;而对于他人相续中痴暗的破除,由于是果的转用,故无碍智本身被称为痴暗破除。所谓无碍智,即是一切知智,世尊以此作说法与观察。此二智于义理上实为同一。由于以无余的有为、无为及假名法为所缘,一切知智于他们无有障碍,故依无著而行,称为无碍智;然而,为了从所缘转起门显示与他人不共之性,故分为二种,于六不共智的分别中宣说。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – bhagavato ñāṇassa ñeyyapariyantikattā sakalañeyyadhammasabhāvāvabodhanasamatthena anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātena paññāpajjotena sakalañeyyadhammasabhāvacchādakamohatamassa vihatattā anāvaraṇañāṇabhūtena anaññasādhāraṇapaññāpajjotavihatamohatamabhāvena bhagavato thomanā veditabbā. Imasmiṃ pana atthavikappe mohatamavidhamanante adhigatattā anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāraṇūpacārena sakasantāne mohatamavidhamananti veditabbaṃ. Abhinīhārasampattiyā savāsanappahānameva hi kilesānaṃ ñeyyāvaraṇappahānanti, parasantāne pana mohatamavidhamanassa kāraṇabhāvato phalūpacārena anāvaraṇañāṇameva mohatamavidhamananti vuccati. Anāvaraṇañāṇanti ca sabbaññutaññāṇameva, yena dhammadesanāpaccavekkhaṇāni karoti. Tadidañhi ñāṇadvayaṃ atthato ekameva. Anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammārammaṇatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tatthāvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti, visayappavattimukhena pana aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ dvidhā katvā chaḷāsādhāraṇañāṇabhede vuttaṃ.
然而,此处何以在赞叹世尊时,仅以无明的彻底断除作为断除成就的代表,而不取更为殊胜的、无余断除一切烦恼呢?回答是:因为说断除无明,便已彰显了与无明俱起的整个杂染的彻底断除,所以此处即包含了无余断除一切烦恼。没有任何杂染不是在无明被无余断除时断除的。或者,如明是生起一切善法、止息轮回的主因,无明正是生起一切不善法、令轮回延续的主因,因此,仅说摧破无明,便已成就了彻底断除一切杂染之义,故仅取此为代表。又或者,因为无明是一切杂染法之顶首,故仅以其彻底断除为代表。如所说:显示巴利原文
Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ avijjāsamugghātoyeveko pahānasampattivasena bhagavato thomanāya gayhati, na pana sātisayaṃ niravasesakilesappahānanti? Vuccate – tappahānavacaneneva hi tadekaṭṭhatāya sakalasaṃkilesasamugghātassa jotitabhāvato niravasesakilesappahānamettha gayhati. Na hi so saṃkileso atthi, yo niravasesāvijjāsamugghātanena na pahīyatīti. Atha vā sakalakusaladhammuppattiyā, saṃsāranivattiyā ca vijjā viya niravasesākusaladhammuppattiyā, saṃsārappavattiyā ca avijjāyeva padhānakāraṇanti tabbighātavacaneneva sakalasaṃkilesasamugghātavacanasiddhito soyeveko gayhatīti. Atha vā sakalasaṃkilesadhammānaṃ muddhabhūtattā avijjāya taṃ samugghātoyeveko gayhati. Yathāha –
「当知无明为顶首,明为摧顶者;
与信、念、定,及欲、精进相应者。」(《经集》1032;《小尼迦耶》51)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avijjā muddhāti jānāhi, vijjā muddhādhipātinī; Saddhāsatisamādhīhi, chandavīriyena saṃyutā’’ti. (su. ni. 1032; cūḷa. ni. 51);
在“sanarāmaralokagaruṃ”一词中,依第一词性,有情亦可通称为“nara(人)”;但此处依第二词性,唯指男人、人类,否则“loka(世间)”一词便无法成立。恰如注释“nāvāvimāna”时所说:“犹如依第一词性之有情,依其他词性,由殊胜义而于先位、高处住立转起,故称purisa(人);同样,能引至最胜位故,称为nara(人)。纵是儿子、兄弟之辈,亦可居于母亲、姐姐的上位,何况身为丈夫者对于他女?”复就简略、复数之理而言:nara(众人),maraṇa(死)为mara(死),无此者即amarā(不死者),与众人及不死者共俱,为sanarāmaro。“garati”是升举、升高之义,已升举而了了可知者,即garu(重/尊),盖“gara”有升举义。又或如石伞,以沉重之义而称“garu(重)”。显示巴利原文
Sanarāmaralokagarunti ettha pana paṭhamapakatiyā avibhāgena sattopi naroti vuccati, idha pana dutiyapakatiyā manujapurisoyeva, itarathā lokasaddassa avattabbatā siyā. ‘‘Yathā hi paṭhamapakatibhūto satto itarāya pakatiyā seṭṭhaṭṭhena pure uccaṭṭhāne seti pavattatīti purisoti vuccati, evaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ netīti naroti. Puttabhātubhūtopi hi puggalo mātujeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, pageva bhattubhūto itarāsa’’nti (vi. aṭṭha. 43-46) nāvāvimānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekasesappakappanena puthuvacanantaviggahena vā narā, maraṇaṃ maro, so natthi yesanti amarā, saha narehi, amarehi cāti sanarāmaro.Garati uggacchati uggato pākaṭo bhavatīti garu, garasaddo hi uggame. Apica pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya bhāriyaṭṭhena ‘‘garū’’ti vuccati.
于父母师长,于难行、非轻之事;
于伟大崇高者,及安立等诸事;
同样,‘garu’一词也用于种种颜色的殊胜之处。
显示巴利原文 Mātāpitācariyesu , dujjare alahumhi ca; Mahante cuggate ceva, nichekādikaresu ca; Tathā vaṇṇavisesesu, garusaddo pavattati.
然而,此处指的是一切世间之师——如来。有些人说:‘应当区分garu与guru两种:表沉重义时是garu一词,表师义时是guru一词。’这种说法不应采纳。因为在巴利语的范畴中,对于前述所有意义,都只应寻求garu一词来表达:由a变为ā,可见其派生词‘gārava’带有增音。而在梵语的范畴中,才应只寻求guru一词,因为通过u的增音,其派生词会以不同形式出现。‘sanarāmaro’即是‘loko(世间)’,因此为‘sanarāmaraloko’,其‘garu(尊/师)’,即‘sanarāmaralokagaruṃ’。也有读作‘sanaramarūlokagaruṃ’的,由于是圣者偈颂,从语法规则和意义上说,这也同样合理。从意义上说,诸天虽长寿,但因有随其限定的死亡本质,故也称为‘marū’。由此显示,如同对诸天、人类一样,世尊也随宜以功德殊胜而利益其他有情。然而,若问:此处诸天、人类应是主要的,为何却将他们表述为非主要呢?答:应从意义上理解其为主。因为词序是一回事,义序是另一回事。显示巴利原文
Idha pana sabbalokācariye tathāgate. Keci pana ‘‘garu, gurūti ca dvidhā gahetvā bhāriyavācakatte garusaddo, ācariyavācakatte tu gurusaddo’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Pāḷivisaye hi sabbesampi yathāvuttānamatthānaṃ vācakatte garusaddoyevicchitabbo akārassa ākārabhāvena ‘‘gārava’’nti taddhitantapadassa savuddhikassa dassanato. Sakkatabhāsāvisaye pana gurusaddoyevicchitabbo ukārassa vuddhibhāvena aññathā taddhitantapadassa dassanatoti. Sanarāmaro ca so loko cāti sanarāmaraloko, tassa garūti tathā, taṃ sanarāmaralokagaruṃ.‘‘Sanaramarūlokagaru’’ntipi paṭhanti, tadapi ariyāgāthattā vuttilakkhaṇato, atthato ca yuttameva. Atthato hi dīghāyukāpi samānā yathāparicchedaṃ maraṇasabhāvattā marūti devā vuccanti. Etena devamanussānaṃ viya tadavasiṭṭhasattānampi yathārahaṃ guṇavisesāvahatāya bhagavato upakārakataṃ dasseti. Nanu cettha devamanussā padhānabhūtā, atha kasmā tesaṃ appadhānatā niddisīyatīti? Atthato padhānatāya gahetabbattā. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti saddakkamānusārena padhānāpadhānabhāvo na codetabbo. Edisesu hi samāsapadesu padhānampi appadhānaṃ viya niddisīyati yathā taṃ ‘‘sarājikāya parisāyā’’ti, tasmā sabbattha atthatova adhippāyo gavesitabbo, na byañjanamattena. Yathāhu porāṇā –
导师宣说:‘义’即是皈依,
饶益世间的大圣,不依文辞。
因此,智者应不耽著于文辞,
而于义中安立其慧。』(《疑惑度疑》注释·初波罗夷品注释)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atthañhi nātho saraṇaṃ avoca, Na byañjanaṃ lokahito mahesi. Tasmā akatvā ratimakkharesu, Atthe niveseyya matiṃ matimā’’ti. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
虽然此处依诸行分别而有三种世间,但就尊重性而言,唯能作尊重之事者方为应理,故应依有情世间来取义。此世间中,福业、非福业及其果报被认知、被了知,故称为世间;声明学者们亦认为“世间”一词有“见”义。此处以“不死”一词指化生天众。另一种解释为:此处“世间”一词有“集合”义,因依集合体而被认知、施设,故称世间。“与人共”即与人俱,他们即是不死者,故为“与人及不死者俱”,其世间亦如此,应依前一种解释来连接。此处“不死”之称不仅包括化生天众,亦包括清净天众,因他们于究竟义上无死,故为不死者。而在此义释中,唯取人与天众,是依增胜而说,如称“天人师”。同样地,世尊以远离一切灾患为先,致力于施设无余的利乐,具足无上的修行成就,对包括天人在内的一切众生有最极的饶益,并具足无量、无与伦比的威德功德,故为无量世界、无量众生最上、无与伦比、不共的尊重处。虽然妇女也同样由此饶益而尊重世尊,但为显示主要所化之世间,故以男性词表述,当知如此。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha sattasaṅkhārabhājanavasena tividho loko, garubhāvassa pana adhippetattā garukaraṇasamatthasseva yujjanato sattalokavasena attho gahetabbo. So hi lokīyanti ettha puññāpuññāni , tabbipāko cāti loko, dassanatthe ca lokasaddamicchanti saddavidū. Amaraggahaṇena cettha upapattidevā adhippetā. Aparo nayo – samūhattho ettha lokasaddo samudāyavasena lokīyati paññāpīyatīti katvā. Saha narehīti sanarā, teyeva amarāti sanarāmarā, tesaṃ loko tathā, purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Amarasaddena cettha upapattidevā viya visuddhidevāpi saṅgayhanti. Tepi hi paramatthato maraṇābhāvato amarā. Imasmiṃ pana atthavikappe narāmarānameva gahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena yathā ‘‘satthā devamanussāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.157, 255). Tathā hi sabbānatthaparihānapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā, sadevamanussāya pajāya accantamupakāritāya aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamamanaññasādhāraṇaṃ gāravaṭṭhānanti. Kāmañca itthīnampi tathāupakārattā bhagavā garuyeva, padhānabhūtaṃ pana lokaṃ dassetuṃ purisaliṅgena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Neruttikā pana avisesanicchitaṭṭhāne tathā niddiṭṭhamicchanti yathā ‘‘narā nāgā ca gandhabbā, abhivādetvāna pakkamu’’nti (apa. 1.1.48). Tathā cāhu –
或以中性词,或以男性词,
当知,在未特别确定之处,即如此表述。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Napuṃsakena liṅgena, saddodāhu pumena vā; Niddissatīti ñātabbamavisesavinicchite’’ti.
此处,“礼敬”一词:显示巴利原文
Vandeti ettha pana –
于现在时的第五格与第七格,
在这三种情形中,“礼敬”一词出现。
显示巴利原文 Vattamānāya pañcamyaṃ, sattamyañca vibhattiyaṃ; Etesu tīsu ṭhānesu, vandesaddo pavattati.
而此处,由于是在现在时,且无其他主语可能,故应依最上士之义取“我礼敬”之意。诸师认为“礼敬”一词有“鞠躬”与“称赞”之义,因此应补入“善逝”或“依怙”一词来连接。所谓“善逝”,谓其已善去、有善行。此处的“去”有身去与智去。身去又有两种:亲近所化众生之去,与自然之去。世尊亲近所化众生时,纯为成就他们的利乐,故是善妙的;同样,其身具足相好庄严,其自然之去如鹅王、牛王、象王、鹿王之行,无迟缓、蹒跚、失足、拖曳、压迫、蜷缩、弯曲、混乱等过失,无有傲慢;其智去则具足无垢、广大之悲、念、精进等殊胜功德,从发愿以来直至大菩提,因无有过失故,唯是善妙。或者,谓:依自觉智,以遍知通达而遍知一切世间,已善去、已通达,故为善逝。凡有“去”义者,即有“觉了”义;凡有“觉了”义者,即有“去”义。同样,以断除通达而断除世间集,令至无生法,已善去、已超越,故为善逝。以作证通达而证得世间灭,已善去、已证得,故为善逝。以修习通达而修习趣向世间灭之道,已善去、已行道,故为善逝。此义应依“以预流道所断之烦恼,他们烦恼不……显示巴利原文
Idha pana vattamānāyaṃ aññāsamasambhavato. Tattha ca uttamapurisavasenattho gahetabbo ‘‘ahaṃ vandāmī’’ti. Namanathutiyatthesu ca vandasaddamicchanti ācariyā, tena ca sugatapadaṃ, nāthapadaṃ vā ajjhāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. Sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Gamanañcettha kāyagamanaṃ, ñāṇagamanañca, kāyagamanampi vineyyajanopasaṅkamanaṃ, pakatigamanañcāti dubbidhaṃ. Bhagavato hi vineyyajanopasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ, tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭika-kuṭilākulatādidosarahita- mavahasitarājahaṃsa- vasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ pakatigamanañca, vimalavipulakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesasahitampi ñāṇagamanaṃ abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhi, tāva niravajjatāya sobhanamevāti. Atha vā ‘‘sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Yo hi gatyattho, so buddhayattho. Yo ca buddhayattho, so gatyatthoti. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammatamāpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato, ayañcattho ‘sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatī’ti (mahāni. 38; cūḷani. 27) sugatotiādinā niddesanayena vibhāvetabbo.
另一种解释:已去、已证得美妙的正等觉,或即涅槃,故为善逝。或者,如实、真实、有义、适时地对所化众生善说话语,故为善逝,即将“da”变为“ta”,而成“善逝”。依福德业与非福德业,以转生方式应往之处,名为“趣”,即转生有的差别。依地狱等差别,趣有五种。由于证得圣道,能使一切趣向于有之业成为无果报,从而令其回转,故从五种趣中脱离、解脱,是为“趣解脱”。因为,虽然那些往生上上有之天众,于各自业报成熟之时,从彼彼有中得以解脱,但仅是暂时解脱,并非依离系而解脱,且因圣道未令趣向彼彼有之业回转,故仍属于趣中;世尊则不然。世尊则如所说方式,已脱离、已解脱。因此,以此显示世尊于任何趣中皆不摄属。由此,世尊被称为“天中天”。故说:显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sundaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ, nibbānameva vā gato adhigatoti sugato. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ yathārahaṃ kālayuttameva vācaṃ vineyyānaṃ sammā gadatīti vā sugato, da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā, taṃ sugataṃ. Puññāpuññakammehi upapajjanavasena gantabbāti gatiyo, upapattibhavavisesā. Tā pana nirayādibhedena pañcavidhā, sakalassāpi bhavagāmikammassa ariyamaggādhigamena avipākārahabhāvakaraṇena nivattitattā pañcahipi tāhi visaṃyutto hutvā muttoti gativimutto. Uddhamuddhabhavagāmino hi devā taṃtaṃkammavipākadānakālānurūpena tato tato bhavato muttāpi muttamattāva, na pana visaññogavasena muttā, gatipariyāpannā ca taṃtaṃbhavagāmikammassa ariyamaggena anivattitattā, na tathā bhagavā. Bhagavā pana yathāvuttappakārena visaṃyutto hutvā muttoti. Tasmā anena bhagavato katthacipi gatiyā apariyāpannataṃ dasseti. Yato ca bhagavā ‘‘devātidevo’’ti vuccati. Tenevāha –
凡由此而往生天趣,或为乾闼婆,或为飞鸟;
我依此可达夜叉,亦可舍离人身;
我的那些诸漏已尽,已摧毁,已根除。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
因为那些导向各趣的业与烦恼,已在大菩提树下由最上圣道彻底断除,所以世尊绝无归属各趣之理,世尊实已从一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居及有情众中彻底解脱。或者,即使在有余涅槃界中,他也已从那些趣中解脱,而“以慧灯破除痴暗”这一句虽也涵盖此义,但此句实是特为赞叹无余依涅槃界而说,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Taṃtaṃgatisaṃvattanakānañhi kammakilesānaṃ mahābodhimūleyeva aggamaggena pahīnattā natthi bhagavato taṃtaṃgatipariyāpannatāti accantameva bhagavā sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsasattanikāyehi parimuttoti. Atha vā kāmaṃ saupādisesāyapi nibbānadhātuyā tāhi gatīhi vimutto, esā pana ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etthevantogadhāti iminā padena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāva thometīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在此,对世尊的赞叹是依自利成就与利他行两种方式而作。其中,证得无障智、永断烦恼与习气、证得无余依涅槃,称为自利成就;对利养恭敬等心无希求,致力于宣说能度脱一切苦的法,对提婆达多等违逆众生亦常怀利益之意,于应调伏的众生成熟时,随其意趣而前往,称为利他行。此利他行依意趣与加行分为二种,自利成就分为三种,在此偈颂中如理显示。“以慈悲清凉心”显示以意趣为体的利他行;由“善逝”一词所含“正行”之义,显示以加行为体的利他行。“以慧灯破除痴暗、解脱诸趣”及由“善逝”一词证知四谛之义,显示三种自利成就;又依其余未退失之义及“天人与阿修罗世间之尊”一语,总显一切自利成就与利他行。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena dvīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā katā hoti. Tesu anāvaraṇañāṇādhigamo, saha vāsanāya kilesānamaccantappahānaṃ, anupādisesanibbānappatti ca attahitasampatti nāma, lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa pana sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammadesanāpayogato devadattādīsupi viruddhasattesu niccaṃ hitajjhāsayatā, vinītabbasattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanañca āsayato parahitapaṭipatti nāma. Sā pana āsayapayogato duvidhā, parahitapaṭipatti tividhā ca attahitasampatti imāya gāthāya yathārahaṃ pakāsitā hoti. ‘‘Karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti hi etena āsayato parahitapaṭipatti, sammā gadanatthena sugatasaddena payogato parahitapaṭipatti. ‘‘Paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ gativimutta’’nti etehi, catusaccapaṭivedhatthena ca sugatasaddena tividhāpi attahitasampatti, avasiṭṭhaṭṭhena pana tena, ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’nti ca etena sabbāpi attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca pakāsitā hoti.
或者,依因、果与饶益有情三种方式作赞叹。其中,因即与大悲相应以及修集菩提资粮,此二者由第一句依字面及功能而显示。果则依智成就、断成就、威力成就与色身成就分为四种。其中,以一切智智为所依的道智,及以其为根本的十力等智,是智成就;令烦恼杂染连同习气永不复起的断除,是断成就;如愿成就的自在,是威力成就;作为一切世间之眼目、灌顶庄严且具足相好的色身,是色身成就。此中,智成就与断成就由第二句及“善逝”一词“证知谛义”之义而显示;威力成就由第三句显示;色身成就由“善逝”一词“妙行”之义及相好圆满而显示,若无相好则无此义。如上所述的二种利他行即饶益有情成就,应知这是由“善逝”一词“正行”之义所显示。显示巴利原文
Atha vā hetuphalasattūpakāravasena tīhākārehi thomanā katā. Tattha hetu nāma mahākaruṇāsamāyogo, bodhisambhārasambharaṇañca, tadubhayampi paṭhamapadena yathārutato, sāmatthiyato ca pakāsitaṃ. Phalaṃ pana ñāṇappahānaānubhāvarūpakāyasampadāvasena catubbidhaṃ . Tattha sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, tammūlakāni ca dasabalādiñāṇāni ñāṇasampadā, savāsanasakalasaṃkilesānamaccantamanuppādadhammatāpādanaṃ pahānasampadā, yathicchitanipphādane ādhipaccaṃ ānubhāvasampadā, sakalalokanayanābhisekabhūtā pana lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitā attabhāvasampatti rūpakāyasampadā. Tāsu ñāṇappahānasampadā dutiyapadena, saccapaṭivedhatthena ca sugatasaddena pakāsitā, ānubhāvasampadā tatiyapadena, rūpakāyasampadā sobhanakāyagamanatthena sugatasaddena lakkhaṇānubyañjanapāripūriyā vinā tadabhāvato. Yathāvuttā duvidhāpi parahitapaṭipatti sattūpakārasampadā, sā pana sammā gadanatthena sugatasaddena pakāsitāti veditabbā.
此外,于此偈中,阿阇黎显示了正等正觉及其根本、修行等众多佛德。此乃诸阿阇黎之本性,即以某种方式宣说不同义理。如何显示?“以慈悲清凉心”一语显示正等正觉之根本。世尊被大悲所催策之心,为救拔陷于轮回泥淖之众生而发愿,次第圆满波罗蜜,证得无上正等正觉,故慈悲是正等正觉之根本。“以慧灯破除痴暗”一语显示正等正觉。以一切智智为所依之道智,与以道智为所依之一切智智,名为“正等正觉”。依“善逝”一词“正行”之义,显示正等正觉之行,因其开示远离沉掉之住立、欲乐与苦行之精勤、常见与断见等二边,为慈悲与智慧所摄持之中道行;依其余诸语显示正等正觉之主行与辅行及其果。在此,从轮回大洪流中救度众生为主行,其余为辅行。依主行与果显示利他行,依辅行显示自利成就,依此二者于自利利他等四行人中,显示世尊为第四行人。由此阐明无上应施者、最上应礼敬者,以及自身礼敬之田已极清净。显示巴利原文
Apica imāya gāthāya sammāsambodhi tammūla – tappaṭipattiyādayo aneke buddhaguṇā ācariyena pakāsitā honti. Esā hi ācariyānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena atthantaraviññāpanaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti hi etena sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ dasseti . Mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso hi bhagavā saṃsārapaṅkato sattānaṃ samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhāro anupubbena pāramiyo pūretvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhimadhigatoti karuṇā sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ. ‘‘Paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etena sammāsambodhiṃ dasseti. Sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi aggamaggañāṇaṃ, aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccati. Sammā gamanatthena sugatasaddena sammāsambodhiyā paṭipattiṃ dasseti līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogasassatucchedābhinivesādiantadvayarahitāya karuṇāpaññāpariggahitāya majjhimāya paṭipattiyā pakāsanato, itarehi sammāsambodhiyā padhānāppadhānappabhedaṃ payojanaṃ dasseti. Saṃsāramahoghato sattasantāraṇañhettha padhānaṃ, tadaññamappadhānaṃ. Tesu ca padhānena payojanena parahitapaṭipattiṃ dasseti, itarena attahitasampattiṃ, tadubhayena ca attahitapaṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu bhagavato catutthapuggalabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Tena ca anuttaraṃ dakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ, uttamañca vandanīyabhāvaṃ, attano ca vandanāya khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ vibhāveti.
再者,提及悲心,则通过阐明已证得世间广大境界的不共功德,显示了一切世间功德的成就;提及智慧,则通过阐明作为一切知智之近因的道智,显示了一切出世间功德的成就。因为这两者所成立的意义,在“为天、人、世间所尊敬”等语句中得到了详细阐述。而且,提及悲心,显示了向无烦恼的趋近;提及智慧,显示了烦恼的离去。同样,提及悲心,显示了世尊随顺世间共许的运作,因为悲心属于世间言说的范畴;提及智慧,显示了不超越世间共许,因为如实了知诸法自性,则超越自性而执取众生等概念。同样,提及悲心,显示了大悲定住;提及智慧,显示了三时无碍智、四谛智、四无碍解智、四无畏智;由于提及悲心已含摄大悲定智,故更以其余不共智——诸如六神通、八众中无怖畏智、十力、十四佛德、十六智行、十八佛法、四十四智事、七十七智事等众多智慧分类——来显示智行。同样,提及悲心,显示了行成就;提及智慧,显示了明成就。提及悲心,显示了以自己为尊;提及智慧,显示了以法为尊。提及悲心,显示了为世间依怙显示巴利原文
Apica karuṇāggahaṇena lokiyesu mahaggatabhāvappattāsādhāraṇaguṇadīpanato sabbalokiyaguṇasampatti dassitā, paññāggahaṇena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānamaggañāṇadīpanato sabbalokuttaraguṇasampatti. Tadubhayaggahaṇasiddho hi attho ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’ntiādinā vipañcīyatīti. Karuṇāggahaṇena ca nirupakkilesamupagamanaṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena apagamanaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena lokasamaññānurūpaṃ bhagavato pavattiṃ dasseti lokavohāravisayattā karuṇāya, paññāggahaṇena lokasamaññāya anatidhāvanaṃ. Sabhāvānavabodhena hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ atidhāvitvā sattādiparāmasanaṃ hoti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattivihāraṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catusaccañāṇaṃ, catupaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ, karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattiñāṇassa gahitattā sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, cha abhiññā, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇāni, dasa balāni, cuddasa buddhaguṇā, soḷasa ñāṇacariyā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, catucattārīsa ñāṇavatthūni, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūnīti evamādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paññāpabhedānaṃ vasena ñāṇacāraṃ dasseti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena caraṇasampattiṃ, paññāggahaṇena vijjāsampattiṃ. Karuṇāggahaṇena attādhipatitā, paññāggahaṇena dhammādhipatitā. Karuṇāggahaṇena lokanāthabhāvo, paññāggahaṇena attanāthabhāvo. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena pubbakārībhāvo, paññāggahaṇena kataññutā. Karuṇāggahaṇena aparantapatā, paññāggahaṇena anattantapatā. Karuṇāggahaṇena vā buddhakaradhammasiddhi, paññāggahaṇena buddhabhāvasiddhi. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena parasantāraṇaṃ, paññāggahaṇena attasantāraṇaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sabbasattesu anuggahacittatā, paññāggahaṇena sabbadhammesu virattacittatā dassitā hoti sabbesañca buddhaguṇānaṃ karuṇā ādi tannidānabhāvato, paññā pariyosānaṃ tato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato. Iti ādipariyosānadassanena sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sīlakkhandhapubbaṅgamo samādhikkhandho dassito hoti. Karuṇānidānañhi sīlaṃ tato pāṇātipātādiviratippavattito, sā ca jhānattayasampayoginīti, paññāvacanena paññākkhandho. Sīlañca sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhe, paññā pariyosānanti evampi ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti nayato dassitattā. Eso eva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo, yadidaṃ nayaggāhaṇaṃ, aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –
纵使是佛陀,若要宣说佛陀的功德,
纵以其他方式说满一劫之久,
长远的劫数或可穷尽,
但如来的功德不会穷尽。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno. Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
也正因此,具寿舍利弗长老试图分别佛功德时,面对世尊的追问,先以“世尊,并非如此”否定,随后说“但世尊,我已知法随法行”,此事记载于《自欢喜经》中。显示巴利原文
Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenāpi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ pati bhagavatā anuyuttena ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘api ca me bhante dhammanvayo vidito’’ti sampasādanīyasutte vuttaṃ.
如此,以略说方式,先赞叹具足一切知德之世尊而行礼敬;今为亦赞叹正法而行礼敬,故说“buddhopi”等。此处,与词句相连的略义为:即使具足如前所说种种功德聚的佛陀,也礼敬那无垢无上的法——即,通过修习称为圣道的法(或连同前行行道法),以及通过证得称为果与涅槃的法(或连同教法、行道法),所成就的正等觉佛位。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepena sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavato thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni saddhammassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ karonto ‘‘buddhopī’’tiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ saha padasambandhena saṅkhepattho – yathāvuttavividhaguṇagaṇasamannāgato buddhopi yaṃ ariyamaggasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ, saha pubbabhāgapaṭipattidhammena vā ariyamaggabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā ceva yaṃ phalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ, pariyattidhammapaṭipattidhammehi vā saha phalanibbānabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikatvā ca sammāsambodhisaṅkhātaṃ buddhabhāvamupagato, vītamalamanuttaraṃ taṃ dhammampi vandeti.
于此,首先应知“佛”一词的含义,依“觉悟诸谛者,故为佛;令众生觉悟者,故为佛”等解说方式。或者,由证得最上道智,彻底永断连同习气在内的愚痴睡眠,及由获得具足无量功德庄严的一切知智而开显,故名为佛,取觉醒、开显之义。或者,由于没有任何应知法未被觉悟,且不将特定应知法执为所作业,故无作业之欲,依了知之义,唯就作业者而解说,因此,亦可说依“觉悟”之义而为佛。因为若不执取部分,便知所取为无余,如言“受戒者不施”。如此,应知“佛”一词唯在作业者上成立,不观待特殊作业。然而,从义理上说,佛是由波罗蜜所成熟、以自然智断尽连同习气、摧毁无余烦恼、为大悲与一切知智等无量功德聚所依的蕴相续,如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha buddhasaddassa tāva ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho. Bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’tiādinā niddesanayena attho veditabbo. Atha vā aggamaggañāṇādhigamena savāsanāya sammohaniddāya accantavigamanato, aparimitaguṇagaṇālaṅkatasabbaññutaññāṇappattiyā vikasitabhāvato ca buddhavāti buddho jāgaraṇavikasanatthavasena. Atha vā kassacipi ñeyyadhammassa anavabuddhassa abhāvena ñeyyavisesassa kammabhāvāgahaṇato kammavacanicchāyābhāvena avagamanatthavasena kattuniddesova labbhati, tasmā buddhavāti buddhotipi vattabbo. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā kammavisesānapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā, atthato pana pāramitāparibhāvito sayambhuñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhastaniravasesakilesomahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimeyyaguṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho, yathāha –
“佛陀”者,即彼世尊,自然而生,无有师长,于前所未闻之法中,自行觉悟诸谛,于中成就一切知智,于诸力而得自在。(《大义释》192;《小义释》97;《无碍解道》161)显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. 97; paṭi. ma. 161).
“Api”一词表示赞叹,以此说明:即便是那位具足如此殊胜功德的世尊,也是通过修习此法并亲证之后,才证得佛位,更不用说其他人证得声闻等位了。这表达了对法的赞叹。“佛位”即正自觉。因为,以一切知智为近因的最上道智,与以最上道智为近因的一切知智,使世尊被称为“佛陀”;而以这(道智与一切知智)为所缘的智也生起,在此处即称为“位”。所谓“位”,即是“觉”等词所依之处。正如他们所说:显示巴利原文
Apisaddo sambhāvane, tena evaṃ guṇavisesayutto sopi nāma bhagavā īdisaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā, sacchikatvā ca buddhabhāvamupagato, kā nāma kathā aññesaṃ sāvakādibhāvamupagamaneti dhamme sambhāvanaṃ dīpeti. Buddhabhāvanti sammāsambodhiṃ. Yena hi nimittabhūtena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānena aggamaggañāṇena, aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānena ca sabbaññutaññāṇena bhagavati ‘‘buddho’’ti nāmaṃ, tadārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tamevidha ‘‘bhāvo’’ti vuccati. Bhavanti buddhisaddā etenāti hi bhāvo. Tathā hi vadanti –
“依于何种因相,‘觉’之词即随之生起;”
“凡由诸缘所宣说者,即是彼彼因相之‘位’。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena yena nimittena, buddhi saddo ca vattate; Taṃtaṃnimittakaṃ bhāvapaccayehi udīrita’’nti.
“修习”的意思是令生起或令增长。“亲证”的意思是现量证知。“Ceva”与“ca”这两个词在此两处都表合集。因为通过这组助词,合集了如下含义:世尊并非仅仅通过法的修习而成就佛位,也并非仅仅通过亲证,而是通过此两者而成就。“达到”即证得、获得,这是词义,此处与“佛位”一词相关联。
“无垢”:在此,“离”以远离之义存在、运行,故为“离”;离于垢染,故为“离垢”;或者说,彼之垢染已离去,故为“无垢”,即指那无垢者。也可见“已去垢”的读法;若如此,则如同带有前缀的“去”词一样,无前缀的“去”词也应理解为表远离之义,因为词根有多义性。因为“去”即离去、消失,故“法”为“已去”;或者“垢”已去,依前一种方法作复合词。“无上”即无有更上。对于如所教导而修行者,能令其不堕恶趣、不堕轮回而持守,故为“法”,即九种出世间法。由于能阐明它,以及能获得亲证、思察的同义词,故教法也包含在此处。正如注释书中所说:“他通达了阿毗达摩法义之海,思察了三藏”,再者,由于说到“修习、亲证了某法”,应知这是指与修习和亲证相应、作为成佛之法的波罗蜜,连同前行增上戒等。显示巴利原文
Bhāvetvāti uppādetvā, vaḍḍhetvā vā. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Ceva-saddo ca-saddo ca tadubhayattha samuccaye. Tena hi saddadvayena na kevalaṃ bhagavā dhammassa bhāvanāmattena buddhabhāvamupagato, nāpi sacchikiriyāmattena, atha kho tadubhayenevāti samuccinoti. Upagatoti patto, adhigatoti attho. Etassa ‘‘buddhabhāva’’nti padena sambandho. Vītamalanti ettha virahavasena eti pavattatīti vīto, malato vīto, vītaṃ vā malaṃ yassāti vītamalo, taṃ vītamalaṃ. ‘‘Gatamala’’ntipi pāṭho dissati, evaṃ sati saupasaggo viya anupasaggopi gatasaddo virahatthavācako veditabbo dhātūnamanekatthattā. Gacchati apagacchatīti hi gato, dhammo . Gataṃ vā malaṃ, purimanayena samāso. Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ. Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyato, saṃsārato ca apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo, navavidho lokuttaradhammo. Tappakāsanattā, sacchikiriyāsammasanapariyāyassa ca labbhamānattā pariyattidhammopi idha saṅgahito . Tathā hi ‘‘abhidhammanayasamuddaṃ adhigacchi, tīṇi piṭakāni sammasī’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā sacchikatvā’’ti ca vuttattā bhāvanāsacchikiriyāyogyatāya buddhakaradhammabhūtāhi pāramitāhi saha pubbabhāgaadhisīlasikkhādayopi idha saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Tāpi hi vigatapaṭipakkhatāya vītamalā, anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttarā ca. Kathaṃ pana tā bhāvetvā, sacchikatvā ca bhagavā buddhabhāvamupagatoti? Vuccate – sattānañhi saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇāya [nissaraṇatthāya (paṇṇāsa ṭī.) nissaraṇe (katthaci)] katamahābhinīhāro mahākaruṇādhivāsanapesalajjhāsayo paññāvisesapariyodātanimmalānaṃ dānadamasaññamādīnaṃ uttamadhammānaṃ kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ niravasesaṃ bhāvanāsacchikiriyāhi kammādīsu adhigatavasībhāvo acchariyācinteyyamahānubhāvo adhisīlādhicittānaṃ paramukkaṃsapāramippatto bhagavā paccayākāre catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pesetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhisaṅkhātaṃ buddhabhāvamupagatoti.
然而,通过此偈,以明成就、解脱成就等众多功德,如其所应地赞叹正法。如何赞叹呢?在此,“修习”一词,是以明成就赞叹;“亲证”一词,是以解脱成就赞叹。同样,或以第一者表禅那成就,以第二者表解脱成就;或以第一者表定成就,以第二者表等至成就;或第一者表尽智之状态,第二者表无生智之状态;或第一者如电光喻,第二者如金刚喻;或第一者表离欲成就,第二者表灭尽成就。同样,或以第一者表出离状态,第二者表脱离状态;或第一者表因状态,第二者表无为状态;或第一者表见状态,第二者表远离状态;或第一者表增上状态,第二者表不死状态,以如是等方式赞叹法。或者,以“修习某法而达到佛位”表善说性赞叹法;以“亲证”表现见性赞叹法。同样,或以第一者表无时性,第二者表来见性;或以第一者表应导入性,第二者表各自应证知性。或以第一者,连同前行戒等,表有学的戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴;以第二者,连同无为界及无学法,来赞叹法。显示巴利原文
Imāya pana gāthāya vijjāvimuttisampadādīhi anekehi guṇehi yathārahaṃ saddhammaṃ thometi. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi ‘‘bhāvetvā’’ti etena vijjāsampadāya thometi, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena vimuttisampadāya. Tathā paṭhamena jhānasampadāya, dutiyena vimokkhasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā samādhisampadāya, dutiyena samāpattisampadāya. Atha vā paṭhamena khayañāṇabhāvena, dutiyena anuppādañāṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā vijjūpamatāya, dutiyena vajirūpamatāya. Paṭhamena vā virāgasampattiyā, dutiyena nirodhasampattiyā. Tathā paṭhamena niyyānabhāvena, dutiyena nissaraṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā hetubhāvena, dutiyena asaṅkhatabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā dassanabhāvena, dutiyena vivekabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā adhipatibhāvena, dutiyena amatabhāvena dhammaṃ thometi. Atha vā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā buddhabhāvaṃ upagato’’ti etena svākkhātatāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena sandiṭṭhikatāya. Tathā paṭhamena akālikatāya, dutiyena ehipassikatāya. Paṭhamena vā opaneyyikatāya, dutiyena paccattaṃveditabbatāya. Paṭhamena vā saha pubbabhāgasīlādīhi sekkhehi sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhehi , dutiyena saha asaṅkhatadhātuyā asekkhehi dhammaṃ thometi.
而“无垢”一词,通过显示无杂染,以清净性赞叹法;“无上”一词,通过显示无其他更殊胜者,以圆满性赞叹法。或以初者以断的成就,以第二者以自性的成就。或以初者以修习果的相应性(来赞叹),因为通过修习的功德,它能断除杂染之垢,故以此说修习行之果。以第二者以亲证果的相应性(来赞叹),因为无有更上应作之事,故不共于他的无上性是由亲证所生,故以此说亲证之果。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vītamala’’nti iminā pana saṃkilesābhāvadīpanena visuddhatāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘anuttara’’nti etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanena paripuṇṇatāya. Paṭhamena vā pahānasampadāya, dutiyena sabhāvasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā bhāvanāphalayogyatāya. Bhāvanāguṇena hi so saṃkilesamalasamugghātako, tasmānena bhāvanākiriyāya phalamāha. Dutiyena sacchikiriyāphalayogyatāya. Taduttarikaraṇīyābhāvato hi anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttarabhāvo sacchikiriyānibbattito, tasmānena sacchikiriyāphalamāhāti.
如此,以简略方式,先以赞叹一切正法功德为前导而作礼敬之后,现在为对圣僧团也作以赞叹为前导的礼敬,而宣说“善逝的亲生子”等语。此处,“善逝的”是属格关系,应与“子”一词相连接。生于胸、由胸所生、或在胸中成长者称为“亲生”,在自生子、田生子、弟子、所赋予子这四种子女中,指自生子;然因相似性,圣者们被称作“亲生”。正如世间亲生之子因由自身所出,特别能继承父亲的遗产,同样,这些圣者因在听闻正法之际以圣生而出生,故特别能继承属于世尊的解脱之乐与法宝之遗产。或者,凭借世尊说法之威力,正进入或已进入圣地的圣弟子们,因在世尊胸怀中由精进所生的殊胜出生,即使不依譬喻,也完全堪当“亲生”之名。恰如世尊观察他们的习性、随眠、行境、胜解等,省思其过失,将他们安立心中,遮除其过失,令住于无过失之处,以戒等法身为滋养而使其成长。如世尊在《如是语》中所说:“诸比丘,我是婆罗门……你们是我的儿子,是亲生,从口所生”等。难道弟子所说的教法不能带来圣位吗?确实能,但因其以世尊教法为根本,且在特相上有所欠缺。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva sabbasaddhammaguṇehi saddhammassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni ariyasaṅghassāpi thomanāpubbaṅgamaṃ paṇāmaṃ karonto ‘‘sugatassa orasāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sugatassāti sambandhaniddeso, ‘‘puttāna’’nti etena sambajjhitabbo. Urasi bhavā, jātā, saṃvuddhā vā orasā, attajo khettajo antevāsiko dinnakoti catubbidhesu puttesu attajā, taṃsarikkhatāya pana ariyapuggalā ‘‘orasā’’ti vuccanti. Yathā hi manussānaṃ orasaputtā attajātatāya pitusantakassa dāyajjassa visesabhāgino honti, evametepi saddhammasavanante ariyāya jātiyā jātatāya bhagavato santakassa vimuttisukhassa dhammaratanassa ca dāyajjassa visesabhāginoti. Atha vā bhagavato dhammadesanānubhāvena ariyabhūmiṃ okkamamānā, okkantā ca ariyasāvakā bhagavato ure vāyāmajanitābhijātatāya sadisakappanamantarena nippariyāyeneva ‘‘orasā’’ti vattabbatamarahanti. Tathā hi te bhagavatā āsayānusayacariyādhimuttiādiolokanena, vajjānucintanena ca hadaye katvā vajjato nivāretvā anavajje patiṭṭhāpentena sīlādidhammasarīraposanena saṃvaḍḍhāpitā. Yathāha bhagavā itivuttake ‘‘ahamasmi bhikkhave brāhmaṇo…pe… tassa me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā’’tiādi (itivu. 100). Nanu sāvakadesitāpi desanā ariyabhāvāvahāti? Saccaṃ, sā pana tammūlikattā, lakkhaṇādivisesābhāvato ca ‘‘bhagavato dhammadesanā’’ icceva saṅkhyaṃ gatā, tasmā bhagavato orasaputtabhāvoyeva tesaṃ vattabboti, etena catubbidhesu puttesu ariyasaṅghassa attajaputtabhāvaṃ dasseti. Attano kulaṃ punenti sodhenti, mātāpitūnaṃ vā hadayaṃ pūrentīti puttā, attajādayo. Ariyā pana dhammatantivisodhanena, dhammānudhammapaṭipattiyā cittārādhanena ca tappaṭibhāgatāya bhagavato puttā nāma, tesaṃ. Tassa ‘‘samūha’’nti padena sambandho.
成为杂染之相,能杀害、压迫功德者,是为魔,即天子魔。以此系缚他人者,为军;魔之军即是如此,魔与魔军被粉碎、被摧毁者,名为“碎魔军者”。虽应说“碎魔与魔军者”,但依部分省略的语法规则而如此说。或者,因“魔”字邻近,“军”字即应理解为魔军,且此处为偈颂韵律而缩短。有些地方读作“碎魔军者”,但对此偈而言,因是圣者们所生,此读法并不妥当。难道圣弟子们在证道之时,不像世尊那样,有天子魔或魔军前来作障碍吗?为何如此说?因为应予排斥之因已被粉碎。由于他们应予排斥之因——杂染已被粉碎,故他们魔与魔军亦名为已被粉碎。或者,如同蕴魔与行魔,天子魔亦因助成杀害功德,故此处烦恼众被称为“魔军”,如世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇaṃ māreti vibādhatīti māro, devaputtamāro. Sināti pare bandhati etāyāti senā, mārassa senā tathā, mārañca mārasenañca mathenti vilothentīti mārasenamathanā, tesaṃ. ‘‘Māramārasenamathanāna’’nti hi vattabbepi ekadesasarūpekasesavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Mārasaddasannidhānena vā senāsaddena mārasenā gahetabbā, gāthābandhavasena cettha rasso. ‘‘Mārasenamaddanāna’’ntipi katthaci pāṭho, so ayuttova ariyājātikattā imissā gāthāya. Nanu ca ariyasāvakānaṃ maggādhigamasamaye bhagavato viya tadantarāyakaraṇatthaṃ devaputtamāro vā mārasenā vā na apasādeti, atha kasmā evaṃ vuttanti? Apasādetabbabhāvakāraṇassa vimathitattā. Tesañhi apasādetabbatāya kāraṇe saṃkilese vimathite tepi vimathitā nāma hontīti. Atha vā khandhābhisaṅkhāramārānaṃ viya devaputtamārassāpi guṇamāraṇe sahāyabhāvūpagamanato kilesabalakāyo idha ‘‘mārasenā’’ti vuccati yathāha bhagavā –
欲爱是你的第一军,第二称为不乐;
第三是你的饥渴,第四称为渴爱。
利养、声誉与恭敬,
以及由邪命所得的名声;
凡是抬高自己,
轻蔑他人者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmā te paṭhamā senā, dutiyā arati vuccati; Tatiyā khuppipāsā te, catutthī taṇhā pavuccati. Pañcamaṃ thinamiddhaṃ te, chaṭṭhā bhīrū pavuccati; Sattamī vicikicchā te, makkho thambho te aṭṭhamo. Lābho siloko sakkāro, Micchāladdho ca yo yaso; Yo cattānaṃ samukkaṃse, Pare ca avajānati. Esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī; Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukha’’nti. (su. ni. 438; mahāni. 28; cūḷani. 47);
那一千五百种乃至无量种的烦恼军队,已被那些圣弟子们以念、择法、精进、止等功德为武器,逐一粉碎、摧毁、破坏,因此他们被称为“碎魔军者”。此处“粉碎”即摧毁或破坏。再者,蕴魔、行魔、死魔、天子魔助成其伴,故对被称为“军”的烦恼魔的粉碎,也可称作“碎魔军者”。如此,以粉碎五魔而令其义圆满。圣弟子们以断集与遍知粉碎蕴魔,以令其无助伴、令其不生而粉碎行魔,以摧伏其力、超越其境而粉碎死魔,以断除天子魔及令烦恼魔完全无生而粉碎烦恼魔。由此显示他们为世尊亲子之因,以及在三种子女中他们是随生子。正因为碎魔军,所以他们是世尊的亲生子,也是随生子。显示巴利原文
Sā ca tehi ariyasāvakehi diyaḍḍhasahassabhedā, anantabhedā vā kilesavāhinī satidhammavicayavīriyasamathādiguṇapaharaṇīhi odhiso mathitā, viddhaṃsitā, vihatā ca, tasmā ‘‘mārasenamathanā’’ti vuccanti. Vilothanañcettha viddhaṃsanaṃ, vihananaṃ vā. Apica khandhābhisaṅkhāramaccudevaputtamārānaṃ tesaṃ sahāyabhāvūpagamanatāya senāsaṅkhātassa kilesamārassa ca mathanato ‘‘mārasenamathanā’’tipi attho gahetabbo. Evañca sati pañcamāranimmathanabhāvena attho paripuṇṇo hoti. Ariyasāvakāpi hi samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇena sabbathā, appavattikaraṇena ca abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena maccumāraṃ, devaputtamārañca samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ mathentīti, iminā pana tesaṃ orasaputtabhāve kāraṇaṃ, tīsu puttesu ca anujātataṃ dasseti. Mārasenamathanatāya hi te bhagavato orasaputtā, anujātā cāti.
“八众”是数目上的限定。以此表明:即使他们依各自类别而有成百上千种不同的数目,但依圣道之道果法的类别,他们都不超越这数目限定,即不超越处于道位与果位的状态。pi 字或 api 字因措辞风格等原因,被用在了不当之处;它应与“圣僧”一词相连,用以总括:不仅指佛法,也指圣僧。虽然离开了组成成分,并没有所谓独立于成分之外的聚合体,因为聚合体是依于成分而说的,但可借由已知的聚合体来限定未知的聚合体,故说“八众之集合”。以此特别说明:这里的“圣僧”,其聚合体并非依某种形态或身体的聚合,而是依处于道位与果位的状态。将组成成分聚集起来,应被思惟、被考量或被集合起来,即合在一起,故为“众”;由于词语的连声等,它也就是“集”。两种读法都合理。因为远离烦恼、不趣向非正道,以及趣向正道,故依词源学为“圣”。或者,因为被包括天神在内的世间所皈依,故应被忆念、应被亲近,且已亲近者能成就其义,故为“圣”;依见与戒的共性而和合,或依聚合体而共同从事和合之业,故为“僧”。圣者们的僧团,或依上述方式既是圣者又是僧伽。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhannanti gaṇanaparicchedo, tenasatipi tesaṃ taṃtaṃbhedena anekasatasahassasaṅkhyābhede ariyabhāvakaramaggaphaladhammabhedena imaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ nātivattanti maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvānativattanatoti dasseti. Pi-saddo, api-saddo vā padalīḷādinā kāraṇena aṭṭhāne payutto, so ‘‘ariyasaṅgha’’nti ettha yojetabbo, tena na kevalaṃ buddhadhammeyeva, atha kho ariyasaṅghampīti sampiṇḍeti. Yadipi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci natthi avayavaṃ upādāya samudāyassa vattabbattā, aviññāyamānasamudāyaṃ pana viññāyamānasamudāyena visesitumarahatīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti, etena ‘‘ariyasaṅgha’’nti ettha na yena kenaci saṇṭhānādinā, kāyasāmaggiyā vā samudāyabhāvo, api tu maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvenevāti viseseti. Avayavameva sampiṇḍetvā ūhitabbo vitakketabbo, saṃūhanitabbo vā saṅghaṭitabboti samūho, soyeva samoho vacanasiliṭṭhatādinā. Dvidhāpi hi pāṭho yujjati. Ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato ariyā niruttinayena . Atha vā sadevakena lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato upagantabbato, upagatānañca tadatthasiddhito ariyā, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhato, samaggaṃ vā kammaṃ samudāyavasena samupagatoti saṅgho, ariyānaṃ saṅgho, ariyo ca so saṅgho ca yathāvuttanayenāti vā ariyasaṅgho, taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Bhagavato aparabhāge buddhadhammaratanānampi samadhigamo saṅgharatanādhīnoti ariyasaṅghassa bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ idheva ‘‘sirasā vande’’ti vuttaṃ. Avassañcāyamattho sampaṭicchitabbo vinayaṭṭhakathādīsupi (pārā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) tathā vuttattā. Keci pana purimagāthāsupi taṃ padamānetvā yojenti, tadayuttameva ratanattayassa asādhāraṇaguṇappakāsanaṭṭhānattā, yathāvuttakāraṇassa ca sabbesampi saṃvaṇṇanākārānamadhippetattāti.
通过此偈颂,显示了圣僧的出身成就、断除成就等众多功德。如何显示的呢?以“善逝的亲生子”一句,说明其源于正自觉者,显示圣僧的出身成就。以“摧破魔军者”一句,说明其断除一切杂染,显示断除成就。以“八众的集合”一句,说明其处于道位与果位的状态,显示智慧成就。以“圣僧”一句,说明其为一切僧伽中的最上者,显示自性成就。或者,以“善逝的亲生子”显示圣僧具有清净依止的性质;以“摧破魔军者”显示其已正确地、正直地、如法地行道;以“八众的集合”显示其应受供养等性质;以“圣僧”显示其是无上福田的性质。同样,以“善逝的亲生子”显示圣僧具有出世间皈依的实质,因为他们正是通过出世间皈依而成为世尊的亲生子。以“摧破魔军者”显示由志向成就所圆满的前行道,因为已立志向并正确行道者能战胜魔及魔军。以“八众的集合”通过人我施设,显示了道果诸法,从而显示了摧破敌对者的有学与无学法。以“圣僧”通过显示其是无上福田,显示了其是最上应供者。皈依是声闻一切功德的开端,连同前行道的修习,有学的戒蕴等皆在其中。显示巴利原文
Imāya pana gāthāya ariyasaṅghassa pabhavasampadā pahānasampadādayo aneke guṇā dassitā honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti hi etena ariyasaṅghassa pabhavasampadaṃ dasseti sammāsambuddhapabhavatādīpanato. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’’nti etena pahānasampadaṃ sakalasaṃkilesappahānadīpanato. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena ñāṇasampadaṃ maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvadīpanato . ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti etena sabhāvasampadaṃ sabbasaṅghānaṃ aggabhāvadīpanato. Atha vā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti ariyasaṅghassa visuddhanissayabhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’’nti sammāujuñāyasāmīcipaṭipannabhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti āhuneyyādibhāvadīpanaṃ. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvadīpanaṃ. Tathā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti etena ariyasaṅghassa lokuttarasaraṇagamanasabbhāvaṃ dasseti. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanena hi te bhagavato orasaputtā jātā. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’nti etena abhinīhārasampadāsiddhaṃ pubbabhāgasammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Katābhinīhārā hi sammāpaṭipannā māraṃ, mārasenaṃ vā abhivijinanti. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena viddhastavipakkhe sekkhāsekkhadhamme dasseti puggalādhiṭṭhānena maggaphaladhammānaṃ dassitattā. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti etena aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ dasseti anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvassa dassitattā. Saraṇagamanañca sāvakānaṃ sabbaguṇassa ādi, sapubbabhāgapaṭipadā sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo majjhe, asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo pariyosānantiādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā saṅkhepato sabbepi ariyasaṅghaguṇā dassitā hontīti.
如是,以三偈略赞一切功德而为礼敬三宝之后,现在为将此礼敬转化为所希求的利益,故说“iti me”等句。其中,iti一词表示例示,用以指示如前所述的三偈方式。me依工具格,表示将自己作为作者,与此相连的剩余文句是“我所获得的功德”;或者这是与格指示,剩余文句为“存在”;或者这是属格指示,意为“我的由礼敬所生的功德”。能令清净欢喜者是净信,具有那样的慧或那样的心者,称为净信慧者。由于此复合词随其他词的词性决定其性,故说为“pasannamatino”。能够带来、产生或承载喜乐者,即是宝。有七种宝或十种宝之说;它们如同这些宝,词源学者如是说。然而,除了相似施设之外,依前所述词义,佛陀等具有宝的性质,也是合理的。因为当人们如理作意“彼世尊是阿罗汉……”等真实功德时,便会生起无量喜悦与欢喜,成为证得不死之因。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṃkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippetapayojane pariṇāmento ‘‘iti me’’tiādimāha. Tattha iti-saddo nidassane. Tena gāthāttayena yathāvuttanayaṃ nidasseti. Meti attānaṃ karaṇavacanena kattubhāvena niddisati. Tassa ‘‘yaṃ puññaṃ mayā laddha’’nti pāṭhasesena sambandho, sampadānaniddeso vā eso, ‘‘atthī’’ti pāṭhaseso, sāminiddeso vā ‘‘yaṃ mama puññaṃ vandanāmaya’’nti. Pasīdīyate pasannā, tādisā mati paññā, cittaṃ vā yassāti pasannamati, aññapadaliṅgappadhānattā imassa samāsapadassa ‘‘pasannamatino’’ti vuttaṃ. Ratiṃ nayati, janeti, vahatīti vā ratanaṃ, sattavidhaṃ, dasavidhaṃ vā ratanaṃ, tamiva imānīti neruttikā. Sadisakappanamaññatra pana yathāvuttavacanattheneva buddhādīnaṃ ratanabhāvo yujjati. Tesañhi ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.157, 255) yathābhūtaguṇe āvajjantassa amatādhigamahetubhūtaṃ anappakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
大名!当圣弟子忆念如来的时候,那时他的心不为贪欲所缠缚,不为嗔恚所缠缚……不为愚痴所缠缚……那时,他的心唯有正直地朝向如来。大名!心正直的圣弟子获得义之乐,获得法之乐,获得与法相应的喜悦。喜悦者生起喜……等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ mahānāma samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa…pe… na moha…pe… ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti tathāgataṃ ārabbha. Ujugatacitto kho pana mahānāma ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11).
或者,被尊重等状态即是宝的含义。这在注疏中已说过:显示巴利原文
Cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu –
受人敬重、价值崇高、无可比拟、难得一见;
具有无与伦比的受用,因此被称为宝物。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti. (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; udāna. aṭṭha. 47; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; su. ni. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 1.226);
而恭敬性等功德是诸佛等独有的、超越的、非他人所共的,唯在诸佛等处于可得。详细内容应取自《宝经注》。然而,此义并非从词源学的角度而说,那是从何而说呢?据声论师所说:是从世间所认可的宝物应当受到尊重等义的角度而说。又因善者喜悦于此,因能渡越生死轮回之海,因能引导至善趣与涅槃,故为宝,这是同义复合词的解释,无需过多分别。或以省略一方的构词法,或以复数词的词源解释,称为诸宝。三者的集合,或三者的聚合,或以此有三部分,故为三,即诸宝之三,非他物,故为三宝。然而,离开了部分则整体并不存在,因此正是这三者被称为宝,而非仅仅是集合体,但基于对集合体的考量而使用了单数。被礼敬即是礼敬,此即礼敬所成,如同‘布施所成、戒所成’。此处的礼敬,是以身、语、意向三宝之功德倾斜,或为称赞。再者,与彼思心所俱生、以此为资助的、与信、慧、念、精进等相应的法为礼敬,由彼所造故为礼敬所成,如同‘金所成、银所成’,就义理而言,即是如前所述的思心所本身。于三宝,或属于三宝的礼敬所成,即三宝礼敬所成。因能产生应供养之果报,故依词源学为福,它清净……显示巴利原文
Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā sātisayato buddhādīsuyeva labbhantīti. Vitthāro ratanasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226) gahetabbo. Ayamattho pana nibbacanatthavasena na vutto, atha kenāti ce? Loke ratanasammatassa vatthuno garukātabbatādiatthavasenāti saddavidū. Sādhūnañca ramanato, saṃsāraṇṇavā ca taraṇato, sugatinibbānañca nayanato ratanaṃ tulyatthasamāsavasena, alamatipapañcena. Ekasesapakappanena, puthuvacananibbacanena vā ratanāni. Tiṇṇaṃ samūho, tīṇi vā samāhaṭāni, tayo vā avayavā assāti tayaṃ, ratanānameva tayaṃ, nāññesanti ratanattayaṃ. Avayavavinimuttassa pana samudāyassa abhāvato tīṇi eva ratanāni tathā vuccanti, na samudāyamattaṃ, samudāyāpekkhāya pana ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Vandīyate vandanā, sāva vandanāmayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ sīlamaya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 33). Vandanā cettha kāyavācācittehi tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇaninnatā, thomanā vā. Apica tassā cetanāya sahajātādopakāreko saddhāpaññāsativīriyādisampayuttadhammo vandanā, tāya pakatanti vandanāmayaṃ yathā ‘‘sovaṇṇamayaṃ rūpiyamaya’’nti, atthato pana yathāvuttacetanāva. Ratanattaye, ratanattayassa vā vandanāmayaṃ ratanattayavandanāmayaṃ. Pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato puññaṃ niruttinayena, attano kārakaṃ, santānaṃ vā punāti visodhetīti puññaṃ, sakammakattā dhātussa kāritavasena atthavivaraṇaṃ labbhati, saddanipphatti pana suddhavasenevāti saddavidū.
以系缚种种成就的方式,进入有情相续的中间,故名为“障碍”,即现世等不利。依礼敬作用中所说的方法,障碍被善加破坏、摧毁者,称为“善摧障碍者”。此处的“破坏”,应理解为通过远离能生起那些障碍的因,令障碍不再生起。“已存在”是过去时态的动作,它与“我将阐明义理”这一句相连。“彼的”——指以“yaṃ”字所指的、由礼敬所成的福德。“以威力”——即以力量。显示巴利原文
Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Paṇāmapayojane vuttavidhinā suṭṭhu vihato viddhasto antarāyo assāti suvihatantarāyo. Vihananañcettha taduppādakahetupariharaṇavasena tesaṃ antarāyānamanuppattikaraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Hutvāti pubbakālakiriyā, tassa ‘‘atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti etena sambandho. Tassāti yaṃ-saddena uddiṭṭhassa vandanāmayapuññassa. Ānubhāvenāti balena.
“威光、精进、咒语,以及影响力、能力,此五种——
——被称为‘威力’,也称为‘影响力’。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tejo ussāhamantā ca, pabhū sattīti pañcime; ‘Ānubhāvo’ti vuccanti, ‘pabhāvo’ti ca te vade’’ti. –
在已说的诸义中,此处指能力。其中,“anu”意为“反复地”,它能修习、增长具足此者,故称“anubhāva”,亦即“ānubhāva”——《优陀那注》中如是说。然而,从义理上说,它正是礼敬所成福德的能力;此能力依所获成就之相,资助往昔业的力量;又由于善摧障碍,成为其因或缘。显示巴利原文
Vuttesu hi atthesu idha sattiyaṃ vattati. Anu punappunaṃ taṃsamaṅgiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti hi anubhāvo, soyeva ānubhāvoti udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, atthato pana yathāladdhasampattinimittakassa purimakammassa balānuppadānavasasaṅkhātā vandanāmayapuññassa sattiyeva, sā ca suvihatantarāyatāya karaṇaṃ, hetu vā sambhavati.
于此,“以净信心”一句,显示了自身净信的成就;“三宝礼敬所成”一句,显示了三宝作为福田的成就。由此,凭借自身净信的成就与三宝福田的成就这两支,彰显了摧破障碍与灾祸的能力,从而阐明义理。正如布施思心所依四支而成就,礼敬思心所亦依两支而成就,由摧破障碍故,成为现世可见。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana ‘‘pasannamatino’’ti etena attano pasādasampattiṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ratanattayavandanāmaya’’nti etena ratanattayassa khettabhāvasampattiṃ, tato ca tassa puññassa attano pasādasampattiyā, ratanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyāti dvīhi aṅgehi atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ vihanane samatthataṃ dīpeti. Caturaṅgasampattiyā dānacetanā viya hi dvayaṅgasampattiyā paṇāmacetanāpi antarāyavihananena diṭṭhadhammikāti.
如此显示了礼敬三宝的作用之后,为了注释法教之义理,并借此显示此法正是应被注释之法,且以其殊胜功德称扬赞颂,故说“对于长时……”等语。这是阿阇梨的惯例,即于诸注释书之首,称扬各应注释之法的特殊功德而作赞颂。正如《破斥犹豫》《显扬义理》《满足希求》《阿毗达摩义集》等论中,依次有“摧破外道论,生起种种智,生起说法师牛王之种种辩才”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ratanattayassa nipaccakārakaraṇe payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni yassā dhammadesanāya atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmo, tadapi saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammabhāvena dassetvā guṇābhitthavanavisesena abhitthavetuṃ ‘‘dīghassā’’tiādimāha. Ayañhi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ taṃtaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāsu ādito tassa tassa saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammassa visesaguṇakittanena thomanā. Tathā hi tesu tesu papañcasūdanīsāratthapakāsanīmanorathapūraṇīaṭṭhasālinīādīsu yathākkamaṃ ‘‘paravādamathanassa, ñāṇappabhedajananassa, dhammakathikapuṅgavānaṃ vicittapaṭibhānajananassa,
他恒以甚深智慧,常入其中,
对于具足种种理趣、极为善巧的阿毗达摩,从起始处……”如是以偈颂赞叹。
显示巴利原文 Tassa gambhīrañāṇehi, ogāḷhassa abhiṇhaso; Nānānayavicittassa, abhidhammassa ādito’’ti. ādinā –
于此偈中,“长”即指名为“长部”者。“以长经为标记”,是指以由长篇、殊胜之文句相续所成的经典为标志的;由此显示,“长”这一称谓是随顺此部圣典义趣的通名。难道不是经典本身即是“阿含”吗?为何说阿含是以经典来标记的呢?从胜义谛上说,确实如此;然而,从世俗施设而言,由于依经典而安立了阿含性,故以作为支分的经典来指称作为总集的阿含。譬如,对于义理与文句的聚合,有“经”之称谓;同样地,对于诸经的聚合,则有“阿含”之称谓。因为具有缘起等微细之义,故为微细。或由它而趣入自利、利他等,或由它而获得,或由它而导出,故为“阿含”;以最上之义、应希求之义,它是殊胜的,故为“阿含之胜”。再者,相对于为外道所认可的《婆罗多往世书》、《那罗希王往世书》等,它也为殊胜,故称为“阿含之胜”,即此部圣典之谓。随顺佛陀而觉悟者,称为“佛陀随觉者”,即随顺佛陀所现证之谛理而同样证得谛实的上首弟子等圣者;他们以义理解说的方式、以功德赞叹的方式作了注释,故如此说。或者,佛陀及随觉者们以如上方式作了解释,故如此说,即指此部圣典之义。显示巴利原文
Thomanā katā. Tattha dīghassāti dīghanāmakassa. Dīghasuttaṅkitassāti dīghehi abhiāyatavacanappabandhavantehi suttehi lakkhitassa, anena ‘‘dīgho’’ti ayaṃ imassa āgamassa atthānugatā samaññāti dasseti. Nanu ca suttāniyeva āgamo, kathaṃ so tehi aṅkīyatīti? Saccametaṃ paramatthato, paññattito pana suttāni upādāya āgamabhāvassa paññattattā avayavehi suttehi avayavībhūto āgamo aṅkīyati. Yatheva hi atthabyañjanasamudāye ‘‘sutta’’nti vohāro, evaṃ suttasamudāye āgamavohāroti. Paṭiccasamuppādādinipuṇatthabhāvato nipuṇassa. Āgacchanti attatthaparatthādayo ettha, etena, etasmāti vā āgamo, uttamaṭṭhena, patthanīyaṭṭhena ca so varoti āgamavaro. Apica āgamasammatehi bāhirakapaveditehi bhāratapurāṇakathānarasīhapurāṇakathādīhi varotipi āgamavaro, tassa. Buddhānamanubuddhā buddhānubuddhā, buddhānaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ anugamma paṭividdhasaccā aggasāvakādayo ariyā, tehi atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena, guṇasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena ca saṃvaṇṇitoti tathā. Atha vā buddhā ca anubuddhā ca, tehi saṃvaṇṇito yathāvuttanayenāti tathā, tassa. Sammāsambuddheneva hi tiṇṇampi piṭakānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanākkamo bhāsito, tato paraṃ saṅgāyanādivasena sāvakehīti ācariyā vadanti. Vuttañca majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāya upālisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇassāti vitthāretvā atthadīpakassa. Bhagavatā hi abyākataṃ tantipadaṃ nāma natthi, sabbesaṃyeva attho kathito’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.76). Saddhāvahaguṇassāti buddhādīsu pasādāvahaguṇassa. Nanu ca sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ tepiṭakaṃ saddhāvahaguṇameva, atha kasmā ayamaññasādhāraṇaguṇena thomitoti? Sātisayato imassa tagguṇasampannattā. Ayañhi āgamo brahmajālādīsu sīladiṭṭhādīnaṃ anavasesaniddesādivasena, mahāpadānādīsu (dī. ni. 2.3) purimabuddhānampi guṇaniddesādivasena, pāthikasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 3.1.4) titthiye madditvā appaṭivattiyasīhanādanadanādivasena, anuttariyasuttādīsu visesato buddhaguṇavibhāvanena ratanattaye sātisayaṃ saddhaṃ āvahatīti.
如是,在对应当解释的法作了赞叹之后,现在为显示即将进行的解释之传承清净,而说出“为了阐明义理”等语。因为通过此偈颂,显示:这即将进行的解释,仅仅除开锡兰(狮子)语这一点,正是从登上三次结集的长部义注而来,而非从他处;应以此为由而说,而非以其他为由。如此显示了自身解释的传承清净。另一种方式:为显示解释的所依,而说“为了阐明义理”等。因为此(阿含)极其微细、深奥,是佛陀的境界,其他人甚至无法言说,而我将以自力解释此殊胜阿含。通过此偈颂,显示:正是依靠先前诸师的大威神力,我将解释其义。如此显示自身解释的所依。其中,“为了阐明义理”:是为了阐明多种义理,如文本义、自性义、所知义、随文义、随彼义、有余义、无余义、了义、不了义等,或者就是“为了阐明”。由于偈颂结构的圆满,而有这两种(阐释)形式。通过它而解说义理,故为“义注”;“义注”本身就是“义注”,其中“ttha”音转变为“ṭṭha”音,正如“苦的逼迫义”一般,这是有连声规则的,因为它源自圣者的语言。即使是文法家们,在说了“tathānaṃṭṭha yug”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammassa abhitthavanampi katvā idāni saṃvaṇṇanāya sampati vakkhamānāya āgamanavisuddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’ntiādimāha. Imāya hi gāthāya saṅgītittayamāruḷhadīghāgamaṭṭhakathātova sīhaḷabhāsāmattaṃ vinā ayaṃ vakkhamānasaṃvaṇṇanā āgatā, nāññato, tadeva kāraṇaṃ katvā vattabbā, nāññanti attano saṃvaṇṇanāya āgamanavisuddhiṃ dasseti. Aparo nayo – paramanipuṇagambhīraṃ buddhavisayamāgamavaraṃ attano baleneva vaṇṇayissāmīti aññehi vattumpi asakkuṇeyyattā saṃvaṇṇanānissayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’ntiādi. Imāya hi pubbācariyānubhāvaṃ nissāyeva tassa atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāmīti attano saṃvaṇṇanānissayaṃ dasseti. Tattha ‘‘atthappakāsanattha’’nti pāṭhattho, sabhāvattho, ñeyyattho, pāṭhānurūpattho, tadanurūpattho, sāvasesattho, nivarasesattho, nītattho, neyyatthotiādinā anekappakārassa atthassa pakāsanatthāya, pakāsanāya vā. Gāthābandhasampattiyā dvibhāvo. Attho kathīyati etāyāti atthakathā, sāyeva aṭṭhakathā ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.17; 2.8), ayañca sasaññogavidhi ariyājātibhāvato. Akkharacintakāpi hi ‘‘tathānaṃṭṭha yuga’’nti lakkhaṇaṃ vatvā idamevudāharanti.
它随顺文句与义理之辞,而解释义理;
它具备因缘、事件与关联,这被视为义注。
显示巴利原文 Yāya’tthamabhivaṇṇenti, byañjanatthapadānugaṃ; Nidānavatthusambandhaṃ, esā aṭṭhakathā matā.
“最初”是指在第一次结集时。长老大迦叶等,因具足六神通、心得极自在,且于禅那等具足五种自在,故称“自在者”;由这五百位长老结集。“结集”,即为了阐明义理,在适当处以“这是此句的义理,这是此句的义理”的方式,收集而说出的义注。而“随后也再结集”:不仅是在第一次结集时,在之后的第二、第三次结集中也进行了再结集。应知不单是最初由五百位自在者长老结集,随后也由耶舍长老等再结集,此处是以“并且”的合集义来理解,因为前后两次合集各自对应着各自的行动时机。显示巴利原文
Āditotiādimhi paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ. Chaḷabhiññatāya paramena cittavasībhāvena samannāgatattā, jhānādīsu pañcavasitā sabbhāvato ca vasino, therā mahākassapādayo, tesaṃ satehi pañcahi.Yā saṅgītāti yā aṭṭhakathā atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne ‘‘ayametassa attho, ayametassa attho’’ti saṅgahetvā vuttā. Anusaṅgītā ca pacchāpīti na kevalaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyameva, atha kho pacchā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītīsupi. Na ca pañcahi vasisatehi ādito saṅgītāyeva, api tu yasattherādīhi anusaṅgītā cāti saha samuccayena attho veditabbo. Samuccayadvayañhi paccekaṃ kiriyākālaṃ samuccinoti.
那么,既然已有古注疏存世,现今为何又要重新造作注疏呢?忆念这种“重复造作”及“无义造作”的过失,为了遮止此过,他便说出“狮子岛”等语。正是通过这一遮止,显示了此注疏的缘起。其中,“sīhaṃ(狮子)lāti(拿取)”即“执取狮子”,将la音变为ḷa音,如同“garuḷo(金翅鸟)”一词。在那个世系中,先祖为狮子王子,而出生于该世系的坦巴潘尼岛的刹帝利及所有民众,皆依后缀规则或惯用称呼而被称为“僧伽罗”;他们所居之岛,也依后缀规则或以地名,被称为“狮子岛”。“岛”,指在水中显现,或水在此处被分流;又因其岛屿四面环水而见分裂之相,亦可作此解。“又”字含有不满的暗示,借以表明此论虽已被三次结集所传诵,但仍包含着“尚且如此”的不圆满状态。由意义上的关联,与前偈“虽已结集及再结集”相连,便产生了“连同结集”的释义,因为这在其他处也能见到类似用法。“被带来”,是指从赡部洲洲带来。显示巴利原文
Atha porāṇaṭṭhakathāya vijjamānāya kimetāya adhunā puna katāya saṃvaṇṇanāyāti punaruttiyā, niratthakatāya ca dosaṃ samanussaritvā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘sīhaḷadīpa’’ntiādimāha. Taṃ pariharaṇeneva hi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya nimittaṃ dasseti. Tattha sīhaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti sīhaḷo la-kārassa ḷa-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘garuḷo’’ti. Tasmiṃ vaṃse ādipuriso sīhakumāro, tabbaṃsajātā pana tambapaṇṇidīpe khattiyā, sabbepi ca janā taddhitavasena, sadisavohārena vā sīhaḷā, tesaṃ nivāsadīpopi taddhitavasena, ṭhānīnāmena vā ‘‘sīhaḷo’’ti veditabbo. Jalamajjhe dippati, dvidhā vā āpo ettha sandatīti dipo, soyeva dīpo, bhedāpekkhāya tesaṃ dīpoti tathā. Panasaddo arucisaṃsūcane, tena kāmañca sā saṅgītittayamāruḷhā, tathāpi puna evaṃbhūtāti aruciyabhāvaṃ saṃsūceti. Tadatthasambandhatāya pana purimagāthāya ‘‘kāmañca saṅgītā anusaṅgītā cā’’ti sānuggahatthayojanā sambhavati. Aññatthāpi hi tathā dissatīti. Ābhatāti jambudīpato ānītā. Athāti saṅgītikālato pacchā, evaṃ sati ābhatapadena sambandho. Athāti vā mahāmahindattherenābhatakālato pacchā, evaṃ sati ṭhapitapadena sambandho. Sā hi dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāyeva, tato pacchā ca mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpamābhatā, pacchā pana tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapitāti. Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana pacchimasambandhameva duddasattā pakāseti. Tathā ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāyā’’ti idampi ‘‘ṭhapitā’’ti ca ‘‘apanetvā āropento’’ti ca etehi padehi sambajjhitabbaṃ. Ekapadampi hi āvuttiyādinayehi anekatthasambandhamupagacchati. Purimasambandhena cettha sīhaḷadīpavāsīnamatthāya nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇena sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapitāti tambapaṇṇiyattherehi ṭhapanapayojanaṃ dasseti. Pacchimasambandhena pana imāya saṃvaṇṇanāya jambudīpavāsīnaṃ, aññadīpavāsīnañca atthāya sīhaḷabhāsāpanayanassa, tantinayānucchavikabhāsāropanassa ca payojananti. Mahāissariyattā mahindoti rājakumārakāle nāmaṃ, pacchā pana guṇamahantatāya mahāmahindoti vuccati. Sīhaḷabhāsā nāma anekakkharehi ekatthassāpi voharaṇato paresaṃ voharituṃ atidukkarā kañcukasadisā sīhaḷānaṃ samudāciṇṇā bhāsā.
姑且不论古注疏,现今所造的注疏又是如何进行的呢?若有此问,为了说明此注疏的造作方式,他便说出“取出”等语。此处关联如下:从根本注疏中去除僧伽罗语,即将其涤除而不载入书册。借此他表明,此下将要说的注疏,除了仅去除被三次结集所传诵的根本注疏中的僧伽罗语之外,在义理上与根本注疏全然相合,就如同恒河之水与阎牟那河之水交融无别。“悦意”等是“语言”的修饰语,显明其具有自然语法的性质。因以自然文法的本质令智者心生愉悦,故称“悦意”。“伸展”是指就此义而伸展,或依义理而被阐明,或以此度脱轮回中的众生,或藉此跨越对种种义境的疑惑,故称“经轨”,即巴利圣典。随顺其被称为“轨则”的常道而行,如影随形,故为“契合经轨”。由于远离了夹杂非自然语法之他语的过失,故为“无过”,即如是具足自然文法的本质。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ hotu porāṇaṭṭhakathāya, adhunā kariyamānā pana aṭṭhakathā kathaṃ karīyatīti anuyoge sati imissā aṭṭhakathāya karaṇappakāraṃ dassetumāha ‘‘apanetvānā’’tiādi. Tattha tato mūlaṭṭhakathāto sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā potthake anāropitabhāvena niraṅkaritvāti sambandho, etena ayaṃ vakkhamānā aṭṭhakathā saṅgītittayamāropitāya mūlaṭṭhakathāya sīhaḷabhāsāpanayanamattamaññatra atthato saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā ‘‘gaṅgodakena yamunodaka’’nti dasseti. ‘‘Manorama’’ miccādīni ‘‘bhāsa’’nti etassa sabhāvaniruttibhāvadīpakāni visesanāni. Sabhāvaniruttibhāvena hi paṇḍitānaṃ manaṃ ramayatīti manoramā. Tanoti atthametāya, tanīyati vā atthavasena vivarīyati, vaṭṭato vā satte tāreti , nānātthavisayaṃ vā kaṅkhaṃ taranti etāyāti tanti, pāḷi. Tassā nayasaṅkhātāya gatiyā chaviṃ chāyaṃ anugatāti tantinayānucchavikā. Asabhāvaniruttibhāsantarasaṃkiṇṇadosavirahitatāya vigatadosā, tādisaṃ sabhāvaniruttibhūtaṃ –
摩揭陀语是根本语言,人们所用的‘yāyā’等语皆从此衍生而来;
梵天的语言亦同此,正自觉者亦作是语。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sā māgadhī mūlabhāsā, narā yāyā’dikappikā; Brahmāno cassutālāpā, sambuddhā cāpi bhāsare’’ti. –
意思是:将具足巴利行迹的语言,以书写的方式录于书册;借此表明其无音声之过失。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ pāḷigatibhāsaṃ potthake likhanavasena āropentoti attho, iminā saddadosābhāvamāha.
“不违乱宗义”,即不违背宗义,借此说明其无义理之失。正因无违乱,所以长老们的主张在此也将得以彰显。那么,这是谁的宗义呢?他说“长老们”等,以此排除了罗睺罗阿阇梨等人的住祇园派、住无畏山派等部派的宗义。因具足戒、闻、定、解脱等称为“坚固”的功德,故为长老。如说:“诸比丘,有四种法能令比丘成长为长老。哪四种呢?诸比丘,在此有比丘具戒……”(增支部4.22)。或者,因具足由谛、法等令坚固的行持,故为长老。正如法王在《法句经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Samayaṃavilomentoti siddhantamavirodhento, iminā pana atthadosābhāvamāha. Aviruddhattā eva hi te theravādāpi idha pakāsayissanti. Kesaṃ pana samayanti āha ‘‘therāna’’ntiādi, etena rāhulācariyādīnaṃ jetavanavāsīabhayagirivāsīnikāyānaṃ samayaṃ nivatteti. Thirehi sīlasutajhānavimuttisaṅkhātehi guṇehi samannāgatāti therā. Yathāha ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave therakaraṇā dhammā. Katame cattāro? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu sīlavā hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.22). Apica saccadhammādīhi thirakaraṇehi samannāgatattā therā. Yathāha dhammarājā dhammapade –
“若人具足谛与法, 不害、自制与调伏,
彼乃吐尽垢秽、智慧坚固者, 得称为『长老』。”(《法句经》第260偈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yamhi saccañca dhammo ca, ahiṃsā saṃyamo damo; Sa ve vantamalo dhīro, ‘thero’iti pavuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 260);
由大迦叶长老等传承而来的师承名为长老系谱。因属于该系谱,并具足教法与证悟,他们以智慧之光令其闪耀,以此方式照亮它,或在此中如同明灯,故称“长老系谱之灯”。以种种方式予以决断,故为“决断”;即在疑难关键之处,以破除执着的方式进行的断疑之说。他们具有极为善巧、微细的决断,故为“善巧微细决断者”。又,能决断者为“决断”,即对于前述对象的智慧;他们具有极为善巧、熟练的决断,故为“善巧微细决断者”。坐落于大云林中的寺院是大寺,它因世尊的大菩提而光辉;住于其中者为大寺住者,意即不违背其人之教说。由此,就补特伽罗增上的角度,显示出大迦叶等长老传承而来、在此中无有颠倒、微细善巧的决断,正是大寺住者教说的准量。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ. Mahākassapattherādīhi āgatā ācariyaparamparā theravaṃso, tappariyāpannā hutvā āgamādhigamasampannattā paññāpajjotena tassa samujjalanato taṃ pakārena dīpenti, tasmiṃ vā padīpasadisāti theravaṃsapadipā. Vividhena ākārena nicchīyatīti vinicchayo, gaṇṭhiṭṭhānesu khīlamaddanākārena pavattā vimaticchedanīkathā, suṭṭhu nipuṇo saṇho vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā. Atha vā vinicchinotīti vinicchayo, yathāvuttavisayaṃ ñāṇaṃ, suṭṭhu nipuṇo cheko vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā. Mahāmeghavane ṭhito vihāro mahāvihāro, yo satthu mahābodhinā virocati, tasmiṃ vasanasīlā mahāvihāravāsino, tādisānaṃ samayaṃ avilomentoti attho, etena mahākassapāditheraparamparāgato, tatoyeva aviparito saṇhasukhumo vinicchayoti mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ samayassa pamāṇabhūtataṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena dasseti.
舍弃一再重复的已说之义:即一处已说,却又在他处再引述之义。因其成为重复,且令文卷沉重,故舍弃之;我将阐明该圣典之义——此即其意。显示巴利原文
Hitvā punappunabhatamatthanti ekattha vutampi puna aññattha ābhatamatthaṃ punaruttibhāvato, ganthagarukabhāvato ca cajitvā tassa āgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmīti attho.
如此示现了作法方式之后,为显示除“为岛民故”所说目的之外注释的其他目的,而说“及为善士”等语。其中,“及为善士”的“及”字是合集义,以此合集:不单为赡部洲民众之义,而且为令善士喜悦之义。正因如此,“亦为铜掌岛民之义”这一意义得以成立,因为通过易于受持等,对他们也有诸多利益。“及为法久住”中,此“及”字也显示合集义:不单为此二义,而且为三藏教法或教理之法住立五千年的久时之义。因为教理之法住立时,行道法与通达法亦得安立,教理正是它们的根本。而教理之法,以善安立的文句与义理而得长久正住;注释之中,文句无颠倒、善安立,其义也无颠倒、善安立,因此,依于注释而使文句与义理无颠倒、善安立的方便,故说“及为法之久住”。此即世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ karaṇappakārampi dassetvā ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāyā’’ti vuttappayojanato aññampi saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sujanassa cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sujanassa cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena na kevalaṃ jambudīpavāsīnameva atthāya, atha kho sādhujanatosanatthañcāti samuccinoti. Teneva ca tambapaṇṇidīpavāsīnampi atthāyāti ayamattho siddho hoti uggahaṇādisukaratāya tesampi bahūpakārattā. Ciraṭṭhitatthañcāti etthāpi ca-saddo na kevalaṃ tadubhayatthameva, api tu tividhassāpi sāsanadhammassa, pariyattidhammassa vā pañcavassasahassaparimāṇaṃ cirakālaṃ ṭhitatthañcāti samuccayatthameva dasseti. Pariyattidhammassa hi ṭhitiyā paṭipattidhammapaṭivedhadhammānampi ṭhiti hoti tasseva tesaṃ mūlabhāvato. Pariyattidhammo pana sunikkhittena padabyañjanena, tadatthena ca ciraṃ sammā patiṭṭhāti, saṃvaṇṇanāya ca padabyañjanaṃ aviparītaṃ sunikkhittaṃ, tadatthopi aviparīto sunikkhitto hoti, tasmā saṃvaṇṇanāya aviparītassa padabyañjanassa, tadatthassa ca sunikkhittassa upāyabhāvamupādāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ciraṭṭhitatthañca dhammassā’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,有此二法能令正法久住、不错乱、不消失。哪二法?为善安立的文句,与善通达的义理。这些二法……乃至……能令正法久住。(《增支部》2.21)显示巴利原文
‘‘Dveme bhikkhave dhammā saddhammassa ṭhitiyā asammosāya anantaradhānāya saṃvattanti. Katame dve? Sunikkhittañca padabyañjanaṃ, attho ca sunīto, ime kho…pe… saṃvattantī’’tiādi (a. ni. 2.21).
如此显示了目的之后,为了以广大的舍弃来避免将作注释的篇幅沉重,而说“戒论”等。正如所说“我将不广分别它”。另一种方法:欲作注释时,应取《清净道论》为其一分,为说法者作此教导,以提纲方式显示其中已分别的法,而说“戒论”等。其中,“戒论”指以行戒、止戒等方式详说戒。“头陀法”指托钵支等十三种断除烦恼之法。“业处”指名为修习的瑜伽业所生之处,即种种法。为令知这些不只限于巴利圣典中所出的三十八种,亦包括注释中所出的两种,故说“一切”。“与行相辨别俱”指与贪行等性行的辨别一同进行,此为“禅那等至广说”的定语。此中,色界禅为禅那,无色界禅为等至。或者,于两者中,仅得近行定者为禅那,达到自在者则为等至。又,此二者亦皆是禅那,而果等至与灭尽等至则为等至。其广说即此义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ payojanampi dassetvā vakkhamānāya saṃvaṇṇanāya mahattapariccāgena ganthagarukabhāvaṃ pariharitumāha ‘‘sīlakathā’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na taṃ vicarayissāmī’’ti. Aparo nayo – yadaṭṭhakathaṃ kattukāmo, tadekadesabhāvena visuddhimaggo gahetabboti kathikānaṃ upadesaṃ karonto tattha vicāritadhamme uddesavasena dassetumāha ‘‘sīlakathā’’tiādi. Tattha sīlakathāti cārittavārittādivasena sīlavitthārakathā. Dhutadhammāti piṇḍapātikaṅgādayo terasa kilesadhunanakadhammā. Kammaṭṭhānānīti bhāvanāsaṅkhātassa yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānattā kammaṭṭhānanāmāni dhammajātāni. Tāni pana pāḷiyamāgatāni aṭṭhatiṃ seva na gahetabbāni, atha kho aṭṭhakathāyamāgatānipi dveti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sabbānipī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cari yāvidhānasahitoti rāgacaritādīnaṃ sabhāvādividhānena saha pavatto, idaṃ pana ‘‘jhānasamāpattivitthāro’’ti imassa visesanaṃ. Ettha ca rūpāvacarajjhānāni jhānaṃ, arūpāvacarajjhānāni samāpatti. Tadubhayampi vā paṭiladdhamattaṃ jhānaṃ, samāpajjanavasībhāvappattaṃ samāpatti. Apica tadapi ubhayaṃ jhānameva, phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattiyo pana samāpatti, tāsaṃ vitthāroti attho.
为摄属世间与出世间的六种神通,而说“一切神通”。“慧算计决断”指依《智分别》等中所出的一类等方式,将慧算计、总集或计数而作决断。“圣谛”的“圣”,因是佛等圣者所应通达,或因能成就圣位而称圣,是省略后词;或因无虚妄而应被取、应被了知而称圣,此为“谛”的定语。显示巴利原文
Lokiyalokuttarabhedānaṃ channampi abhiññānaṃ gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘sabbā ca abhiññāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇavibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 751) āgatanayena ekavidhādinā bhedena paññāya saṅkalayitvā sampiṇḍetvā, gaṇetvā vā vinicchayanaṃ paññāsaṅkalanavinicchayo. Ariyānīti buddhādīhi ariyehi paṭivijjhitabbattā, ariyabhāvasādhakattā vā ariyāni uttarapadalopena. Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā, avagantabbattā ariyāni, ‘‘saccānī’’timassa visesanaṃ.
缘相,即因等缘法以因缘等方式资助缘生法;其说示,即是缘起之说。此缘起之说,因不杂其他部派之见而极清净,因剖析密集极为难行而甚深微细,并以‘一’等理趣于其中分别,故说‘极清净、微细、理趣’。此三词亦是缘相说示的定语。不舍弃《无碍解道》等中所出之理而作分别,故其道未脱离本母,为‘未脱本母之道’。此中,‘道’指名为圣典的方法,因是通达种种义或通达谛的方便。或因其长行相续,与寻常之道相似,此为‘观’与‘修习’二词的定语。显示巴利原文
Hetādipaccayadhammānaṃ hetupaccayādibhāvena paccayuppannadhammānamupakārakatā paccayākāro, tassa desanā tathā, paṭiccasamuppādakathāti attho. Sā pana nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkararahitatāya suṭṭhu parisuddhā, ghanavinibbhogassa ca sudukkaratāya nipuṇā, ekattādinayasahitā ca tattha vicāritāti āha ‘‘suparisuddhanipuṇanayā’’ti. Padattayampi hetaṃ paccayākāradesanāya visesanaṃ. Paṭisambhidādīsu āgatanayaṃ avissajjitvāva vicāritattā avimutto tantimaggo yassāti avimuttatanti maggā. Maggoti cettha pāḷisaṅkhāto upāyo taṃtadatthānaṃ avabodhassa, saccapaṭivedhassa vā upāyabhāvato. Pabandho vā dīghabhāvena pakatimaggasadisattā, idaṃ pana ‘‘vipassanā, bhāvanā’’ti padadvayassa visesanaṃ.
此外,所谓‘一切’:此处‘iti’一词用于结束,因如所标示的标目已圆满完结,意为‘此即全部’。‘pana’一词仅为言辞庄严,并无独立意义。由于词义不相混杂,且无未说的剩余应说之义,故易于理解而极为清净,与‘一切’一词相关联;或者,此‘一切’为抽象中性词,与‘已说’一词相关联。‘bhiyyo’意为更多、极广,表示‘我仅将审察词义本身’。以此表明:这一切,我在本注疏中不再审察,因为会成重复,且会使著作沉重。而‘vicarayissāmīti’中,因是偈颂之故,不应视为‘vuddhi’变化,当如是见。显示巴利原文
Itipana sabbanti ettha iti-saddo parisamāpane yathāuddiṭṭhauddesassa pariniṭṭhitattā, ettakaṃ sabbanti attho. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ visuṃ atthābhāvato. Padatthasaṃkiṇṇassa, vattabbassa ca avuttassa avasesassa abhāvato suviññeyyabhāvena suparisuddhaṃ, ‘‘sabba’’nti iminā sambandho, bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘vutta’’nti iminā sambajjhanato. Bhiyyoti atirekaṃ, ativitthāranti attho, etena padatthamattameva vicārayissāmīti dasseti. Etaṃ sabbaṃ idha aṭṭhakathāya na vicārayissāmi punaruttibhāvato, ganthagarukabhāvato cāti adhippāyo. Vicarayissāmīti ca gāthābhāvato na vuddhibhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
即使如此,若有人责难说:“这部《清净道论》并未阐明诸阿含的义理,那么这一切在此都应被审察。”为了确定不审察的绝对原因并回避那责难,他说“majjhe visuddhimaggo”等。其中,“majjhe”指在《小部》之外的其他四部阿含之中。“hi”一词表原因,由此显示如前所述的原因。“tattha”指在那四部阿含中。“yathābhāsitaṃ”指世尊所各别宣说的,或与所宣说相应的。又或者,指诸注释家以注释方式所各别说的,或与所说相应的。“iccevaṃ”中,以“iti”一词指示如前所述的原因,其义为“即以此因”或“将此因存于心中”。“kato”在此也应视为以被动语态与“visuddhimaggo esā”一句相关联,依重复等理趣而见。“tampi”指以智摄持那《清净道论》后。“etāya”指以此名为《吉祥悦美》的注疏。在此,以“居中而立”显示中立性,特别表明《清净道论》是四部阿含的共同注疏,不像《吉祥悦美》等是不共注疏。然而,就一般性而言,它当然也随宜作为律藏和论藏的共同注疏;由于与它们相杂,且对余下的《小部》阿含特别共通,虽如此,但除去《小部》,只说它是四部阿含的共同注疏。显示巴利原文
Evampi esa visuddhimaggo āgamānamatthaṃ na pakāseyya, atha sabbopeso idha vicāritabboyevāti codanāya tathā avicāraṇassa ekantakāraṇaṃ niddhāretvā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘majjhe visuddhimaggo’’tiādimāha. Tattha majjheti khuddakato aññesaṃ catunnampi āgamānaṃ abbhantare. Hi-saddo kāraṇe, tena yathāvuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ joteti. Tatthāti tesu catūsu āgamesu. Yathābhāsitanti bhagavatā yaṃ yaṃ desitaṃ, desitānurūpaṃ vā. Api ca saṃvaṇṇakehi saṃvaṇṇanāvasena yaṃ yaṃ bhāsitaṃ, bhāsitānurūpantipi attho. Iccevāti ettha iti-saddena yathāvuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ nidasseti, imināva kāraṇena, idameva vā kāraṇaṃ manasi sannidhāyāti attho. Katoti etthāpi ‘‘visuddhimaggo esā’’ti padaṃ kammabhāvena sambajjhati āvuttiyādinayenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tampīti taṃ visuddhimaggampi ñāṇena gahetvāna. Etāyāti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā nāma etāya aṭṭhakathāya. Ettha ca ‘‘majjhe ṭhatvā’’ti etena majjhattabhāvadīpanena visesato catunnampi āgamānaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhakathā visuddhimaggo, na sumaṅgalavilāsinīādayo viya asādhāraṇaṭṭhakathāti dasseti. Avisesato pana vinayābhidhammānampi yathārahaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhakathā hotiyeva, tehi sammissatāya ca tadavasesassa khuddakāgamassa visesato sādhāraṇā samānāpi taṃ ṭhapetvā catunnameva āgamānaṃ sādhāraṇātveva vuttāti.
因缘论序章义释。显示巴利原文
Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā
如此,依前所述种种理趣,完成了以礼赞等为开端的造论序仪。现在,为使诸有分者的自性因分门显示而得善加明了、善加告知,故先依品与经显示分类,而说“于此,名为《长部》”等。其中,“于此”指在“我将阐明《长部》胜妙阿含之义理”这一语句中。其义为:所允诺“我将阐明其义理”者,即名为《长部》,应依品、经如此了知,或如此分类。又或,“于此”指在“依《长部》”这一语句中。所说的《长部》,此名《长部》者,应依品、经如此分析,或具如此类别。因为以“长部之”等所说的远处之词,用“彼”一词来复指;同样,以“依《长部》”所说的近处之词,也用“彼”一词来复指,这是由于它在自己心中犹如面向背面而转起。在此类情形中,无论在自己心中是面向正面或背面而转起,都可以随宜复指,因为仅以词语复指而不违义理。品、经等之词源将于后文明了。“三品具”指具有三品。“摄三十四经”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yathāvuttena vividhena nayena paṇāmādikaṃ pakaraṇārambhavidhānaṃ katvā idāni vibhāgavantānaṃ sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanavaseneva suvibhāvitaṃ, suviññāpitañca hotīti paṭhamaṃ tāva vaggasuttavasena vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha dīghāgamo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘dīghassa āgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti yadidaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vacane. ‘‘Yassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti paṭiññātaṃ, so dīghāgamo nāma vaggasuttavasena evaṃ veditabbo, evaṃ vibhāgoti vā attho. Atha vā tatthāti ‘‘dīghāgamanissita’’nti yaṃ vuttaṃ, etasmiṃ vacane. Yo dīghāgamo vutto, so dīghāgamo nāma vaggasuttavasena. Evaṃ vibhajitabbo, edisoti vā attho. ‘‘Dīghassā’’tiādinā hi vuttaṃ dūravacanaṃ taṃ-saddena paṭiniddisati viya ‘‘dīghāgamanissita’’nti vuttaṃ āsannavacanampi taṃ-saddena paṭiniddisati attano buddhiyaṃ parammukhaṃ viya parivattamānaṃ hutvā pavattanato. Edisesu hi ṭhānesu attano buddhiyaṃ sammukhaṃ vā parammukhaṃ vā parivattamānaṃ yathā tathā vā paṭiniddisituṃ vaṭṭati saddamattapaṭiniddesena atthassāvirodhanato. Vaggasuttādīnaṃ nibbacanaṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Tayo vaggā yassāti tivaggo. Catuttiṃsa suttāni ettha saṅgayhanti, tesaṃ vā saṅgaho gaṇanā etthāti catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho.
为了显示自己的注释是按照第一结集中安立的次第而转起,故说“彼之……以序分为始”等。在此,“为始”应知即依结集次第。然而,为何在四部阿含中,《长部》最先结集,其中《戒蕴品》最先安立,其中《梵网经》最先安立,其中又以“序分”为先呢?不应如此追问,因为在任何地方都不应仅凭语词次第而追问理由。再者,因为具足能引生信之功德,《长部》最先结集。信乃诸善法之种子,如说“信为种子,苦行为雨”。而其具足能引生信之功德,前已显示。此外,因为它收录少数经典且篇幅不大,易于领受、忆持等,故最先结集。如是,它收录三十四经,篇幅为六十四诵分。又因戒的论说众多,《戒蕴品》最先安立。戒乃教法之始,因为一切功德皆以戒为依止。因此他说:“是故,比丘!你应首先清净善法。何为善法之始?即戒极为清净”等。由于戒蕴的论说众多,故称为《戒蕴品》。又因它是破除邪见之论,而《梵网经》无余遗地分析一切邪见,故知它最先被安立于经藏中。因为在三藏佛语中,没有像《梵网经》那样将诸邪见无遗余、无结缚地分析开示的经典。显示巴利原文
Attano saṃvaṇṇanāya paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkameneva pavattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa…pe… nidānamādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādibhāvo hettha saṅgītikkameneva veditabbo. Kasmā pana catūsu āgamesu dīghāgamo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto, tattha ca sīlakkhandhavaggo paṭhamaṃ nikkhitto, tasmiñca brahmajālasuttaṃ, tatthāpi nidānanti? Nāyamanuyogo katthacipi na pavattati sabbattheva vacanakkamamattaṃ paṭicca anuyuñjitabbato. Apica saddhāvahaguṇattā dīghāgamova paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Saddhā hi kusaladhammānaṃ bījaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.197; su. ni. 77). Saddhāvahaguṇatā cassa heṭṭhā dassitāyeva. Kiñca bhiyyo – katipayasuttasaṅgahatāya ceva appaparimāṇatāya ca uggahaṇadhāraṇādisukhato paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Tathā hesa catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho, catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇo ca. Sīlakathābāhullato pana sīlakkhandhavaggo paṭhamaṃ nikkhitto. Sīlañhi sāsanassa ādi sīlapatiṭṭhānattā sabbaguṇānaṃ . Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā tiha tvaṃ bhikkhu ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.469). Sīlakkhandhakathābāhullato hi so ‘‘sīlakkhandhavaggo’’ti vutto. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathābhāvato pana suttantapiṭakassa niravasesadiṭṭhivibhajanaṃ brahmajālasuttaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti veditabbaṃ. Tepiṭake hi buddhavacane brahmajālasadisaṃ diṭṭhigatāni niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vibhattasuttaṃ natthi. Nidānaṃ pana paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ mahākassapattherena puṭṭhena āyasmatā ānandena desakālādinidassanatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti. Tenāha ‘‘brahmajālassāpī’’tiādi. Tattha ca ‘‘āyasmatā’’tiādinā desakaṃ niyameti, paṭhamasaṅgītikāleti pana kālanti, ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati.
第一次大结集之说的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
现在,借着“第一次大结集时”这一语缘,为了说明那第一次大结集,或者说,因为想要依照第一次大结集中所安立的次第来作注释,也为了显示即使它已载入该部传承,此处提及它亦有其理由,便宣说“此即名为第一次大结集”等语。在此,虽然……(中略)……已载入传承,由此便显出这样的诘难之端:那结集不是已在《结集犍度》中载入传承了吗?为何在此再次述说?若再述说,岂非无有意义且令著作变得沉重?然而,借着“缘起……应知”等语,显示其特殊理由而避免过失:由于有通达缘起的利益,故不会有如前所说的过失。在“此即名为第一次大结集”一句中,ca字于如此场合有汇集应说之义。以此,它汇集了这样的意思:以第一次大结集时所说的缘起等为起始,而这第一次大结集本身也应如此了知。或者,ca字有“更起说”之义,“更起说”即指语句的开端。因为这是诸论师的惯例:在有所宣说之后,又为了开始宣说其他内容而使用ca字。至于金刚觉长老所说:“在此,ca字是多余之义,以此表示还有其他”,那全然不合理。因为在此,ca字并不能令人领会那个意思。如果在此,ca显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle’’ti vacanappasaṅgena taṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassento, yassaṃ vā paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkamena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmattā taṃ vibhāvento tassā tantiyā āruḷhāyapi idha vacane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā’’tiādimāha. Ettha hi kiñcāpi…pe… māruḷhāti etena nanu sā saṅgītikkhandhake tantimāruḷhā, kasmā idha puna vuttā, yadi ca vuttā assa niratthakatā, ganthagarutā ca siyāti codanālesaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nidāna…pe… veditabbā’’ti pana etena nidānakosallatthabhāvato yathāvuttadosatā na siyāti visesakāraṇadassanena pariharati. ‘‘Paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā’’ti ettha ca-saddo īdisesu ṭhānesu vattabbasampiṇḍanattho. Tena hi paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānañca ādi, esā ca paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma evaṃ veditabbāti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Upaññāsattho vā ca-saddo, upaññāsoti ca vākyārambho vuccati. Esā hi ganthakārānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ kiñci vatvā puna aparaṃ vattumārabhantānaṃ ca-saddapayogo. Yaṃ pana vajirabuddhittherena vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha ca-saddo atirekattho, tena aññāpi atthīti dīpetī’’ti (vajira ṭī. bāhiranidānakathāvaṇṇanā), tadayuttameva. Na hettha ca-saddena tadattho viññāyati. Yadi cettha tadatthadassanatthameva ca-kāro adhippeto siyā, evaṃ sati so na kattabboyeva paṭhamasaddeneva aññāsaṃ dutiyādisaṅgītīnampi atthibhāvassa dassitattā. Dutiyādimupādāya hi paṭhamasaddapayogo dīghādimupādāya rassādisaddapayogo viya. Yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā, paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti, etena taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ, taṃtaṃsuttānañca ādipariyosānesu, antarantarā ca sambandhavasena ṭhapitaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Mahāvisayattā, pūjitattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti, paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti. Kiñcāpīti anuggahattho, tena pāḷiyampi sā saṅgītimāruḷhāvāti anuggahaṃ karoti, evampi tatthāruḷhamattena idha sotūnaṃ nidānakosallaṃ na hotīti pana-saddena aruciyatthaṃ dasseti. Nidadāti desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ, tasmiṃ kosallaṃ, tadatthāyāti attho.
现在,为了详细显示它,而宣说“因为转法轮”等语。在此,虽然世尊还有其他种种现行的事业,能作为众生获得无上见、皈依等利益的因,但为了从本质上显示:唯有随顺“佛陀应令觉悟”的誓愿、能作为所化众生证得道果之因的事业,才是不加修饰地被称为“佛事”的,所以说“因为转法轮……调伏”。然而,在转法轮之前的阶段,即使听闻世尊所说,也只是成为习气分,而非有学分,也非决择分,如同为塔普沙、跋利迦授予皈依一样。因为这是法性,所以应知,正是以此为界限而说的。信根等法本身,由于能转动的意义而称为“轮”,故为“法轮”。或者,“轮”指教令,由于不离法,既是法又是轮,故为“法轮”。由于是以法、以正理而转动,故也是“法轮”。正如在《无碍解道》中所说:显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammacakkapavattanañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattānaṃ dassanānuttariyasaraṇādipaṭilābhahetubhūtāsu vijjamānāsupi aññāsu bhagavato kiriyāsu ‘‘buddho bodheyya’’nti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. abbhantaranidāna 1; cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā; udāna aṭṭha. 18) paṭiññāya anulomanato vineyyānaṃ maggaphaluppattihetubhūtā kiriyāva nippariyāyena buddhakiccaṃ nāmāti taṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanañhi…pe… vinayanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammacakkappavattanato pana pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suṇantānampi vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na sekkhabhāgiyaṃ, na nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya. Esā hi dhammatā, tasmā tameva mariyādabhāvena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Saddhindriyādi dhammoyeva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Atha vā cakkanti āṇā, dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Vuttañhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
“既转动法又转动轮,故为法轮。既转动轮又转动法,故为法轮。以法而转动,故为法轮。以法行而转动,故为法轮”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.40, 41).
此即它的转动。所谓“转动”,有“正在转动”与“已转动”二义,分别对应现在与过去。对此,注疏中说:“宣说《转法轮经》时,名为转动法轮;自阿若憍陈如长老证得道果起,则名为已转动。”然而在此处,只取现在义才恰当。“yāva”是表示限定的不变词,应解为“以……为内在界限”,即“以调伏名为须跋陀罗的游方者为内在界限”。因为世尊正是躺在般涅槃床上调伏了他。“kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yena”意为“由他而成办、究竟了佛陀的事业”,即“在他之中”。其关联句为:“在已成办佛陀事业的世尊、世间依怙般涅槃时”,以此显示佛陀所应作的事业已无任何遗余。正因如此,世尊才般涅槃。难道不是这样吗:即使是由声闻弟子所调伏的有缘者,也名为由世尊亲自调伏。同样,声闻所说的经也称为“佛说”。然而,若尚有声闻所应调伏的有缘者未被调伏,岂不应说“佛陀事业尚未成办”?这并非过失,因为调伏他们的方法已安立在声闻弟子之中。正因如此,他说——显示巴利原文
Tassa pavattanaṃ tathā. Pavattananti ca pavattayamānaṃ, pavattitanti paccuppannātītavasena dvidhā attho. Yaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkapavattanasuttantaṃ desento dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti nāma, aññāsikoṇḍaññattherassa maggaphalādhigatato paṭṭhāya pavattitaṃ nāmā’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1081-1088; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.40). Idha pana paccuppannavaseneva attho yutto. Yāvāti paricchedatthe nipāto, subhaddassa nāma paribbājakassa vinayanaṃ antoparicchedaṃ katvāti abhividhivasena attho veditabbo. Tañhi bhagavā parinibbānamañce nipannoyeva vinesīti. Kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yenāti tathā, tasmiṃ. Katabuddhakicce bhagavati lokanāthe parinibbuteti sambandho, etena buddhakattabbassa kiccassa kassacipi asesitabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tatoyeva hi bhagavā parinibbutoti. Nanu ca sāvakehi vinītāpi vineyyā bhagavatāyeva vinītā nāma. Tathā hi sāvakabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘buddhabhāsita’’nti vuccati. Sāvakavineyyā ca na tāva vinītā, tasmā ‘‘katabuddhakicce’’ti na vattabbanti? Nāyaṃ doso tesaṃ vinayanupāyassa sāvakesu ṭhapitattā. Tenevāha –
“波旬,只要我的比丘弟子们尚未成为贤善、调伏、无畏、多闻、持法……能以正法善加折伏已生起的他宗论说,并宣说具足神变的法,在此之前,我将不般涅槃”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ pāpima parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā…pe… uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ saha dhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168; udā. 51).
以“在拘尸那罗……”等语说明世尊般涅槃的地点与时间的特殊之处,是为了破除“世尊未般涅槃”的错误执取,也为了显示世尊在世间出生、成长等事相。同样,为使人的状态极为明了,大菩萨们在最后生也会行娶妻等事。“在拘尸那罗”意为于拘尸那罗城中。据说该城因建于展示手握拘舍草者的地方而得名“拘尸那罗”,此处用的是近处格。“在末罗族的沙罗树林,即优波跋陀那”意为在该城附近的、属于末罗王的沙罗树林中。那片沙罗树林,因为想进城的人们从园林出来后,沿着它而行、经由此处前往,所以称为“优波跋陀那”。正如阿努罗陀补罗的西南方有塔园,该园林也在拘尸那罗的西南方。又如从塔园经南门入城的道路先向东行,再向北转,从该园林出来的沙罗树行列也是先向东行,再向北转,因此称为“优波跋陀那”。另有人说:“到了那片沙罗树林,看望亲友后再返回,故名优波跋陀那”,这已成为众所周知的说法。“在两棵双沙罗树之间”意为在两棵双沙罗树的中间。据说在那里,为世尊敷设的般涅槃床的头部方向有一排沙罗树,脚部方向也有一排。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kusinārāya’’ntiādinā bhagavato parinibbutadesakālavisesavacanaṃ ‘‘aparinibbuto bhagavā’’ti gāhassa micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ, loke jātasaṃvaddhādibhāvadassanatthañca. Tathā hi manussabhāvassa supākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ mahābodhisattā carimabhave dārapariggahādīnipi karontīti. Kusinārāyanti evaṃ nāmake nagare. Tañhi nagaraṃ kusahatthaṃ purisaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne māpitattā ‘‘kusināra’’nti vuccati, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Upavattane mallānaṃ sālavaneti tassa nagarassa upavattanabhūte mallarājūnaṃ sālavane. Tañhi sālavanaṃ nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upacca vattanti gacchanti etenāti upavattanaṃ. Yathā hi anurādhapurassa dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ thūpārāmo, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ hoti. Yathā ca thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivattati, evaṃ uyyānato sālapanti pācīnamukhā gantvā uttarena nivattā, tasmā taṃ ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Apare pana ‘‘taṃ sālavanamupagantvā mittasuhajje apaloketvā nivattanato upavattananti pākaṭaṃ jātaṃ kirā’’ti vadanti. Yamakasālānamantareti yamakasālānaṃ vemajjhe. Tattha kira bhagavato paññattassa parinibbānamañcassa sīsabhāge ekā sālapanti hoti, pādabhāge ekā. Tatrāpi eko taruṇasālo sīsabhāgassa āsanno hoti, eko pādabhāgassa. Tasmā ‘‘yamakasālānamantare’’ti vuttaṃ. Apica ‘‘yamakasālā nāma mūlakkhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbetvā ṭhitasālā’’tipi mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mā iti cando vuccati tassa gatiyā divasassa minitabbato, tadā sabbakalāpāripūriyā puṇṇo eva māti puṇṇamā. Saddavidū pana ‘‘mo sivo candimā cevā’’ti vuttaṃ sakkatabhāsānayaṃ gahetvā okārantampi candimavācaka ma-saddamicchanti. Visākhāya yutto puṇṇamā yatthāti visākhāpuṇṇamo, soyeva divaso tathā, tasmiṃ. Paccūsati timiraṃ vināsetīti paccūso, pati-pubbo usa-saddo rujāyanti hi neruttikā, soyeva samayoti rattiyā pacchimayāmapariyāpanno kālaviseso vuccati, tasmiṃ. Visākhāpuṇṇamadivase īdise rattiyā pacchimasamayeti vuttaṃ hoti.
由业与烦恼所执取,故称“有执取”(upādi),即异熟蕴及由业所生之色。然而,在摧破烦恼、行、死魔之际,此“有执取”并未被舍弃;而在此处,于蕴与死魔的摧破中,则已全然舍离、无有剩余,因此并无所谓“有执取”的残余,或者说“有执取”的残余已尽,故称“无有执取残余”(anupādisesā)。这里所说的“涅槃界”,唯指寂灭本身;而涅槃因其持守自性,故也称为“界”。由于寂灭,遂以因的同义语说为“无为界”。此处的具格说明,表示“处于此状态的特征”。即:对于已证得、已达到、已般涅槃的世尊,在其特征——名为“无有执取残余”的涅槃界这一意义上,安立为第三句。难道“无有执取残余”仅仅是涅槃界的定语,而不是已般涅槃的世尊的定语吗?为何又说世尊已证得呢?因为与涅槃界相伴而行。由于与之相伴而行,世尊也可说为已证得无有执取残余的状态。或者,也可以这样理解:对于已证得以“无有执取残余状态”为特征的涅槃界,从认知作用上安立为第三句。而“无有执取残余的涅槃界”的意思,即是成为无有执取残余的涅槃界。例如,“由已证得少于……”显示巴利原文
Upādīyate kammakilesehīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā, kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. So pana upādi kilesābhisaṅkhāramāranimmathane anossaṭṭho, idha khandhamaccumāranimmathane ossaṭṭhona sesito, tasmā natthi etissā upādisaṅkhāto seso, upādissa vā sesoti katvā ‘‘anupādisesā’’ti vuccati. Nibbānadhātūti cettha nibbutimattaṃ adhippetaṃ, nibbānañca taṃ sabhāvadhāraṇato dhātu cāti katvā. Nibbutiyā hi kāraṇapariyāyena asaṅkhatadhātu tathā vuccati. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Anupādisesatāsaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūtassa pattassa parinibbutassa bhagavato lakkhaṇe nibbānadhātusaṅkhāte atthe tatiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu ca ‘‘anupādisesāyā’’ti nibbānadhātuyāva visesanaṃ hoti, na parinibbutassa bhagavato, atha kasmā taṃ bhagavā pattoti vuttoti? Nibbānadhātuyā sahacaraṇato. Taṃsahacaraṇena hi bhagavāpi anupādisesabhāvaṃ pattoti vuccati. Atha vā anupādisesabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ pattāya nibbānadhātuyā lakkhaṇe sañjānanakiriyāya tatiyātipi vattuṃ yujjati. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti ca anupādisesanibbānadhātu hutvāti attho. ‘‘Ūnapañcabandhanena pattenā’’ti (pārā. 612). Ettha hi ūnapañcabandhanapatto hutvāti atthaṃ vadanti. Apica nibbānadhātuyā anupādisesāya anupādisesā hutvā bhūtāyātipi yujjati. Vuttañhi udānaṭṭhakathāya nandasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘upaḍḍhullikhitehi kesehīti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ vippakatullikhitehi kesehi upalakkhitāti attho’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 22) esanayo īdisesu. Dhātubhājanadivaseti jeṭṭhamāsassa sukkapakkhapañcamīdivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tañca na ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ, ‘‘ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti etassa pana visesanaṃ ‘‘dhātubhājanadivase bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti ussāhajananassa kālavasena bhinnādhikaraṇavisesanabhāvato. Dhātubhājanadivasato hi purimataradivasesupi bhikkhū sannipatitāti. Atha vā ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti idaṃ kāyasāmaggivasena sannipatanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na samāgamanamattena. Tasmā ‘‘dhātubhājanadivase’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ sambhavati, idañca bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti ettha ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti etenapi sambajjhanīyaṃ . Saṅghassa thero saṅghatthero. So pana saṅgho kiṃ parimāṇoti āha ‘‘sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti. Saṅghasaddena hi aviññāyamānassa parimāṇassa viññāpanatthamevetaṃ puna vuttaṃ. Saddavidū pana vadanti –
复合词与派生词,于句义中作简别者;
于已成就者中,通称如“油”、如“善逝衣”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samāso ca taddhito ca, vākyatthesu visesakā; Pasiddhiyantu sāmaññaṃ, telaṃ sugatacīvaraṃ.
因此,那仅是名义的僧团长老,正是为了作区别而再次宣说的。在类似情形中,由于有恒常的依待关系,故有复合词,例如“提婆达多的师家”。此处所谓的恒常依待关系,是指“僧团”一词虽依待于“十万比丘”一词,但因中间并无其他词,便如句中一样,能令所依待的意义得以理解。因为“七十万比丘”与“僧团”一词之间,是以整体与部分的关系相连,而它又与“长老”一词以所属关系相连。这里的“七十万比丘”,则是特指那些为首的比丘而说的。因为那时聚集的比丘数量如此众多,已超出计数范围。如同从韦卢瓦村开始,由于镇伏痛苦,听闻“世尊不久将般涅槃”后,从各处前来的比丘之中,竟无一人离去。如所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā nāmamattabhūtassa saṅghattherassa visesanatthamevetaṃ puna vuttanti, niccasāpekkhatāya ca edisesu samāso yathā ‘‘devadattassa garukula’’nti. Niccasāpekkhatā cettha saṅghasaddassa bhikkhusatasahassasaddaṃ sāpekkhattepi aññapadantarābhāvena vākye viya apekkhitabbatthassa gamakattā. ‘‘Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti hi etassa saṅghasadde avayavībhāvena sambandho, tassāpi sāmibhāvena therasaddeti. ‘‘Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti ca gaṇapāmokkhabhikkhūyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadā hi sannipatitā bhikkhū ettakāti gaṇanapathamatikkantā. Tathā hi veḷuvagāme vedanāvikkhambhanato paṭṭhāya ‘‘nacireneva bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti sutvā tato tato āgatesu bhikkhūsu ekabhikkhupi pakkanto nāma natthi. Yathāhu –
七十万之中,为首的比丘们;
那时,僧团长老即是大迦叶长老。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sattasatasahassāni , tesu pāmokkhabhikkhavo; Thero mahākassapova, saṅghatthero tadā ahū’’ti.
具寿大迦叶在随念、思惟、筹量之后,策发精进;或者说,是随念、思惟、筹量的具寿大迦叶策发了精进,此为句子的连接。由于具足大戒蕴等诸德,故名大迦叶,意即“大”迦叶。再者,“大迦叶”之称,是与优楼频罗迦叶、那提迦叶、伽耶迦叶、鸠摩罗迦叶等诸位小长老相区别而言。当追问“为何具寿大迦叶要策发精进”时,为阐明其缘由,便说“于般涅槃七日后”等。“七日”是指七个时日被总合。“般涅槃七日后”的构词法,如同“刚离去不久”“出生一月后”,是词末另加他词的复合词,意为“在那时”。即从世尊般涅槃之日算起,过了七日。此言与“所说的话”相连,也与“由老年出家的须跋陀”相连。其中,“须跋陀”只是他的名字,因是在老年时出家,故称“由老年出家者”,以此区别于须跋陀外道等。“够了,贤友!”等语,是显示他所说的话。事情是这样的:世尊般涅槃七日后,具寿大迦叶长老与约五百位比丘从波婆前往拘尸那罗。途中,见到那些未离欲的比丘,从一位邪命外道处听闻世尊已般涅槃,便丢弃衣钵、高举双臂、哭泣悲号,此时大迦叶尊者便说了这番话。显示巴利原文
Āyasmā mahākassapo anussaranto maññamāno cintayanto hutvā ussāhaṃ janesi, anussaranto maññamāno cintayanto āyasmā mahākassapo ussāhaṃ janesīti vā sambandho. Mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo. Apica ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti uruvelakassapo nadīkassapo gayākassapo kumārakassapoti ime khuddānukhuddake there upādāya vuccati. Kasmā panāyasmā mahākassapo ussāhaṃ janesīti anuyoge sati taṃ kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘sattāhaparinibbute’’tiādi. Satta ahāni samāhaṭāni sattāhaṃ. Sattāhaṃ parinibbutassa assāti tathā yathā ‘‘acirapakkanto, māsajāto’’ti, antatthaaññapadasamāsoyaṃ, tasmiṃ. Bhagavato parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya sattāhe vītivatteti vuttaṃ hoti, etassa ‘‘vuttavacana’’nti padena sambandho, tathā ‘‘subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitenā’’ti etassapi. Tattha subhaddoti tassa nāmamattaṃ, vuḍḍhakāle pana pabbajitattā ‘‘vuḍḍhapabbajitenā’’ti vuttaṃ, etena subhaddaparibbājakādīhi taṃ visesaṃ karoti. ‘‘Alaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā tena vuttavacanaṃ nidasseti. So hi sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati āyasmatā mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggapaṭipannesu pañcamattesu bhikkhusatesu avītarāge bhikkhū antarāmagge diṭṭhaājīvakassa santikā bhagavato parinibbānaṃ sutvā pattacīvarāni chaḍḍetvā bāhā paggayhaṃ nānappakāraṃ paridevante disvā evamāha.
他为何这样说?因为他对世尊心怀嗔恨。据说,这位在犍度中提到——曾为理发师、后在老年出家的须跋陀,当世尊从拘尸那罗出发,与一千二百五十位比丘一同前往阿头摩时,他听说“世尊来了”,便对两位尚在沙弥阶段的儿子说:“听说世尊正与一千二百五十位比丘的大僧团一同前来阿头摩。孩子们,你们去吧,带上剃刀器具,用竹筒或布袋挨家挨户地收集盐、油、米和嚼食。等世尊到了,我要供养粥。”他们便照做了。后来,世尊到达阿头摩,进入谷仓之后,须跋陀于傍晚时分来到村口,招呼众人说:“请给我一些手工活。”他求取手工活后,当被问及“尊者,我们做什么?”时,便说:“你们拿这个和那个。”他让人取来一切所需用具,在寺院里砌起灶台,自己穿上一套黑色袈裟,又披上同样的一套,整夜指挥着“做这个,做那个”,花费了十万钱,让人准备了食物粥与蜜丸。所谓食物粥,是吃完后要喝的粥,其中加入了酥油、蜜、糖浆、鱼、肉、花、果汁等一切可嚼食之物。其香气芬芳,适合嬉戏者涂抹在头上。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana so evamāhāti? Bhagavati āghātena. Ayaṃ kireso khandhake āgate ātumāvatthusmiṃ (mahāva. 303) nahāpitapubbako vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavati kusinārato nikkhamitvā aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ātumaṃ gacchante ‘‘bhagavā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘āgatakāleyāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhite dve putte etadavoca ‘‘bhagavā kira tātā ātumaṃ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi, gacchatha tumhe tātā, khurabhaṇḍaṃ ādāya nāḷiyā vā pasibbakena vā anugharakaṃ āhiṇḍatha, loṇampi telampi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃharatha, bhagavato āgatassa yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgārakaṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantetvā ‘‘hatthakammamattaṃ me dethā’’ti hatthakammaṃ yācitvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante karomā’’ti vutte ‘‘idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi. Bhojjayāgu nāma bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃ kiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ pavisati. Kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.
那时,世尊在清晨整理好身体后,由比丘僧团围绕,面向阿头摩村前往乞食。有人便告知须跋陀:“世尊正进入村庄乞食,你为谁准备了粥?”他便穿着那套黑色袈裟,一手拿着汤匙与勺子,犹如梵天一般,右膝跪地,顶礼后说道:“尊者世尊,请接受我的粥。”随后,世尊依照犍度中所记载的方式——“如来虽知而故问”——询问并明了情况后,呵斥了那位老年出家的须跋陀,并以此事为缘,制定了“非时受食学处”与“蓄剃刀器具学处”这两条学处,然后说:“比丘们,无数劫以来,你们正是以寻求食物度过的。但这对你们来说是不如法的,食用这非法所得的食物,将在无数千生中堕于恶趣。走开,不要接受。”说完便前往乞食,没有一位比丘接受任何东西。须跋陀心生不满,心想:“这个自称‘我知一切’的人四处游走。如果他不想要,派人告知我便好了。煮好的食物最多能存放七日左右,而这足够我终生受用,全被他毁了。他对我心怀恶意。”于是他对世尊结下嗔恨,但在十力尊住世时,他什么也不敢说。据说他心里这样想:“这位是从高种姓出家的大人物,我若在他活着时说什么,只会被他呵斥。”显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto piṇḍāya carituṃ ātumābhimukho pāyāsi. Atha tassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘bhagavā piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisati, tayā kassa yāgu paṭiyāditā’’ti. So yathānivatthapāruteheva tehi kāḷakakāsāvehi ekena hatthena dabbiñca kaṭacchuñca gahetvā brahmā viya dakkhiṇaṃ jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā vanditvā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā yāgu’’nti āha. Tato ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti khandhake (mahāva. 304) āgatanayena bhagavā pucchitvā ca sutvā ca taṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ vigarahitvā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ akappiyasamādānasikkhāpadaṃ, khurabhaṇḍapariharaṇasikkhāpadañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā ‘‘anekakappakoṭiyo bhikkhave bhojanaṃ pariyesanteheva vītināmitā , idaṃ pana tumhākaṃ akappiyaṃ, adhammena uppannaṃ bhojanaṃ imaṃ paribhuñjitvā anekāni attabhāvasahassāni apāyesveva nibbattissanti, apetha mā gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācārābhimukho agamāsi, ekabhikkhunāpi na kiñci gahitaṃ. Subhaddo anattamano hutvā ‘‘ayaṃ sabbaṃ jānāmī’’ti āhiṇḍati, sace na gahetukāmo pesetvā ārocetabbaṃ assa, pakkāhāro nāma sabbaciraṃ tiṭṭhanto sattāhamattaṃ tiṭṭheyya, idañca mama yāvajīvaṃ pariyattaṃ assa, sabbaṃ tena nāsitaṃ, ahitakāmo ayaṃ mayha’’nti bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā dasabale dharamāne kiñci vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ayaṃ uccā kulā pabbajito mahāpuriso, sace kiñci dharantassa vakkhāmi, mamaṃyeva santajjessatī’’ti.
今日,他与大迦叶长老同行,听闻“世尊已般涅槃”,便如释重负,欢喜踊跃地说出此言。然而长老听后,如遭锥心之痛,又如晴天霹雳当头击落,心中生起了法之悚惧,他思惟:“世尊般涅槃仅七日,至今身色犹作金色。世尊以艰辛所成就的教法中,竟如此迅速地出现了这般大恶、垢秽与荆棘。若这恶人继续坐大,再得到同类的助伴,足以令教法衰微。”显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ ajja mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ gacchanto ‘‘parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti sutvā laddhassāso viya haṭṭhatuṭṭho evamāha. Thero pana taṃ sutvā hadaye pahāraṃ viya, matthake patitasukkhāsaniṃ viya (sukkhāsani viya dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.232) maññi, dhammasaṃvego cassa uppajji ‘‘sattāhamattaparinibbuto bhagavā, ajjāpissa suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ dharatiyeva, dukkhena bhagavatā ārādhitasāsane nāma evaṃ lahuṃ mahantaṃ pāpaṃ kasaṭaṃ kaṇṭako uppanno, alaṃ kho panesa pāpo vaḍḍhamāno aññepi evarūpe sahāye labhitvā sāsanaṃ osakkāpetu’’nti.
于是,长老思惟:“如果我现在就让这老朽之人穿着粪扫衣,撒上灰烬后逐出,人们会说‘沙门乔达摩的遗骨尚在,弟子们便已起诤’,从而指责我们。我暂且忍耐。世尊所宣说之法,犹如未以线贯穿的花堆。正如花朵被风吹散,四处飘零,随着这类人的存在,时光流逝,律中将有一两条学处隐没,经中将有一两处问答隐没,论中将有一两种界差别隐没。如此渐次,根基坏灭时,我们便将如同毕舍遮鬼一般。因此,我应当结集法与律。若能如此,这法与律便将如同以坚固之线贯穿的花朵,稳固不动。世尊正是为此,才为我远迎三伽浮他,以三次教诫授予具足戒,与我交换袈裟,于空中挥手,以月譬开示行道时以我为证,三次将整个教法宝藏付嘱于我。有我这样的比丘在,这恶人便不能在教法中增长。只要非法尚未彰显、正法尚未被遮蔽,非律尚未彰显、律尚未被遮蔽,说非法者尚未强大、说法者尚未衰弱,说非律者尚未强大、说律者尚未衰弱,我就应当结集法与律。之后,比丘们便可各自依力所能,辨别如法与非法。那时,这恶人自然会被制伏,再不能抬头,教法则将兴盛繁荣。”如此思惟后,显示巴利原文
Tato thero cintesi ‘‘sace kho panāhaṃ imaṃ mahallakaṃ idheva pilotikaṃ nivāsetvā chārikāya okirāpetvā nīharāpessāmi, manussā ‘samaṇassa gotamassa sarīre dharamāneyeva sāvakā vivadantī’ti amhākaṃ dosaṃ dassessanti, adhivāsemi tāva. Bhagavatā hi desitadhammo asaṅgahitapuppharāsisadiso, tattha yathā vātena pahaṭapupphāni yato vā tato vā gacchanti, evameva evarūpānaṃ vasena gacchante gacchante kāle vinaye ekaṃ dve sikkhāpadāni nassissanti, sutte eko dve pañhāvārā nassissanti, abhidhamme ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni nassissanti, evaṃ anukkamena mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāma, tasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karissāmi, evaṃ sati daḷhasuttena saṅgahitapupphāni viya ayaṃ dhammavinayo niccalo bhavissati. Etadatthañhi bhagavā mayhaṃ tīṇi gāvutāni paccuggamanaṃ akāsi, tīhi ovādehi (saṃ. ni. 2.149, 150, 151) upasampadaṃ akāsi, kāyato cīvaraparivattanaṃ akāsi, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candopamapaṭipadaṃ kathento maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā kathesi, tikkhattuṃ sakalasāsanaratanaṃ paṭicchāpesi, mādise bhikkhumhi tiṭṭhamāne ayaṃ pāpo sāsane vaḍḍhiṃ mā alattha, yāva adhammo na dippati, dhammo na paṭibāhiyyati, avinayo na dippati, vinayo na paṭibāhiyyati, adhammavādino na balavanto honti, dhammavādino na dubbalā honti, avinayavādino na balavanto honti, vinayavādino na dubbalā honti, tāva dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmi, tato bhikkhū attano attano pahonakaṃ gahetvā kappiyākappiye kathessanti, athāyaṃ pāpo sayameva niggahaṃ pāpuṇissati, puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkhissati, sāsanaṃ iddhañceva phīttañca bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā so ‘‘evaṃ nāma mayhaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti kassacipi anārocetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ samassāsetvā atha pacchā dhātubhājanadivase dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaparinibbute…pe… dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti.
此处“ala”是遮止之词,意为“不应如此”。以“友”称呼那些正在悲叹的比丘。“勿生悲伤”意为:心中生起强烈的忧伤时,切勿忧愁。“勿哀叹”意为:口中切勿发出哀号。因为论中说“悲痛即是哀号”。为了说明不忧愁等的原因,便说“善解脱”等。“故由大沙门”是表示来源的作格,或是“smā”一词的异名。而“逼迫”一词,以依主格第三格与作格相关联,此词兼顾两者。若作“我们曾被逼迫”,则是依当时而言的现在时词,省略了“当时”一词;或是表过去义的现在时词,意为“我们曾遭逼迫”。随念之时,唯依法之悚惧之力,而非依嗔恚等。因为依止思惟法之自性而起的、有惭有愧之慧,即是法之悚惧。这已如前所说。显示巴利原文
Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ, na yuttanti attho. Āvusoti paridevante bhikkhū ālapati. Mā socitthāti citte uppannabalavasokena mā sokamakattha. Mā paridevitthāti vācāya mā vilāpamakattha. ‘‘Paridevanaṃ vilāpo’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Asocanādīnaṃ kāraṇamāha ‘‘sumuttā’’tiādinā. Tena mahāsamaṇenāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ, smāvacanassa vā nābyappadeso. ‘‘Upaddutā’’ti pade pana kattari tatiyāvasena sambandho. Ubhayāpekkhañhetaṃ padaṃ. Upaddutā ca homāti taṃkālāpekkhavattamānavacanaṃ, ‘‘tadā’’ti seso. Atītatthe vā vattamānavacanaṃ, ahumhāti attho. Anussaranto dhammasaṃvegavaseneva, na pana kodhādivasena. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena hi pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Vuttañhetaṃ –
对为无明所覆者,说为法悚惧。”(《显扬心要疏》·第一次结集之释)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbasaṅkhatadhammesu, ottappākārasaṇṭhitaṃ; Ñāṇamohitabhārānaṃ, dhammasaṃvegasaññita’’nti. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā);
为说明另一激发精进之因,而说“如此(īdisassa)”等。此处“如此之僧众集会(īdisassa ca saṅghasannipātassa)”,是指以七百千众为上首的僧团集会,超出此数的集会亦涵盖在内。“然而有此道理(ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatī)”等,也是说明另一原因。其中“道理(ṭhānaṃ)”指果依于因得以成立,即指因。“确实(kho)”是限定词。“而(pana)”是语气词,表示“有此因,非无此因”。“是何因由(kiṃ pana)”所以提到“恶比丘(yaṃ pāpabhikkhū)”等。“yaṃ”仅是助词,或表因由,意为“由于何因令其消失,即有此因”。欲劣、行恶之人即是恶比丘。此处“过去的老师”,或指属于过去诸师,如“多作者(bahukattuko)”。“教(pāvacana)”指殊胜之言。“pā”在此为助词,例如“pā eva vutyassā”等;或作为前缀词,长音时则如“pāvadatī”。依附无惭者之党(pakkhanti alajjipakkhaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Aññaṃ ussāhajananakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘īdisassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha īdisassa ca saṅghasannipātassāti sattasatasahassagaṇapāmokkhattherappamukhagaṇanapathātikkantasaṅghasannipātaṃ sandhāya vadati. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatī’’tiādināpi aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, hetu. Khoti avadhāraṇe. Panāti vacanālaṅkāre, etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjateva, no na vijjatīti attho. Kiṃ pana tanti āha ‘‘yaṃ pāpabhikkhū’’tiādi. Yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena ṭhānena antaradhāpeyyuṃ, tadetaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatiyevāti. Pāpena lāmakena icchāvacarena samannāgatā bhikkhū pāpabhikkhū. Atīto satthā ettha, etassāti vā atītasatthukaṃ yathā ‘‘bahukattuko’’ti. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ. Pā-saddo cettha nipāto ‘‘pā eva vutyassā’’tiādīsu viya. Upasaggapadaṃ vā etaṃ, dīghaṃ katvā pana tathā vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘pāvadatī’’tipi vadanti. Pakkhanti alajjipakkhaṃ. ‘‘Yāva cā’’tiādinā saṅgītiyā sāsanaciraṭṭhitikabhāve kāraṇaṃ, sādhakañca dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti hi padamajjhāharitvā ‘‘saṅgāyeyya’’nti padena sambandhanīyaṃ.
此处“法与律住立多久”,是指法与律在有惭之人中住立多长时间。世尊卧在般涅槃床时,于《大般涅槃经》(长部·第2经216节)中曾说及此义,故说“此已说”等。依传承,“hi”字是坚固的显示。“已开示已施设”:法既已开示,也已施设。因为收摄于经与阿毗达摩的法,令超越、令觉知,即是开示;显示其行相、置于应调伏者的相续中,即是施设。律同样是已开示且已施设。因为收摄于律典之义,令超越、令觉知,即是开示;显示其行相、使不混淆而安立,即是施设。因此应知,两种业也相应于这两种行相。显示巴利原文
Tattha yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhatīti yattakaṃ kālaṃ dhammo ca vinayo ca lajjipuggalesu tiṭṭhati. Parinibbānamañcake nipannena bhagavatā mahāparinibbānasutte (dī. ni. 2.216) vuttaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Hi-saddo āgamavasena daḷhijotako. Desito paññattoti dhammopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa hi dhammassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ vineyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ. Vinayopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Vinayatantisaṅgahitassa hi atthassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā kammadvayampi kiriyādvayena sambajjhanaṃ yujjatīti veditabbaṃ.
“此”即法与律。“我般涅槃后”,即我灭度之时。文法学者们说,这是处所义的作格;或者,作格亦可表因义,意为“以我般涅槃为因,将成为汝等的师长”。因为《大般涅槃经疏》中说:“我般涅槃后,将为汝等成办师长之务。”此处表相之词实为成因之义,例如“于眼正生时”。其意是说:由我如此安立——“这是轻,这是重,这是应对治,这是不应对治,这是世间罪,这是制罪,此罪于一人前出罪,此罪于众前,此罪于僧团前出罪”——于七聚罪不违越中,依所应决断之事,结合诸聚,由二分别所开示者,名为大律,此全部律藏于我般涅槃后,将成为汝等师长之务,以“此汝等应作,此汝等不应作”之分别而教诫故。又由我如此安立——“四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道”——随顺所调伏者之意乐,以种种方式分别此三十七菩提分法而开示经藏,此全部经藏于我般涅槃后,将成为汝等师长之务,以随顺诸行道之正行而教诫故。又由我如此安立——“五蕴、十二处、十八界、四谛、二十二根、九因、四食、七触、七受、七想、七思、七识。其中某些法是欲界,某些是色界,某些是无色界”——随顺所调伏者之意乐,以种种方式分别此诸法而开示阿毗达摩藏,此全部阿毗达摩藏于我般涅槃后,将成为汝等师长之务,以随顺诸法之分别而教诫故。显示巴利原文
Soti so dhammo ca vinayo ca. Mamaccayenāti mama accayakāle. ‘‘Bhummatthe karaṇaniddeso’’ti hi akkharacintakā vadanti. Hetvatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, mama accayahetu tumhākaṃ satthā nāma bhavissatīti attho. Vuttañhi mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.216). Lakkhaṇavacanañhettha hetvatthasādhakaṃ yathā ‘‘nette ujuṃ gate satī’’ti (a. ni. 4.70; netti. 10.90, 93). Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mayā vo ṭhiteneva ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, idaṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ayaṃ āpatti puggalassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ gaṇassa, ayaṃ saṅghassa santike vuṭṭhātī’’ti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena otiṇṇavatthusmiṃ sakhandhakaparivāro ubhatovibhaṅgo mahāvinayo nāma desito, taṃ sakalampi vinayapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti tena tena vineyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā suttantapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi suttantapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato, ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.216), dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, cattāri saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta saññā, satta cetanā, satta cittāni. Tatrāpi ettakā dhammā kāmāvacarā, ettakā rūpāvacarā, ettakā arūpāvacarā, ettakā pariyāpannā, ettakā apariyāpannā, ettakā lokiyā, ettakā lokuttarā’’ti ime dhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā. Iti sabbampetaṃ abhisambodhito yāva parinibbānā pañcacattālīsa vassāni bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ ‘‘tīṇi piṭakāni, pañca nikāyā, navaṅgāni, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti evaṃ mahappabhedaṃ hoti. Imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tiṭṭhanti, ahaṃ ekova parinibbāyissāmi, ahañca panidāni ekova ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti buddhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanakiccassa nipphādanatoti.
“教法”,就教理、行道、证悟三种方式而言,统指这三类教法;但就严格意义来说,则特指三十七菩提分法。“能行远路”,即堪能行于远路,意为能走远路、能耐长途。“此能久住”,即能长久安立。这是说:假如我以某种方式结集法与律,使此教法堪行远路,并因此能长久安立,那实在是善哉。显示巴利原文
Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhampi sāsanaṃ, nippariyāyato pana sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Addhānaṃ gamitumalanti addhaniyaṃ, addhānagāmi addhānakkhamanti attho. Ciraṃ ṭhiti etassāti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena pakārena idaṃ sāsanaṃ addhaniyaṃ, tatoyeva ca ciraṭṭhitikaṃ bhaveyya, tena pakārena dhammañca vinayañca yadi panāhaṃ saṅgāyeyyaṃ, sādhu vatāti.
现在,为了显示正自觉者忆念世尊对自己的殊胜摄受后思惟的方式,而说“我曾被世尊……”等语。其中,“我曾被”与“摄受、称赞”相关联。“Yaṃ”意为“由于”,或为对动作的指代,因此指代“摄受”与“称赞”中的摄受与称赞。而“你能持守吗”等语,是世尊在某棵树根下,坐在大迦叶尊者所敷设的粪扫衣上,以手掌边缘轻触那件如莲花色的粪扫衣时所说。此事在《迦叶相应》中,正是由大迦叶尊者对阿难尊者所讲述的。显示巴利原文
Idāni sammāsambuddhena attano kataṃ anuggahavisesaṃ samanussaritvā cintanākārampi dassento ‘‘yañcāhaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘yañcāha’’nti etassa ‘‘anuggahito, pasaṃsito’’ti etehi sambandho. Yanti yasmā, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, tena ‘‘anuggahito, pasaṃsito’’ti ettha anuggahaṇaṃ, pasaṃsanañca parāmasati. ‘‘Dhāressasī’’tiādikaṃ pana vacanaṃ bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle mahākassapattherena paññattasaṅghāṭiyaṃ nisinno taṃ saṅghāṭiṃ padumapupphavaṇṇena pāṇinā antantena parāmasanto āha. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.154) mahākassapatthereneva ānandattheraṃ āmantetvā kathentena –
“当时,贤友,世尊离开道路,来到某棵树根下。贤友,我便将破布片制成的粪扫衣四折敷设,对世尊说:‘尊者世尊,请坐此处,愿我长夜获得利益与安乐。’贤友,世尊便坐在敷设的座位上,坐下后对我说:‘迦叶,你这件破布片粪扫衣很是柔软啊。’‘尊者世尊,请出于悲悯,接受我这件破布片粪扫衣。’‘那么,迦叶,你能持守我这些穿旧的麻布粪扫衣吗?’‘尊者,我能持守世尊的麻布粪扫衣。’贤友,我便将破布片粪扫衣供养世尊,而我则接受了世尊的麻布粪扫衣。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho āvuso bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami, atha khvāhaṃ āvuso paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ catugguṇaṃ paññapetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘idha bhante bhagavā nisīdatu, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’ti . Nisīdi kho āvuso bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho maṃ āvuso bhagavā etadavoca ‘mudukā kho tyāyaṃ kassapa paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭī’ti. Paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ anukampaṃ upādāyāti. Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānīti. Dhāressāmahaṃ bhante bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānīti. So khvāhaṃ āvuso paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ bhagavato pādāsiṃ, ahaṃ pana bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanāni paṭipajji’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
其中,“柔软啊,你这件”意为“你这件很柔软”。世尊为何这样说?因为想要与尊者交换粪扫衣。为何想要交换?因为想把尊者安置在自己的位置上。难道没有舍利弗、目犍连吗?有的,但世尊这样想:“他们不久将入灭,而迦叶能活到一百二十岁,在我般涅槃后,他将住在七叶窟,结集法与律,令我的教法流布五千年。”因此将他安置在自己的位置上,这样比丘们便会认为“应当听从迦叶”。所以这样说。而尊者按照惯例,当衣服或钵的功德被称赞时,会说“请您接受吧”,因此说:“尊者世尊,请接受我的。”显示巴利原文
Tattha mudukā kho tyāyanti mudukā kho te ayaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāhāti? Therena saha cīvaraṃ parivattetukāmatāya. Kasmā parivattetukāmo jātoti? Theraṃ attano ṭhāne ṭhapetukāmatāya. Kiṃ sāriputtamoggallānā natthīti? Atthi, evaṃ panassa ahosi ‘‘ime na ciraṃ ṭhassanti, ‘kassapo pana vīsavassasatāyuko, so mayi parinibbute sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṃ vasitvā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ katvā mama sāsanaṃ pañcavassasahassaparimāṇakālaṃ pavattanakaṃ karissatī’’ti attano naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapesi, evaṃ bhikkhū kassapassa sussusitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti tasmā evamāha. Thero pana yasmā cīvarassa vā pattassa vā vaṇṇe kathite ‘‘imaṃ tumhe gaṇhathā’’ti vacanaṃ cārittameva, tasmā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā’’ti āha.
“那么,迦叶,你能持守吗?”意思是:“迦叶,你能持用这些穿旧的粪扫衣吗?”这不是指体力,而是指圆满修行。在此,其本意是:我披上这件名为“满”的女仆弃于荒冢间的衣服,进入冢间,那衣服上布满约一升量的虫,我抖落那些虫,立足于大圣种姓而取用此衣。在我取用此衣之日,一万世界的大地发出巨大震吼而震动,虚空发出爆裂声,轮围世界的诸天称扬善哉。受取此衣的比丘,应成为从受戒时起即持粪扫衣者、即住阿兰若者、即一座食者、即次第乞食者。你能与此衣相称而行吗?尊者自身虽具有五头大象之力,但他不这样思惟,而以精进心想“我将圆满此修行”,愿与善逝之衣相称,故说:“尊者,我能持守。”“我接受”意为“我已遵行”。如此交换衣服后,世尊披上尊者所穿过的衣,尊者披上了导师的衣。那时,大地以水为界,发出震吼而震动。显示巴利原文
Dhāressasipana me tvaṃ kassapāti kassapa tvaṃ imāni paribhogajiṇṇāni paṃsukūlāni pārupituṃ sakkhissasīti vadati. Tañca kho na kāyabalaṃ sandhāya, paṭipattipūraṇaṃ pana sandhāya evamāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ahaṃ imaṃ cīvaraṃ puṇṇaṃ nāma dāsiṃ pārupitvā āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ susānaṃ pavisitvā tumbamattehi pāṇakehi samparikiṇṇaṃ te pāṇake vidhunitvā mahāariyavaṃse ṭhatvā aggahesiṃ, tassa me imaṃ cīvaraṃ gahitadivase dasasahassacakkavāḷe mahāpathavī mahāviravaṃ viravamānā kampittha, ākāsaṃ taṭataṭāyi, cakkavāḷe devatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, imaṃ cīvaraṃ gaṇhantena bhikkhunā jātipaṃsukūlikena jātiāraññikena jātiekāsanikena jātisapadānacārikena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati, tvaṃ imassa cīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ sakkhissasīti. Theropi attanā pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti, so taṃ atakkayitvā ‘‘ahametaṃ paṭipattiṃ pūressāmī’’ti ussāhena sugatacīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘dhāressāmahaṃ bhante’’ti āha. Paṭipajjinti paṭipannosiṃ. Evaṃ pana cīvaraparivattanaṃ katvā therena pārupitacīvaraṃ bhagavā pārupi, satthu cīvaraṃ thero. Tasmiṃ samaye mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā unnadantī kampittha.
“麻布粪扫衣”指包裹死尸后丢弃的、抖落约一升量虫后取来的麻纤维制成的粪扫衣。“穿旧的”指已完成了穿着之用,即穿用旧了的意思。在此,虽然那只是一件衣,但因具有多个部分,故用复数,这是《中部义释》所说。在“以衣的共同受用”中,由于“以自己共同受用”的意义可被理解,而对于可理解意义的词,在运用上可有省略,故未说“自己”。因为经中说“迦叶,你能持守我这些麻布粪扫衣吗?”(相应部2.154),故理解为“以自己共同受用”,而非他人。并非仅凭字句便处处决定意义,多数情况下意义也由上下文等确定。而阿阇梨法护长老对此这样说:“‘以衣的共同受用’中,此处应引用‘自己’一词,安立为‘自己同等’,然后连接为‘以自己共同受用衣’。”显示巴利原文
Sāṇāni paṃsukūlānīti matakaḷevaraṃ pariveṭhetvā chaḍḍitāni tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitāni sāṇavākamayāni paṃsukūlacīvarāni. Nibbasanānīti niṭṭhitavasanakiccāni, paribhogajiṇṇānīti attho. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ekameva taṃ cīvaraṃ, anekāvayavattā pana bahuvacanaṃ katanti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti atthassa viññāyamānattā, viññāyamānatthassa ca saddassa payoge kāmācārattā ‘‘attanā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) hi vuttattā ‘‘attanāva sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’’ti viññāyati, nāññena. Na hi kevalaṃ saddatoyeva sabbattha atthanicchayo, atthapakaraṇādināpi yebhuyyena atthassa niyamitattā. Ācariyadhammapālattherena panettha evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha ‘attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’ti idha vuttaṃ attanā – saddamānetvā ‘cīvare attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’ti yojetabbaṃ.
因为某物与某物若有关联,即使它处于远处,此关联也使其成为近因;对于意义各不相同的诸法,同样如此。
对于意义上互不相同的诸法,由于关联,即使(其中一法)处于远处,此关联也令其成为近因。
显示巴利原文 Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa taṃ; Atthato hyasamānānaṃ, āsannattamakāraṇanti.
又或者说,应作如下连接:世尊以共用受用的方式摄受了(大迦叶)。因为即使是一个具格的说明,也可能表示与“一起”相连的主体意义。“共同持有”即称为“共”,如此的受用即是“共用受用”,即是以此(共用受用)。以共用受用与同等安立而摄受,这便是其间的关联。显示巴利原文
Atha vā bhagavatā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena bhagavatā anuggahitoti yojanīyaṃ. Ekassāpi hi karaṇaniddesassa sahādiyogakattutthajotakattasambhavato’’ti. Samānaṃ dhāraṇametassāti sādhāraṇo, tādiso paribhogoti sādhāraṇaparibhogo, tena. Sādhāraṇaparibhogena ca samasamaṭṭhapanena ca anuggahitoti sambandho.
诸比丘,我随意便能离诸欲、离不善法,有寻有伺,由离生喜乐,具足初禅而安住;诸比丘,迦叶也随意便能离诸欲、离不善法,有寻有伺,由离生喜乐,具足初禅而安住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi, kassapopi bhikkhave yāvade ākaṅkhati vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
此处是为了显示世尊在《迦叶相应》(《相应部》2.151)中所说、以省略方式和“等”字概括的经文——关于九次第定与六种神通分类的上人法,将自己与迦叶同等安立——而引来“诸比丘,我……”等这段。显示巴利原文
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāpabhede uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanatthāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.151) āgataṃ pāḷimimaṃ peyyālamukhena, ādiggahaṇena ca saṅkhipitvā dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādi.
其中,“yāvade”即“yāvadeva”,意谓:我愿住多久,就住多久。因此,《中部根本复注》与《小复注》中说:“‘yāvade’即是‘yāvadeva’。”《相应部注释》也解释其义为:“‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmi’即‘yāvadeva icchāmi’。”同样,阿阇梨法护长老在《利义显明》中说:“‘yāvade’一词与‘yāvadeva’同义。”不过,在某些典籍中只见“yāvadeva”这一读法。还应了知:在等至方面,“yāvade”的意思是——我愿住于多少等至住,就住于多少等至住;在神通方面,连同其余经文,意思是——我愿运用多少神通说,就运用多少神通说。阿阇梨法护长老为随宜显示同一意义而说:“意思是:我愿住于多少等至住或神通说,就住于并说于多少,迦叶也是如此。”还有人这样说:“在等至处,应作如此连接:‘我愿初禅,即具足初禅而住’等,所引出的‘彼’字作业格;在神变通处,则以具格连接:‘我愿天耳,即以彼天耳闻声’等。”显示巴利原文
Tattha yāvadeti yāvadeva, yattakaṃ kālaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ kālaṃ viharāmīti attho. Tatoyeva hi majjhimagaṇṭhipade, cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘yāvadeti yāvadevāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2.152) attho vutto. Tathā hi tattha līnatthapakāsaniyaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘yāvadevāti iminā samānatthaṃ ‘yāvade’ti idaṃ pada’’nti vuttaṃ. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti ayameva pāṭho dissati. Api ca yāvadeti yattakaṃ samāpattivihāraṃ viharituṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ samāpattivihāraṃ viharāmīti samāpattiṭṭhāne, yattakaṃ abhiññāvohāraṃ voharituṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tattakaṃ abhiññāvohāraṃ voharāmīti abhiññāṭhāne ca saha pāṭhasesena attho veditabbo. Ācariyadhammapālattherenāpi tadevatthaṃ yathālābhanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yattake samāpattivihāre, abhiññāvohāre vā ākaṅkhanto vihārāmi ceva voharāmi ca, tathā kassapopīti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘yāvadeti ‘yaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, taṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja vihārāmī’tiādinā samāpattiṭṭhāne, iddhividhābhiññāṭhāne ca ajjhāharitassa ta-saddassa kammavasena ‘yaṃ dibbasotaṃ ākaṅkhāmi, tena dibbasotena sadde suṇāmī’tiādinā sesābhiññāṭhāne karaṇavasena yojanā vattabbā’’ti vadanti. Vivicceva kāmehīti ettha eva-saddo niyamattho, ubhayattha yojetabbo. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, tadupari āvi bhavissati.
在“九次第住与六神通分类”中,“九次第住”是指连同灭尽定在内的八等至,因须次第证入而得名。“六神通”是指连同漏尽智在内的五神通。此处某些典籍中见有“ādi”字,但那并非所许,因为如所说经文所要摄取的义理已无剩余。“上人法”是指:在人类中、或超越人类的、或属于上等人类——即禅修者与圣者——的法;亦即超越人法的法,故称上人法。在此,十善业道除了修习作意之外,自然由人类所生起并能带来人身,故名为“人法”;而超越此的禅那等,应知为“上人法”。“以同等安立”是指:这样地使同等——“我住于多少时间、或多少等至住、运用多少神通,迦叶也是如此”。这是就多处安立,或就任何上人法都无余、绝对地同等安立而说“以同等安立”,并且应视为仅是以九次第住与六神通的体性共通而作称赞。因为具寿大迦叶并不像世尊那样,每天入于二十四万亿之数的等至,以及以双神变等方式运用神通。在此,“在上人法方面,将自己与(迦叶)同等安立”应知仅是举例。正如:显示巴利原文
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhedeti ettha navānupubbavihārā nāma anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbattā evaṃsaññitā nirodhasamāpattiyā saha aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Chaḷabhiññā nāma āsavakkhayañāṇena saha pañcābhiññāyo. Katthaci potthake cettha ādisaddo dissati. So anadhippeto yathāvuttāya pāḷiyā gahetabbassa atthassa anavasesattā. Manussesu, manussānaṃ vā uttaribhūtānaṃ, uttarīnaṃ vā manussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammoti uttarimanussadhammo, manussadhammā vā uttarīti uttarimanussadhammo. Dasa kusalakammapathā cettha vinā bhāvanāmanasikārena pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbato, manussattabhāvāvahanato ca manussadhammo nāma, tato uttari pana jhānādi uttarimanussadhammoti veditabbo. Samasamaṭṭhapanenāti ‘‘ahaṃ yattakaṃ kālaṃ, yattake vā samāpattivihāre, yattakā abhiññāyo ca vaḷañjemi , tathā kassapopī’’ti evaṃ samasamaṃ katvā ṭhapanena. Anekaṭṭhānesu ṭhapanaṃ, kassacipi uttarimanussadhammassa asesabhāvena ekantasamaṭṭhapanaṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti vuttaṃ, idañca navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññābhāvasāmaññena pasaṃsāmattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavā viya devasikaṃ catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, yamakapāṭihāriyādivasena ca abhiññāyo vaḷañjetīti. Ettha ca uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi –
“迦叶,你教诫比丘们吧!迦叶,你为比丘们说法吧!迦叶,或者由我来教诫比丘们,或者由你;迦叶,或者由我来为比丘们说法,或者由你。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ovada kassapa bhikkhū, karohi kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhū ovadeyyaṃ, tvaṃ vā. Ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kareyyaṃ, tvaṃ vā’’ti –
即使这样,他也确实把自己与(迦叶)安立为同等。显示巴利原文
Evampi attanā samasamaṭṭhapanamakāsiyevāti.
“如此”是指:如同以同等的受用被摄受,也以同等的方式被称赞。“在空中摇手”:世尊亲自在空中摇手,以心于诸家不执着的状态为因、为方便而作称赞,这是其中的关联。或者,“以心不执着的状态”为处格,意即:在空中摇手后,以亲近俗家比丘心不执着的状态——也就是由于他适于对诸家保持心不执着,便仿佛亲自作证一般地加以称赞。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tathāti rūpūpasaṃhāro yathā anuggahito, tathā pasaṃsitoti. Ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvāti bhagavatā attanoyeva pāṇiṃ ākāse cāletvā kulesu alaggacittatāya ceva karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsitoti sambandho. Alaggacittatāyāti vā ādhāre bhummaṃ, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā kulūpakassa bhikkhuno alaggacittatāya kulesu alagganacittena bhavituṃ yuttatāya ceva maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti attho. Yathāha –
那时,世尊在空中摇动手臂。诸比丘,正如这只在空中摇动的手,不黏着、不被抓取、不被束缚;同样地,诸比丘,任何比丘前往俗家时,在俗家中其心不黏着、不被抓取、不被束缚,心想:‘愿希求利养者获得利养,愿希求福德者造作福德。’如同因自己的利养而喜悦、欢喜,也因他人的利养而喜悦、欢喜。诸比丘,这样的比丘才适合前往俗家。诸比丘,迦叶前往俗家时,在俗家中其心不黏着、不被抓取、不被束缚,心想:‘愿希求利养者获得利养,愿希求福德者造作福德。’如同因自己的利养而喜悦、欢喜,也因他人的利养而喜悦、欢喜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā ākāse pāṇiṃ cālesi seyyathāpi bhikkhave, ayaṃ ākāse pāṇi na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati, evameva kho bhikkhave yassa kassaci bhikkhuno kulāni upasaṅkamato kulesu cittaṃ na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati ‘labhantu lābhakāmā, puññakāmā karontu puññānī’ti. Yathā sakena lābhena attamano hoti sumano, evaṃ paresaṃ lābhena attamano hoti sumano. Evarūpo kho bhikkhave bhikkhu arahati kulāni upasaṅkamituṃ. Kassapassa bhikkhave kulāni upasaṅkamato kulesu cittaṃ na sajjati na gayhati na bajjhati ‘labhantu lābhakāmā, puññakāmā karontu puññānī’ti. Yathā sakena lābhena attamano hoti sumano, evaṃ paresaṃ lābhena attamano hoti sumano’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.146).
其中,“在空中摇动手臂”意为:在蓝色的虚空中,宛如闪动一道闪电,于下方、上方及两侧摇动手臂。而这在三藏佛语中被称为“不混杂之句”。“喜悦”意为自心满意,并非被忧恼所截断而执取的心;“欢喜”意为满足之心。现在,若有志向下劣、行于邪道者这样说:“正自觉者说‘以不黏着之心,如空中摇手之喻,前往俗家’,这是将人置于不可能的境地,强加无法承受的负担,让人去做不可能的事。”为了断除他的论调,并说明“此事可行,有这样的比丘”,世尊便举出大迦叶尊者作为见证,说道:“诸比丘,迦叶……”等语。显示巴利原文
Tattha ākāse pāṇiṃ cālesīti nīle gaganantare yamakavijjukaṃ sañcālayamāno viya heṭṭhābhāge , uparibhāge, ubhato ca passesu pāṇiṃ sañcālesi, idañca pana tepiṭake buddhavacane asambhinnapadaṃ nāma. Attamanoti sakamano, na domanassena pacchinditvā gahitamano. Sumanoti tuṭṭhamano, idāni yo hīnādhimuttiko micchāpaṭipanno evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘sammāsambuddho ‘alaggacittatāya ākāse cālitapāṇūpamā kulāni upasaṅkamathā’ti vadanto aṭṭhāne ṭhapeti, asayhabhāraṃ āropeti, yaṃ na sakkā kātuṃ, taṃ kārehī’’ti, tassa vādapathaṃ pacchinditvā ‘‘sakkā ca kho evaṃ kātuṃ, atthi evarūpo bhikkhū’’ti āyasmantaṃ mahākassapattherameva sakkhiṃ katvā dassento ‘‘kassapassa bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
又说了其他赞叹之语:“以如月之行道……”。意思是:因如月之行道而受赞叹,或者以那行持为基础,以他本人为证而赞叹。如所说:显示巴利原文
Aññampi pasaṃsanamāha ‘‘candopamapaṭipadāya cā’’ti, candapaṭibhāgāya paṭipadāya ca karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsito, tassaṃ vā ādhārabhūtāya maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti attho. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,应如月般前往俗家:收摄身体,收摄心念,在俗家中常作新来者,不鲁莽。诸比丘,譬如有人观看古井、山间险处或河岸断崖时,收摄身体,收摄心念;同样地,诸比丘,应如月般前往俗家:收摄身体,收摄心念,在俗家中常作新来者,不鲁莽。诸比丘,迦叶如月般前往俗家:收摄身体,收摄心念,在俗家中常作新来者,不鲁莽。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Candūpamā bhikkhave kulāni upasaṅkamatha apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavakā kulesu appagabbhā. Seyyathāpi bhikkhave puriso jarudapānaṃ vā olokeyya pabbatavisamaṃ vā nadīviduggaṃ vā apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ, evameva kho bhikkhave candūpamā kulāni upasaṅkamatha apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavakā kulesu appagabbhā. Kassapo bhikkhave candūpamo kulāni upasaṅkamati apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittaṃ niccanavako kulesu appagabbho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.146).
其中,“如月般”意为:如同月亮一般。难道是因为圆形的相似吗?不是的。而是正如月亮在天空中运行时,不与任何事物建立亲密、情感、执着、爱乐、希求或缠缚,却仍为大众所喜爱、悦意;你们也应如此,不与任何事物建立亲密等,成为大众喜爱、悦意的如月者,前往刹帝利家等四种俗家,这是其含义。再者,正如月亮破除黑暗、遍照光明,你们也应通过破除烦恼黑暗、遍照智慧光明而成为如月者。应当通过这些及其他方式理解其含义。显示巴利原文
Tattha candūpamāti candasadisā hutvā. Kiṃ parimaṇḍalatāya sadisāti? No, apica kho yathā cando gaganatalaṃ pakkhandamāno na kenaci saddhiṃ santhavaṃ vā sinehaṃ vā ālayaṃ vā nikantiṃ vā patthanaṃ vā pariyuṭṭhānaṃ vā karoti, na ca na hoti mahājanassa piyo manāpo, tumhepi evaṃ kenaci saddhiṃ santhavādīnaṃ akaraṇena bahujanassa piyā manāpā candūpamā hutvā khattiyakulādīni cattāri kulāni upasaṅkamathāti attho. Apica yathā cando andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokaṃ pharati, evaṃ kilesandhakāravidhamanena, ñāṇālokapharaṇena ca candūpamā hutvāti evamādīhipi nayehi attho daṭṭhabbo.
“收摄身体,收摄心念”意为:正是通过避免那种建立亲密等行为,将身体和心念向内收摄,不牵引、不攀附,使其远离。“常作新来者”意为:始终如同新来者,如同客人一般。因为客人依序进入所到之家后,如果主人看见他,心生悲悯地想:“我们那远游的儿子、兄弟,也是如此游历于外的吧”,便请他入座、供养食物;他用餐完毕,便说“收好你们的食器”,随即起身离去,既不与他们建立亲昵,也不参与他们的各种事务。这正说明:你们也应当如此,依序前往所到之家,接受那些对威仪生起净信的人们所施之物,然后断除亲昵,不涉入他们的事务,便离去。“不鲁莽”意为:不骄慢,远离由八种因缘所起的身骄慢、由四种因缘所起的语骄慢,以及由多种因缘所起的心骄慢,前往俗家。这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Apakasseva kāyaṃ, apakassa cittanti teneva santhavādīnamakaraṇena kāyañca cittañca apakassitvā, akaḍḍhitvā apanetvāti attho. Niccanavakāti niccaṃ navikāva, āgantukasadisā eva hutvāti attho. Āgantuko hi paṭipāṭiyā sampattagehaṃ pavisitvā sace naṃ gharasāmikā disvā ‘‘amhākaṃ puttabhātaropi vippavāsagatā evaṃ vicariṃsū’’ti anukampamānā nisīdāpetvā bhojenti, bhuttamattoyeva ‘‘tumhākaṃ bhājanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti uṭṭhāya pakkamati, na tehi saddhiṃ santhavaṃ vā karoti, kiccakaraṇīyāni vā saṃvidahati, evaṃ tumhepi paṭipāṭiyā sampattagharaṃ pavisitvā yaṃ iriyāpathesu pasannā manussā denti, taṃ gahetvā pacchinnasanthavā tesaṃ kiccakaraṇīye abyāvaṭā hutvā nikkhamathāti dīpeti. Appagabbhāti na pagabbhā, aṭṭhaṭṭhānena kāyapāgabbhiyena, catuṭṭhānena vacīpāgabbhiyena, anekaṭṭhānena manopāgabbhiyena ca virahitā kulāni upasaṅkamathāti attho.
“古井”意为:破旧的井。“山间险处”意为:山中的险峻悬崖处。“河岸断崖”意为:河边的断崖崩岸处。“同样地”:此处应配合譬喻——古井等犹如四种俗家,观望者如同比丘。正如身心未收摄者,观望那些地方时会坠落其中;同样,以未防护的身等前往俗家的比丘,会在俗家中被系缚,从而遭遇种种破戒断足等灾祸。反之,正如身心收摄者不会坠落其中;同样,以善加防护的身、善加防护的语、善加防护的心、善安立的念,成为身心收摄者而前往俗家的比丘,不会在俗家中被系缚,他那以戒、信、定、慧为自性的足、手、腹、头不会破损,贪等荆棘不会刺伤他,他得以安乐地前往未曾抵达的涅槃之境。为了断除志向低劣、行于邪道者的论路,世尊便举出大迦叶尊者作为见证,说道:“诸比丘,迦叶……”等语。如此,在此义理中,世尊以称为“不黏着之心”的如月行道作为原因而赞叹他,或者以那如月行道为基础,举出他本人作为见证而加以赞叹。若是如此,“唯”字与“而”字便不应使用,因为两句是同位关系。这一含义与读法似乎更为合理,因为在《般涅槃经注》中说:“在空中挥动手臂,宣说如月行道时,是……”显示巴利原文
Jarudapānanti jiṇṇakūpaṃ. Pabbatavisamanti pabbate visamaṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ. Nadīvidugganti nadiyā viduggaṃ chinnataṭaṭṭhānaṃ. Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – jarudapānādayo viya hi cattāri kulāni, olokanapuriso viya bhikkhu, yathā pana anapakaṭṭhakāyacitto tāni olokento puriso tattha patati, evaṃ arakkhitehi kāyādīhi kulāni upasaṅkamanto bhikkhu kulesu bajjhati, tato nānappakāraṃ sīlapādabhañjanādikaṃ anatthaṃ pāpuṇāti. Yathā pana apakaṭṭhakāyacitto puriso tattha na patati, evaṃ rakkhiteneva kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya, rakkhitehi cittehi, sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā apakaṭṭhakāyacitto hutvā kulāni upasaṅkamanto bhikkhu kulesu na bajjhati, athassa sīlasaddhāsamādhipaññāsaṅkhātāni pādahatthakucchisīsāni na bhañjanti, rāgakaṇṭakādayo na vijjhanti, sukhito yenakāmaṃ agatapubbaṃ nibbānadisaṃ gacchati, evarūpo ayaṃ mahākassapoti hīnādhimuttikassa micchāpaṭipannassa vādapathapacchindanatthaṃ mahākassapattheraṃ eva sakkhiṃ katvā dassento ‘‘kassapo bhikkhave’’tiādimāhāti. Evampettha atthamicchantialaggacittatāsaṅkhātāya candopamapaṭipadāya karaṇabhūtāya pasaṃsito, tassaṃ vā ādhārabhūtāya maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā pasaṃsitoti, evaṃ sati ceva-saddo, ca-saddo ca na payujjitabbo dvinnaṃ padānaṃ tulyādhikaraṇattā, ayameva attho pāṭho ca yuttataro viya dissati parinibbānasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candūpamaṃ paṭipadaṃ kathento maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā kathesī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.232) vuttattāti.
他的意思是:除了结集法与律之外,我还能有什么无债的状态呢?其中,“tassa”(他的)一词,在指示原因时,通过补充“tasmā”(因此)一词,意为“因此,我的”;而在指代动作时,则指“他的那种护念、那种称赞”。在某些抄本中,也可见到“tassa me”(我的那种)的读法,若是如此,在指代动作时,则须另外补充“tassā”(她的/它的)一词。“无债之人”即没有债务者,其状态为无债。除了结集法与律之外,还能有什么名为他的无债状态呢?意思是根本不会有。以“世尊不是对我……”等语,通过譬喻来阐明前面所说的义理。在“通过授予自己的铠甲与自在力”这句中,“铠甲”即胸甲,用以遮蔽胸部,此处以衣作喻而取其义;而“自在力”则应以神通、等至作喻而取其义,应如此理解。“令家族传承得以安立者”,即令家族传承、家族传统得以安立者。由于“me”(我的)一词恒常有所期待,故复合词意为“令正法传承得以安立者”。此中要义为:譬如国王为了通过摧破敌众来安立自己的家族传承,而授予自己的铠甲与自在力,令儿子成为家族传承……显示巴利原文
Tassakimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati, aññatra dhammavinayasaṅgāyanāti adhippāyo. Tattha tassāti yaṃ-saddassa kāraṇanidassane ‘‘tasmā’’ti ajjhāharitvā tassa meti attho, kiriyāparāmasane pana tassa anuggahaṇassa, pasaṃsanassa cāti. Potthakesupi katthaci ‘‘tassa me’’ti pāṭho dissati, evaṃ sati kiriyāparāmasane ‘‘tassā’’ti aparaṃ padamajjhāharitabbaṃ. Natthi iṇaṃ yassāti aṇaṇo, tassa bhāvo āṇaṇyaṃ. Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ kiṃ nāma tassa iṇavirahitattaṃ bhavissati, na bhavissati evāti attho. ‘‘Nanu maṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ upamāvasena vibhāveti. Sakakavacaissariyānuppadānenāti ettha kavaco nāma uracchado, yena uro chādīyate, tassa ca cīvaranidassanena gahaṇaṃ, issariyassa pana abhiññāsamāpattinidassanenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakanti kulavaṃsassa kulapaveṇiyā patiṭṭhāpakaṃ. ‘‘Me’’ti padassa niccasāpekkhattā saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakoti samāso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sattusaṅghanimmaddanena attano kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ sakakavacaissariyānuppadānena kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakaṃ puttaṃ rājā viya bhagavāpi maṃ dīghadassī ‘‘saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako me ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti mantvā sāsanapaccatthikagaṇanimmaddanena saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ cīvaradānasamasamaṭṭhapanasaṅkhātena iminā asādhāraṇānuggahena anuggahesi nanu, imāya ca uḷārāya pasaṃsāya pasaṃsi nanūti. Iti cintayantoti ettha itisaddena ‘‘antaradhāpeyyuṃ, saṅgāyeyyaṃ, kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti vacanapubbaṅgamaṃ, ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi vākyattayaṃ nidasseti.
现在,为了以结集犍度的巴利经文来证成前文所说的义理,他说:“如所说……”等。其中,“如所说”的意思是:他说了什么?意即:对我所阐述的义理,他引了什么作为证明?或者,其意思是:我以某种方式所说,在巴利经文中也以那种方式说了。或者,其意思是:巴利经文中说了什么话,就以那种话,与我所说的话相应相合,正如可说“以恒河水与耶牟那河水”一般。因为引证巴利经文为证的事实是现量可知的,而对于已知意义的词句,在使用上是可以善巧随宜的。因为义理的连接,正是为了阐明意趣。或者,其意思是:他以某种方式激发了比丘们为结集法与律而精勤,在巴利经文中也以那种方式说了。如此种种。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ saṅgītikkhandhakapāḷiyā sādhento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Tattha yathāhāti kiṃ āha, mayā vuttassa atthassa sādhakaṃ kiṃ āhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā vā yena pakārena mayā vuttaṃ, tathā tena pakārena pāḷiyampi āhāti attho. Yathā vā yaṃ vacanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āha, tathā tena vacanena mayā vuttavacanaṃ saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā taṃ gaṅgodakena yamunodakantipi vattabbo pāḷiyā sādhanatthaṃ udāharitabhāvassa paccakkhato viññāyamānattā, viññāyamānatthassa ca saddassa payoge kāmācārattā. Adhippāyavibhāvanatthā hi atthayojanā. Yathā vā yena pakārena dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi, tathā tena pakārena pāḷiyampi āhāti attho. Evamīdisesu.
在“ekamidāhaṃ”这句中,“idaṃ”只是一个虚词。“ekaṃ samayaṃ”是依处格意义而用的业格,意为“在一个时候”。“Pāvāyaṃ”指从波婆城,在那里乞食之后,他踏上了前往拘尸那罗的旅途,这是所说之义。“Addhānamagga”就是长路,此处“addhāna”一词是长途的同义词。“mahatā”指因功德之大和数量之多而称为大。“以大约五百位”等,显示了数量的巨大,“matta”一词是表示概量的词,就像在“于食知量”等中的用法。为了证成“激发为结集法与律而精勤”这一义理而引用的“那时……”等巴利经文,并不能证成前文所说的义理。因为其中并未提到激发精勤的方式。为了避开这样的难问,他说:“应详知整个须跋陀品”。即便如此,难问依然如故,因此说了“从那以后,他说……”等。再者,由于能证成前文所说义理的巴利经文篇幅较长,为了避免著作过于沉重,他以中间省略的方式,只出示首尾的巴利经文,而说:“应详知整个须跋陀品”。由此,他指示了从“那时,贤友,我离开道路,坐在某棵树下”这句巴利经文开始,直到……显示巴利原文
Ekamidāhanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti ca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, ekasmiṃ samayeti attho. Pāvāyāti pāvānagarato, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā ‘‘kusināraṃ gamissāmī’’ti addhānamaggappaṭipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhānamaggoti ca dīghamaggo vuccati, dīghapariyāyo hettha addhānasaddo. Mahatāti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. ‘‘Pañcamattehī’’tiādinā saṅkhyāmahattaṃ dasseti, mattasaddo ca pamāṇavacano ‘‘bhojane mattaññutā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.16) viya. ‘‘Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti etassatthassa sādhanatthaṃ āhatā ‘‘atha kho’’tiādikā pāḷi yathāvuttamatthaṃ na sādheti . Na hettha ussāhajananappakāro āgatoti codanaṃ pariharitumāha ‘‘sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti. Evampesā codanā tadavatthāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’tiādi. Apica yathāvuttatthasādhikā pāḷi mahatarāti ganthagarutāpariharaṇatthaṃ majjhe peyyālamukhena ādiantameva pāḷiṃ dassento ‘‘sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti āha. Tena hi ‘‘atha khvāhaṃ āvuso maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdī’’ti (cūḷava. 437) vuttapāḷito paṭṭhāya ‘‘yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 437) vuttapāḷipariyosānaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ dasseti.
而通过“从那以后……”等,则指示了剩余的部分,即“贤友,来吧,我们……”等显示激发精勤方式的巴利经文。因此,在“tasmā tato paraṃ āhā”这句中,应知意思为:因此,在那之后,即在须跋陀品之后,他说了显示激发精勤方式的话。在《大结节注》中,也正说了此义。阿阇梨舍利弗长老也是如此意许。然而,阿阇梨法护长老则说:“‘tato paraṃ’是指从那激发比丘们精勤之后”,但这有待商榷,因为在前面的巴利经文中并未提及激发精勤的方式。因为,正是这个“贤友,来吧,在非法尚未炽盛之前,我们来结集法与律吧”等,才是激发精勤的方式。如果有人说,因为须跋陀品揭示了由须跋陀所说、成为激发精勤之因的话语,所以它就是激发精勤,那么这里便无可指摘了。在“在非法尚未炽盛之前”这句中,“非法”是指与十善业道相反的非法。或者,由于结集法与律而引发了激发精勤,因此,不结集所导致的过失聚也可能生起,如所说“说非法者强盛,说法者羸弱”。所以,以戒坏等为因的恶欲等过失聚,也称为“非法”。“pure di…”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tato para’’ntiādinā pana tadavasesaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso’’tiādikaṃ ussāhajananappakāradassanapāḷiṃ. Tasmā tato paraṃ āhāti ettha subhaddakaṇḍato paraṃ ussāhajananappakāradassanavacanamāhāti attho veditabbo. Mahāgaṇṭhipadepi hi soyevattho vutto. Ācariyasāriputtattherenāpi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) tatheva adhippeto. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘tato paranti tato bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananato parato’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ vicāretabbaṃ heṭṭhā ussāhajananappakārassa pāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Ayameva hi ussāhajananappakāro yadidaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippatī’’tiādi. Yadi pana subhaddakaṇḍameva ussāhajananahetubhūtassa subhaddena vuttavacanassa pakāsanattā ussāhajanananti vadeyya, natthevettha vicāretabbatāti. Pure adhammo dippatīti ettha adhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathapaṭipakkhabhūto adhammo. Dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhajananappasaṅgattā vā tadasaṅgāyanahetuko dosagaṇopi sambhavati, ‘‘adhammavādino balavanto honti, dhammavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti vuttattā sīlavipattiādihetuko pāpicchatādidosagaṇo adhammotipi vadanti. Pure dippatīti api nāma dippati. Saṃsayatthe hi pure-saddo. Atha vā yāva adhammo dhammaṃ paṭibāhituṃ samattho hoti, tato puretaramevāti attho. Āsanne hi anadhippete ayaṃ pure-saddo. Dippatīti dippissati, pure-saddayogena hi anāgatatthe ayaṃ vattamānapayogo yathā ‘‘purā vassati devo’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
诗人们将“pure”一词用于未来决定之时,也用于过去久远之时,以此涵盖二时。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anāgate sannicchaye, tathātīte ciratane;
所谓“新次第修行”与“六通”的差别,于此,“新次第修行”是指需要渐次进入的修行,共有八种等至,连同灭尽定,合称九次第定。“六通”则指断尽烦恼之智,连同五种神通。某些抄本在这里有“ādi”(等)字,虽无主导意义,但为随顺巴利原文而采纳。“人”在这里指人类,或指超于常人者;反之亦然:修习禅定的有学、无学者等,被称为“上人法”,也称“人法”。十善业道若未修习定,终将在众生中灭尽,因其承载人性,故称为“人行法”;而上人的禅定等,即是“上人法”。所谓“同等安立”,意思是“我在何时、何处修定,何种神通便增长”,这是划定与安立之义。在多处安立,或指持续称赞无余断尽的上人法,这便是“同等安立”的含义。由此可见,新次第修行与六通的境界,总以此同等安立作为普遍的称赞。诚然,大迦叶尊者并非如世尊那般,于无数百千俱胝禅定中同时进入,亦非依神通而得自在。此处,上人法以自身安立,便是此处所显示的意义。如此——显示巴利原文
Kāladvayepi kavīhi, puresaddo payujjate’’ti. (vajira. ṭī. bāhiranidānakathāvaṇṇanā);
“Pureyāvapurāyoge, niccaṃ vā karahi kadā”一句,意为:关于“pure”(前)与“pacchā”(后)的用法,是恒常的,还是偶尔的?
“Lacchāyamapi kiṃ vutte, vattamānā bhavissatī”ti ca,意为:即便这样说来,现在时又如何能成立呢?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pureyāvapurāyoge , niccaṃ vā karahi kadā; Lacchāyamapi kiṃ vutte, vattamānā bhavissatī’’ti ca.
然而,有些论师在此处作如是解释:“pure”指未来,亦即“之后”。好比行路人要走的道路被称为“pure”(前方),同样地,此处也以行路为喻,将未来时间称作“pure”。若如此,则此处依彼时而可有现在时的用法。在“法被反驳”一句中,也应结合“pure”一词,依上述方式来理解其义;同样,“法”也可依非法颠倒之义来理解,此后亦当依此理类推。“非律”指与断除律、防护律相对立的非律。关于“持律者变得无力”一句,经文中出现的“iti”一词,应与后文“tato paraṃ āha”中的“āha”相连接。显示巴利原文
Keci panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti – pureti pacchā anāgate, yathā addhānaṃ gacchantassa gantabbamaggo ‘‘pure’’ti vuccati, tathā idhāpi maggagamananayena anāgatakālo ‘‘pure’’ti vuccatīti. Evaṃ sati taṃkālāpekkhāya cettha vattamānapayogo sambhavati. Dhammo paṭibāhiyyatīti etthāpi pure-saddena yojetvā vuttanayena attho veditabbo, tathā dhammopi adhammaviparītavasena, ito parampi eseva nayo. Avinayoti pahānavinayasaṃvaravinayānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūto avinayo. Vinayavādino dubbalā hontīti evaṃ iti-saddena pāṭho, so ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’ti ettha āha-saddena sambajjhitabbo.
“Tena hi”是不变词,表催促之意。在遴选时,他们敦促大迦叶长老,这样说:“请遴选比丘。”意思是:请选出适合结集的比丘,审察后予以录取。“他掌握了全部……”这句,显示即使是如前所述的那些比丘,乃至以干观者漏尽者为限的比丘,尽管也可能具备教理与证悟,然而那些具足无碍解、三明等功德者,其教理与证悟的成就达到最高,因此对结集有大利益。所谓“全部九分教”,指经、应颂等九分教属于此或存于此中,故称“全部九分教”;而大师世尊的教法则称为“大师教法”,因为依此而教化,故得此名,二者相合即是“全部九分教的大师教法”。另一种解释:经、应颂等九支属于此或存于此中,故名为“九分教”,那正是大师教法,且是全部而非部分的,故如此说。为求真舍利益而应当遍学、修习,或能成就现法利益等人生目标的教法,称为“教法”,即是三藏。持守此“全部九分教大师教法”的教法者,如其所说,即是这样的人。凡夫……乃至……干观漏尽比丘,在此处——显示巴利原文
Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Uccinane uyyojentā hi mahākassapattheraṃ evamāhaṃsu ‘‘bhikkhū uccinatū’’ti, saṅgītiyā anurūpe bhikkhū uccinitvā upadhāretvā gaṇhātūti attho. ‘‘Sakala…pe… pariggahesī’’ti etena sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavapariyantānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ satipi āgamādhigamasambhave saha paṭisambhidāhi pana tevijjādiguṇayuttānaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiyā ukkaṃsagatattā saṅgītiyā bahūpakārataṃ dasseti. Sakalaṃ suttageyyādikaṃ navaṅgaṃ ettha, etassāti vā sakalanavaṅgaṃ, satthu bhagavato sāsanaṃ satthusāsanaṃ sāsīyati etenāti katvā, tadeva satthusāsananti sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanaṃ. Nava vā suttageyyādīni aṅgāni ettha, etassāti vā navaṅgaṃ, tameva satthusāsanaṃ, tañca sakalameva, na ekadesanti tathā. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbā sikkhitabbā, diṭṭhadhammikādipurisatthaṃ vā nipphādetuṃ pariyattā samatthāti pariyatti, tīṇi piṭakāni, sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanasaṅkhātā pariyatti, taṃ dhārentīti tathā, tādiseti attho. Puthujjana…pe… sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavabhikkhūti ettha –
“Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā;” 意为:日亲佛陀说了两种凡夫。
“Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano”ti. 意为:一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.61; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.51; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 88; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.130); –
所说的两种凡夫中,所指的正是善凡夫,因为即使依邻近词语的安立,也能了知意义的差别。由于缺乏止修习的润泽,他们的观干涩、粗糙、不润泽,故称“干观者”。他们即是漏尽者,故如此说。而“比丘”一词,在一切处皆应结合理解。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Vuttesu kalyāṇaputhujjanāva adhippetā saddantarasannidhānenapi atthavisesassa viññātabbattā. Samathabhāvanāsinehābhāvena sukkhā lūkhā asiniddhā vipassanā etesanti sukkhavipassakā, teyeva khīṇāsavāti tathā. ‘‘Bhikkhū’’ti pana sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Vuttañhi –
“Yañcatthavato saddekasesato vāpi suyyate”的意思是:凡从义理或从声音的余分而听闻到的。
“Taṃ sambajjhate paccekaṃ, yathālābhaṃ kadācipī”ti的意思是:那些各自随其所得,在某个时候连接起来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yañcatthavato saddekasesato vāpi suyyate; Taṃ sambajjhate paccekaṃ, yathālābhaṃ kadācipī’’ti.
“持守三藏一切教法类别者”:在此,三藏的集合称为“三藏”,持守那以九分教等方式分为众多类别的一切教法——也就是三藏——的人,便如此称呼,指那些具足者。“随其具足者而屡屡修习、增长”称为“随力”,此本身即是“威力”,也就是“势力”;那些具有大威力者,称为“大威力者”。“诸比丘,此是第一”——因为这句话是依世尊所说而流传下来的,所以“第一”这个词是随顺而生的名称,如同“yevāpanaka”一词一样;依其威力,紧接着所说的位置,此处即是“第一”,意为安立其上。或者,这位比丘是第一,如此安立也可以。为了显示即使没有特别安立他们,他们也因具备其余功德而被选出、存于其中,所以说“大多”。“三明”即是三种明,以此为起始的六神通等,称为“三明等”;具有多种类别者,名为“三明等类别”。或者,此漏尽者具有三明,故为“三明者”,以此为起始的六神通等称为“三明等”,那些即是类别,故为“三明等类别”。意思是:以三明、六神通等方式分为多种类别的漏尽比丘。关于他们而说,也就是关于那些比丘,在结集犍度中宣说了“那时”等语句。由此可知,虽然经文表面上是笼统而说,但实际上是特别针对如前所述的漏尽比丘而说的,如此方与经义相应。显示巴利原文
Tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadhareti ettha tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samāhāro tipiṭakaṃ, taṃsaṅkhātaṃ navaṅgādivasena anekabhedabhinnaṃ sabbaṃ pariyattippabhedaṃ dhārentīti tathā, tādise. Anu anu taṃ samaṅginaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, soyeva ānubhāvo, pabhāvo, mahanto ānubhāvo yesaṃ te mahānubhāvā. ‘‘Etadaggaṃ bhikkhave’’ti bhagavatā vuttavacanamupādāya pavattattā ‘‘etadagga’’nti padaṃ anukaraṇajanāmaṃ nāma yathā ‘‘yevāpanaka’’nti, tabbasena vuttaṭṭhānantaramidha etadaggaṃ, tamāropiteti attho. Etadaggaṃ eso bhikkhu aggoti vā āropitepi vaṭṭati. Tadanāropitāpi avasesaguṇasampannattā uccinitā tattha santīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tisso vijjā tevijjā, tā ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnanti tevijjādayo, te bhedā anekappakārā yesanti tevijjādibhedā. Atha vā tisso vijjā assa khīṇāsavassāti tevijjo, so ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnanti tevijjādayo, teyeva bhedā yesanti tevijjādibhedā. Tevijjachaḷabhiññādivasena anekabhedabhinne khīṇāsavabhikkhūyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ye sandhāya vuttanti ye bhikkhū sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘atha kho’’tiādivacanaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake vuttaṃ. Iminā kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ avisesatova vuttaṃ, tathāpi visesena yathāvuttakhīṇāsavabhikkhūyeva sandhāya vuttanti pāḷiyā saṃsandanaṃ karoti.
难道持守全部九分教与大师教法的漏尽者,不是有数百、数千位吗?为什么长老只选了不足五百位?提出这一问难后,为了通过显示特别理由来消除它,而说了“kissa panā”等。其中,“kissa”意为“为何”。“pana”是表示另一方的语气词。“为了给与机会”是指:以给与机会为因由、为理由。因为“attha”一词,如同在“为节日故,出城登杂山”等句中,是表示原因的词语;又如在“因何故”等中,是处格表原因义。正如他们所解释:“为节日故,即是以节日为因、以节日为理由。”如此,问与答便相应,这在此类情形中是通例。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidharā khīṇāsavā anekasatā, anekasahassā ca, kasmā thero ekenūnamakāsīti codanaṃ uddharitvā visesakāraṇadassanena taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘kissa panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kissāti kasmā. Pakkhantarajotako pana-saddo. Okāsakaraṇatthanti okāsakaraṇanimittaṃ okāsakaraṇahetu. Attha-saddo hi ‘‘chaṇatthañca nagarato nikkhamitvā missakapabbataṃ abhiruhatū’’tiādīsu viya kāraṇavacano, ‘‘kissa hetū’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.238) viya ca hetvatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti ‘‘chaṇatthanti chaṇanimittaṃ chaṇahetūti attho’’ti. Evañca sati pucchāsabhāgatāvissajjanāya hoti, esa nayo īdisesu.
为何他给予了机会?因而说“tena”等。其中“hi”字表原因。“So hāyasmā”等句,是针对“sahāpi vināpi na sakkā”(无论共存还是分离,皆不可能)这一说法,逐一显示其原因。有些人说“tamatthaṃ vivarati”(它揭示其义),这并不合理,因为已显示“tasmā”这一表原因的语句。在“tasmā”等显示原因之处,“hi”字正是原因指示词。正如所谓“仅表标记、如折枝譬喻般的不变词”,即用于此类情形。正在学习者,故为“有学”;或者,所学即是学处,那学处本身就是他的戒,故为“有学”。因为他尚未完成所学,心又倾向于彼,故一向以学为性——不像无学那样已完成所学、于彼止息了精勤;也不像放逸的凡夫,心不倾向于彼,如同欺诈者。此处依派生词义,取其“以彼为本性”之义,如“kāruṇiko”(悲悯者)。又或者,依圣者之生,于三学中已生起,或于彼中存在,故为“有学”。又,依此而见,故为“见”,即道果正见;与见俱,故为“有学”。由于上三道的作用尚未完成,故为“有应作”。“Assa”即“anena”,与“appaccakkhaṃ nāma”这一句相连。或者,a...显示巴利原文
Kasmā panassa okāsamakāsīti āha ‘‘tenā’’tiādi. Hi-saddo kāraṇatthe. ‘‘So hāyasmā’’tiādinā ‘‘sahāpi vināpi na sakkā’’ti vuttavacane paccekaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘tamatthaṃ vivaratī’’ti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ ‘‘tasmā’’ti kāraṇavacanadassanato. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā hi kāraṇadassanaṭṭhāne kāraṇajotakoyeva hi-saddo. Saññāṇamattajotakā sākhābhaṅgopamā hi nipātāti, evamīdisesu. Sikkhatīti sekkho, sikkhanaṃ vā sikkhā, sāyeva tassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā, tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo, na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭippassaddhussāho, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto, kitavasena viya ca taddhitavasenidha tappakatiyattho gayhati yathā ‘‘kāruṇiko’’ti. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsupi sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Apica ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi, saha ikkhāyāti sekkho. Uparimaggattayakiccassa apariyositattā saha karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyo. Assāti anena, ‘‘appaccakkhaṃ nāmā’’ti etena sambandho. Assāti vā ‘‘natthī’’ti ettha kiriyāpaṭiggahakavacanaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvato appaccakkhaṃ nāma natthi. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘asammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ nāma natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, taṃ’’ dve sahassāni bhikkhuto’’ti vuttampi bhagavato santike paṭiggahitameva nāmāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi sāvakabhāsitampi suttaṃ ‘‘buddhabhāsita’’nti vuccatīti.
以“Yathāhā”等句,尊者阿难引来自己所说之偈作为证明。此偈是尊者阿难在《瞿波迦目犍连经》中,回答一位名叫瞿波迦目犍连的婆罗门所问:“你在佛教中以多闻著称,有多少法被大师所说、为你所持?”时所说;或者也在《长老偈》中,为显示自身功德而说。这里略义为:我从佛、大师处领受、掌握了八万二千法蕴;又从比丘——法将舍利弗等比丘处,领受了二千法蕴。凡在我舌端、心中现行、熟练、善诵之法,那些法合为八万四千法蕴。然而有些人说:“‘yeme’此处,应分解为‘ye ime’,作如此连接:ye ime dhammā buddhassa, bhikkhūnañca pavattino pavattitā, tesu dhammesu buddhato dvāsīti sahassāni ahaṃ gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto gaṇhiṃ, evaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni。”这样的连接法,因为无法了知“法蕴唯此数量”的定论,……显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā āyasmatā ānandena vuttagāthameva sādhakabhāvena dasseti. Ayañhi gāthā gopakamoggallānena nāma brāhmaṇena ‘‘buddhasāsane tvaṃ bahussutoti pākaṭo, kittakā dhammā te satthārā bhāsitā, tayā ca dhāritā’’ti pucchitena tassa paṭivacanaṃ dentena āyasmatā ānandeneva gopakamoggallānasutte, attano guṇadassanavasena vā theragāthāyampi bhāsitā. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – buddhato satthu santikā dvāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni ahaṃ gaṇhiṃ adhigaṇhiṃ, dve dhammakkhandhasahassāni bhikkhuto dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikā gaṇhiṃ. Ye dhammā me jivhāgge, hadaye vā pavattino paguṇā vācuggatā, te dhammā tadubhayaṃ sampiṇḍetvā caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti. Keci pana ‘‘yemeti ettha ‘ye ime’ti padacchedaṃ katvā ye ime dhammā buddhassa, bhikkhūnañca pavattino pavattitā, tesu dhammesu buddhato dvāsīti sahassāni ahaṃ gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto gaṇhiṃ, evaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti sambandhaṃ vadanti, ayañca sambandho ‘‘ettakāyeva dhammakkhandhā’’ti sanniṭṭhānassa aviññāyamānattā kecivādo nāma kato.
由于结集具有多方面的利益,因此“sahāpi na sakkā”(俱亦不能)这一应说的理由,比“vināpi na sakkā”(离亦不能)的理由更为有力。是故,在彼处先示以问难,再作遮止,故有“yadi evaṃ”等语。其中,yadi evaṃ意为:若如此,若离此则不能,若是如此。Sekkhopi samānoti:即使是处于有学位之人。此处māna一词表特征。Bahukārattā:因有多饶益。kāra一词表饶益,如“appakampi kataṃ kāraṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ”(虽作微少饶益,福果亦大)等句中所说。Assāti:应是。Atha一词用于询问。他们举出问句中“atha tvaṃ kena vaṇṇena”之例。然而应说其义为“evaṃ sante”(若如是)。Parūpavādavivajjanato:因欲避免那些不知前述缘由之人,将诽谤加诸于他人,故有此举。他以“thero hi”等语阐明此义。Ativiya vissattho:极度地信赖。如何得知?故说“tathā hi”等语。或者,此语是为令其坚固。通达声韵者说:“vuttañh……”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sahāpi na sakkā’’ti vattabbahetuto ‘‘vināpi na sakkā’’ti vattabbahetuyeva balavataro saṅgītiyā bahukārattā. Tasmā tattha codanaṃ dassetvā pariharituṃ ‘‘yadi eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadi evanti evaṃ vinā yadi na sakkā, tathā satīti attho. Sekkhopi samānoti sekkhapuggalo samānopi. Māna-saddo hettha lakkhaṇe. Bahukārattāti bahūpakārattā. Upakāravacano hi kāra-saddo ‘‘appakampi kataṃ kāraṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphala’’ntiādīsu viya. Assāti bhaveyya. Atha-saddo pucchāyaṃ. Pañhe ‘‘atha tvaṃ kena vaṇṇenā’’ti hi payogamudāharanti. ‘‘Evaṃ sante’’ti pana attho vattabbo. Parūpavādavivajjanatoti yathāvuttakāraṇaṃ ajānantānaṃ paresaṃ āropitaupavādato vivajjitukāmattā. Taṃ vivarati ‘‘thero hī’’tiādinā. Ativiya vissatthoti atirekaṃ vissāsiko. Kena viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Daḷhīkaraṇaṃ vā etaṃ vacanaṃ. ‘‘Vuttañhi, tathā hi iccete daḷhīkaraṇatthe’’ti hi vadanti saddavidū. Nanti ānandattheraṃ. ‘‘Ovadatī’’ti iminā sambandho. Ānandattherassa yebhuyyena navakāya parisāya vibbhamane mahākassapatthero ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) āha. Tathā hi parinibbute bhagavati mahākassapatthero bhagavato parinibbāne sannipatitassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe nisīditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ pañcasate bhikkhū uccinitvā ‘‘rājagahe āvuso vassaṃ vasantā dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyissāma, tumhe pure vassūpanāyikāya attano attano palibodhaṃ pacchinditvā rājagahe sannipatathā’’ti vatvā attanā rājagahaṃ gato.
阿难尊者亦持世尊的衣钵,劝导大众之后,便前往舍卫城。从那里出城,一路向王舍城而去,并在南山一带游化。那时,阿难尊者门下约有三十位常随弟子,大多还是年少沙弥或仅受具足戒一两年的比丘,他们竟纷纷舍戒还俗了。他们因何出家,又为何还俗呢?据说,他们的父母曾心想:‘阿难尊者是世尊所信赖的人,他为大众请得了八种殊胜之法而得以随侍,能请动世尊前往任何他希望去的地方。我们让儿子在他座下出家,如此他便能请世尊前来。世尊驾临时,我们便能获得极大的恭敬供养。’正是由于这个原因,亲属们令他们出家了。然而世尊般涅槃后,这个愿望便落空了,于是仅过了一天,他们便被劝说还俗了。那时,大迦叶尊者见到阿难尊者结束南山的游化回到王舍城,便这样对他说道。此事在《迦叶相应》中有记载:显示巴利原文
Ānandattheropi bhagavato pattacīvaramādāya mahājanaṃ saññāpento sāvatthiṃ gantvā tato nikkhamma rājagahaṃ gacchanto dakkhiṇāgirismiṃ cārikaṃ cari. Tasmiṃ samaye ānandattherassa tiṃsamattā saddhivihārikā yebhuyyena kumārakā ekavassikaduvassikabhikkhū ceva anupasampannā ca vibbhamiṃsu. Kasmā panete pabbajitā, kasmā ca vibbhamiṃsūti? Tesaṃ kira mātāpitaro cintesuṃ ‘‘ānandatthero satthuvissāsiko aṭṭha vare yācitvā upaṭṭhahati, icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ satthāraṃ gahetvā gantuṃ sakkoti, amhākaṃ dārake etassa santike pabbajeyyāma, evaṃ so satthāraṃ gahetvā āgamissati, tasmiṃ āgate mayaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ kātuṃ labhissāmā’’ti. Iminā tāva kāraṇena nesaṃ ñātakā te pabbājesuṃ, satthari pana parinibbute tesaṃ sā patthanā upacchinnā, atha ne ekadivaseneva uppabbājesuṃ. Atha ānandattheraṃ dakkhiṇāgirismiṃ cārikaṃ caritvā rājagahamāgataṃ disvā mahākassapatthero evamāhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte –
“既然如此,阿难贤友,你为何还与这些新戒比丘同行游化呢?他们诸根不摄,于食不知量,又懈怠于警寤修行。我看你这样,就像在践踏庄稼!我看你这样,就像在毁坏善信之家!阿难贤友,你的随众正在溃散啊;阿难贤友,你这新入道的‘嫩苗’正在凋零;这个年少之人,真是不知分寸啊!”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kiñcarahi tvaṃ āvuso ānanda imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te āvuso ānanda parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti.
“大迦叶尊者,我头上已生白发,然而直到今日,我们仍不能免于被大迦叶尊者唤作‘童子’。”——“阿难贤友,正因如此,你才与这些新比丘一同游方——他们诸根不守、饮食不知量、不勤于警寤。依我看,你这是在践踏庄稼,依我看,你这是在毁坏信众!阿难贤友,你的随众正在瓦解,阿难贤友,你的新乳正在漏失,这童子真不知分寸啊!”显示巴利原文
Api me bhante kassapa sirasmiṃ palitāni jātāni, atha ca pana mayaṃ ajjāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa kumārakavādā na muccāmāti. Tathā hi pana tvaṃ āvuso ānanda imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te āvuso ānanda parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
其中,“依我看,你这是在践踏庄稼”:意为如同毁坏庄稼般四处游走。“依我看,你这是在毁坏信众”:意为如同毁坏信众般四处游走。“瓦解”:即崩溃、破裂。“阿难贤友,你的新乳正在漏失”:意为阿难贤友,这些由你所哺育的新众,大多是受具足戒仅一二年的年少比丘与沙弥,他们正在崩溃。“这童子不知分寸”:意为这童子不知自身的分寸,这是长老在呵责他。“不能免于被唤作童子”:即未能脱离童子的称谓。“正因如此”:是为了说明应当如此言说的原因而作此说。此处意思是:正因你与这些缺乏根律仪、于食不知量的新比丘一同游方,故与童子同行,理应被称为“童子”。显示巴利原文
Tattha sassaghātaṃ maññe carasīti sassaṃ ghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasīti kulāni upaghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Olujjatīti palujjati bhijjati. Palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyāti āvuso ānanda ete tuyhaṃ pāyena yebhuyyena navakā ekavassikaduvassikadaharā ceva sāmaṇerā ca palujjanti. Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āha. Kumārakavādā na muccāmāti kumārakavādato na muccāma. Tathā hi pana tvanti idamassa evaṃ vattabbatāya kāraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yasmā tvaṃ imehi navehi indriyasaṃvaravirahitehi bhojane amattaññūhi saddhiṃ vicarasi, tasmā kumārakehi saddhiṃ vicaranto ‘‘kumārako’’ti vattabbataṃ arahasīti.
“这童子不知量”——在此,“vā”(或)字是填词。因为“vā”字见于比喻、集合、疑问、分别、填词等多种意义。如此,它在“彼亦因彼而明智”等(法句经63)中见于比喻,意为相似性。在“智者仙人亦知彼”等(经集213)中见于集合。在“谁为谁之谁”等(波罗夷296)中见于疑问。在“这些沙门婆罗门中,此人是极愚极痴者”等(长部181)中见于分别。在“诸比丘,凡任何沙门或婆罗门”等(中部1.170;相应部2.13)中亦见于分别。在“我不食叶,此非我食”等中见于填词。在此亦应视为填词。因此,法护阿阇梨在提取“vā”字之义时说:“‘这童子不知量’等中之‘vā’为填词”。相应部注中亦如此说:“‘这童子不知量’——此童子不知自己的分寸,这是长老在呵责他”(相应部注2.154)。在此,亦因“vata”(确实)一言语辞优美而说。将“na vāyaṃ”作“na ve ayaṃ”分词,指出“ve”字之义而说为“vata”。因为语法家们将“ve”字作决定义,保持原巴利用例而引用。然而金刚觉长老说:“此处‘na vāyanti’之‘vā’为异说,‘不知其他,不知其他’”(金刚觉疏初大结集篇解说),这只是他个人的见解,因为相应部注中未如此说。这是产生非难的原因,应以“其中,有些人”等来会通。显示巴利原文
Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ettha vā-saddo padapūraṇe. Vā-saddo hi upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavissaggavikappapadapūraṇādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccaye. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 181) vavassagge. ‘‘Ye hi keci bhikkhave samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsupi (ma. ni. 1.170; saṃ. ni. 2.13) vikappe. ‘‘Na vāhaṃ paṇṇaṃ bhuñjāmi, na hetaṃ mayha bhojana’’ntiādīsu padapūraṇe. Idhāpi padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Teneva ca ācariyadhammapālattherena vā-saddassa atthuddhāraṃ karontena vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu padapūraṇe’’ti. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyampi idameva vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānāsīti theraṃ tajjento āhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.154). Etthāpi ‘‘vatā’’ti vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na vāya’’nti etassa vā ‘‘na ve aya’’nti padacchedaṃ katvā ve-saddassatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘vatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ve-saddassa ekaṃsatthabhāve tadeva pāḷiṃ payogaṃ katvā udāharanti neruttikā. Vajirabuddhitthero pana evaṃ vadati ‘‘na vāyanti ettha ca vāti vibhāsā, aññāsipi na aññāsipī’’ti, (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) taṃ tassa matimattaṃ saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāya tathā avuttattā. Idamekaṃ parūpavādasambhavakāraṇaṃ ‘‘tattha kecī’’tiādinā sambajjhitabbaṃ.
他又说了另一个原因:“尊者是释迦族出身”。尊者阿难生于释迦族,或因释迦族之身份而著名。其中……乃至……应呵责,这样连接。他又说了另一个原因:“是如来的弟弟,是叔父之子”。“弟弟”在此是幼弟,以叔父之子的身份,而非依年龄为同生兄弟。显示巴利原文
Aññampi kāraṇamāha ‘‘sakyakulappasuto cāyasmā’’ti. Sākiyakule jāto, sākiyakulabhāvena vā pākaṭo ca āyasmā ānando. Tattha…pe… upavadeyyunti sambandho. Aññampi kāraṇaṃ vadati ‘‘tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto’’ti. Bhātāti cettha kaniṭṭhabhātā cūḷapituputtabhāvena, na pana vayasā sahajātabhāvato.
净饭、斛饭,释饭、白饭与甘露饭,
甘露、蜜生;以上是五人,这是那二人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Suddhodano dhotodano, sakkasukkāmitodanā; Amitā pālitā cāti, ime pañca imā duve’’ti.
如上所述,最年幼的甘露饭之子即是尊者阿难。在《满足希求》中也说:显示巴利原文
Vuttesu hi sabbakaniṭṭhassa amitodanasakkassa putto āyasmā ānando. Vuttañhi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ –
他曾在十万劫中广行布施,与我们的菩萨一同生于兜率天,从彼处寿终之后,降生于甘露饭之家;因他令一切亲族欢喜愉悦,故出生时便被命名为“阿难”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kappasatasahassaṃ pana dānaṃ dadamāno amhākaṃ bodhisattena saddhiṃ tusitapure nibbattitvā tato cuto amitodanasakkassa gehe nibbatti, athassa sabbe ñātake ānandite pamodite karonto jātoti ‘ānando’tveva nāmamakaṃsū’’ti.
同样的说法也见于《破除痴网》:显示巴利原文
Tathāyeva vuttaṃ papañcasūdaniyampi –
然而另有人说:尊者阿难并非与世尊同时出生,而是依年龄及身为叔父之子故,实为世尊的幼弟。因为在《满足希求》第一品注释的同生计数中,并未将他列入。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññe pana vadanti – nāyasmā ānando bhagavatā sahajāto, vayasā ca cūḷapituputtatāya ca bhagavato kaniṭṭhabhātāyeva. Tathā hi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ ekanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ sahajātagaṇane so na vuto’’ti.
凡是所说的,便应当受持。“此处”是指在那放逸等的状态存在时。意思是:极度放逸的释迦族出身者、作为如来之兄弟的状态。因为以状态表示状态的特征时,有时会成就原因的意义。正如阿阇梨法护长老在《指导论注》中解释“若牛群正匆忙而行”之偈颂时所说:显示巴利原文
Yaṃ vuccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ vissatthādibhāve sati. Ativissatthasakyakulappasutatathāgatabhātubhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe hi katthaci hetvattho sampajjati. Tathā hi ācariyadhammapālattherena nettiṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘gunnañce taramānāna’’nti gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
“‘所有那些牛都歪斜而行’的意思是:所有那些母牛都只是弯曲而行。为何呢?因为导绳歪斜而行,因为导绳弯曲而行,由于导绳弯曲而行的缘故——这是它的含义。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbā tā jimhaṃ gacchantīti sabbā tā gāviyo kuṭilameva gacchanti, kasmā? Nette jimhagate sati nette kuṭilaṃ gate sati, nettassa kuṭilaṃ gatattāti attho’’ti.
在《优陀那注》释“此有故彼有”经文时也说:“应知:依处格表示原因义,以原因的状态,即标示果的状态与其不相离。”这里的“此处”,是指在那作为征相的放逸等之中,这是其含义,他们也称此为“于彼收集”。如“chandāgamanaṃ”一词,此处应拆解为“chandā āgamanaṃ viyā”。而“chandā”是表示原因的从格,意为“由欲而来、由欲而转起”,即“因欲而作不应作之事”。“chandāgamanaṃ”也可解为“以相应之力趣向于欲”,由此转起的,是趋向恶趣的不善心生起。或者,不适当的趣行名为“非趣行”,由欲而起的非趣行即是“chandāgamanaṃ”,意为:由欲、由爱著而生起的不适当趣行与转起,如同作不应作之事。成就无学者的无碍解,或已证得彼无碍解,故如此说;或者,他们是无学者且已证得无碍解者,即属于此类。于“有学得无碍解证得者”中,此理亦然。“回避”一词中的“anta”是原因义,意为“以回避为原因”。“随顺”即允许、请求,这是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Udānaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti suttapadavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘hetuatthatā bhummavacanassa kāraṇassa bhāvena tadavinābhāvī phalassa bhāvo lakkhīyatīti veditabbā’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 1.1). Tatthāti vā nimittabhūte vissatthādimhīti attho, tasmiṃ uccinanetipi vadanti. Chandāgamanaṃ viyāti ettha chandā āgamanaṃ viyāti padacchedo. Chandāti ca hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ, chandena āgamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viyāti attho, chandena akattabbakaraṇamivāti vuttaṃ hoti, chandaṃ vā āgacchati sampayogavasenāti chandāgamanaṃ, tathā pavatto apāyagamanīyo akusalacittuppādo. Atha vā ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ agamanaṃ. Chandena agamanaṃ chandāgamanaṃ, chandena sinehena ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viya akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asekkhabhūtā paṭisambhidā, taṃpattāti tathā, asekkhā ca te paṭisambhidāppattā cāti vā tathā, tādise. Sekkhapaṭisambhidāppattanti etthāpi esa nayo. Parivajjentoti hetvatthe antasaddo, parivajjanahetūti attho. Anumatiyāti anuññāya, yācanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“虽然是有学”这句话,是因为只推选了无学者而说的,并非因为有学尚可能行于非道。因为在第一道时便已断除了四种非道之行,所以,虽然是有学,但长老仍说“请推选具寿阿难”——这是其中的关联。然而,这并不是说“虽然是有学,但仍不能行于非道”。以“不能”等语,在法的结集中显示了他的阿罗汉体性,并讲述其现前功德,由此表明:当结集要对法与律作出决断时,他不会因欲等因由而歪曲说法,必将如实而说。不应行、或不适当的行,即是“非道”,此即其义。“通晓”即已通达、已领受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiñcāpi sekkho’’ti idaṃ asekkhānaṃyeva uccinitattā vuttaṃ, na sekkhānaṃ agatigamanasambhavena. Paṭhamamaggeneva hi cattāri agatigamanāni pahīyanti, tasmā kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi thero āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ uccinatūti sambandho. Na pana kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi abhabbo agatiṃ gantunti. ‘‘Abhabbo’’tiādinā pana dhammasaṅgītiyā tassa arahabhāvaṃ dassento vijjamānaguṇe katheti, tena saṅgītiyā dhammavinayavinicchaye sampatte chandādivasena aññathā akathetvā yathābhūtameva kathessatīti dasseti. Na gantabbā, ananurūpā vā gatīti agati, taṃ. Pariyattoti adhigato uggahito.
以“如是”等语,显示确定的人数。“已收集”指推选之后而执取者。再者,“如是……收集”是结语,而“由彼具寿”等语,他们也说是显示确定的人数。显示巴利原文
‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā sanniṭṭhānagaṇanaṃ dasseti. Uccinitenāti uccinitvā gahitena. Apica evaṃ…pe… uccinīti nigamanaṃ, ‘‘tenāyasmatā’’tiādi pana sanniṭṭhānagaṇanadassanantipi vadanti.
如此显示了结集者筛选的方式后,为显示为结集而选择地点等其他方式,便说了“那时……”等语。这里,“他生起此念”是指他生起如此的思虑。“nu”字表示思虑。“王舍城”,《结句释》中说:“是取王舍城的近郊而说。”牛群在这里觅食,所以称为“行处”,也就是牛群觅食之处;同样,比丘们行往觅食之处,也叫作“行处”。那处很大,或者说在那里有极大的行处,所以称为“大行处”。因为有十八座大寺院,所以床座众多。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅgāyakavicinanappakāraṃ dassetvā aññampi saṅgāyanatthaṃ desavicinanādippakāraṃ dassento ‘‘atha kho’’tiādimāha. Tattha etadahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Nu-saddena hi parivitakkanaṃ dasseti. Rājagahanti ‘‘rājagahasāmantaṃ gahetvā vutta’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vadanti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, so viyāti gocaro, bhikkhūnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, mahanto so assa, etthāti vā mahāgocaraṃ. Aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvihārānampi atthitāya pahūtasenāsanaṃ.
“坚固业”是指长久住立的业。“异类人”指如须跋陀那样的人。“可能破坏”即可能进行遮止。“iti”字是“此”义,意思是:以此思惟为因,他生起此念。为了生起尊重想,以白二甘马告知僧团,而不是仅仅以征求式的白羯磨——这是其中的意旨。显示巴利原文
Thāvarakammanti ciraṭṭhāyikammaṃ. Visabhāgapuggalo subhaddasadiso. Ukkoṭeyyāti nivāreyya. Iti-saddo idamatthe, iminā manasikārena hetubhūtena etadahosīti attho. Garubhāvajananatthaṃ ñattidutiyena kammena saṅghaṃ sāvesi, na apalokanañattikammamattenāti adhippāyo.
为了说明这是何时所作,而说“此则是……”等语。为了显示如此所作的情况可由这种计数得知,而说“因为世尊……”等语。“atha”是不久义的不变词,意思是“就在般涅槃之后”。因为“七日”是包含了般涅槃之日而说的。“assa”指世尊,与“遗体”一词相关联。一再称扬能激发厌离之事,唱诵与无常想相应的歌,以供养作为游戏,因此是善美的游戏日,名为“善戏日”;或者,以成就自他利益之义而称为“善”的善士们,一再称扬能激发厌离之事而游戏的日子,也说得通。而在之前的七日中,仅有一部分时间进行了善戏。特别地,则是在舍利供养等日。正如《大般涅槃经注》中所说——显示巴利原文
Kadā panāyaṃ katāti āha ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi. Evaṃ katabhāvo ca imāya gaṇanāya viññāyatīti dasseti ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādinā. Athāti anantaratthe nipāto, parinibbānantaramevāti attho. Sattāhanti hi parinibbānadivasampi saṅgaṇhitvā vuttaṃ. Assāti bhagavato, ‘‘sarīra’’nti iminā sambandho. Saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā aniccatāpaṭisaññuttāni gītāni gāyitvā pūjāvasena kīḷanato sundaraṃ kīḷanadivasā sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma, saparahitasādhanaṭṭhena vā sādhūti vuttānaṃ sappurisānaṃ saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā kīḷanadivasātipi yujjati. Imasmiñca purimasattāhe ekadeseneva sādhukīḷanamakaṃsu. Visesato pana dhātupūjādivasesuyeva. Tathā hi vuttaṃ mahāparinibbānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.235) –
因为在之前的两个七日里,那些比丘们为僧团打理坐卧之处,准备嚼食与啖食,无暇行善戏。于是他们想:‘这个七日,我们当行善戏。然而,有可能某人察觉我们放逸后,会来迎取舍利,我等应设好守卫,再行游戏。’他们便这样做了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ito purimesu hi dvīsu sattāhesu te bhikkhū saṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ karontā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ saṃvidahantā sādhukīḷikāya okāsaṃ na labhiṃsu, tato nesaṃ ahosi ‘imaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷissāma, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ amhākaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā kocideva āgantvā dhātuyo gaṇheyya, tasmā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā kīḷissāmā’ti, tena te evamakaṃsū’’ti.
即便如此,由于他们也行了舍利供养,故有舍利供养日等称。正因于薄伽梵已无余应作之事,虽只是略作部分,却也以此善戏而被称为‘善戏日’,故云:‘如是,这七日便得名为善戏日。’显示巴利原文
Tathāpi te dhātupūjāyapi katattā dhātupūjādivasā nāma. Imeyeva visesena bhagavati kattabbassa aññassa abhāvato ekadesena katampi sādhukīḷanaṃ upādāya ‘‘sādhukīḷanadivasā’’ti pākaṭā jātāti āha ‘‘evaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma ahesu’’nti.
‘火葬堆’指高二十肘的栴檀木火葬堆。至于说‘以精勤事之力,火葬堆被火烧了七日’,并非指不间断地整整燃烧七天,因为实际仅在最后一日才燃烧;故应解为‘在七日之内’。因在前一七日与后一七日之间的那段七日里,无论在哪一天燃烧,皆可说‘在七日中燃烧’。显示巴利原文
Citakāyāti vīsasataratanuccāya candanadārucitakāya, padhānakiccavaseneva ca sattāhaṃ citakāyaṃ agginā jhāyīti vuttaṃ. Na hi accantasaṃyogavasena nirantaraṃ sattāhameva agginā jhāyi tattha pacchimadivaseyeva jhāyitattā, tasmā sattāhasminti attho veditabbo. Purimapacchimānañhi dvinnaṃ sattāhānamantare sattāhe yattha katthacipi divase jhāyamāne sati ‘‘sattāhe jhāyī’’ti vattuṃ yujjati. Yathāha –
那时,有四位末罗族首领,洗过头,穿着新衣,心想:‘我们要点燃世尊的火葬堆。’却无法点燃。等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṃ nhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā ‘mayaṃ bhagavato citakaṃ āḷimpessāmā’ti na sakkonti āḷimpetu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.233).
“作矛栅”:这是就相状而言,指末罗王们令手持矛、剑等武器的人守护世尊的舍利。因为手持矛的人,矛如‘枪在挥舞’,由于从四周守护而呈现栅栏的样貌,故称‘矛栅’。‘会议厅’是国王们的一座大讲堂。因为在出征等时候,国王们站在那里,作出安排、划定界限:‘这么多人走前面,这么多人走后面,这么多人走两侧,这么多人骑象,这么多人骑马,这么多人乘车’,所以那个地方被称为‘会议厅’。又,从出征处回来后,直到各家各户完成涂湿牛粪等事的两三天里,国王们在那里停留、休息、消除疲劳,故也称‘会议厅’;或者,国王们共同商议事务的房屋,将‘ha’变为‘dha’,并插入随韵,故称‘会议厅’;或者,因为国王们聚集在那里,以‘此时应耕,此时应种’等方式商议在家事务,在那里维系着或断或续的在家生活,故称‘会议厅’。从毗舍佉月满月日起,至毗舍佉月的黑月分,依僧伽罗人的习惯,计为十六天;加上质多罗月白分中的五天,所以说‘如是已过二十一天’。他们是在最后一天才分配舍利,而此甘马语也是在同一天所作。因此说‘质多罗月白分第五日’等。其中,质多罗显示巴利原文
Sattipañjaraṃkatvāti sattikhaggādihatthehi purisehi mallarājūnaṃ bhagavato dhātuārakkhakaraṇaṃ upalakkhaṇavasenāha. Sattihatthā purisā hi sattiyo yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, tāhi samantato rakkhāpanavasena pañjarapaṭibhāgattā sattipañjaraṃ. Sandhāgāraṃ nāma rājūnaṃ ekā mahāsālā. Uyyogakālādīsu hi rājāno tattha ṭhatvā ‘‘ettakā purato gacchantu, ettakā pacchato, ettakā ubhohi passehi, ettakā hatthīsu abhiruhantu, ettakā assesu, ettakā rathesū’’ti evaṃ sandhiṃ karonti mariyādaṃ bandhanti, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘sandhāgāra’’nti vuccati. Apica uyyogaṭṭhānato āgantvāpi yāva gehesu allagomayaparibhaṇḍādīni karonti, tāva dve tīṇi divasāni rājāno tattha santhambhanti vissamanti parissayaṃ vinodentītipi sandhāgāraṃ, rājūnaṃ vā saha atthānusāsanaṃ agārantipi sandhāgāraṃ ha-kārassa dha-kāraṃ, anusarāgamañca katvā, yasmā vā rājāno tattha sannipatitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle kasituṃ vaṭṭati, imasmiṃ kāle vapitu’’nti evamādinā nayena gharāvāsakiccāni sammantayanti, tasmā chinnavicchinnaṃ gharāvāsaṃ tattha sandhārentītipi sandhāgāraṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamito paṭṭhāya yāva visākhamāsassa amāvāsī, tāva soḷasa divasā sīhaḷavohāravasena gahitattā, jeṭṭhamūlamāsassa sukkapakkhe ca pañca divasāti āha ‘‘iti ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti. Tattha carimadivaseyeva dhātuyo bhājayiṃsu, tasmiṃyeva ca divase ayaṃ kammavācā katā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamiya’’ntiādi. Tattha jeṭṭhanakkhattaṃ vā mūlanakkhattaṃ vā tassa māsassa puṇṇamiyaṃ candena yuttaṃ, tasmā so māso ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlamāso’’ti vuccati. Anācāranti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ anācāraṃ.
如果是这样,为什么在《律藏注释》和《吉祥经注释》中说‘在七个善戏日和七个舍利供养日过去之后’呢?因为在计入七个舍利供养日时,由于与之不相离,中间的火葬堆燃烧七天也被计入了,所以似乎没有单独说明。如果是这样,为什么又说‘半个月已过,还有一个半月剩余’呢?这不是过失。因为少许的不足或超出不计入总数,所以即使超出半个月五天,也说‘半个月已过’,如同在《八十二蕴行处》中某处说‘八十蕴行处’一样;同样,即使不足一个半月五天,也说‘一个半月剩余’,如同在《念处分别注释》中,不足六个月半个月,也说‘应诵习六个月’一样,否则注释书之间就会有矛盾。再者,依长部诵者的意见,以三个七天计,此处说‘已过二十一天’。而在《律藏》、《经集》、《小诵》的注释中,依小部诵者的意见,将燃烧日计为一天,以其余两个七天计,说‘半个月已过,还有一个半月剩余’。应知,如同在第一次结集佛语等中一样,注释书中也因各诵者的意见而有说法差异。对此,他们这样说:从般涅槃之日起,最初只有四个善戏日;之后是三个善戏日兼火葬堆燃烧日;之后只有一显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kasmā vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) maṅgalasuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (khu. pā. aṭṭha. maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanā) ‘‘sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu, sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesu vītivattesū’’ti vuttanti? Sattasu dhātupūjādivasesu gahitesu tadavinābhāvato majjhe citakāya jhāyanasattāhampi gahitamevāti katvā visuṃ na vuttaṃ viya dissati. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hoti, tasmā appakena adhikopi samudāyo anadhiko viya hotīti katvā aḍḍhamāsato adhikepi pañcadivase ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto’’ti vuttaṃ dvāsītikhandhakavattānaṃ katthaci ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vacanaṃ viya, tathā appakena ūnopi samudāyo anūno viya hotīti katvā diyaḍḍhamāsato ūnepi pañcadivase ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti vuttaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. 356) chamāsato ūnepi aḍḍhamāse ‘‘chamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo’’ti vacanaṃ viya, aññathā aṭṭhakathānaṃ aññamaññavirodho siyā. Apica dīghabhāṇakānaṃ matena tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ vasena ‘‘ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Vinayasuttanipātakhuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāsu pana khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena ekameva jhāyanadivasaṃ katvā tadavasesānaṃ dvinnaṃ sattāhānaṃ vasena ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Paṭhamabuddhavacanādīsu viya taṃ taṃ bhāṇakānaṃ matena aṭṭhakathāsupi vacanabhedo hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Evampettha vadanti – parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya ādimhi cattāro sādhukīḷanadivasāyeva, tato paraṃ tayo sādhukīḷanadivasā ceva citakajhāyanadivasā ca, tato paraṃ eko citakajhāyanadivasoyeva, tato paraṃ tayo citakajhāyanadivasā ceva dhātupūjādivasā ca, tato paraṃ cattāro dhātupūjādivasāyeva, iti taṃ taṃ kiccānurūpagaṇanavasena tīṇi sattāhāni paripūrenti, agahitaggahaṇena pana aḍḍhamāsova hoti. ‘‘Ekavīsati divasā gatā’’ti idha vuttavacanañca taṃ taṃ kiccānurūpagaṇaneneva. Evañhi catūsupi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttavacanaṃ sametīti vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Vajirabuddhittherena pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkantoti ettha eko divaso naṭṭho, so pāṭipadadivaso, kolāhaladivaso nāma so, tasmā idha na gahito’’ti, (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) taṃ na sundaraṃ parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 2.227) pāṭipadadivasatoyeva paṭṭhāya sattāhassa vuttattā, aṭṭhakathāyañca parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gaṇitattā. Tathā hi parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gaṇaneneva jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamī ekavīsatimo divaso hoti.
“四十天”是指从胜月白分第六天算起,至阿沙荼月满月为止所计的天数。“在此期间”,即在此四十天之内。疾病本身即是疾病的障碍。对导师与戒师应尽的义务即是导师与戒师的障碍,父母之障碍亦然。“障碍”(palibodha)是指阻碍、遮止所欲之义或事,使之不能进行;此字由 ra 转为 la 而成。断除这些障碍后,当行应作之事;也就是由结集者断除这一切障碍后,应作那名为“法与律结集”的应作之事。显示巴利原文
Cattālīsa divasāti jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhachaṭṭhadivasato yāva āsaḷhī puṇṇamī, tāva gaṇetvā vuttaṃ. Etthantareti cattālīsadivasabbhantare. Rogo eva rogapalibodho. Ācariyupajjhāyesu kattabbakiccameva ācariyupajjhāyapalibodho, tathā mātāpitupalibodho. Yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ, kammaṃ vā paribundheti uparodheti pavattituṃ na detīti palibodho ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā. Taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ karotūti saṅgāhakena chinditabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanasaṅkhātaṃ tadeva karaṇīyaṃ karotu.
“其他大长老”指阿那律长老等。“被忧箭所中”指被名为忧的箭所穿透、所刺伤。因未断除无明与渴爱的随眠,以此无明与渴爱所造之业,于有、生处、趣、住、众生居处中,产生、令生起名为五蕴的自身,故称为“生者”(jano)。又或,令烦恼生起、已生起、将生起,故为“生者”,即广大众生。“一批又一批”指来了一批又一批,如同“一一”之义。于此有人会问:“此处说‘长老由自己的五百随众围绕前往王舍城,其他大长老也各自带领自己的随从,为了安慰为忧箭所中的大众,而前往各方’,这与《一切善见》中所说‘大迦叶长老说:贤友,我们去王舍城吧,带领一半比丘僧走一条路,阿那律长老也带领一半走一条路’的语句,岂不互相矛盾?因为这里的意思是大迦叶长老等各自仅与自己的随从比丘前往各方,而那里却说大迦叶长老与阿那律长老各带一半僧众分别走一条路。”答曰:此两种说法并不矛盾,因为义理上是相合的。此处说诸长老各自前往,那里则以理趣显示;此处说与各自随众前往,那里则说与一半僧众前往。所谓“一半僧众”,实指各自随众所成的比丘群,显示巴利原文
Aññepi mahātherāti anuruddhattherādayo. Sokasallasamappitanti sokasaṅkhātena sallena anupaviṭṭhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ. Asamucchinnaavijjātaṇhānusayattā avijjātaṇhābhisaṅkhātena kammunā bhavayonigatiṭṭhitisattāvāsesu khandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti jano. Kilese janeti, ajani, janissatīti vā jano, mahanto jano tathā, taṃ. Āgatāgatanti āgatamāgataṃ yathā ‘‘ekeko’’ti. Ettha siyā – ‘‘thero attano pañcasatāya parisāya parivutto rājagahaṃ gato, aññepi mahātherā attano attano parivāre gahetvā sokasallasamappitaṃ mahājanaṃ assāsetukāmā taṃ taṃ disaṃ pakkantā’’ti idha vuttavacanaṃ samantapāsādikāya ‘‘mahākassapatthero ‘rājagahaṃ āvuso gacchāmā’ti upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ gahetvā ekaṃ maggaṃ gato, anuruddhattheropi upaḍḍhaṃ gahetvā ekaṃ maggaṃ gato’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttavacanañca aññamaññaṃ viruddhaṃ hoti. Idha hi mahākassapattherādayo attano attano parivārabhikkhūhiyeva saddhiṃ taṃ taṃ disaṃ gatāti attho āpajjati, tattha pana mahākassapattheraanuruddhattherāyeva paccekamupaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhiṃ ekekaṃ maggaṃ gatāti? Vuccate – tadubhayampi hi vacanaṃ na virujjhati atthato saṃsandanattā. Idha hi niravasesena therānaṃ paccekagamanavacanameva tattha nayavasena dasseti, idha attano attano parisāya gamanavacanañca tattha upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhiṃ gamanavacanena. Upaḍḍhasaṅghoti hi sakasakaparisābhūto bhikkhugaṇo gayhati upaḍḍhasaddassa asamepi bhāge pavattattā. Yadi hi sannipatite saṅghe upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhinti atthaṃ gaṇheyya, tadā saṅghassa gaṇanapathamatītattā na yujjateva , yadi ca saṅgāyanatthaṃ uccinitānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ majjhe upaḍḍhasaṅghena saddhinti atthaṃ gaṇheyya, evampi tesaṃ gaṇapāmokkhānaṃyeva uccinitattā na yujjateva. Paccekagaṇino hete. Vuttañhi ‘‘sattasatasahassāni, tesu pāmokkhabhikkhavo’’ti , iti atthato saṃsandanattā tadetaṃ ubhayampi vacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ na virujjhatīti. Taṃtaṃbhāṇakānaṃ matenevaṃ vuttantipi vadanti.
应与“世尊尚未般涅槃时”等句连接。“持衣钵”在此指取用了四大天王所献的石钵与善逝衣。此钵正是世尊常所用者。如《平等行经注》中所说:“为了显示即使超过二十年安居后,此钵仍为世尊所用,清晨整理身体后,整齐穿着下衣,披上善逝衣,持石钵,由比丘僧围绕,从南门入城乞食……”他们手中持着香、花鬘等物,即手执香、花鬘等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aparinibbutassa bhagavato’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Pattacīvaramādāyāti ettha catumahārājadattiyaselamayapattaṃ, sugatacīvarañca gaṇhitvāti attho. Soyeva hi patto bhagavatā sadā paribhutto. Vuttañhi samacittapaṭipadāsuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vassaṃvutthānusārena atirekavīsativassakālepi tasseva paribhuttabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmena pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā sunivatthanivāsano sugatacīvaraṃ pārupitvā selamayapattamādāya bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvā piṇḍāya caranto’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.37) gandhamālādayo nesaṃ hattheti gandhamālādihatthā.
“在那里”指在舍卫城。“suda”仅为小品词。“与无常等相关的”,指与“诸行无常”等无常自性相连。与法相应,或适合法的,称为“法随的”,即那样的法谈。“令了知、令完全信解后”,意为令其明白、令其安稳。“所住的香室”,因常有期待故为复合词;由于是受用支提,故说“礼敬香室后”。“礼敬后”与“打开后”在此表示前时动作。正如阿阇梨舍利弗长老所说:“‘打开香室之门’应理解为:由于是受用支提,礼敬香室后,打开香室之门。”枯萎的花,其本身即是垃圾,或枯萎的花所成的垃圾。移开后,即移向原先放置处的对面。置于原处,即不越过原先放置处,就放在原处。世尊在世时应作的一切义务他都做了,这是指在住所应作的义务。而正在做时,即正在做那一切义务时。此处“māna”词缀表相。浴室的清扫与水的准备等,这些是开头;说法、教诫等是其后,即在那些时候。兽王狮子的卧姿为狮子卧,依派生词或相似称呼,世尊的卧姿也称为“狮子卧”。或因威仪具足威光而为最上卧姿,正如所说:“那时,世尊以右胁作狮子卧,足叠足,正念正知。”应连接为:“作的时间”即指正在做的时候。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tissaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277) aniccasabhāvapaṭisaññuttāya. Dhammena yuttā, dhammassa vā patirūpāti dhammī, tādisāya. Saññāpetvāti suṭṭhu jānāpetvā, samassāsetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vasitagandhakuṭinti niccasāpekkhattā samāso. Paribhogacetiyabhāvato ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vanditvā’’ti ca ‘‘vivaritvā’’ti ettha pubbakālakiriyā. Tathā hi ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivaritvāti paribhogacetiyabhāvato gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivarīti veditabba’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) milātā mālā, sāyeva kacavaraṃ, milātaṃ vā mālāsaṅkhātaṃ kacavaraṃ tathā. Atiharitvāti paṭhamaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānamabhimukhaṃ haritvā. Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvāti paṭhamaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ anatikkamitvā yathāṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapetvā. Bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsīti senāsane kattabbavattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kurumāno cāti taṃ sabbaṃ vattaṃ karonto ca. Lakkhaṇe hi ayaṃ māna-saddo. Nhānakoṭṭhakassa sammajjanañca tasmiṃ udakassa upaṭṭhāpanañca, tāni ādīni yesaṃ dhammadesanāovādādīnanti tathā, tesaṃ kālesūti attho. Sīhassa migarājassa seyyā sīhaseyyā, taddhitavasena, sadisavohārena vā bhagavato seyyāpi ‘‘sīhaseyyā’’ti vuccati. Tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā vā, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi pāde pādaṃ accādhāya sato sampajāno’’ti, (dī. ni. 2.198) taṃ. Kappanakālo karaṇakālo nanūti yojetabbaṃ.
“正如那样”等,是以譬喻阐明前述之义。其中,正如其他对世尊……既已安立敬爱又是漏尽者,于众多……且生起感恩之心而心性柔和者所作的那样;同样地,尊者阿难也对世尊的功德……成为心性柔和者而作,这是句子的连结方式。“Nti”仅为小品词。再者,以此显示如此造作的原因:正如其他具足前述性质者所作的那样,尊者阿难也因对世尊……安立敬爱、因是漏尽者、于众多……因生起感恩而心性柔和之故,而如此造作,因为原因之义是可得出的。这些语句确实内含原因,因为正是此义成为如此造作的原因。此处应以《调伏护财象本生》、《金蟹本生》、《小鹅本生》、《大鹅本生》等来阐明。功德之聚,其本身因与产生甘露之味相似,故称为甘露味。因了知彼之本性,这是“安立”一词的原因。“感恩……柔和”,指因先前受恩而正确生起的心之柔软。如此,为了显示“他以此理由而忍受”,说了“tamena”等。其中,“tamena”指那位尊者阿难。“eta”字仅为庄严文句,因为这是语言的常态:在两个代词中,只有前词具有实义。“令悚惧”,如法护阿阇梨长老所说:“世尊不是早已预……”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā ta’’ntiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya āvi karoti. Tattha yathā aññopi bhagavato…pe… patiṭṭhitapemo ceva akhīṇāsavo ca anekesu…pe… upakārasañjanitacittamaddavo ca akāsi, evaṃ āyasmāpi ānando bhagavato guṇa…pe… maddavo ca hutvā akāsīti yojanā. Nti nipātamattaṃ. Apica etena tathākaraṇahetuṃ dasseti, yathā aññepi yathāvuttasabhāvā akaṃsu, tathā āyasmāpi ānando bhagavato…pe… patiṭṭhitapemattā ceva akhīṇāsavattā ca anekesu…pe… upakārasañjanitacittamaddavattā cāti hetuatthassa labbhamānattā. Hetugabbhāni hi etāni padāni tadatthasseva tathākaraṇahetubhāvato. Dhanapāladamana (cūḷava. 342), suvaṇṇakakkaṭa (jā. 1.5.94), cūḷahaṃsa (jā. 1.15.133) -mahāhaṃsajātakādīhi (jā. 2.21.89) cettha vibhāvetabbo. Guṇānaṃ gaṇo, soyeva amatanipphādakarasasadisatāya amataraso. Taṃ jānanapakatitāyāti patiṭṭhitapade hetu. Upakāra…pe… maddavoti upakārapubbabhāvena sammājanitacittamuduko. Evampi so iminā kāraṇena adhivāsesīti dassento ‘‘tamena’’ntiādimāha. Tattha tamenanti taṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ. Eta-saddo hi padālaṅkāramattaṃ. Ayañhi saddapakati, yadidaṃ dvīsu sabbanāmesu pubbapadasseva atthapadatā. Saṃvejesīti ‘‘nanu bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṃ ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.183; saṃ. ni. 5.379; a. ni. 10.48) saṃvegaṃ janesī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati ‘‘bhante…pe… assāsessathāti paṭhamaṃ vatvā’’ti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā assa. Yathārutato pana ādyatthena iti-saddena ‘‘evamādinā saṃvejesī’’ti yojanāpi yujjateva. Yena kenaci hi vacanena saṃvegaṃ janesi, taṃ sabbampi saṃvejanassa karaṇaṃ sambhavatīti. Santhambhitvāti paridevanādivirahena attānaṃ paṭibandhetvā patiṭṭhāpetvā. Ussannadhātukanti upacitapittasemhādidosaṃ. Pittasemhavātavasena hi tisso dhātuyo idha bhesajjakaraṇayogyatāya adhippetā, yā ‘‘dosā, malā’’ti ca loke vuccanti, pathavī āpo tejo vāyo ākāsoti ca bhedena paccekaṃ pañcavidhā. Vuttañhi –
风、胆汁、痰为过患,界与污秽亦复如是;
于那些处亦各说为五种,各别持身。
“过患”为污染身体者,“污秽”为令成垢秽者;
“界”则为持,他们依义而得此名。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vāyupittakaphā dosā, dhātavo ca malā tathā; Tatthāpi pañcadhākhyātā, paccekaṃ dehadhāraṇā. Sarīradūsanā dosā, malīnakaraṇā malā; Dhāraṇā dhātavo te tu, itthamanvatthasaññakā’’ti.
“令安稳”即令满足。指被天所悚惧之日,或进入祇园精舍之日后的第二天。“由此排泄”故为泻药,即经药处理过的牛乳即为泻药,如此。“所指”指那种药饮。“以肢节庄严”故为“净”,摩奴之子为“摩纳婆”,而将na变为ṇa则成“摩纳婆”。所谓“摩奴”,是在最初劫时,居于人类父母之位的人,于教法中名为“大选出王”。他因了知一切世间的利益与心意,故称为“摩奴”。于此,有人这样说:“带齿音na的mānavasadda是一切众生通用的称呼,而带头音ṇa的māṇavasadda则是卑劣愚痴之子的称呼。”在《小业分别经注》中,也解释了带头音ṇa的māṇavasadda之义。其复注中,诸阿阇梨说:“凡卑劣或愚痴之子,世间称之为māṇava,而众生大多在幼年时其性愚痴,故即阐明此义。”别处说二十岁以内的青年为摩纳婆,但此处依其惯用语,年长者亦可称。正如《小业分别经释》所说:“摩纳婆者,彼于年幼时如此称呼,至年长时亦以此惯用语称呼。”意即依“净”名而得摩纳婆之称。他听闻“大师已般涅槃,据说阿难长老持其衣钵而来,大众前显示巴利原文
Samassāsetunti santappetuṃ. Devatāya saṃvejitadivasato, jetavanavihāraṃ paviṭṭhadivasato vā dutiyadivase. Viriccati etenāti virecanaṃ, osadhaparibhāvitaṃ khīrameva virecanaṃ tathā. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ bhesajjapānaṃ sandhāya. Aṅgapaccaṅgena sobhatīti subho, manuno apaccaṃ mānavo, na-kārassa pana ṇa-kāre kate māṇavo. Manūti hi paṭhamakappikakāle manussānaṃ mātāpituṭṭhāne ṭhito puriso, yo sāsane ‘‘mahāsammatarājā’’ti vutto. So hi sakalalokassa hitaṃ manabhi jānātīti manūti vuccati. Evampettha vadanti ‘‘dantaja na-kārasahito mānavasaddo sabbasattasādhāraṇavacano, muddhaja ṇa-kārasahito pana māṇavasaddo kucchitamūḷhāpaccavacano’’ti. Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṭṭhakathāyampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.289) hi muddhaja ṇa-kārasahitasseva māṇavasaddassa attho vaṇṇito. Taṭṭīkāyampi ‘‘yaṃ apaccaṃ kucchitaṃ mūḷhaṃ vā, tattha loke māṇavavohāro, yebhuyyena ca sattā daharakāle mūḷhadhātukā hontīti tassevattho pakāsito’’ti vadanti ācariyā. Aññattha ca vīsativassabbhantaro yuvā māṇavo, idha pana tabbohārena mahallakopi. Vuttañhi cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘māṇavoti pana taṃ taruṇakāle vohariṃsu, so mahallakakālepi teneva vohārena voharīyatī’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.289) subhanāmakena laddhamāṇavavohārenāti attho. So pana ‘‘satthā parinibbuto, ānandatthero kirassa pattacīvaramādāya āgato, mahājano taṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘vihāraṃ kho pana gantvā mahājanamajjhe na sakkā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ vā kātuṃ, dhammakathaṃ vā sotuṃ, gehamāgataṃyeva naṃ disvā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmi , ekā ca me kaṅkhā atthi, tampi naṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā ekaṃ māṇavakaṃ pesesi, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pahitaṃ māṇavaka’’nti khuddake cettha kapaccayo. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘akālo’’tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ ānandatthero avoca.
“非时”指今日不宜前往。若问“何以故?”则为“我有……”等语。“药量”指少量药。此处“量”字表“少”义,如“量于乐舍”等句中。“已饮”指已喝下。“明日亦”中,金刚觉长老说:“‘api’字表期望、思量、允许。”其意趣为:若仅以“或许”表疑惑,则允许之义不成立,故为成就彼义而说“api”,以此显示此义:“或许明日我们能前往,若有能力前往,我们便会前往。”显示巴利原文
Akāloti ajja gantuṃ ayuttakālo. Kasmāti ce ‘‘atthi me’’tiādimāha. Bhesajjamattāti appakaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Appattho hettha mattāsaddo ‘‘mattā sukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 290) viya. Pītāti pivitā. Svepīti ettha ‘‘api-saddo apekkho mantā nuññāyā’’ti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhittherena vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana tassādhippāyo – ‘‘appeva nāmā’’ti saṃsayamatte vutte anuññātabhāvo na siddho, tasmā taṃ sādhanatthaṃ ‘‘apī’’ti vuttaṃ, tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘appeva nāma sve mayaṃ upasaṅkameyyāma, upasaṅkamituṃ paṭibalā samānā upasaṅkamissāma cā’’ti.
第二天,指服用催乳泻药之日后的第二天。由制多长老,即因生于制多国而得名为“制多”的长老。作为随行沙门,即跟随在后的沙门。此处“亲手”为作格。被善贤青年所问,即他这样思惟:“世尊乔达摩曾在此世间安立的那些法,在他去世后是灭去了呢,还是存在呢?如果存在,尊者阿难应该知道,我来问他吧。”于是以“尊者乔达摩曾称赞哪些法,又曾劝导、安顿、确立此众人于哪些法中?阿难尊者,世尊乔达摩曾称赞哪些法?”等语提问。那时,长老将三藏以戒蕴等三蕴摄持而开示,说:“青年,世尊称赞三蕴……”等语,在此戒蕴品中宣说了第十经。针对此而说“在此……宣说了”。显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti khīravirecanapītadivasato dutiyadivase. Cetakattherenāti cetiyaraṭṭhe jātattā cetakoti evaṃ laddhanāmena therena. Pacchāsamaṇenāti pacchānugatena samaṇena. Sahatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti ‘‘yesu dhammesu bhavaṃ gotamo imaṃ lokaṃ patiṭṭhapesi, te tassa accayena naṭṭhā nu kho, dharanti nu kho, sace dharanti, bhavaṃ (natthi dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.448) ānando jānissati, handa naṃ pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘yesaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo dhammānaṃ vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṃ janataṃ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi, katamesānaṃ kho bho ānanda dhammānaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.448) puṭṭho, athassa thero tīṇi piṭakāni sīlakkhandhādīhi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kho māṇava khandhānaṃ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.449) idha sīlakkhandhavagge dasamaṃ suttamabhāsi, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imasmiṃ…pe… mabhāsī’’ti.
“破损”指断裂;“破裂”指裂开,或指苔藓、菌类等的蔓延。对它们的修复,即妥善恢复原状,也就是作新的修补。“临近”指接近。在此处入雨安居,即进入此处,故称“入雨安居日”,指入雨安居的时节,借此指称。在结集圣典(《小品》440)中,虽是举其通称而言,但其实正是指这等情形,为对应或成立故,而说“如此……”等。显示巴利原文
Khaṇḍanti chinnaṃ. Phullanti bhinnaṃ, sevālāhichattakādivikassanaṃ vā, tesaṃ paṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ sammā pākatikakaraṇaṃ, abhinavapaṭikaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upakaṭṭhāyāti āsannāya. Vassaṃ upanenti upagacchanti etthāti vassūpanāyikā, vassūpagatakālo, tāya. Saṅgītipāḷiyaṃ (cūḷava. 440) sāmaññena vuttampi vacanaṃ evaṃ gateyeva sandhāya vuttanti saṃsandetuṃ sādhetuṃ vā āha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi.
“围绕王舍城”是指位于城外。“丢弃、散落、污秽”指丢弃的、散落的和污秽之物。意思是:前往世尊般涅槃处的比丘们所丢弃抛弃的,又因被白蚁等啃食而四处散落,又因无人清扫而垃圾遍布,故为污秽。为阐明此义,故说“因为世尊……”等。“污秽”指腐败变质,将“uklāpo”中的“tha”音变为“la”,或指被抛弃的成捆杂物,即“污秽”。依音韵结合而如此说,如“随烦恼”“爱”等,故与此相应。“精舍”指因划分界限而可见的院落。“正在做”指想要做。由于世尊制定了住所的义务,且在《住所犍度》中说了许多与住所相关的事,因此修补住所也就是对教法的供养,故说“为了供养世尊的教法”。“第一个月”指雨安居的第一个月。此处是持续关系中的业格。为了阐明“也为了脱离外道言论”的含义,而说“因为外道……”等。显示巴利原文
Rājagahaṃ parivāretvāti bahinagare ṭhitabhāvena vuttaṃ. Chaḍḍitapatitauklāpāti chaḍḍitā ca patitā ca uklāpā ca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhagavato parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantehi bhikkhūhi chaḍḍitā vissaṭṭhā, tatoyeva ca upacikādīhi khāditattā ito cito ca patitā, sammajjanābhāvena ākiṇṇakacavarattā uklāpā cāti. Tadevatthaṃ ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Avakuthi pūtibhāvamagamāsīti uklāpo tha-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā, ujjhiṭṭho vā kalāposamūhoti uklāpo, vaṇṇasaṅgamanavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘upakleso, sneho’’ – iccādi, tena yuttāti tathā. Paricchedavasena veṇīyanti dissantīti pariveṇā. Kurumānāti kattukāmā. Senāsanavattānaṃ paññattattā, senāsanakkhandhake ca senāsanapaṭibaddhānaṃ bahūnampi vacanānaṃ vuttattā senāsanapaṭisaṅkharaṇampi tassa pūjāyeva nāmāti āha ‘‘bhagavato vacanapūjanattha’’nti. Paṭhamaṃ māsanti vassānassa paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Titthiyavādaparimocanatthañcā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘titthiyā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“Yanti”指制定公约。在此类语境中,“yaṃ”一词不与“taṃ”配对,其意义已自足。或者,是指针对那公约而说“那时……”等句,其意思是:那也正是我所说的。这一逻辑同样适用于“世尊……称赞”等文句,即是在制定住所义务时,于《住所犍度》(《小品》308)中宣说住所相关之语时所称赞的。在“我们将结集”中,“iti”一词关联“被说”之义,或是省略了一个“iti”字。显示巴利原文
Yanti katikavattakaraṇaṃ. Edisesu hi ṭhānesu yaṃ-saddo taṃ-saddānapekkho teneva atthassa paripuṇṇattā. Yaṃ vā katikavattaṃ sandhāya ‘‘atha kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tadeva mayāpi vuttanti attho. Esa nayo īdisesu bhagavatā…pe… vaṇṇitanti senāsanavattaṃ paññapentena senāsanakkhandhake (cūḷava. 308) ca senāsanapaṭibaddhavacanaṃ kathentena vaṇṇitaṃ. Saṅgāyissāmāti ettha iti-saddassa ‘‘vuttaṃ ahosī’’ti ca ubhayattha sambandho, ekassa vā iti-saddassa lopo.
“第二日”是指如此思惟那天的第二天,而且正好是入雨安居那天的第二天。因为长老们是在阿沙利月圆日后的新月初日聚集并入雨安居,随后如此思惟的。“于王宫门”指王宫的大门。“手工”指手的操作,即做手工活。“禀报”指告知。“放心”指无有顾虑之心。以无碍运转而行的意义,称为“轮”,即“教令轮”。同样地,法本身即是“轮”,故为“法轮”,此处可依说法智与证悟智两者来理解,因为结集是依此二者而运转的。如注释书所说:“‘法轮’是说法智的名称,也是证悟智的名称”(相应部注2.3.78)。“集会处”指聚集而坐之处。“七叶”指有七片叶子的树,即“七叶树”,亦称“伞叶树”、“异色叶树”,意为生于其洞门之树。显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti evaṃ cintitadivasato dutiyadivase, so ca kho vassūpanāyikadivasato dutiyadivasova. Therā hi āsaḷhipuṇṇamito pāṭipadadivaseyeva sannipatitvā vassamupagantvā evaṃ cintesunti. Rājadvāreti rājagehadvāre. Hatthakammanti hatthakiriyaṃ, hatthakammassa karaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭivedesunti jānāpesuṃ. Visaṭṭhāti nirāsaṅkacittā. Āṇāyeva appaṭihatavuttiyā pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti āṇācakkaṃ. Tathā dhammoyeva cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ, taṃ panidha desanāñāṇapaṭivedhañāṇavasena duvidhampi yujjati tadubhayeneva saṅgītiyā pavattanato. ‘‘Dhammacakkanti cetaṃ desanāñāṇassāpi nāmaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇassāpī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.78) hi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Sannisajjaṭṭhānanti sannipatitvā nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ. Satta paṇṇāni yassāti sattapaṇṇī, yo ‘‘chattapaṇṇo, visamacchado’’ tipi vuccati, tassa jātaguhadvāreti attho.
“由毗首羯磨”是针对帝释天那位掌管工巧的天子而说。“墙壁、柱、阶梯皆善巧划分”一句中,由于“善巧划分”一词在复合词之前被听闻,故它与前面所有复合词都有关联,同样在“种种……庄严”等处也是如此。“王宫之庄严”指王宫的成就或王宫的光辉。“如同在嘲笑”指仿佛在嘲笑。“以吉祥”指以那名为光辉的吉祥。“如同住处”指如同居住之处,也有“如同燃烧”的异读。恰如众鸟齐落于同一饮水处,所有人的目光都落在殿堂之上,故说“一落……鸟”。“眼鸟”指称为眼睛的鸟。“如同世间一切可爱之物聚集一处”指若将世间存在的一切可爱之物都取来聚集一处,则如同那样;或指世间一切值得喜爱之物都汇集于此。“应见心髓”指如同无皮材的木心,又如离垢的清净,在值得观看的诸物中为心髓、为清净。又,“应见”即可看、可观,“心髓”为殊胜,“庄严”为装饰,即以此为庄严,故为“应见心髓庄严”。“殿堂”指遮挡太阳光线,或保护一切人的清净心髓,或因适合装饰而饮。显示巴利原文
Vissakammunāti sakkassa devānamindassa kammākammavidhāyakaṃ devaputtaṃ sandhāyāha. Suvibhattabhittithambhasopānanti ettha suvibhattapadassa dvandato pubbe suyyamānattā sabbehi dvandapadehi sambandho, tathā ‘‘nānāvidha…pe… vicitta’’ntiādīsupi. Rājabhavanavibhūtinti rājabhavanasampattiṃ, rājabhavanasobhaṃ vā. Avahasantamivāti avahāsaṃ kurumānaṃ viya. Siriyāti sobhāsaṅkhātāya lakkhiyā. Niketanamivāti vasanaṭṭhānamiva, ‘‘jalantamivā’’tipi pāṭho. Ekasmiṃyeva pānīyatitthe nipatantā pakkhino viya sabbesampi janānaṃ cakkhūni maṇḍapeyeva nipatantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekanipāta…pe… vihaṅgāna’’nti. Nayanavihaṅgānanti nayanasaṅkhātavihaṅgānaṃ. Lokarāmaṇeyyakamiva sampiṇḍitanti yadi loke vijjamānaṃ rāmaṇeyyakaṃ sabbameva ānetvā ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ siyā, taṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti, yaṃ yaṃ vā loke ramitumarahati, taṃ sabbaṃ sampiṇḍitamivātipi attho. Daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍanti pheggurahitaṃ sāraṃ viya, kasaṭavinimuttaṃ pasannaṃ viya ca daṭṭhumaraharūpesu sārabhūtaṃ, pasannabhūtañca. Apica daṭṭhabbo dassanīyo sārabhūto visiṭṭhataro maṇḍo maṇḍanaṃ alaṅkāro etassāti daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍo, taṃ. Maṇḍaṃ sūriyarasmiṃ pāti nivāreti, sabbesaṃ vā janānaṃ maṇḍaṃ pasannaṃ pāti rakkhati, maṇḍanamalaṅkāraṃ vā pāti pivati alaṅkarituṃ yuttabhāvenāti maṇḍapo, taṃ.
那些既是花环串又是垂挂物的,便称为“花环串垂饰”。此处,修饰语后置,如同“agyāhito”的用法。正是种种花环串垂饰如此,它们仿佛在滴流、在喷吐、在绽放一般,这里有美妙悦目的华盖,故如此说。以锤捣固而平整者,称为“捣固地”,那样的宝石即是“宝石捣固地”,其地面由种种宝石所庄严。或者,因将宝石捣碎而作成地面,故由宝石捣固地所成就的,即是“宝石捣固地”,那地面本身——由种种宝石所庄严的宝石捣固地之地面——正是如此。而它就像由种种献花所庄严、善巧完成的地面作业一样——应如此连结文意。供花即是献花。在此,应知“种种宝石所庄严”这一表述,是为了显示“由种种献花所庄严”的状态;“宝石捣固地之地面”这一表述,是为了显示“善巧完成的地面作业”的状态。“Naṃ”指凉亭。如同梵天宫殿一般——这是修辞上的中性表达,意思是:如同梵天宫殿那样辉煌,如此装饰之后。特别应受尊敬者,称为“宫殿”。然而,精通声明的学者们说:“于空中……”此处文句未完。显示巴利原文
Kusumadāmāni ca tāni olambakāni ceti kusumadāmolambakāni. Visesanassa cettha paranipāto yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. Vividhāniyeva kusumadāmolambakāni tathā, tāni viniggalantaṃ visesena vamentaṃ nikkhāmentamiva cāru sobhanaṃ vitānaṃ etthāti tathā. Kuṭṭena gahito samaṃ katoti kuṭṭimo, koṭṭimo vā, tādisoyeva maṇīti maṇikoṭṭimo, nānāratanehi vicitto maṇikoṭṭimo, tassa talaṃ tathā. Atha vā maṇiyo koṭṭetvā katatalattā maṇikoṭṭena nipphattanti maṇikoṭṭimaṃ, tameva talaṃ, nānāratanavicittaṃ maṇikoṭṭimatalaṃ tathā. Tamiva ca nānāpupphūpahāravicittaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmikammanti sambandho. Pupphapūjā pupphūpahāro. Ettha hi nānāratanavicittaggahaṇaṃ nānāpupphūpahāravicittatāyanidassanaṃ, maṇikoṭṭimatalaggahaṇaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmikammatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanti maṇḍapaṃ. Brahmavimānasadisanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, yathā brahmavimānaṃ sobhati, tathā alaṅkaritvāti attho. Visesena mānetabbanti vimānaṃ. Saddavidū pana ‘‘vihe ākāse māyanti gacchanti devā yenāti vimāna’’nti vadanti. Visesena vā sucaritakammunā mīyati nimmīyatīti vimānaṃ, vīti vā sakuṇo vuccati, taṃ saṇṭhānena mīyati nimmīyatīti vimānantiādināpi vattabbo. Vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekayojanadviyojanādibhāvena pamāṇavisesayuttatāya, sobhātisayayogena ca visesato mānanīyatāya vimāna’’nti (vi. va. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) vuttaṃ. Natthi agghametesanti anagghāni, aparimāṇagghāni agghitumasakkuṇeyyānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Patirūpaṃ, paccekaṃ vā attharitabbānīti paccattharaṇāni, tesaṃ satāni tathā. Uttarābhimukhanti uttaradisābhimukhaṃ. Dhammopi satthāyeva satthukiccanipphādanatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato āsanārahaṃ dhammāsanaṃ paññapetvā’’ti. Yathāha ‘‘yo kho…pe… mamaccayena satthā’’tiādi, (dī. ni. 2.216) tathāgatappaveditadhammadesakassa vā satthukiccāvahattā tathārūpe āsane nisīditumarahatīti dassetumpi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Āsanārahanti nisīdanārahaṃ. Dhammāsananti dhammadesakāsanaṃ, dhammaṃ vā kathetuṃ yuttāsanaṃ. Dantakhacitanti dantehi khacitaṃ, hatthidantehi katanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Danto nāma hatthidanto vuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ dhammāsane. Mama kiccanti mama kammaṃ, mayā vā karaṇīyaṃ.
现在,为了显示尊者阿难达到无学位,而说“在那一天……”等语。其中,“在那一天”即国王如此通报的那一天,也就是萨瓦那月黑分的第四天。由于能生伤害、如同毒一般令人畏惧,故烦恼为毒;又因是漏尽者的状态,而有名为“转变”的能力,即“气味”。也正因为如此,他在世尊般涅槃等时,作出了悲泣等行为。再者,由于如同能引生毒的花等的气味,能产生种种苦因之行为的烦恼,即被称为“毒气”。确实有说:“‘visaṃ harati’(带来毒),故为‘visattikā’(贪欲);‘visamūlā’(毒根),故为‘visattikā’;‘visaphalā’(毒果),故为‘visattikā’;‘visaparibhogā’(受用毒),故为‘visattikā’。”另外,所谓“visagandha”(毒气),是指腐肉等难闻的气味,因与其相似,故指烦恼。在《阿毗达摩注释》中说:“‘vissa’一词,意为难看的。”确实地,即决定地。悚惧感,即对法的悚惧。因为“已放下重担者”等,主要是就精进而说的。然而,在这些场合,显示巴利原文
Idāni āyasmato ānandassa asekkhabhūmisamāpajjanaṃ dassento ‘‘tasmiñca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tasmiñca pana divasaeti tathā raññā ārocāpitadivase, sāvaṇamāsassakāḷapakkhacatutthadivaseti vuttaṃ hoti. Anatthajananato visasaṅkāsatāya kileso visaṃ, tassa khīṇāsavabhāvato aññathābhāvasaṅkhātā satti gandho. Tathā hi so bhagavato parinibbānādīsu vilāpādimakāsi. Apica visajananakapupphādigandhapaṭibhāgatāya nānāvidhadukkhahetukiriyājananako kilesova ‘‘visagandho’’ti vuccati. Tathā hi so ‘‘visaṃ haratīti visattikā, visamūlāti visattikā, visaphalāti visattikā, visaparibhogāti visattikā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 3) vuttoti. Apica visagandhonāma virūpo maṃsādigandho, taṃsadisatāya pana kileso. ‘‘Vissasaddo hi virūpe’’ti (dha. sa. ṭī. 624) abhidhammaṭīkāyaṃvuttaṃ. Addhāti ekaṃsato. Saṃveganti dhammasaṃvegaṃ. ‘‘Ohitabhārāna’’nti hi yebhuyyena, padhānena ca vuttaṃ. Edisesu pana ṭhānesu tadaññesampi dhammasaṃvegoyeva adhippeto. Tathā hi ‘‘saṃvego nāma sahottappaṃ ñāṇaṃ, so tassā bhagavato dassane uppajjī’’ti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 838) rajjumālāvimānavaṇṇanāyaṃvuttaṃ, sā ca tadā aviññātasāsanā anāgataphalāti. Itarathā hi cittutrāsavasena dosoyeva saṃvegoti āpajjati, evañca sati so tassa asekkhabhūmisamāpajjanassa ekaṃsakāraṇaṃ na siyā. Evamabhūto ca so idha na vattabboyevāti alamatipapañcena. Tenāti tasmā sve saṅghasannipātassa vattamānattā, sekkhasakaraṇīyattā vā. Te na yuttanti tava na yuttaṃ, tayā vā sannipātaṃ gantuṃ na patirūpaṃ.
“Mama etaṃ gamanaṃ”意为“我的此行”,即我的这一次前往。“Yvāhaṃ”即“yo ahaṃ”(我);或者,“yaṃ”是对动作的指称,因此在“gaccheyya”(若去)中,它指称前往的动作。而对动作进行指称时,“yaṃ, taṃ”等词的自然状态,如各处所见,是与中性、单数相应。因为精通声明的学者们认为,动作的自性是中性且单一的。他转向,即他呈献。已解脱,即被解脱。尚未到达的,即尚未抵达的,意思是尚未放置在枕头上。在此间隙,即在这中间,是以此两个词所显示的时间之中间刹那,或所显示的两个时间之间的空隙。显示巴利原文
Metanti mama etaṃ gamanaṃ. Yvāhanti yo ahaṃ, yanti vā kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tena ‘‘gaccheyya’’nti ettha gamanakiriyaṃ parāmasati, kiriyāparāmasanassa ca yaṃ taṃ-saddassa ayaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgena, ekavacanena ca yogyatā tathāyeva tattha tattha dassanato. Kiriyāya hi sabhāvato napuṃsakattamekattañca icchanti saddavidū. Āvajjesīti upanāmesi. Muttāti muccitā. Appattañcāti agatañca, bimbohane na tāva ṭhapitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etasmiṃ antareti etthantare, iminā padadvayena dassitakālānaṃ vemajjhakkhaṇe, tathādassitakāladvayassa vā vivareti vuttaṃ hoti.
于因,于心,于刹那,于空隙中;
在中间等义中,“antarā”一词义为“其间”之用。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāraṇe ceva citte ca, khaṇasmiṃ vivarepi ca; Vemajjhādīsu atthesu ‘antarā’ti ravo gato’’ti.
如上所说。“无取着”即:不依渴爱与邪见而执持任何一法,也不执持被其解脱的烦恼之一丝一毫。“从诸漏”即:从属于有的乃至有顶,从属于法的乃至种姓智,从听闻、转起而名之为漏的诸烦恼中。此唯特相之语。因处同一境故,如实从一切烦恼、一切不善法而解脱之心。“心解脱”即:于阿罗汉道刹那正在解脱,于阿罗汉果刹那已解脱。为明此义,乃以“此即”等语开启。“经行”即经行之动作。“殊胜”即由自所得之道果而殊胜之道果。所谓“作转起依止之已作、已积集之福,名作福者”,即:为证阿罗汉而作加行者。“勤精进”即发动精进,意为:作阿罗汉等至之加行。“你将是”即你将成为。“论之过”即论之虚妄性。“极已发勤”即极度已发勤。“掉举”即高扬的状态。“来吧”是放舍之说。他作放舍,说:“那么我今即策励而已,我不再作戏论。”“我策励精进平等”即:因经行之精进过强,为令其不退减而与定平等,我策励精进之平等(均等状态);又或曰“我以精进而系结称为止的定”,此义亦可成就。以此二读俱可得见故。“我将休息”即我将得息。今为显示彼殊胜之应赞叹性,显示巴利原文
Hi vuttaṃ. Anupādāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā, yehi vā kilesehi muccati, tesaṃ lesamattampi aggahetvā. Āsavehīti bhavato ā bhavaggaṃ, dhammato ca ā gotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi kilesehi. Upalakkhaṇavacanamattañcetaṃ. Tadekaṭṭhatāya hi sabbehipi kilesehi sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccatiyeva. Cittaṃ vimuccīti cittaṃ arahattamaggakkhaṇe āsavehi vimuccamānaṃ hutvā arahattaphalakkhaṇe vimucci. Tadatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādinā. Caṅkamenāti caṅkamanakiriyāya. Visesanti attanā laddhamaggaphalato visesamaggaphalaṃ. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ yenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Padhānamanuyuñjāti vīriyamanuyuñjāhi, arahattasamāpattiyā anuyogaṃ karohīti vuttaṃ hoti. Hohisīti bhavissasi. Kathādosoti kathāya doso vitathabhāvo. Accāraddhanti ativiya āraddhaṃ. Uddhaccāyāti uddhatabhāvāya. Handāti vossaggavacanaṃ. Tena hi adhunāyeva yojemi, na panāhaṃ papañcaṃ karomīti vossaggaṃ karoti. Vīriyasamataṃ yojemīti caṅkamanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa hāpanavasena samādhinā samatāpādanena vīriyassa samataṃ samabhāvaṃ yojemi, vīriyena vā samathasaṅkhātaṃ samādhiṃ yojemītipi attho. Dvidhāpi hi pāṭho dissati. Vissamissāmīti assasissāmi. Idāni tassa visesato pasaṃsanārahabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāti catuiriyāpathavirahitatākāraṇena. ‘‘Anipanno’’tiādīni paccuppannavacanāneva. Parinibbutopi so ākāseyeva parinibbāyi. Tasmā therassa kilesaparinibbānaṃ, khandhaparinibbānañca visesena pasaṃsārahaṃ acchariyabbhutamevāti.
“第二日”即从长老证阿罗汉之日起的第二日。“第五日”是依观星宿而说,与“第二日”同指一事。盖文法上词性相异,而同义之词亦可见,如“德为量,二十心”等。“黑分”即沙瓦那月的黑分。因第一个月,他们已作了破损剥落的修补,且初月之分依中区之俗语。于彼处,从初满月到后满月,即称为一月。此后三日,国王作帐幕;此后第二日,长老证阿罗汉;第三日,诸长老集会结集。故从阿沙陀月黑分初一至沙瓦那月黑分第五,五日为多出一月。“平等”即生起。“喜悦心”即极其悦意之心,或由喜悦而喜心,由喜而悦心。“一肩”即于一肩,意为左肩。因为在《婆耆沙经注释》中如是说:显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti therena arahattapattadivasato dutiyadivase. Pañcamiyanti tithīpekkhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘dutiyadivase’’ti iminā tulyādhikaraṇaṃ. Bhinnaliṅgampi hi tulyatthapadaṃ dissati yathā ‘‘guṇo pamāṇaṃ, vīsati cittāni’’ iccādi. Kāḷapakkhassāti sāvaṇamāsakāḷapakkhassa. Paṭhamañhi māsaṃ khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇamakaṃsu, paṭhamamāsabhāvo ca majjhimappadesavohārena. Tattha hi purimapuṇṇamito yāva aparā puṇṇamī, tāva eko māsoti voharanti. Tato tīṇi divasāni rājā maṇḍapamakāsi, tato dutiyadivase thero arahattaṃ sacchākāsi, tatiyadivase pana sannipatitvā therā saṅgītimakaṃsu, tasmā āsaḷhimāsakāḷapakkhapāṭipadato yāva sāvaṇamāsakāḷapakkhapañcamī , tāva pañcadivasādhiko ekamāso hoti. Samānoti uppajjamāno. Haṭṭhatuṭṭhacittoti ativiya somanassacitto, pāmojjena vā haṭṭhacitto pītiyā tuṭṭhacitto. Ekaṃsanti ekasmiṃ aṃse, vāmaṃseti attho. Tathā hi vaṅgīsasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
“一肩衣”,此处是为安立而作是说;“一肩”,是对披覆左肩而立者的称呼。即如披覆左肩而立时那样整理衣服——应知这是此词的含义。(小部尼柯耶注释 2.345)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaranti ettha puna saṇṭhāpanavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ, ekaṃsanti ca vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yato yathā vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, tathā cīvaraṃ katvāti evamassattho veditabbo’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.345).
“如……绑”:即如从蒂脱落的熟多罗果。“如……黄”:如置于淡黄毛毯上、闪耀白黄光泽的生得宝珠,此处以“生”字简别非人造者。“如升起之满月”:即如于白半第十五布萨日升起的十六分圆满之月。“如……愚者”:如被初升日光照触而绽放、具有金色花房的红莲。“‘Piñjara’一词实为秋色之同义语”(《显扬心要疏》1.22),于《显扬心要》中如是说。“极明净”:即极为光净。“具光耀”:即具有色身之光耀与戒德之光耀。“具威光”:即具有身相庄严等威仪之光,极具威光。“最上面”:即由于上述的庄严而居于最上。纵使他并未宣告“我已证阿罗汉”,然而以最殊胜的威仪而行时,见者便知晓其境界,故如同宣告一般,因而说:“犹如宣告自己证得阿罗汉而行。”显示巴利原文
Bandha…pe… viyāti vaṇṭato pavuttasuparipakkatālaphalamiva. Paṇḍu…pe… viyāti sitapītapabhāyuttapaṇḍuromajakambale ṭhapito jātimā maṇi viya, jātivacanena cettha kuttimaṃ nivatteti. Samuggatapuṇṇacando viyāti juṇhapakkhapannarasuposathe samuggato soḷasakalāparipuṇṇo cando viya. Bālā…pe… viyāti taruṇasūriyapabhāsamphassena phullitasuvaṇṇavaṇṇaparāgagabbhaṃ satapattapaddhaṃ viya. ‘‘Piñjarasaddo hi hemavaṇṇapariyāyo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.22) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vutto. Pariyodātenāti pabhassarena. Sappabhenāti vaṇṇappabhāya, sīlappabhāya ca samannāgatena. Sassirikenāti sarīrasobhaggādisaṅkhātāya siriyā ativiya sirimatā. Mukhavarenāti yathāvuttasobhāsamalaṅkatattā uttamamukhena. Kāmaṃ ‘‘ahamasmi arahattaṃ patto’’ti nārocesi, tathārūpāya pana uttamalīḷāya gamanato passantā sabbepi tamatthaṃ jānanti, tasmā ārocento viya hotīti āha ‘‘attano arahattappattiṃ ārocayamāno viya agamāsī’’ti.
那么,他为何如同宣告一般而行呢?答曰:他作意“世尊赞叹不自我记说他人”,并思惟:“虽然以有学之身,我本不适合参与法与律的结集,但因我多闻,我当参与”,为使已在座的长老们了知他证得阿罗汉而生起欢喜,也为了显示世尊“汝勿放逸”的教诫确有果效等,故他如同宣告一般而行。具寿大迦叶亦如此思惟:“由上述原因,依平等安立等,他与导师相合。”“将持”:即将持有。“贤友阿难,汝之证得阿罗汉实为善哉”等,他如此给予赞叹。这是长部诵者的说法。在小品诵者、经集诵者及小诵诵者的传承中,此说亦相合,因其注释中亦作如是说。显示巴利原文
Kimatthaṃ panāyaṃ evamārocayamāno viya agamāsīti? Vuccate – so hi ‘‘attupanāyikaṃ akatvā aññabyākaraṇaṃ bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇita’’nti manasi karitvā ‘‘sekkhatāya dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā gahetumayuttampi bahussutattā gaṇhissāmā’’ti nisinnānaṃ therānaṃ arahattappattivijānanena somanassuppādanatthaṃ, ‘‘appamatto hohī’’ti bhagavatā dinnaovādassa ca saphalatādīpanatthaṃ evamārocayamāno viya agamāsīti. Āyasmatomahākassapassaetadahosi samasamaṭṭhapanādinā yathāvuttakāraṇena satthukappattā. Dhareyyāti vijjamāno bhaveyya. ‘‘Sobhati vata te āvuso ānanda arahattasamadhigamatā’’tiādinā sādhukāramadāsi. Ayamidha dīghabhāṇakānaṃ vādo. Khuddakabhāṇakesu ca suttanipātakhuddakapāṭhabhāṇakānaṃ vādotipi yujjati tadaṭṭhakathāsupi tathā vuttattā.
“中尼柯耶诵者”指以音调诵持《中部》者,以及以此著称的阿阇梨们。“依长幼”即按照长幼次第,或不逾越此次第。“于彼处”指于彼比丘僧团中。“此是阿难之座”,是句子的关联。“于彼时”指在那般交谈之时。长老思惟:“若在众人询问‘去了何处’时显现自身,便会显得过于显露。”中尼柯耶诵者中有一部分人也持此说,由此便关联到“所以有些长老这样说”。另有一些人则说:“他从空中而来,就在自己的座位上显现了自身。”因为以阳性词“eke”表述时,一切处都应理解为“一部分人”。而且,在这三种说法中,除了各诵师各自传来的说法之外,种种不同的表述并无其他特别的原因。因为对于历时七月完成的法与律结集,有时说他是以平常方式而来,有时说他是从地中沉入而来,有时说他是从空中而来,人们是依他当时到达的方式而作种种说法。此外,也有人说:在结集的最初之日,他首先以平常方式前来,随后腾空而起,在到达大众之时,从空中降下,为了不挤迫比丘行列,沉入地中,再于座位上显现自身。然而,无论他以何种方式到来,到来的方式本身并不重显示巴利原文
Majjhimaṃ nikāyaṃ bhaṇanti sīlenāti majjhimabhāṇakā, tappaguṇā ācariyā. Yathāvuḍḍhanti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiṃ, tadanatikkamitvā vā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe. Ānandassa etamāsananti sambandho. Tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ evaṃkathanasamaye. Thero cintesi ‘‘kuhiṃ gato’’ti pucchantānaṃ attānaṃ dassente ativiya pākaṭabhāvena bhavissamānattā, ayampi majjhimabhāṇakesveva ekaccānaṃ vādo, tasmā itipi eke vadantīti sambandho. Ākāsena āgantvā attano āsaneyeva attānaṃ dassesītipi tesameva ekacce vadanti. Pulliṅgavisaye hi ‘‘eke’’ti vutte sabbattha ‘‘ekacce’’ti attho veditabbo. Tīsupi cettha vādesu tesaṃ tesaṃ bhāṇakānaṃ tena tenākārena āgatamattaṃ ṭhapetvā visuṃ visuṃ vacane aññaṃ visesakāraṇaṃ natthi. Sattamāsaṃ katāya hi dhammavinayasaṅgītiyā kadāci pakatiyāva, kadāci pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā, kadāci ākāsena āgatattā taṃ tadāgamanamupādāya tathā tathā vadanti. Apica saṅgītiyā ādidivaseyeva paṭhamaṃ pakatiyā āgantvā tato paraṃ ākāsamabbhuggantvā parisaṃ pattakāle tato otaritvā bhikkhupantiṃ apīḷento pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā āsane attānaṃ dassesītipi vadanti. Yathā vā tathā vā āgacchatu, āgamanākāramattaṃ na pamāṇaṃ, āgantvā gatakāle āyasmato mahākassapassa sādhukāradānameva pamāṇaṃ satthārā dātabbasādhukāradāneneva arahattappattiyā aññesampi ñāpitattā, bhagavati dharamāne paṭiggahetabbāya ca pasaṃsāya therassa paṭiggahitattā. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā vā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatthāpīti sabbesupi tīsu vādesu.
“比丘们”是呼格,此处意为“招呼比丘们”。然而,在表示告知时也可见此用法,如“比丘们,我告知你们,我宣示你们”;在召唤时也可见,如“来,比丘,以我之言招呼舍利弗”;在呼唤时也可见,如“在那里,世尊招呼比丘们:‘比丘们!’”。此处也是呼唤,这是《心义灯》所说。然而,由于此处仅有呼唤而无告知内容,却又与“我们先结集什么?”等所表达的应知意义相伴而行,故理解为“告知”方为合适,因此“招呼”应解释为“宣示、告知”。因为在“在那里,世尊招呼比丘们:‘比丘们!’‘尊者们!’那些比丘回应世尊”等句中,只见单纯的呼唤,不见应被了知的意义,而该意义是随后以“比丘们,从前……”等另行开始的。因此,只有在那样单纯的呼唤中才适用“呼唤”的解释,这是我的见解。然而,通晓声明的学者们说:“如同‘招呼了天王之后,对有大神通的毗首羯磨’等句,‘manta’一词意为秘密言说,因此‘āmantesi’的意思是‘商议’。”“贤友们”等是显示招呼的方式。“法或律”中的“或”字表示选择,由此显示“我们先结集其中哪一个?”为何说“寿”?答:显示巴利原文
Bhikkhū āmantesīti bhikkhū ālapīti ayamettha attho, aññatra pana ñāpanepi dissati yathā ‘‘āmantayāmi vo bhikkhave, (dī. ni. 2.218) paṭivedayāmi vo bhikkhave’’ti (a. ni. 7.72) pakkosanepi dissati yathā ‘‘ehi tvaṃ bhikkhu mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11) ālapanepi dissati yathā ‘‘tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘bhikkhavo’ti’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.249), idhāpi ālapaneti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Ālapanamattassa pana abhāvato ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’tiādinā vuttena viññāpiyamānatthantarena ca sahacaraṇato ñāpaneva vaṭṭati, tasmā āmantesīti paṭivedesi viññāpesīti attho vattabbo. ‘‘Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘bhikkhavo’ti, ‘bhaddante’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.249) hi ālapanamattameva dissati, na viññāpiyamānatthantaraṃ, taṃ pana ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.249) paccekameva āraddhaṃ. Tasmā tādisesveva ālapane vaṭṭatīti no takko. Saddavidū pana vadanti ‘‘āmantayitvā devindo, vissakammaṃ mahiddhika’ntiādīsu (cariyā. 107) viya mantasaddo guttabhāsane. Tasmā ‘āmantesī’ti etassa sammantayīti attho’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso’’tiādi āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Dhammaṃ vā vinayaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo vikappane, tena ‘‘kimekaṃ tesu paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti dasseti. Kasmā āyūti āha ‘‘vinaye ṭhite’’tiādi. ‘‘Yasmā, tasmā’’ti ca ajjhāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. Tasmāti tāya āyusarikkhatāya . Dhuranti jeṭṭhakaṃ. No nappahotīti pahotiyeva. Dvipaṭisedho hi saha atisayena pakatyatthadīpako.
“此是最上”即此为最上者。这是通过性别的转换来表述的。“所谓”即“此即”,或应连接为“所谓五蕴”。因为如此,则“此是最上”的性别便如文所示。而“所谓”一词的本性即是:对于应被述说的各个意义,应根据其性别,连接为“此即”、“此即”或“此即”,这在各处都已显示。“于持律比丘中”是表示简别的属格表述。显示巴利原文
Etadagganti eso aggo. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ayaṃ niddeso. Yadidanti ca yo ayaṃ, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakanti vā yojetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati ‘‘etadagga’’nti yathārutaliṅgameva. ‘‘Yadida’’nti padassa ca ayaṃ sabhāvo, yā tassa tassa atthassa vattabbassa liṅgānurūpena ‘‘yo aya’’nti vā ‘‘yā aya’’nti vā ‘‘yaṃ ida’’nti vā yojetabbatā tathāyevassa tattha tattha dassitattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānanti niddhāraṇachaṭṭhīniddeso.
“自己选定自己”,意即自己让自己被选定。此处“自己”一词是第三格的修饰语,排除了由他人选定的情况;或者,“自己”是一个在词形上像带格尾、实则属于不变词的词。然而,有些人说:“在表示性时,第三格已体现出行为主体。”这种说法并不合理,因为“长老”这一行为主体本来就存在。应当这样连接:为了发问,自己选定自己。又因“问”这个语根带有双宾语,所以说“向优波离问律”含有两个宾语。显示巴利原文
Attanāva attānaṃ sammannīti sayameva attānaṃ sammataṃ akāsi. ‘‘Attanā’’ti hi idaṃ tatiyāvisesanaṃ bhavati, tañca parehi sammannanaṃ nivatteti, ‘‘attanā’’ti vā ayaṃ vibhatyantapatirūpako abyayasaddo . Keci pana ‘‘liṅgatthe tatiyā abhihitakattubhāvato’’ti vadanti. Tadayuttameva ‘‘thero’’ti kattuno vijjamānattā. Vissajjanatthāya attanāva attānaṃ sammannīti yojetabbaṃ. Pucchadhātussa dvikammikattā ‘‘upāliṃ vinaya’’nti kammadvayaṃ vuttaṃ.
“持扇”——此处应知持扇是说法者的惯例。因为说法者以此扇来遮挡大众中因不安而产生的手势、面容变化等。而世尊持一把精致的扇子,正是为了显示说法者的这一惯例。若非如此,便不应遮蔽佛陀那作为一切世间庄严、达到最上境界的学处与威仪所显的面如满月之容。为何问:“贤友优波离,第一波罗夷在何处制定”?难道在结集之前,它的第一性就不合理吗?并非不合理,因为根据世尊安立的次第以及诵巴帝摩卡的次第,其第一性是成立的。事实上,三藏的大部分,在世尊住世时便已依照他安立的次第结集了,特别是律藏和论藏,应当如此看待。“于何事”、“于何对象”中的“于非法事”,是表示所缘的处格。它把“在何处制定”等所说到的内容,连同其余未说到的内容一并显示出来,因此说“也问了事由”等。显示巴利原文
Bījaniṃ gahetvāti ettha bījanīgahaṇaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatāti veditabbaṃ. Tāya hi dhammakathikānaṃ parisāya hatthakukkuccamukhavikārādi paṭicchādīyati. Bhagavā ca dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatādassanatthameva vicitrabījaniṃ gaṇhāti. Aññathā hi sabbassapi lokassa alaṅkārabhūtaṃ paramukkaṃsagatasikkhāsaṃyamānaṃ buddhānaṃ mukhacandamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetabbaṃ na siyā. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ āvuso upāli pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tassa saṅgītiyā purimakāle paṭhamabhāvo na yuttoti? No na yutto bhagavatā paññattānukkamena, pātimokkhuddesānukkamena ca paṭhamabhāvassa siddhattā. Yebhuyyena hi tīṇi piṭakāni bhagavato dharamānakāle ṭhitānukkameneva saṅgītāni, visesato vinayābhidhammapiṭakānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kismiṃ vatthusminti, methunadhammeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā dassitena saha tadavasiṭṭhampi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vatthumpi pucchī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
为了消除“这是混入了结集者的话,还是纯粹的佛语”这样的疑虑,并为了显示只有依结集本身才是准量,他提出质问后,在解答时说了“但在此中……”等语。在此,“初波罗夷”是指在那样结集而成的初波罗夷经文中。因此他说:“因为诸如来甚至一个音节也不说无意义的。”“应去除的”,是指由于多余而无意义,或因虚妄不当而应舍弃的言辞。“应补入的”,是指由于不完整而应添加的言辞。为什么?他说:“因为不……”等。而“在弟子或天人所说话中”,是就世尊以提问、赞叹等方式所说的话而言。“即使在一切处”,则指在世尊、弟子及天人所说的一切话中。然而,那种补入仅仅是关联性的言辞,并非具有实质意义;为了显示这一点,他说“但那个……”等,“仅仅是关联性的言辞”,即只是承上启下的语句。他们确定了“这是初波罗夷”之后,便以此读诵方式安立,为了完成学习、持诵等任务,并为此目的进行了团体共诵:“他们……乃至……安住”。据说在开始共诵时,大地即震动;而为了表明这大地震动是由于长老们法诵的威力,所以说“犹如给予随喜赞叹”。水界边际:指支撑大地的水界边际,因为……显示巴利原文
Saṅgītikārakavacanasammissaṃ vā nu kho, suddhaṃ vā buddhavacananti āsaṅkāpariharaṇatthaṃ, yathāsaṅgītasseva pamāṇabhāvaṃ dassanatthañca pucchaṃ samuddharitvā vissajjento ‘‘kiṃ panetthā’’tiādimāha. Ettha paṭhamapārājiketi etissaṃ tathāsaṅgītāya paṭhamapārājikapāḷiyaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadantī’’ti. Apanetabbanti atirekabhāvena niratthakatāya, vitathabhāvena vā ayuttatāya chaḍḍetabbavacanaṃ. Pakkhipitabbanti asampuṇṇatāya upanetabbavacanaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Sāvakānaṃ pana devatānaṃ vā bhāsiteti bhagavato pucchāthomanādivasena bhāsitaṃ sandhāyāha. Sabbatthāpīti bhagavato sāvakānaṃ devatānañca bhāsitepi. Taṃ pana pakkhipanaṃ sambandhavacanamattasseva, na sabhāvāyuttiyā atthassāti dasseti ‘‘kiṃ pana ta’’ntiādinā sambandhavacanamattanti pubbāparasambandhavacanameva. Idaṃ paṭhamapārājikanti vavatthapetvā ṭhapesuṃ imināva vācanāmaggena uggahaṇadhāraṇādikiccanipphādanatthaṃ, tadatthameva ca gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu ‘‘tena…pe… viharatī’’ti. Sajjhāyārambhakāleyeva pathavī akampitthāti vadanti, tadidaṃ pana pathavīkampanaṃ therānaṃ dhammasajjhāyānubhāvenāti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Udakapariyantanti pathavīsandhārakaudakapariyantaṃ. Tasmiñhi caliteyeva sāpi calati, etena ca padesapathavīkampanaṃ nivatteti.
虽然在经文中并未计数,但为了表明结集所收录的仅此数量,故说“七十五学处”。以“依前所说方式”此句,说明了“犹如给予随喜赞叹”之意。为了显示不仅依学处篇章分别的方式,也依据数量的标准,故说“六十四诵分”。在此,诵分是指——显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ gaṇanā natthi, saṅgītimāropitāni pana ettakānevāti dīpetuṃ ‘‘pañcasattati sikkhāpadānī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘purimanayenevā’’ti etena sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyāti atthamāha. Na kevalaṃ sikkhāpadakaṇḍavibhaṅganiyameneva, atha kho pamāṇaniyamenāpīti dassetuṃ ‘‘catusaṭṭhibhāṇavārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca bhāṇavāroti –
现在展示具寿阿难尊者证得无漏地的见证,他说:“在这一日……”。此处指佛历七月望日,即农历七月十六日。因染污破坏而起的污秽即是烦恼,诸如愤怒等皆称为“毒”。烦恼断尽的状态称为灭毒。“恶臭”即肮脏臭气,义虽为毒而非实臭。“毒气”常因烦恼恶行而生。“烦恼之毒”乃一切烦恼之根本。“听觉不净”指恶声。“精进”即法中的精勤努力。“波罗蜜多”所成就如须弥山网状般精密。“忧虑涌现”是烦恼外现之相。“圣法威仪庄严”是佛法中至高的庄严。“知觉”是如实知见。“前缘”是缘起的先行条件。“心惊恐”和“嗔恨”以种种方式表现出烦恼。“忆念”是觉知的内涵。“无明”是诸烦恼之根。因此佛法修行大抵依此原理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhakkharā ekapadaṃ, ekagāthā catuppadaṃ;
三十二音节为一品,共计二百五十之数;
一诵分被计为有一,含八千音节。
显示巴利原文 Gāthā cekā mato gantho, gantho bāttiṃsatakkharo. Bāttiṃsakkharaganthānaṃ, paññāsadvisataṃ pana; Bhāṇavāro mato eko, svaṭṭhakkharasahassako’’ti.
如此,凡有八千音节篇幅的文句,即称为诵分。因为应被诵出的部分,即是诵分,意指依一种共诵方式所应讲述的部分。犍度,即指大品与小品。从蕴的集合或阐明来说,它被称为犍度。在此,“蕴”是指出家、具足戒等律仪行事,以及涵盖应行、应止等学处的制立。因为出家等事是由世尊所制立的,故称为制立。于制立之处,得见“蕴”一词的运用,如“木蕴”、“火蕴”、“水蕴”等。再者,由于那些制立是按部分、依集合而分类的,因此以部分、集合之义来称说也是恰当的。然而,为使这部律藏能被诵者所守护、所执持,依结集时收录的形式,长久不灭地安住,他们将此法付嘱具寿优波离长老:“贤友,请将此律教给你所依止的弟子们。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aṭṭhakkharasahassaparimāṇo pāṭho vuccati. Bhaṇitabbo vāro yassāti hi bhāṇavāro, ekena sajjhāyanamaggena kathetabbavāroti attho. Khandhakanti mahāvaggacūḷavaggaṃ. Khandhānaṃ samūhato, pakāsanato vā khandhakoti hi vuccati, khandhāti cettha pabbajjūpasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā, cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā paññattiyoti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandhasaddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho, (a. ni. 6.41) aggikkhandho (a. ni. 7.72), udakakkhandho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.45; 6.37) viya. Apica bhāgarāsaṭṭhatāpi yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato, rāsito ca vibhattattā, taṃ pana vinayapiṭakaṃ bhāṇakehi rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ saṅgahāruḷhanayeneva cirakālaṃ anassamānaṃ hutvā patiṭṭhahissatīti āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti.
“欲结集法”指欲进行经藏与论藏的结集,因为如同“法与律已被宣说、制定”等语句那样,以排除法而言,“法”一词仅适用于经藏与论藏。此义将于后文明了。显示巴利原文
Dhammaṃ saṅgāyitukāmoti suttantābhidhammasaṅgītiṃ kattukāmo ‘‘dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.216) viya pārisesanayena dhammasaddassa suttantābhidhammesveva pavattanato. Ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati.
“告知僧团”此处,应依前文所述的方式进行理解。“朋友,哪一部藏?”是指在律藏之外的两部藏中,是指哪一部藏。因为律藏与论藏亦包含在“小结集”中,所以其间说“经藏中有四部结集”。而所谓“结集”,是指在结集时,依《长部》等分别确定而诵出,故因此即称为“部”,因而说“长结集”等。为了显示仅是汇经之后,依分品而有三种品,并非其他,故说“三十四经,三品”。因此,三十四经有三品,或者说经有三十四,依其分品而有三分,应如此连属:于彼三品中。当有人提议“有一部名为《梵网经》的经,我们首先结集它吧”时,为防有“为何如此”的质疑,故说“以三种戒庄严”等句,因为这些语句是带有理由的。由于以小品、中品、大品戒三种戒的阐明,故以此为三种戒而庄严、装饰;又因为它摧毁了种种诡诈、谄媚等邪命,故为“种种邪命、诡诈、谄媚等的摧毁”。其中,“诡诈”即欺骗,以三种事——资具受用、周边暗示、威仪路——使人惊异,此为其义。“谄媚”指见到来寺院的人后,说:“诸位来此有何事?是要邀请比丘吗?若是如此,请先回去,我随后便带比丘们来”等语。以“等”字显示巴利原文
Saṅghaṃ ñāpesīti ettha heṭṭhā vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Kataraṃ āvuso piṭakanti vinayāvasesesu dvīsu piṭakesu kataraṃ piṭakaṃ. Vinayābhidhammānampi khuddakasaṅgītipariyāpannattā tamantarena vuttaṃ ‘‘suttantapiṭake catasso saṅgītiyo’’ti. Saṅgītiyoti ca saṅgāyanakāle dīghādivasena visuṃ visuṃ niyametvā saṅgayhamānattā nikāyāva vuccanti. Tenāha ‘‘dīghasaṅgīti’’ntiādi. Suttāneva sampiṇḍetvā vaggakaraṇavasena tayo vaggā, nāññānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘catuttiṃsa suttāni tayo vaggā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā catuttisaṃ suttāni tayo vaggā honti, suttāni vā catuttiṃsa, tesaṃ vaggakaraṇavasena tayo vaggā, tesu tīsu vaggesūti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Brahmajālasuttaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti vutte kasmāti codanāsambhavato ‘‘tividhasīlālaṅkata’’ntiādimāha. Hetugabbhāni hi etāni. Cūḷamajjhimamahāsīlavasena tividhassāpi sīlassa pakāsanattā tena alaṅkataṃ vibhūsitaṃ tathā nānāvidhe micchājīvabhūte kuhanalapanādayo viddhaṃsetīti nānāvidhamicchājīvakuhanalapanādividdhaṃsanaṃ. Tattha kuhanāti kuhāyanā, paccayapaṭisevanasāmantajappanairiyāpathasannissitasaṅkhātena tividhena vatthunā vimhāpanāti attho. Lapanāti vihāraṃ āgate manusse disvā ‘‘kimatthāya bhonto āgatā, kiṃ bhikkhū nimantetuṃ. Yadi evaṃ gacchatha, ahaṃ pacchato bhikkhū gahetvā āgacchāmī’’ti evamādinā bhāsanā. Ādisaddena pupphadānādayo, nemittikatādayo ca saṅgaṇhāti. Apicettha micchājīvasaddena kuhanalapanāhi sesaṃ anesanaṃ gaṇhāti. Ādisaddena pana tadavasesaṃ mahicchatādikaṃ dussilyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo eva paliveṭhanaṭṭhena jālasarikkhatāya jālaṃ, tassa viniveṭhanaṃ apaliveṭhakaraṇaṃ tathā.
“于王舍城与那烂陀之间”:此处“之间”一词,用于表示空隙,如同“且说,诸比丘,此从多波达二大地狱之间的缝隙而来”等处。因此,应理解为“于王舍城与那烂陀的空隙处”。然而,因与“之间”一词结合,故用了业格。在此类处所,文法家们如此使用单一的“之间”一词,如“于村与河之间行走”,此词亦须与第二个词连接。若不如此连接,则业格不能成立,因为若用属格,与“之间”一词结合时,所欲求的正是业格。其中,为国王游乐而建造的、具足才智与心识变化的彩绘楼阁,称为“王阁”,意即在此。“庵婆罗园”是国王的园林。据说其门附近有一棵幼嫩的芒果树,人们称之为“庵婆罗树”,因园近此树,故该园林亦以“庵婆罗园”之名著称,如同“伐楼那城”一般。因此,意为:在名为庵婆罗园、有王阁的园林中。说明此二处所依止的处所,是为了使不明了者明了。或者,“王阁”即有此王阁的园林,意为:在具足王阁的庵婆罗园园林中。有些人说:“即使性相有异的简别词也是存在的。”若如此,则“王阁”就不是处所依止的简别了。金刚觉尊者说:“‘王阁’即于如此命名的园林中,据说有值得娱乐的显示巴利原文
Antarā ca bhante rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti ettha antarāsaddo vivare ‘‘apicāyaṃ bhikkhave tapodādvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) viya. Tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandassa ca vivareti attho daṭṭhabbo. Antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti. Ayojiyamāne hi upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarāsaddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicitraagāramakaṃsu, taṃ ‘‘rājāgāraka’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇo ambarukkho atthi, taṃ ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ti vadanti, tassa samīpe pavattattā uyyānampi ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ tveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ yathā ‘‘varuṇanagara’’nti, tasmā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ nāma uyyāne rājāgāraketi attho. Aviññāyamānassa hi viññāpanatthaṃ etaṃ ādhāradvayaṃ vuttaṃ rājāgārametassāti vā rājāgārakaṃ, uyyānaṃ, rājāgāravati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ nāma uyyāneti attho. Bhinnaliṅgampi hi visesanapadamatthī’’ti keci vadanti, evaṃ sati rājāgāraṃ ādhāro na siyā. ‘‘Rājāgāraketi evaṃnāmake uyyāne abhiramanārahaṃ kira rājāgārampi. Tattha, yassa vasenetaṃ evaṃ nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhitthero. Evaṃ sati ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikāya’’nti āsannataruṇambarukkhena visesetvā ‘‘rājāgārake’’ti uyyānameva nāmavasena vuttanti attho āpajjati, tathā ca vuttadosova siyā. Suppiyañca paribbājakanti suppiyaṃ nāma sañcayassa antevāsiṃ channaparibbājakañca. Brahmadattañca māṇavanti ettha taruṇo ‘‘māṇavo’’ti vutto ‘‘ambaṭṭho māṇavo, aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.259, 211) viya, tasmā brahmadattaṃ nāma taruṇapurisañca ārabbhāti attho. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇeti pasaṃsāya ceva garahāya ca. Atha vā guṇo vaṇṇo, aguṇo avaṇṇo, tesaṃ bhāsanaṃ uttarapadalopena tathā vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti.
“此后”这一句,语序如下:“阿难贤友,《沙门果经》是在何处所说的?”“尊者,在王舍城耆婆庵罗林。”“与谁共说?”“与韦提希子阿阇世王共说。”于是,尊者大迦叶向尊者阿难询问了《沙门果经》的缘起,也问了当时在场的人物。此处不应说“关于谁”,而应说“与谁共说”。何以故?因为此经并非仅由世尊所说,国王也说了“正如这些种种技艺处……”等一些话,因此应如此说。应知依此理趣,于一切处,或说“关于谁”,或说“与谁共说”,随宜而结集。“经”:即依经与品的合集而确立的圣典。如此,则“三品所摄,三十四经所庄严”的说法便得合理。“护持”:即以受持、读诵等方式持守。此后随即结集,文句如此衔接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tato para’’ntiādimhi ayaṃ vacanakkamo – sāmaññaphalaṃ panāvuso ānanda kattha bhāsitanti? Rājagahe bhante jīvakambavaneti. Kena saddhinti? Ajātasattunā vedehiputtena saddhinti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sāmaññaphalassa nidānampi pucchi, puggalampi pucchīti. Ettha hi ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kena saddhi’’nti vattabbaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Na bhagavatā eva etaṃ suttaṃ bhāsitaṃ, raññāpi ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni puthusippāyatanānī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.163) kiñci kiñci vuttamatthi, tasmā evameva vattabbanti. Imināva nayena sabbattha ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti vā ‘‘kena saddhi’’nti vā yathārahaṃ vatvā saṅgītimakāsīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tantinti suttavaggasamudāyavasena vavatthitaṃ pāḷiṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘tivaggasaṅgahaṃ catuttiṃsasuttapaṭimaṇḍita’’nti vacanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Pariharathāti uggahaṇavācanādivasena dhāretha. Tato anantaraṃ saṅgāyitvāti sambandho.
“以及法集”等,这是略说。如此,这便是古德所注释的含义。以此遮止了异端论者所说的“与《大法心》或《大界论》一起,七论为阿毗达摩藏”的主张,而彰显了同派论者所说的“唯与《论事》一起”的主张。因为这是细智的境界,或具细智者的境界,故称为细智所行境。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammasaṅgaho cā’’tiādinā samāso. Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitaṃ porāṇakehīti attho. Etena ‘‘mahādhammahadayena, mahādhātukathāya vā saddhiṃ sattappakaraṇaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ vitaṇḍavādimataṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘kathāvatthunāva saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ samānavādimataṃ dasseti. Saṇhañāṇassa, saṇhañāṇavantānaṃ vā visayabhāvato sukhumañāṇagocaraṃ.
小义释与大义释这两种,即是“义释”。长部诵者认为:诸如本生等属于小部的经典,以及大部分为法义解释、类似于阿毗达摩藏的经典,应摄归阿毗达摩藏,而不应摄归长部等经藏,也不应摄归以制立解释为体的律藏;因此他们将本生等摄于阿毗达摩藏。此处未收《行藏》与《佛种姓》,因其性质同于本生;未收《导论》与《藏释》等,因其性质同于义释与《无碍解道》。然而,中部诵者说:诸如本生等依因缘而说的经典,因其随顺的教说方式,应摄归经藏;不应摄归以自性法解释为体、如法教诫的阿毗达摩藏,也不应摄归以制立解释为体、如罪教诫的律藏;因此他们主张本生等属于经藏。对此应审察后,作合理的取舍。显示巴利原文
Cūḷaniddesamahāniddesavasena duvidhopi niddeso. Jātakādike khuddakanikāyapariyāpanne, yebhuyyena ca dhammaniddesabhūte tādise abhidhammapiṭakeva saṅgaṇhituṃ yuttaṃ, na pana dīghanikāyādippakāre suttantapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte vinayapiṭaketi dīghabhāṇakā jātakādīnaṃ abhidhammapiṭake saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsānañcettha aggahaṇaṃ jātakagatikattā, nettipeṭakopadesādīnañca niddesapaṭisambhidāmaggagatikattā. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana aṭṭhuppattivasena desitānaṃ jātakādīnaṃ yathānulomadesanābhāvato tādise suttantapiṭake saṅgaho yutto, na pana sabhāvadhammaniddesabhūte yathādhammasāsane abhidhammapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte yathāparādhasāsane vinayapiṭaketi jātakādīnaṃ suttantapiṭakapariyāpannataṃ vadanti. Yuttamettha vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
如此,从缘起、目的、时间、地点、作者、方式等方面说明了第一次结集之后,现在为显示其中所确立的法与律中种种善巧的差别——即一种等分类,而说‘evametaṃ’等语。其中,‘evaṃ’一词指示应以‘eta’词所缘取的如前所述的结集方式。‘yaṃ hi’等是广说。‘无上正等正觉’指以无碍智为近因的道智,及以道智为近因的无碍智。‘于此中间’指正觉与般涅槃之间的间隔。‘这四十五年’是以时间来确定。‘以观察者’是指依优陀那等方式而转起的法。‘所说的一切语’是连接。‘那是什么?’回答‘即是解脱味’,意为并非其他味。‘已解脱’是解脱,‘应尝应味’是味——因有解脱之味故为解脱味,即阿罗汉果味。这是阿阇梨舍利弗长老的意见(《心义疏·第一大结集语释》)。阿阇梨法护长老则作为一种说法而解释此义:‘已解脱、已解脱故为解脱,随其所应为道与果。味即功德,或成就的作用,依所说方式作复合——即解脱的功德,或由成就道果而具解脱成就,或由彻底解脱烦恼而成就解脱的作用’(《长部疏·第一大结集语释》)。在《增支部注释》中说:‘义……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nimittapayojanakāladesakārakakaraṇappakārehi paṭhamaṃ saṅgītiṃ dassetvā idāni tattha vavatthāpitesu dhammavinayesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ ekavidhādibhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘eva’’nti iminā etasaddena parāmasitabbaṃ yathāvuttasaṅgītippakāraṃ nidasseti. ‘‘Yañhī’’tiādi vitthāro. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ. Etthantareti abhisambujjhanassa, parinibbāyanassa ca vivare. Tadetaṃ pañcacattālīsa vassānīti kālavasena niyameti. Paccavekkhantena vāti udānādivasena pavattadhammaṃ sandhāyāha. Yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ tanti sambandho. Kiṃ panetanti āha ‘‘vimuttirasamevā’’ti, na tadaññarasanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vimuccitthāti vimutti, rasitabbaṃ assādetabbanti rasaṃ, vimuttisaṅkhātaṃ rasametassāti vimuttirasaṃ, arahattaphalassādanti attho. Ayaṃ ācariyasāriputtattherassa mati (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā). Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana taṃ kecivādaṃ katvā imamatthamāha ‘‘vimuccati vimuccitthāti vimutti, yathārahaṃ maggo phalañca. Rasanti guṇo, sampattikiccaṃ vā , vuttanayena samāso. Vimuttānisaṃsaṃ, vimuttisampattikaṃ vā maggaphalanipphādanato, vimuttikiccaṃ vā kilesānamaccantavimuttisampādanatoti attho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā). Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘attharasassādīsu attharaso nāma cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, dhammaraso nāma cattāro maggā, vimuttiraso nāma amatanibbāna’’nti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.335) vuttaṃ.
虽就通相而言,一切佛语皆因调伏烦恼而为律,因能令如教奉行者远离堕恶趣等而任持故为法,但此处为随顺用语意趣,从自相上简别所特指的法与律,故说‘其中律藏’等。其余佛语为法,因多依蕴等宣说自性法。或者,虽然律亦是法,因属教法等故,但当‘律’一词出现时,因所依事不同而使用的‘法’一词,即显示与‘律’相反的法藏,如‘福德智资粮,牛与黄牛’之例。为依用法显示此义,而说‘因此他说’等。意即:因律……法,故在《结集犍度》(《小品》347)中说明了它们如此的性质。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi avisesena sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ kilesavinayanena vinayo, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyapatanādito dhāraṇena dhammo ca hoti, tathāpi idhādhippeteyeva dhammavinaye vatticchāvasena sarūpato niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādimāha. Avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo khandhādivasena sabhāvadhammadesanābāhullato. Atha vā yadipi vinayo ca dhammoyeva pariyattiyādibhāvato, tathāpi vinayasaddasannidhāne bhinnādhikaraṇabhāvena payutto dhammasaddo vinayatanti viparītaṃ tantimeva dīpeti yathā ‘‘puññañāṇasambhārā, gobalībadda’’nti. Payogavasena taṃ dassentena ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena vinaya…pe… dhammo, teneva tesaṃ tathābhāvaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake (cūḷava. 347) āhāti attho.
‘Anekajātisaṃsāra’此偈是世尊观察自己以一切知智为近因的阿罗汉果证得时,在第十九观察智之后随即所说,故称为‘第一佛语’。据说这是诸佛皆不弃舍的优陀那。其略义为:我为了寻找此有身之家的建造者——渴爱工匠,以能见彼之智,即菩提智为目的,于燃灯佛足下发起愿求,如此长时,在多生轮回、无数百千生轮回中,未得报酬、未得彼智、未获未得而流转轮回。因为夹杂老病死,此所谓生是屡屡趋入之苦,而未见彼时此苦不会止息,故为寻求彼而流转。现在,有身之家的建造者——渴爱工匠,你已被证得一切知智的我看见了。你将不再建造我这有身之家。你的一切残余烦恼肋骨已被我粉碎。你这所造有身之家的屋顶——无明之椽环已被拆毁。现在我的心以无行涅槃为所缘而趋入。我已证得渴爱灭尽之阿罗汉道或阿罗汉果。在《义释》中则说:‘无行心即证得渴爱灭尽之阿罗汉道或阿罗汉果’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti ayaṃ gāthā bhagavatā attano sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattappattiṃ paccavekkhantena ekūnavīsatimassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa anantaraṃ bhāsitā, tasmā ‘‘paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vuttā. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhehi avijahitaṃ udānaṃ. Ayamassa saṅkhepattho – ahaṃ imassa attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kārakaṃ taṇhāvaḍḍhakiṃ gavesanto yena ñāṇena taṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tassa bodhiñāṇassatthāya dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro ettakaṃ kālaṃ anekajātisaṃsāraṃ anekajātisatasahassasaṅkhyaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ anibbisaṃ anibbisanto taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto alabhantoyeva sandhāvissaṃ saṃsariṃ. Yasmā jarābyādhimaraṇamissatāya jāti nāmesā punappunaṃ upagantuṃ dukkhā, na ca sā tasmiṃ adiṭṭhe nivattati, tasmā taṃ gavesanto sandhāvissanti attho. Idāni bho attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kāraka taṇhāvaḍḍhaki tvaṃ mayā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantena diṭṭho asi. Puna imaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ mama gehaṃ na kāhasi na karissasi. Tava sabbā avasesakilesa phāsukā mayā bhaggā bhañjitā . Imassa tayā katassa attabhāvasaṅkhātassa gehassa kūṭaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ kaṇṇikamaṇḍalaṃ visaṅkhataṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Idāni mama cittaṃ visaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gataṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Ahañca taṇhānaṃ khaya saṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato pattosmīti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana visaṅkhāragataṃ cittameva taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigatanti attho vutto.
在“sandhāvissaṃ”中,语词学者说“此偈中此词为过去之义”。有人则认为:“依时态所表之意愿,于过去时亦可表达未来。”“punappunaṃ”是表“屡屡”义的助词。“phāsu”:因应保护、应守护,故将pa变为pha;或因应触而作phāsu,其本身即是phāsukā。“ajjhagā”:他们称“此为今日之义,或为过去之义”。若以心为作者,则唯是过去。据说世尊以内心自语而说出“anekajātisaṃsāra”等二偈,故此乃意所转法之始;而“yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā”一偈,则是语所转法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sandhāvissa’’nti ettha ca ‘‘gāthāyamatītatthe imissa’’nti neruttikā. ‘‘Taṃkālavacanicchāyamatītepi bhavissantī’’ti keci. Punappunanti abhiṇhatthe nipāto. Pātabbā rakkhitabbāti phāsu pa-kārassa pha-kāraṃ katvā, phusitabbāti vā phāsu, sāyeva phāsukā. Ajjhagāti ca ‘‘ajjataniyamāttamiṃ vā aṃ vā’’ti vadanti. Yadi pana cittameva kattā, tadā parokkhāyeva. Antojappanavasena kira bhagavā ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti gāthādvayamāha, tasmā esā manasā pavattitadhammānamādi. ‘‘Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’ti ayaṃ pana vācāya pavattitadhammānanti vadanti.
“Kecī”指的是持诵《犍度》者。而首先所说明的,则是持诵《法句》者的主张。在“Yadā…pe… dhammā”中,“iti”一词被省略,具有举例与起始之义。因为倘若没有举例——即没有限定语——仅凭颠倒词义者,意义便不完整。对此,只取“iti”的起始义,则“iti”一词即表起始,如师子弃长老在《心义疏·第一结集语释》中所说:“由此,‘iti’一词摄取了‘tena ātāpino…pe… sahetudhamma’等为首的三首偈颂。”“Khandhake”指《大品》。“Udānagāthā”是依类别所说的单数,应知此处亦仅取第一首偈颂而说。显示巴利原文
Kecīti khandhakabhāṇakā. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ vādo. Yadā…pe… dhammāti ettha nidassanattho, ādyattho ca iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Nidassanena hi mariyādavacanena vinā padatthavipallāsakārināva attho paripuṇṇo na hoti. Tattha ādyatthameva iti-saddaṃ gahetvā iti-saddo ādiattho, ‘‘tena ātāpino…pe… sahetudhamma’ntiādigāthāttayaṃ saṅgaṇhātī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Khandhaketi mahāvagge. Udānagāthanti jātiyā ekavacanaṃ, tatthāpi vā paṭhamagāthameva gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在此,持诵《犍度》者这样说:“持诵《法句》者的偈颂是仅以意门宣说的,因此当时对广大人群并未带来利益;而我们的偈颂是发出言语而宣说的,因此当时对听闻的诸天与梵天带来了利益,所以这才是最初的佛语。”然而,持诵《法句》者则说:“宣说对人群是否有利益,并非判定是否为最初佛语的标准。因为这是世尊最初以意门宣说的,所以这才是最初的佛语。”因此,应知两种说法在各自的角度都合理。若问:“如果‘anekajātisaṃsāra’这首偈颂是仅以意门宣说的,那为何在《法句注》中说:‘导师坐在菩提树下,以自说语的方式诵出“anekajātisaṃsāra”这一佛法开示,后来被阿难长老问及而讲述’?”答:那是依义理而如此理解的。因为在那里,也应理解为“以意门自说”。正如有“以意门自说”和“以言语自说”两种自说之分。如果这是以言语自说,就应被收入《自说经》中;因此,未被收入《自说经》这一点,正可作为并非以言语自说,而是以意门自说的理由。而“成道之时”这一说法,不应理解为证得一切知智之时,而应理解为观察缘起之时。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca khandhakabhāṇakā evaṃ vadanti ‘‘dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ gāthā manasāva desitattā tadā mahato janassa upakārāya nāhosi, amhākaṃ pana gāthā vacībhedaṃ katvā desitattā tadā suṇantānaṃ devabrahmānaṃ upakārāya ahosi, tasmā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Dhammapadabhāṇakā pana ‘‘desanāya janassa upakārānupakārabhāvo paṭhamabhāve lakkhaṇaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā manasā paṭhamaṃ desitattā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vadanti . Tasmā ubhayampi ubhayathā yujjatīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ca yadi ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti gāthā manasāva desitā, atha kasmā dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’nti imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ satthā bodhirukkhamūle nisinno udānavasena udānetvā aparabhāge ānandattherena puṭṭho kathesī’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.152 udānavatthu) vuttanti? Atthavasena tathāyeva gahetabbattā. Tatthāpi hi manasā udānetvāti atthoyeva gahetabbo. Desanā viya hi udānampi manasā udānaṃ, vacasā udānanti dvidhā viññāyati. Yadi cāyaṃ vacasā udānaṃ siyā, udānapāḷiyamāruḷhā bhaveyya , tasmā udānapāḷiyamanāruḷhabhāvoyeva vacasā anudānetvā manasā udānabhāve kāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Pāṭipadadivase’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sabbaññubhāvappattassā’’ti etena na sambajjhitabbaṃ, ‘‘paccavekkhantassa uppannā’’ti etena pana sambajjhitabbaṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamāyameva hi bhagavā paccūsasamaye sabbaññutaṃ patto. Lokiyasamaye pana evampi sambajjhanaṃ bhavati, tathāpi nesa sāsanasamayoti na gahetabbaṃ. Somanassameva somanassamayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ, sīlamaya’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34) taṃsampayuttañāṇenāti attho. Somanassena vā sahajātādisattiyā pakataṃ, tādisena ñāṇenātipi vaṭṭati.
“Handa”是一个表示催促的助词。因“iṅgha sampādetha”即是催促。“Āmantayāmi”意为告知、令知,而“vo”是其宾语。文字学家们说:“在称呼义中只用第二格,不用第四格”,并以此为例。“Vayadhammā”是通过无常相来阐明诸行的苦相与无我相,如经中所说:“凡是无常的,就是苦的;凡是苦的,就是无我的。”应知,正是通过阐明三相的方式,开示了以彼为所缘的观智,从而揭示了不为一切外道所及的、佛陀独有的、以四谛为业处基础的、无颠倒的趣向涅槃之道。现在,以“appamādena sampādetha”劝导人们行于正道,其义为:以四谛为业处基础的、无颠倒的趣向涅槃之道,以不放逸而成就。再者,以“vayadhammā saṅkhārā”简要地激发悚惧感,再以“appamādena sampādetha”简要地开示了无余的正行道。因为“不放逸”一词总摄三学,涵括了完整圆满的教法;其义为:以不放逸成就那总摄三学、完整圆满、名为教法的正行道。显示巴利原文
Handāti codanatthe nipāto. Iṅgha sampādethāti hi codeti. Āmantayāmīti paṭivedayāmi, bodhemīti attho. Voti pana ‘‘āmantayāmī’’ti etassa kammapadaṃ. ‘‘Āmantanatthe dutiyāyeva, na catutthī’’ti hi vatvā tamevudāharanti akkharacintakā. Vayadhammāti aniccalakkhaṇamukhena saṅkhārānaṃ dukkhānattalakkhaṇampi vibhāveti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15, 45, 76, 77; 2.3.1, 4; paṭi. ma. 2.10) vacanato. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvananayeneva ca tadārammaṇaṃ vipassanaṃ dassento sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ buddhāveṇikaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānaṃ aviparītaṃ nibbānagāminipaṭipadaṃ pakāsetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idāni tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojeti ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti, tāya catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānāya aviparītanibbānagāminipaṭipadāya appamādena sampādethāti attho. Apica ‘‘vayadhammā saṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhepena saṃvejetvā ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti saṅkhepeneva niravasesaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti . Appamādapadañhi sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ sāsanaṃ pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhati, sikkhattayasaṅgahitāya kevalaparipuṇṇāya sāsanasaṅkhātāya sammāpaṭipattiyā appamādena sampādethāti attho. Ubhinnamantareti dvinnaṃ vacanānamantarāḷe vemajjhe. Ettha hi kālavatā kālopi nidassito tadavinābhāvittāti veditabbo.
在“Suttantapiṭaka”一词中,“sutta”本身即是“suttanta”,如同“kammanta, vananta”的构词。“已结集与未结集”是总说一切类别。“未结集”指在结集中被归入犍度的《论事》等。然而,有些人说“《须跋经》在第一次结集中未被结集”,这是不合理的。因为法护长老在《长部注·第一结集语释》中说:“《须跋经》早在第一次结集之前,就已由住在祇园精舍的尊者阿难为须跋青年所说。”而《须跋经》是以“如是我闻:一时,尊者阿难住在舍卫城祇树给孤独园,世尊般涅槃后不久……”等开头的。在那里,“如是我闻”等语,若由尊者阿难在第一次结集中亲口说出,是不合适的。因为阿难尊者不会自己宣说了《须跋经》后,又说“如是我闻”等。他应当这样说:“一时,我住在舍卫城的祇树给孤独园……”等。因此,似乎是第二次或第三次结集的参与者,以“如是我闻”等开头,将《须跋经》纳入结集。然而,法护长老的意图可能是这样的:“即使是阿难尊者所说的《须跋经》,大迦叶尊者等希望将其纳入第一次结集、确立为圣典的人,也显示巴利原文
Suttantapiṭakanti ettha suttameva suttantaṃ yathā ‘‘kammantaṃ, vananta’’nti. Saṅgītañca asaṅgītañcāti sabbasarūpamāha. ‘‘Asaṅgītanti ca saṅgītikkhandhakakathāvatthuppakaraṇādi. Keci pana ‘subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444) paṭhamasaṅgītiyamasaṅgīta’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Paṭhamasaṅgītito puretarameva hi āyasmatā ānandattherena jetavane viharantena subhassa māṇavassa bhāsita’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Subhasuttaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ me suttaṃ ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā ānando sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme aciraparinibbute bhagavatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.444) āgataṃ. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādivacanaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ āyasmatā ānandatthereneva vattuṃ yuttarūpaṃ na hoti. Na hi ānandatthero sayameva subhasuttaṃ desetvā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīni vadati. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ siyā ‘‘ekamidāhaṃ bhante samayaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ viharāmi jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’tiādi. Tasmā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītikārakehi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā subhasuttaṃ saṅgītimāropitaṃ viya dissati. Athācariyadhammapālattherassa evamadhippāyo siyā ‘‘ānandatthereneva vuttampi subhasuttaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītimāropetvā tantiṃ ṭhapetukāmehi mahākassapattherādīhi aññesu suttesu āgatanayeneva ‘evaṃ me suta’ntiādinā tanti ṭhapitā’’ti. Evaṃ sati yujjeyya. Atha vā āyasmā ānando subhasuttaṃ sayaṃ desentopi sāmaññaphalādīsu bhagavatā desitanayeneva desesīti bhagavato sammukhā laddhanaye ṭhatvā desitattā bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ attani adahanto ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāhāti evamadhippāyepi sati yujjateva. ‘‘Anusaṅgītañcā’’tipi pāṭho. Dutiyatatiyasaṅgītīsu puna saṅgītañcāti atthavasena ninnānākaraṇameva. Samodhānetvā vinayapiṭakaṃ nāma veditabbaṃ, sutta…pe… abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāma veditabbanti yojanā.
依比丘、比丘尼巴帝摩卡而有二部巴帝摩卡。依比丘、比丘尼分别而有二分别。于大品、小品中所出有二十二犍度。各以十六转起而相区分,故说为“十六附随”。于附随巴利中,大分别有十六转起,比丘尼分别有十六转起,合为三十二转起。然而,于某些写本中仅见“附随”而已,但于多数写本、律藏注释及阿毗达摩注释中,皆见“十六附随”之语,故此读法亦不可排斥,遂依此而释其义。“如是”者,示所说之佛语已,而以“此”指称之。或“iti”一字用于“此”义,“idaṃ”仅为言辞之顺适,或“iti idaṃ”二同义语皆用于“此”义,如“今现在有”等语中所见。于此类处,理趣同此。梵网等三十四经,于此中摄集,或以此摄集,或他们之摄集、计数为此所有,故为“梵网等三十四经摄集”。其余诸处亦同此理。于前所述长部诵者与中部诵者之主张中,因中部诵者之主张更为合理,故将小诵等亦摄入经藏而示之,言:“小诵……乃至……名为经藏”。其中,因有言:“谛听诸已修习者之偈,乃义利导引者”(长老偈·序偈),故“长老偈、长老尼偈”之读法为合理。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhubhikkhunīpātimokkhavasena ubhayāni pātimokkhāni. Bhikkhubhikkhunīvibhaṅgavasena dve vibhaṅgā. Mahāvaggacūḷavaggesu āgatā dvāvīsati khandhakā. Paccekaṃ soḷasahi vārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasa parivārāti vuttaṃ. Parivārapāḷiyañhi mahāvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā, bhikkhunīvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā cāti bāttiṃsa vārā āgatā. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘parivārā’’ti ettakameva dissati, bahūsu pana potthakesu vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘soḷasa parivārā’’ti evameva dissamānattā ayampi pāṭho na sakkā paṭibāhitunti tassevattho vutto. ‘‘Itī’’ti yathāvuttaṃ buddhavacanaṃ nidassetvā ‘‘ida’’nti taṃ parāmasati. Iti-saddo vā idamatthe, idanti vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattaṃ, iti idanti vā pariyāyadvayaṃ idamattheyeva vattati ‘‘idānetarahi vijjatī’’tiādīsu viya. Esa nayo īdisesu. Brahmajālādīni catuttiṃsa suttāni saṅgayhanti ettha, etena vā, tesaṃ vā saṅgaho gaṇanā etassāti brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho. Evamitaresupi. Heṭṭhā vuttesu dīghabhāṇakamajjhimabhāṇakānaṃ vādesu majjhimabhāṇakānaññeva vādassa yuttatarattā khuddakapāṭhādayopi suttantapiṭakeyeva saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘khuddaka…pe… suttantapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti āha. Tattha ‘‘suṇātha bhāvitattānaṃ, gāthā atthūpanāyikāti (theragā. nidānagāthā) vuttattā ‘‘theragāthā therīgāthā’’ti ca pāṭho yutto.
如此依自性确定三藏之后,现在为显示词释而说:“其中”等。“其中”,是指在三种藏之中。“由种种差别理趣故”,即由种种理趣故,及由差别理趣故。“由律制故”,是指律制的状态,这里是以状态作为根本的表述,或者说是状态的省略;否则,若以实物为根本,那么具有律制状态功德的律制实物本身就会被当作原因而被称为“律”,但并不是因为律制状态的功德而得名,那就会导致非预期的含义。这一理趣在此类情况中也同样适用。或者,“令调伏”即是律制,其义为“由彼故”。这个“律”是义施设,属于概念的“此”,就是律。被称为“律”者,则是声施设,属于名称的“律”名,即被说示。实际上,针对义施设而阐明名施设,这就是词释。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato piṭakattayaṃ niyametvā idāni nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tibbidhesu piṭakesu. Vividhavisesanayattāti vividhanayattā, visesanayattā ca. Vinayanatoti vinayanabhāvato, bhāvappadhānaniddesoyaṃ, bhāvalopo vā, itarathā dabbameva padhānaṃ siyā, tathā ca sati vinayanatāguṇasamaṅginā vinayadabbeneva hetubhūtena vinayoti akkhāto, na pana vinayanatāguṇenāti anadhippetatthappasaṅgo bhaveyya. Ayaṃ nayo edisesu. Vinīyate vā vinayanaṃ, tatoti attho. Ayaṃ vinayoti atthapaññattibhūto saññīsaṅkhāto ayaṃ tanti vinayo. Vinayoti akkhātoti saddapaññattibhūto saññāsaṅkhāto vinayo nāmāti kathito. Atthapaññattiyā hi nāmapaññattivibhāvanaṃ nibbacananti.
现在为了解释这首偈颂的意义而说:“种种”等。应以“其中具有种种理趣,因此由种种理趣而被称为律”等方式来连结。以“五种”等显示种种的自相,又以“坚固业”等显示差别的相貌。在有关世间罪的学处中,以坚固业为用;在有关施设罪的学处中,则以宽松为用。超越防护界限而生起的行为,称为违越行,也就是违犯;这种行为在身、语中生起,而它的遮止正是如此,由此,这个遮止本身即以方便的方式,被称为身语的调伏。说过“故”之后,为了多方面地指称它,而说“由种种理趣”等。为了说明所说的偈颂旨在阐明这样的词释,因此说“由此”等。“由此”,是指由种种理趣等作为原因,为作具格。又有说法:为了显示“种种”等句中所说的功德,而说“由此”等,也有这样的连结方式。若是如此,则“由此”是指由种种理趣等因之义。或者还有说法:为了让它与“这首偈颂是古德根据所说之语而说”相应,而说“由此”等,其中“由此”一词的意义同于第二种理趣。“此”是指偈颂的言语。“此”是指“律”一词,与“词义”一词相连结。虽然已经说了“词之义”的连结,但为了显示该词在共相中的差别,因此再次说“此”。而语源学者们在复合词与派生词成立时,由于共相和名词的缘故,对于这类情况,想要用另一个词来显示差别相。显示巴利原文
Idāni imissā gāthāya atthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Vividhā ettha nayā, tasmā vividhanayattā vinayoti akkhāto’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Vividhattaṃ sarūpato dasseti ‘‘pañcavidhā’’tiādinā, tathā visesattampi ‘‘daḷhīkammā’’tiādinā. Lokavajjesu sikkhāpadesu daḷhīkammapayojanā, paṇṇattivajjesu sithilakaraṇapayojanā. Saññamavelaṃ abhibhavitvā pavatto ācāro ajjhācāro, vītikkamo, kāye, vācāya ca pavatto so, tassa nisedhanaṃ tathā, tena tathānisedhanameva pariyāyena kāyavācāvinayanaṃ nāmāti dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti vatvā tassānekadhā parāmasanamāha ‘‘vividhanayattā’’tiādi. Yathāvuttā ca gāthā īdisassa nibbacanassa pakāsanatthaṃ vuttāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāti vividhanayattādihetunā karaṇabhūtenāti vadanti. Apica ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādivākyassa yathāvuttassa guṇaṃ dassento ‘‘tenā’’tiādimāhātipi sambandhaṃ vadanti. Evaṃ sati tenāti vividhanayattādinā hetubhūtenāti attho. Atha vā yathāvuttavacanameva sandhāya porāṇehi ayaṃ gāthā vuttāti saṃsandetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttantipi vadanti, dutiyanaye viya ‘‘tenā’’ti padassa attho. Etanti gāthāvacanaṃ. Etassāti vinayasaddassa, ‘‘vacanatthā’’ti padena sambandho. ‘‘Vacanassa attho’’ti hi sambandhe vuttepi tassa vacanasāmaññato visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘etassā’’ti puna vuttaṃ. Neruttikā pana samāsataddhitesu siddhesu sāmaññattā, nāmasaddattā ca edisesu saddantarena visesitabhāvaṃ icchanti.
“诸义”一词,应与“由指示……乃至……诸经”等词,依相应之格关系而连结。彼义开显云:“盖彼”等。于自义、他义等差别之义中,凡讽诵、听闻、教授、思惟、宣说彼经者,由经所摄之戒等义亦为彼所有,由此,应令成就于他故,于他亦然,彼经指示、显明彼二者,如是,于现法义、后世义、世间义、出世间义等差别之义,以“等”字摄之。且此“义”字为利益之同义词,非所说义之词。若为所说义,则“经指示自己之所说义,亦指示于他”云云,此成非所期之义。盖由经所显了之义,乃属彼能显之经本身,故不由彼指示他义,因无彼所应指示、应遮遣之他义,故亦不应作自义之摄;因无离自义、他义之所说义,故亦不应作“等”字之摄。是故,因所说之利益同义词之义于经中不存在,故依持经之人而说自义、他义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthāna’’nti padaṃ ‘‘sūcanato…pe… suttāṇā’’ti padehi yathārahaṃ kammasambandhavasena yojetabbaṃ. Tamatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tañhī’’tiādinā. Attatthaparatthādibhede attheti yo taṃ suttaṃ sajjhāyati, suṇāti, vāceti, cinteti, deseti ca, suttena saṅgahito sīlādiattho tassapi hoti, tena parassa sādhetabbato parassapīti tadubhayaṃ taṃ suttaṃ sūceti dīpeti, tathā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe lokiyalokuttaratthe cāti evamādibhede atthe ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhāti. Atthasaddo cāyaṃ hitapariyāyo, na bhāsitatthavacano. Yadi siyā, suttaṃ attanopi bhāsitatthaṃ sūceti, parassapīti ayamanadhippetattho vutto siyā. Suttena hi yo attho pakāsito, so tasseva pakāsakassa suttassa hoti, tasmā na tena parattho sūcito, tena sūcetabbassa paratthassa nivattetabbassa abhāvā attatthaggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Attatthaparatthavinimuttassa bhāsitatthassa abhāvā ādiggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttassa hitapariyāyassa atthassa sutte asambhavato suttādhārassa puggalassa vasena attatthaparatthā vuttā.
或者,不依于经文,而于“不为他利,唯赞自利”一语之释义(《大义释》63)中所说的自利、他利、俱利、现法利、来世利、浅显利、甚深利、隐秘利、覆蔽利、应引利、已引利、无过利、无垢利、清净利、究竟利等利益类别,这些正是它所要指示的——应当如此把握其义。虽然不顾经文而说自利等,因为未以经义加以说明,但这些利益类别中,哪怕任一,亦不脱离须由经文阐明的特性。在如此抉择“义”时,“义”字也可作为“言说之义”的同义表达。因为在此,前五种利益类别是“利益”的同义表达;其后六种是“言说之义”的类别;最后四种则兼具二者性质。其中,因易于理解、显了而不深奥,故为“浅显利”;因难以证得、显了而深奥,故为“甚深利”;未曾开显者为“隐秘利”;如同树根、水等被泥土等遮蔽,被字句组合等所隐匿,故为“覆蔽利”;须加以引出而告知者,为“应引利”;依文即可解者,为“已引利”。无过、无垢、清净,是依同义表达而说,或依善异熟、行、法的次第分别配属。究竟利即涅槃,或即诸法不颠倒的自性。显示巴利原文
Atha vā suttaṃ anapekkhitvā ye attatthādayo atthappabhedā ‘‘na ha’ññadattha’tthi pasaṃsalābhā’’ti etassa padassa niddese (mahāni. 63) vuttā ‘‘attattho, parattho, ubhayattho, diṭṭhadhammiko attho, samparāyiko attho, uttāno attho, gambhīro attho, gūḷho attho, paṭicchanno attho, neyyo attho, nīto attho, anavajjo attho, nikkileso attho, vodāno attho, paramattho’’ti, (mahāni. 63) te atthappabhede sūcetīti attho gahetabbo. Kiñcāpi hi suttanirapekkhaṃ attatthādayo vuttā suttatthabhāvena aniddiṭṭhattā, tesu pana ekopi atthappabhedo suttena dīpetabbataṃ nātivattatīti. Imasmiñca atthavikappe atthasaddo bhāsitatthapariyāyopi hoti. Ettha hi purimakā pañca atthappabhedā hitapariyāyā, tato pare cha bhāsitatthappabhedā, pacchimakā cattāro ubhayasabhāvā. Tattha suviññeyyatāya vibhāvena anagādhabhāvo uttāno. Duradhigamatāya vibhāvena agādhabhāvo gambhīro. Avivaṭo gūḷho. Mūludakādayo viya paṃsunā akkharasannivesādinā tirohito paṭicchanno. Niddhāretvā ñāpetabbo neyyo. Yathārutavasena veditabbo nīto. Anavajjanikkilesavodānā pariyāyavasena vuttā, kusalavipākakiriyādhammavasena vā yathākkamaṃ yojetabbā. Paramattho nibbānaṃ, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo eva vā.
或者,由“自己少欲”指示自利,由“令他人少欲”指示他利。依此方式,“自己远离杀生,又劝导他人远离杀生”等经文应如此配属。然而余师则说:“如自性所说之自利,即说明富兰那迦叶等外道之教义为他利;或自利为经所摄,他利随顺于经;或自利随顺经部义,他利随顺律与阿毗达摩义。”而且,应以律与阿毗达摩作区分来说明“经”一词之义。因此,随所化弟子意乐而转的教说,显然开示了自利、他利等,以其为主要;而非依命令法自性而转。正因如此,才说“由指示诸义故为经”。此处“sūca”(指示)一词是略音。“如此所作之后,在自宗论中说‘这是彼世尊经中所出、经所摄的’以及‘五百经’等,在此语境中,经一词应理解为引申义”——这是阿阇梨舍利弗长老所说。而其他人则说,依上述同样的词源解释,经一词亦可作为律与阿毗达摩的表称词。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘attanā ca appiccho hotī’’ti attatthaṃ, ‘‘appicchakathañca paresaṃ kattā hotī’’ti paratthaṃ sūceti. Evaṃ ‘‘attanā ca pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, parañca pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā samādapetī’’tiādisuttāni (a. ni. 4.99, 265) yojetabbāni. Apare pana ‘‘yathāsabhāvaṃ bhāsitaṃ attatthaṃ, pūraṇakassapādīnamaññatitthiyānaṃ samayabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ sūceti, suttena vā saṅgahitaṃ attatthaṃ, suttānulomabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ, suttantanayabhūtaṃ vā attatthaṃ, vinayābhidhammanayabhūtaṃ paratthaṃ sūcetī’’tipi vadanti. Vinayābhidhammehi ca visesetvā suttasaddassa attho vattabbo, tasmā veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya desanāya sātisayaṃ attahitaparahitādīni pakāsitāni honti tappadhānabhāvato, na pana āṇādhammasabhāva-vasappavattāyāti idameva ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato sutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Sūca-saddassa cettha rasso. ‘‘Evañca katvā ‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpanna’nti (pāci. 655, 1242) ca sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’ti (aṭṭhasā. nidānakathā, kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ca evamādīsu suttasaddo upacaritoti gahetabbo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Aññe pana yathāvuttasadiseneva nibbacanena suttasaddassa vinayābhidhammānampi vācakattaṃ vadanti.
在经中,命令法自性随顺所化弟子的意乐,而不像在律和阿毗达摩中,所化弟子的意乐随顺命令法自性,因此,经的教说能导致所化者获得绝对的利益,故说“此处之义善说”等。“经的教说能导致绝对的利益”这句话,也是在经的教说成就所化者利益时,仅就其为主要因素而说的。而其主要因素,应视为随顺所化弟子的意乐。因此他说:“由于是随顺所化弟子意乐而说的。”以此原因,难道律和阿毗达摩不也是善说的吗?为何唯独这样说?他排除了这种诘难。显示巴利原文
Sutte ca āṇādhammasabhāvo veneyyajjhāsayamanuvattati, na vinayābhidhammesu viya veneyyajjhāsayo āṇādhammasabhāve, tasmā veneyyānaṃ ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanāti āha ‘‘suvuttā cettha atthā’’tiādi. ‘‘Ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā’’ti idampi veneyyānaṃ hitasampādane suttantadesanāya tapparabhāvameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tapparabhāvo ca veneyyajjhāsayānulomato daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘veneyyajjhāsayānulomena vuttattā’’ti. Etena ca hetunā nanu vinayābhidhammāpi suvuttā, atha kasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti anuyogaṃ pariharati.
为显示依循序渐进的修学等,经过一段时间方能成就法义,故说“如谷之果”。意思是:正如谷物并非在播种等的当下便结果,而是通过次第培育等,经过一段时间方结果;同样,此法并非在听闻、受持等的当下即生起法义,而是依循序渐进的修学等,经过一段时间方生起。此处“pasavati”即结果、即成就,因为成就即是结果。为显示唯具足方便者能成就法义,故说“如牛之乳”。其意趣为:恰如适时产犊的母牛,若以方便抓住乳房挤奶,乳汁才会流出;若不当时、或未产犊则否。即便适时,若抓住牛角等无方便处挤奶,亦不能得。同理,此法以出离等为前行,唯具足方便者听闻、受持,方能流出戒等法义;而若如蛇喻般,听闻、受持而无方便,则不能成就。纵使将“sūdatī”释为“沸腾”或“流出”,亦依使役用法,说有作为动词词根的含义,如说“paggharāpeti”即“使流出”,如同“taratī”之意为“使落下”。至于“suttāṇa”,他解释为“善妙且确实……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantarena atthābhinipphattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sassamiva phala’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sassaṃ nāma vapanaropanādikkhaṇeyeva phalaṃ na pasavati, anupubbajagganādivasena kālantareneva pasavati, tathā idampi savanadhāraṇādikkhaṇeyeva atthe na pasavati, anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantareneva pasavatīti. Pasavatīti ca phalati, abhinipphādetīti attho. Abhinipphādanameva hi phalanaṃ. Upāyasamaṅgīnaññeva atthābhinipphattiṃ dassento ‘‘dhenu viya khīra’’nti āha. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yathā dhenu nāma kāle jātavacchā thanaṃ gahetvā duhataṃ upāyavantānameva khīraṃ paggharāpeti, na akāle ajātavacchā. Kālepi vā visāṇādikaṃ gahetvā duhataṃ anupāyavantānaṃ, tathā idampi nissaraṇādinā savanadhāraṇādīni kurutaṃ upāyavantānameva sīlādiatthe paggharāpeti, na alagaddūpamāya savanadhāraṇādīni kurutaṃ anupāyavantānanti. Yadipi ‘‘sūdatī’’ti etassa gharati siñcatīti attho, tathāpi sakammikadhātuttā paggharāpetīti kāritavasena attho vutto yathā ‘‘taratī’’ti etassa nipātetīti attho’’ti. ‘‘Suttāṇā’’ti etassa atthamāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ca ne tāyatī’’ti. Neti atthe.
Suttasabhāga(经之同类)意为与经相似。通过“正如……”等语句显示其状态。木匠的线(sutta)即木工的黑线。由于依循它来削切,它成为标准。这里的意思是——正如拉出黑线、做好标记后,便明了应取用和应舍弃的部分,因此它成为木匠的标准;同样,在争论生起时,一旦引用经典,由于“此应取,此应舍”变得清晰,争论便平息,因此经典是智者的标准。现在,为了以另一种方式阐明经之同类性,说道“又如……”等。以线(suttena)即用任何结实的线穿起花朵。Saṅgahitāni(被摄持)意为善巧地、或整齐地持取,即被穿起之义。不散落(na vikiriyanti)指不会四处散乱;不毁坏(na viddhaṃsīyanti)指不会断坏破碎。此处意旨为——如同以结实的线穿起的花朵不会被风吹散、毁坏,同样,以经典摄持的义理不会被邪说所散乱、毁坏。并且,由于随应所化众生心性而起的教说,在自利、利他等方面有殊胜的阐明,故从教令、法性等方面区别于律与阿毗达摩,而唯独说此经之同类性。在“因此……”等语句中,应随宜依前述之理说明其关联与含义。此处,虽前文已说“经藏”,但未用“anta(藏)”字,是为了显示它没有单独的含义,因其以彼之状态而说。因为,不提及伴随词“saha”,便表明其剩余部分与它同格,或表明它无意义。显示巴利原文
Suttasabhāganti suttasadisaṃ. Tabbhāvaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā. Tacchakānaṃ suttanti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ kāḷasuttaṃ. Pamāṇaṃ hoti tadanusārena tacchanato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā kāḷasuttaṃ pasāretvā saññāṇe kate gahetabbaṃ, vissajjetabbañca paññāyati, tasmā taṃ tacchakānaṃ pamāṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ vivādesu uppannesu sutte ānītamatte ‘‘idaṃ gahetabbaṃ, idaṃ vissajjetabba’’nti pākaṭattā vivādo vūpasammati, tasmā etaṃ viññūnaṃ pamāṇanti. Idāni aññathāpi suttasabhāgataṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādimāha. Suttenāti pupphāvutena yena kenaci thirasuttena. Saṅgahitānīti suṭṭhu, samaṃ vā gahitāni, āvutānīti attho. Na vikiriyantīti ito cito ca vippakiṇṇābhāvamāha, na viddhaṃsīyantīti chejjabhejjābhāvaṃ. Ayametthādhippāyo – yathā thirasuttena saṅgahitāni pupphāni vātena na vikiriyanti na viddhaṃsīyanti, evaṃ suttena saṅgahitā atthā micchāvādena na vikiriyanti na viddhaṃsīyantīti. Veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya ca desanāya attatthaparatthādīnaṃ sātisayappakāsanato āṇādhammasabhāvehi vinayābhidhammehi visesetvā imasseva suttasabhāgatā vuttā. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādīsu vuttanayānusārena sambandho ceva attho ca yathārahaṃ vattabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘suttantapiṭaka’’nti heṭṭhā vuttepi antasaddassa avacanaṃ tassa visuṃ atthābhāvadassanatthaṃ tabbhāvavuttito. Sahayogassa hi saddassa avacanena sesatā tassa tulyādhikaraṇataṃ, anatthakataṃ vā ñāpeti.
“Yanti”是不变词,表原因,义为“由于那个”。此处,在阿毗达摩中,由于那些有增上的法被说示,因此阿毗达摩被称为“阿毗达摩”,应如此分别结合。基于“abhi”前缀的含义而有此分类,为显示其依彼义而转起,并成就彼义,故说“因为此……”等。“abhi”前缀在动作行为中,显示称为增长、殊胜的超越义,故说“在‘abhikkamanti(前进)’等词中,用于增长义”。“Abhiññātā(被善知)”即通过半月等某种标记而被认知,意为被了知、被显明。因为,通过月相的特征而有认知:“由于半月,故为初八;由于月缺,故为十四;由于月满,故为十五”。“Abhilakkhitā(被善标记)”中,也应知同此义。但在《根本五十篇·怖畏经》中,说“abhilakkhita”是“abhiññāta”的同义词,故说“在‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’等中,用于标记义”。若如此,由于“lakkhita”一词本身即显示标记义,“abhi”前缀岂非无义?不应如此看待,因为它也阐明彼义。当有表义之词存在时,前缀与不变词仅是彼义的阐明者;因此,由“lakkhita”一词以表义方式所显示的标记义,再由“abhi”前缀以阐明方式加以显示,故说“abhi”前缀也转起于标记义中,应如此理解。“Rājābhirājā(王中之王)”意为值得被其他诸王供养之王。“Pūjite(被供养)”意为值得供养。此在《经集·塞罗经》中。显示巴利原文
Yanti esa nipāto kāraṇe, yenāti attho. Ettha abhidhamme vuḍḍhimanto dhammā yena vuttā, tena abhidhammo nāma akkhātoti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Abhi-saddassa atthavasenāyaṃ pabhedoti tassa tadatthappavattatādassanena tamatthaṃ sādhento ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādimāha. Abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvasaṅkhātamatirekatthaṃ dīpetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkamantītiādīsu vuḍḍhiyaṃ āgato’’ti. Abhiññātāti aḍḍhacandādinā kenaci saññāṇena ñātā, paññātā pākaṭāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aḍḍhacandādibhāvo hi rattiyā upalakkhaṇavasena paññāṇaṃ hoti ‘‘yasmā aḍḍho, tasmā aṭṭhamī. Yasmā ūno, tasmā cātuddasī. Yasmā puṇṇo, tasmā pannarasī’’ti. Abhilakkhitāti etthāpi ayamevattho veditabbo, idaṃ pana mūlapaṇṇāsake bhayabheravasutte (ma. ni. 1.34) abhilakkhitasaddapariyāyo abhiññātasaddoti āha ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitātiādīsu lakkhaṇe’’ti. Yajjevaṃ lakkhitasaddasseva lakkhaṇatthadīpanato abhi-saddo anatthakova siyāti? Nevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tassāpi tadatthajotanato. Vācakasaddasannidhāne hi upasagganipātā tadatthajotakamattāti lakkhitasaddena vācakabhāvena pakāsitassa lakkhaṇatthasseva jotakabhāvena pakāsanato abhi-saddopi lakkhaṇe pavattatīti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rājābhirājāti parehi rājūhi pūjitumaraho rājā. Pūjiteti pūjārahe. Idaṃ pana suttanipāte selasutte (su. ni. 553 ādayo).
“阿毗达摩中”意指远离与律制不相混杂的法,如说“即使梦中遗精无犯,也有不善思”等。由于前后无矛盾,所述诸法本身互不混杂,故也称为“互不混杂之法”。或者,于“杀生是不善”等中,意图令死、生起断命根加行的思是不善,而所谓“有情”的命根断除并不称为“杀”。同样,“取不属于自己的他人财物,称为‘不与取’的表色是无记法,生起彼表色的偷盗思则是不善法”,依此类推,应知“互不混杂之法”之义。而在“阿毗律中”,如说“不应捉持金银”,此于律中教导;如说“如此捉持者犯波逸提,如此则犯恶作”,此于阿毗律中教导。因此,对于以盗心取他人金银者,随其所应,犯波罗夷、偷兰遮或恶作之一;以库官身份取者,犯波逸提;为自己而取者,犯舍堕波逸提;仅因贪玩而取者,犯不可触恶作;被认可为弃钱者,则无犯。如此,在互不混杂的律中亦能教导,应知此义。因此,为从自性上简略显示其限定性,说“互不……成为……”.显示巴利原文
Abhidhammeti ‘‘supinantena sukkavisaṭṭhiyā anāpattibhāvepi akusalacetanā upalabbhatī’’tiādinā (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vinayapaññattiyā saṅkaravirahite dhamme. Pubbāparavirodhābhāvena yathāvuttadhammānameva aññamaññasaṅkaravirahato aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammetipi vadanti. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto akusala’’nti (ma. ni. 2.192) evamādīsu vā maraṇādhippāyassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā akusalo, na pāṇasaṅkhātajīvitindriyassa upacchedasaṅkhāto atipāto. Tathā ‘‘adinnassa parasantakassa ādānasaṅkhātā viññatti abyākato dhammo, taṃviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā akusalo dhammo’’ti evamādināpi aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammeti attho veditabbo. Abhivinayeti ettha pana ‘‘jātarūparajataṃ na paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadanto vinaye vineti nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘evaṃ paṭiggaṇhato pācittiyaṃ, evaṃ pana dukkaṭa’’nti vadanto abhivinaye vineti nāmāti vadanti. Tasmā jātarūparajataṃ parasantakaṃ theyyacittena gaṇhantassa yathāvatthuṃ pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭesu aññataraṃ, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena gaṇhantassa pācittiyaṃ, attano atthāya gaṇhantassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, kevalaṃ lolatāya gaṇhantassa anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ, rūpiyachaḍḍakasammatassa anāpattīti evaṃ aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite vinayepi paṭibalo vinetunti attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ pana paricchinnataṃ sarūpato saṅkhepeneva dassento ‘‘aññamañña…pe… hotī’’ti āha.
“Abhikkantena”中,abhi-词缀表示“殊胜”即“增上”之义,故说为“增上”。然而,在“abhikkamantī”中,abhi-词缀表示行进动作的增长、超越;在“abhiññātā abhilakkhitā”中,表示智与相动作的极明显之殊胜;在“abhikkantena”中,表示殊胜的增上、殊胜状态——这是合理的,因为词缀是动作的差别者。语法论典中说:“动词与动作相关时,词缀(与动词相连)。”然而,在“abhirājā, abhivinaye”中,abhi-词缀用于被尊敬、被限定的王与律,这如何合理?因为非实体词不能成为实体词的能诠。对此并无过失,因为它也表示了尊敬、限定等动作,并且由于这些动作,也适用于与这些动作相关的王与律。即,以“被殊胜尊敬的王”之义,以动作与作者的关系为因,abhi-词缀主要说作为业所成的王实体,而次要地说尊敬动作。同样,以“被殊胜限定的律”之义,以动作与作者的关系为因,abhi-词缀主要说作为业所成的律实体,而次要地说限定动作。因此……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Abhikkantenāti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ abhi-saddo dīpetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adhike’’ti. Nanu ca ‘‘abhikkamantī’’ti ettha abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekattaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’’ti ettha ñāṇalakkhaṇakiriyānaṃ supākaṭataṃ visesaṃ, ‘‘abhikkantenā’’ti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ visiṭṭhabhāvaṃ dīpetīti idaṃ tāva yuttaṃ kiriyāvisesakattā upasaggassa. ‘‘Pādayo kiriyāyoge upasaggā’’ti hi saddasatthe vuttaṃ. ‘‘Abhirājā, abhivinaye’’ti pana pūjitaparicchinnesu rājavinayesu abhi-saddo vattatīti kathametaṃ yujjeyya. Na hi asatvavācī saddo satvavācako sambhavatīti? Natthi atra doso pūjanaparicchedanakiriyānampi dīpanato, tāhi ca kiriyāhi yuttesu rājavinayesupi pavattattā. Abhipūjito rājāti hi atthena kiriyākārakasambandhaṃ nimittaṃ katvā kammasādhanabhūtaṃ rājadabbaṃ abhi-saddo padhānato vadati, pūjanakiriyaṃ pana appadhānato. Tathā abhiparicchinno vinayoti atthena kiriyākārakasambandhaṃ nimittaṃ katvā kammasādhanabhūtaṃ vinayadabbaṃ abhi-saddo padhānato vadati, paricchindanakiriyaṃ pana appadhānato. Tasmā atimālādīsu ati-saddo viya abhi-saddo ettha saha sādhanena kiriyaṃ vadatīti abhirājaabhivinayasaddā sopasaggāva siddhā. Evaṃ abhidhammasaddepi abhisaddo saha sādhanena vuḍḍhiyādikiriyaṃ vadatīti ayamattho dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
即使abhi-词缀在上述诸义中成立,但若问:以其运用,由dhamma一词所表示的具有增长等义的法,在此处是否就不会被说及?此义如何合理?为回应此追问,论师说“ettha ca”等。其中,“ettha”指在此阿毗达摩中。“ca”字表引介。“bhāvetī”指心的增长,“pharitvā”指所缘的增长,因此,以这些修习与遍满的增长,具有增长的法也被说及,这是其义。“ārammaṇādīhi”指以所缘、相应、业、门、行道等。“ekantato lokuttaradhammānaññeva pūjārahattā”等,由于唯有出世间法绝对值得尊敬,故以“有学法”等显示唯他们被尊敬。“pūjārahā”以此遮遣作者等成就法、过去等时间、或可能义。即显示此中唯应被尊敬、无时间差别限制、值得尊敬的法被说及。“sabhāvaparicchinnattā”指以触等自性而被限定。“kāmāvacarehi mahantabhāvato mahaggatā dhammā adhikā, tatopi uttaravirahato anuttarā dhammā”以“mahaggatā”等显示:因较欲界法为大,故广大法为增上;因无更上者,故为无上法。“tena”指以“vuḍḍhimanto”等语为工具因或原因。显示巴利原文
Hotu abhi-saddo yathāvuttesu atthesu, tappayogena pana dhammasaddena dīpitā vuḍḍhimantādayo dhammā ettha vuttā na bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ ayamattho yujjeyyāti anuyoge sati taṃ pariharanto ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha etthāti etasmiṃ abhidhamme. Upanyāse ca-saddo. Bhāvetīti cittassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ, pharitvāti ārammaṇassa vaḍḍhanaṃ, tasmā tāhi bhāvanāpharaṇavuḍḍhīhi vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttāti attho . Ārammaṇādīhīti ārammaṇasampayuttakammadvārapaṭipadādīhi. Ekantato lokuttaradhammānaññeva pūjārahattā ‘‘sekkhā dhammā’’tiādinā teyeva pūjitāti dassitā. ‘‘Pūjārahā’’ti etena kattādisādhanaṃ, atītādikālaṃ, sakkuṇeyyatthaṃ vā nivatteti. Pūjitabbāyeva hi dhammā kālavisesaniyamarahitā pūjārahā ettha vuttāti adhippāyo dassito. Sabhāvaparicchinnattāti phusanādisabhāvena paricchinnattā. Kāmāvacarehi mahantabhāvato mahaggatā dhammā adhikā, tatopi uttaravirahato anuttarā dhammāti dasseti ‘‘mahaggatā’’tiādinā. Tenāti ‘‘vuḍḍhimanto’’tiādinā vacanena karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena vā.
然而,于律等三者中,彼此有差异;其中无差异而共通者,即是「藏」(piṭaka)之义。因为「律」等三词相互不共通,故称为「差异」;而「藏」一词与三者皆共通,故称为「无差异」。「Pariyattibbhājanatthato」是指以应学取之义、安立之义为工具因,或以差别因。又,也可理解为:从应学取之义、分别之义,故说「pariyattibhājanattha」。因为语尾-to 表示「关于此义」,需以 iti 来指示。由 iti 指示的-to 语尾,如语法家所许,例如「aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī」(观无常、苦、无我)。以此显示:从应学取、从彼彼义之分别,故名为「藏」。此为尚未完成的语基词。然而,通声论者说「piṭa」有音声、合集之义,并援引此处所用之例,故依其见,应作词源解释:因 piṭīyati(被音声宣说、被学取),故为 piṭaka;或因 piṭīyati(被合集),彼彼义在此中,故为 piṭaka。随后以「tena」等语展示复合词。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panetthāti etesu vinayādīsu tīsu aññamaññavisiṭṭhesu yaṃ avisiṭṭhaṃ samānaṃ, taṃ piṭakanti attho. Vinayādayo hi tayo saddā aññamaññāsādhāraṇattā visiṭṭhā nāma, piṭakasaddo pana tehi tīhipi sādhāraṇattā ‘‘avisiṭṭho’’ti vuccati. Pariyattibbhājanatthatoti pariyāpuṇitabbatthapatiṭṭhānatthehi karaṇabhūtehi, visesanabhūtehi vā. Apica pariyattibbhājanatthato pariyattibhājanatthanti āhūti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paccattatthe hi to-saddo iti-saddena niddisitabbattā. Itinā niddisitabbehito – saddamicchanti neruttikā yathā ‘‘aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.406, 408, 411) etena pariyāpuṇitabbato, taṃtadatthānaṃ bhājanato ca piṭakaṃ nāmāti dasseti. Anipphannapāṭipadikapadañhetaṃ. Saddavidū pana ‘‘piṭa saddasaṅghāṭesū’’ti vatvā idha vuttameva payogamudāharanti, tasmā tesaṃ matena piṭīyati saddīyati pariyāpuṇīyatīti piṭakaṃ, piṭīyati vā saṅghāṭīyati taṃtadattho etthāti piṭakanti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādinā samāsaṃ dasseti.
「mā piṭakasampadānena」——此句引述自《卡拉玛经》(增支部 3.66)与《萨罗经》(增支部 3.67)的经文。其注释书中解释道:「意思是:不要以『与我们的藏经教法相符』为由而执取。」然而,阿阇梨舍利弗长老说:「不要以经文传承为据而执取。」(《心义疏·第一大结集语释》)「kudālapiṭakamādāya」意指携带了锄头与篮子。其中「ku」指大地,因能破地、裂地,所以一种铁制工具名为「kudāla」(锄头)。又因其为盛放各种物品的容器,以棕榈叶、藤条等制成的容器便名为「piṭaka」(篮子)。此说出于《根本五十篇·锯喻经》(中部 1.227)。显示巴利原文
Māpiṭakasampadānenāti kālāmasutte, (a. ni. 3.66) sāḷhasutte (a. ni. 3.67) ca āgataṃ pāḷimāha. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘amhākaṃ piṭakatantiyā saddhiṃ sametīti mā gaṇhitthā’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.66) attho vutto. Ācariyasāriputtattherena pana ‘‘pāḷisampadānavasena mā gaṇhathā’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Kudālapiṭakamādāyāti kudālañca piṭakañca ādāya. Ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidālanato ayomayaupakaraṇaviseso kudālaṃ nāma. Tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ bhājanabhāvato tālapaṇṇavettalatādīhi kato bhājanaviseso piṭakaṃ nāma. Idaṃ pana mūlapaṇṇāsake kakacūpamasutte (ma. ni. 1.227).
引出「tena...pe... ñeyyā」这一偈句后,即以「tena」等语加以解说。凡由「一切」等一切代词,或依所指称之物的性,或依所说之物的性,然而此处随顺说话时的意图,唯取所指称之物的性,故说「vinayo ca so piṭakañca」(此律就是藏)。以「依如前所述之理趣」一句,总摄了「evaṃ duvidhatthena...pe... katvā」以及「pariyattibhāvato, tassa tassa atthassa bhājanato cā」等所述的一切。「tayo pi」中的「api」或「pi」字,是部分总括之义。因为不说「apī」而说「pī」,这表明如同「api」字一样,「pi」字也是一个独立的助词。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena…pe… ñeyyā’’ti gāthāpadaṃ ulliṅgetvā ‘‘tenā’’tiādinā vivarati. Sabbādīhi sabbanāmehi vuttassa vā liṅgamādiyate, vuccamānassa vā, idha pana vatticchāya vuttassevāti katvā ‘‘vinayo ca so piṭakañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvutteneva nayenā’’ti iminā ‘‘evaṃ duvidhatthena…pe… katvā’’ti ca ‘‘pariyattibhāvato, tassa tassa atthassa bhājanato cā’’ti ca vuttaṃ sabbamatidisati. Tayopīti ettha apisaddo, pi-saddo vā avayavasampiṇḍanattho. ‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto hi api-saddo viya pi-saddopi visuṃ nipāto atthīti dasseti.
依于说法者,对所应说之义,以教令等法则进行教导、令其觉悟,名为“说法”。依于应被教诫的补特伽罗,随其犯行等应教诫的相状而进行教诫、调伏,名为“教诫”。依于所应说之义,如防护与非防护等义,通过言说使其系属于言语,名为“论说”。也就是说:相对于说法者世尊而言,即为“说法”;相对于应被教诫的补特伽罗而言,即为“教诫”;相对于所应说之义而言,即为“论说”。应当了知,它们有如此差别。在此,虽然说法等并非不观待所应说等,但教令等则特别依于说法者等,因此结合各自的差别而说“说法”等的区分。正如教令的制定特别依于堪受教令者及对此的善巧相应,同样,世俗与胜义的安立也依于安立者,所以说教令等法则依于说法者。又如随顺犯行与意乐,教诫也特随顺于法,同时亦观待应调伏的补特伽罗,故依应教诫的补特伽罗而说“教诫”。又如针对防护与非防护、名与色,以及应解开的邪见进行论说,当有言说所依时便存在,无有言说所依时便不存在,因此特别依于此,故依所应说之义而说“论说”。在此并有:显示巴利原文
Kathetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ desakāyattena āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ vinayanaṃ sāsanaṃ. Kathetabbassa saṃvarāsaṃvarādino atthassa kathanaṃ vacanapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ kathā, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – desitāraṃ bhagavantamapekkhitvā desanā, sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ, kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathāti evamimesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbanti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi desanādayo desetabbādinirapekkhā na honti, āṇādayo pana visesato desakādiadhīnāti taṃ taṃ visesayogavasena desanādīnaṃ bhedo vutto. Yathā hi āṇāvidhānaṃ visesato āṇārahādhīnaṃ tattha kosallayogato, evaṃ vohāraparamatthavidhānāni ca vidhāyakādhīnānīti āṇādividhino desakāyattatā vuttā. Aparādhajjhāsayānurūpaṃ viya ca dhammānurūpampi sāsanaṃ visesato, tathā vinetabbapuggalāpekkhanti sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvarāsaṃvaranāmarūpānaṃ viya ca vinibbeṭhetabbāya diṭṭhiyā kathanaṃ sati vācāvatthusmiṃ, nāsatīti visesato tadadhīnaṃ, tasmā kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathā vuttā. Honti cettha –
依于说法者,此中“说法”即三藏;
依于应教诫者,此即名为“教诫”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Desakassa vasenettha, desanā piṭakattayaṃ; Sāsitabbavasenetaṃ, sāsananti pavuccati. Kathetabbassa atthassa, vasenāpi kathāti ca; Desanāsāsanakathā-bhedampevaṃ pakāsaye’’ti.
将此三词合在一处,作为“它们的区分”;由于“区分”一词在相违释之后被单独听闻,故应各自连接:“应随宜阐明说法的区分、教诫的区分及论说的区分”。所谓“区分”,即差异性,或特殊性。于他们藏中,学、断与甚深性,亦应随宜阐明。显示巴利原文
Padattayampetaṃ samodhānetvā tāsaṃ bhedoti katvā bhedasaddo visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo dvandapadato paraṃ suyyamānattā ‘‘desanābhedaṃ, sāsanabhedaṃ, kathābhedañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye’’ti. Bhedanti ca nānattaṃ, visesaṃ vā. Tesu piṭakesu. Sikkhā ca pahānañca gambhīrabhāvo ca, tañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye.
以第二偈,应阐明教法分类、学习方式及特殊性。于律等藏中。比丘如何证得成就与退失,亦应于彼处阐明其一切——此为连结。或者,应如此连接:比丘如何于彼处证得教法分类之成就与退失,亦应于彼处阐明其一切。“如何”即:以谴责等因、学习等方式,即谴责、出离、法、库藏、守护等因的学习,以及善行、恶行等这些方式。虽然也有其他如此证得者,但由于最胜、最上、近、常随逐故,以及依教奉行、如法安住故,而说“比丘”。显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya pariyattibhedaṃ pariyāpuṇanassa pakāraṃ, visesañca vibhāvaye. Yahiṃ vinayādike piṭake. Yaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñca yathā bhikkhu pāpuṇāti, tathā tampi sabbaṃ tahiṃ vibhāvayeti sambandho. Atha vā yaṃ pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñca yahiṃ yathā bhikkhu pāpuṇāti, tathā tampi sabbaṃ tahiṃ vibhāvayeti yojetabbaṃ. Yathāti ca yehi upārambhādihetupariyāpuṇanādippakārehi, upārambhanissaraṇadhammakosarakkhaṇahetupariyāpuṇanaṃ suppaṭipattiduppaṭipattīti etehi pakārehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santesupi ca aññesu tathā pāpuṇantesu jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ sammāpaṭipajjanena dhammādhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca bhikkhūti vuttaṃ.
“其中”(Tatrā),是指在那两首偈颂之中。“此”(Ayaṃ),是现在将要宣说的论述。“阐明”(Paridīpanā),意谓周遍地开演,即毫无遗漏、毫厘不爽地加以分别解说,这便是此处所说的意思。“显了”(Vibhāvanā),则是指虽已作了那样的阐明,却仍不令其隐藏、遮蔽,而是以令听者容易明了的方式,将其呈显出来。也有一种说法是:简略地说名为“阐明”,详细地说名为“显了”。再者,这两个词虽是根据前文所述而相随顺地宣说,但在含义上其实是同一回事。因此,应当把“阐明”与第一偈颂相关联,把“显了”与第二偈颂相关联。其中的“ca”字,是将这两者相互结合起来。为何要这样说呢?所以才说“在此(ettha hi)”等语。“Hi”是一个表示原因的介词,就如同在“由于字母的错误(akkharavipattiyaṃ hi)”等文句中的用法一样。它的意思是“因为”或者说“何以故”。有资格颁布教令的人,名为“堪能教令者”(āṇāraho)。因为世尊是正自觉者,并且是由于大悲心而能作无颠倒之利益教导的人,所以他的言教堪为准量,因此是“堪能教令的世尊”——这便是此处的意涵。由于世俗谛与胜义谛的法也都摄在其中,所以说“以教令为主”,这便总括地开示了大致的理趣。在此之后,也是如此的道理。能特别地执持有情的心,所以称为“世俗”(voh…)。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tāsu gāthāsu. Ayanti adhunā vakkhamānā kathā. Paridīpanāti samantato pakāsanā, kiñcimattampi asesetvā vibhajanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhāvanāti evaṃ paridīpanāyapi sati gūḷhaṃ paṭicchannamakatvā sotūnaṃ suviññeyyabhāvena āvibhāvanā. Saṅkhepena paridīpanā, vitthārena vibhāvanātipi vadanti. Apica etaṃ padadvayaṃ heṭṭhā vuttānurūpato kathitaṃ, atthato pana ekameva. Tasmā paridīpanā paṭhamagāthāya, vibhāvanā dutiyagāthāyāti yojetabbaṃ. Ca-saddena ubhayatthaṃ aññamaññaṃ samucceti. Kasmā, vuccantīti āha ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādi. Hīti kāraṇe nipāto ‘‘akkharavipattiyaṃ hī’’tiādīsu viya. Yasmā, kasmāti vā attho. Āṇaṃ paṇetuṃ [ṭhapetuṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā)] arahatīti āṇāraho, sammāsambuddhattā, mahākāruṇikatāya ca aviparītahitopadesakabhāvena pamāṇavacanattā āṇārahena bhagavatāti attho. Vohāraparamatthadhammānampi tattha sabbhāvato ‘‘āṇābāhullato’’ti vuttaṃ, tena yebhuyyanayaṃ dasseti. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Visesena sattānaṃ manaṃ avaharatīti vohāro, paññatti, tasmiṃ kusalo, tena.
那些有过失、有罪过、有违犯既多且重的人,名为“多过失者”(pacurāparādhā),如同Seyyasaka长老等人。“随顺过失”(Yathāparādhaṃ),即是随顺其罪过。在“种种意乐(Anekajjhāsayā)”等文句中,“意乐”(ajjhāsayo)就是“阿阇耶”(āsayo),从义理上说,即是正见与智慧,而从分类上,则有四种。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Pacuro bahulo aparādho doso vītikkamo yesaṃ te pacurāparādhā, seyyasakattherādayo. Yathāparādhanti dosānurūpaṃ. ‘‘Anekajjhāsayā’’tiādīsu āsayova ajjhāsayo, so atthato diṭṭhi, ñāṇañca, pabhedato pana catubbidho hoti. Vuttañca –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍与如实智,这些即称为意乐(阿阇耶)。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā;
于中,因一切见皆为常见与断见所摄,故一切堕于见的有情皆依附于此二见。如经所说:“迦旃延!此世间大多依于二边:有性与无性。”(相应部 2.15)所谓“有性”,即指执取常见;“无性”,即指执取断见。此是轮回凡夫的意乐。而依于还灭的净信者之意乐则有二种:随顺忍与如实智。其中,随顺忍是观智;如实智则是业自性智。这四种即称为意乐。有情依此而安住,或心依此而止息,故称意乐,犹如野兽的栖息处。正如野兽外出觅食后,又回到那林丛中躺卧,那处便被称作它的“栖息处”;同样,心即使以其他方式活动后,又回到某处而止息,那处就是它的“意乐”。欲贪等七种随眠,犹如鼠毒,在获得因缘时,不论当生、未生、已过、现在,皆因其自性如此而得此称,因为诸法的自性不因时间的差别而改变。行(cariyā)有贪行等六种根本行,依中间细分而有多种,依交往方式则有六十三种;或者,行可依善行、恶行而分为二种。此于《分别论》的行分别中已作解说。显示巴利原文
Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
此处所言“abhikkanta”一词,其义为“更有力、更加强烈地彰显”,此即“adhike”之意。而“abhikkanta”中,“abhi”此前缀指趋入、增强,令词根“kanta”(吸引、承受)所表动作得以强化。如“abhiññātā abhilakkhitā”(已了知、已了觉)等词中所见,且“abhikkanta”一词音调更为庄重、突出,属于词义的特殊用法,含有“随附于动作之语气”之义。正如经典中所说“与动作相连之词语存在加强之用”,此即词义的特殊造用。又如于“abhirāja”、“abhivinaya”这类尊重律的表达中,“abhi”前缀用以显扬尊敬语气。如何方能正确使用?不可将虚伪不实之言认作出于真诚。律中尊敬章节的特殊表达并非对词义的浮华增益之误,相反,因敬仰而生出的敬意词语存在于律中,此是事实。所谓“abhirāja”,乃是基于行为动机而建立的王权约束之义,“abhi”一词虽弱化了谓语内容,却仍保有尊敬语气。依此同例,“abhipūjito”(被敬者)之律,其语义在于突出行为动因。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito kho panāyaṃ kaccāna loko yebhuyyena atthitañca natthitañcā’’ti, (saṃ. ni. 2.15) atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo. Vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti, yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo. Tattha ca anulomikā khanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇaṃ pana kammasakatāñāṇaṃ. Catubbidho peso āsayanti sattā ettha nivasanti, cittaṃ vā āgamma seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvāpi paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti taṃ tassa ‘‘āsayo’’ti vuccati, tathā cittaṃ aññathāpi pavattitvā yattha paccāgamma seti, tassa so ‘‘āsayo’’ti. Kāmarāgādayo satta anusayā. Mūsikavisaṃ viya kāraṇalābhe uppajjamānārahā anāgatā, atītā, paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedoti. Cariyāti rāgacariyādikā cha mūlacariyā, antarabhedena anekavidhā, saṃsaggavasena pana tesaṭṭhi honti. Atha vā cariyāti sucaritaduccaritavasena duvidhaṃ caritaṃ. Tañhi vibhaṅge caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ.
在《义集》中说:“胜解,即‘我今天就要出家,今天就要证得阿罗汉’等,以倾心于此的状态而生起的决意。”而阿阇梨法护长老则说:“胜解,是众生依过去的所行而产生的意乐,它有两种:低劣与殊胜。”正如具有低劣胜解的众生只亲近低劣胜解的众生,具有殊胜胜解的众生只亲近殊胜胜解的众生。即使戒师与依止师不持戒,而共住的弟子持戒,那些弟子也不会亲近自己的戒师与依止师,只会亲近与自己相应的、相宜的比丘。如果戒师与依止师是相宜的比丘,而其他比丘不相应,他们也不会亲近戒师与依止师,只会亲近与自己志趣相同的、不相应的比丘。此义应依《界相应》来阐明。如此,这种规定了低劣胜解者等相互亲近等的意乐、意乐界,应知为“胜解”。他们具有众多的意乐等,或众多的意乐等属于他们,如说“多作者、多河者”。随顺,即不违背意乐等,或随顺于种种的意乐等,依此而行,这是其义。也有说,是随顺或适合意乐等。由于未能破除密集,依见、慢、爱而执取“我、我所”的有情。如法,即“此处无我、无我显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhimutti nāma ‘ajjeva pabbajissāmi, ajjeva arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’tiādinā tanninnabhāvena pavattamānaṃ sanniṭṭhāna’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘adhimutti nāma sattānaṃ pubbacariyavasena abhiruci, sā duvidhā hīnapaṇītabhedenā’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Tathā hi yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva satte sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā paṇītādhimuttikeyeva . Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā sīlavanto na honti, saddhivihārikā sīlavanto, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppabhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise asāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Dhātusaṃyuttavasena (saṃ. ni. 2.85 ādayo) cesa attho dīpetabbo. Evamayaṃ hīnādhimuttikādīnaṃ aññamañño pasevanādiniyamitā abhiruci ajjhāsayadhātu ‘‘adhimuttī’’ti veditabbā. Anekā ajjhāsayādayo te yesaṃ atthi, anekā vā ajjhāsayādayo yesanti tathā yathā ‘‘bahukattuko, bahunadiko’’ti. Yathānulomanti ajjhāsayādīnaṃ anulomaṃ anatikkamma, ye ye vā ajjhāsayādayo anulomā, tehi tehīti attho. Āsayādīnaṃ anulomassa vā anurūpantipi vadanti. Ghanavinibbhogābhāvato diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena ‘‘ahaṃ mama santaka’’nti evaṃ pavattasaññino. Yathādhammanti ‘‘natthettha attā, attaniyaṃ vā, kevalaṃ dhammamattameveta’’nti evamādinā dhammasabhāvānurūpanti attho.
防护即是律仪,以身语不违犯。大律仪即非律仪。因为此处的“a-”前缀表增长义,如“无学诸法”,而与之结合时,小律仪依剩余等方式也是律仪,因此即是小律仪,也是大律仪,这是其义。因此说“律仪即律仪”等。见之解缠,即从见解中解脱,义理上则是其正对治的正见等法。同样也说:“是六十二种邪见的正对治。”对名、色、名色的分别,即是名色分别,而此依“是贪等的正对治”之说,即是如此生起的智。显示巴利原文
Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Mahanto saṃvaro asaṃvaro. Vuḍḍhiattho hi ayaṃ a-kāro yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 21) taṃyogatāya ca khuddako saṃvaro pārisesādinayena saṃvaro, tasmā khuddako, mahanto ca saṃvaroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvarā saṃvaro’’tiādi. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanāti diṭṭhiyā vimocanaṃ, atthato pana tassa ujuvipaccanikā sammādiṭṭhiādayo dhammā. Tathā cāha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhipaṭipakkhabhūtā’’ti. Nāmassa, rūpassa, nāmarūpassa ca paricchindanaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedo, so pana ‘‘rāgādipaṭipakkhabhūto’’ti vacanato tathāpavattameva ñāṇaṃ.
以“于三中”等语,开示尚未宣说的义理。由于在三藏中都有其言说可能,故说“特别地”。此义应于一切处配合理解。其中,依“此增上戒学,即是于此义中所欲之学”的说法,而说“在律藏中为增上戒学”。在经藏中,因“远离诸欲已……”等文多处宣说定,故说“在经藏中为增上心学”。由于名色分别是增上慧的近因,且为了增上慧而宣说其余的名色诸法,故说“在论藏中为增上慧学”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tīsupī’’tiādinā aparaḍḍhaṃ vivarati. Tīsupi tāsaṃ vacanasambhavato ‘‘visesenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadetaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Tatra ‘‘yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā sikkhā’’ti vacanato āha ‘‘vinayapiṭake adhisīlasikkhā’’ti. Suttantapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 1.152; a. ni. 4.123) samādhidesanābāhullato ‘‘suttanta piṭake adhicittasikkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāmarūpaparicchedassa adhipaññāpadaṭṭhānato, adhipaññāya ca atthāya tadavasesanāmarūpadhammakathanato āha ‘‘abhidhammapiṭake adhipaññāsikkhā’’ti.
所谓“诸烦恼的”,即指杂染法,或业与烦恼。由于有“以身、语门违犯烦恼,其断除乃因有彼对立面”及“戒的”这样的表述,可知此词兼摄两者。其中“违犯”与“对立面”处于作格关系,而“戒的”则处于从格关系,一切处皆应如此理解。依随眠而在相续中随转的烦恼,纵使遇缘得以现起,也因畏惧戒的坏失而不能违犯,故说“戒是违犯的对立面”。遇缘便会占据内心、令善法灭尽而生起者,即是缠缚;其断除,即依在内心相续中生起之力而断除烦恼之缠缚,这便是此处所说的义理。因“诸烦恼的”是总摄,而断除缠缚是依心等持而成就,故说“定是缠缚的对立面”。以未断除的状态在相续中随眠、遇适宜之缘便能生起、已具力量的欲贪等七种烦恼,即是随眠;其断除,唯依圣道慧而彻底断除,故说“慧是随眠的对立面”。显示巴利原文
Kilesānanti saṃklesadhammānaṃ, kammakilesānaṃ vā, ubhayāpekkhañcetaṃ ‘‘yo kāyavacīdvārehi kilesānaṃ vītikkamo, tassa pahānaṃ, tassa paṭipakkhattā’’ti ca. ‘‘Vītikkamo’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘paṭipakkha’’nti bhāvayoge sambandho, ‘‘sīlassā’’ti pana bhāvapaccaye. Evaṃ sabbattha. Anusayavasena santāne anuvattantā kilesā kāraṇalābhe pariyuṭṭhitāpi sīlabhedabhayavasena vītikkamituṃ na labhantīti āha ‘‘vītikkamapaṭipakkhattā sīlassā’’ti. Okāsādānavasena kilesānaṃ citte kusalappavattiṃ pariyādiyitvā uṭṭhānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa pahānaṃ, cittasantāne uppattivasena kilesānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānassa pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Kilesāna’’nti hi adhikāro, taṃ pana pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ cittasamādahanavasena bhavatīti āha ‘‘pariyuṭṭhānapaṭipakkhattā samādhissā’’ti. Appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayanakā anurūpakāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahā thāmagatā kāmarāgādayo satta kilesā anusayā, tesaṃ pahānaṃ, te pana sabbaso ariyamaggapaññāya pahīyantīti āha ‘‘anusayapaṭipakkhattā paññāyā’’ti.
如同以灯光驱散黑暗,通过布施等福行事所摄的种种善支,对种种不善的断除,即是“彼分断”。然而在此处,由于是增上戒学所论之处,故应理解为:以种种善戒支对种种恶戒支的断除,称为“彼分断”。依近行定与安止定等各类定,通过阻止其生起而镇伏诸盖等法,犹如以木棍击打水面的藻类一般,以镇伏方式断除,即是“镇伏断”。由修习四圣道,于每一道者的相续中,以彻底断除的方式断除集谛所属的烦恼群,令其永不复起,即是“正断”。恶行,即被烦恼所染污之行;它生起之处,便会真实地染污、损害、恼害该相续,故为染污。对其的断除,以身、语恶行所起的染污,以彼分断的方式断除,这已如前所说的,因为戒是恶行的对治。依三学次第应知此义。渴爱,即“它渴求”之义,依前说方式即是染污;对其以镇伏的方式断除,已如前说,因为定是欲贪的对治。邪见本身依前说方式即是染污;对其以正断的方式断除,已如前说,因为慧能开显离我、我所等自性的法。显示巴利原文
Dīpālokena viya tamassa dānādipuññakiriyavatthugatena tena tena kusalaṅgena tassa tassa akusalassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ. Idha pana adhisīlasikkhāya vuttaṭṭhānattā tena tena susīlyaṅgena tassa tassa dussīlyaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti gahetabbaṃ. Upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇena ghaṭappahārena viya jalatale sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃ taṃ maggavato santāne samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantamappavattisaṅkhāta samucchindanavasena pahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ, saṃkilesehi vā dūsitaṃ caritaṃ duccaritaṃ. Tadeva yattha uppannaṃ, taṃ santānaṃ sammā kilisati vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti saṃkileso, tassa pahānaṃ. Kāyavacīduccaritavasena pavattasaṃkilesassa tadaṅgavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ sīlassa duccaritapaṭipakkhattā. Sikkhattayānusārena hi attho veditabbo. Tasatīti taṇhā, sāva vuttanayena saṃkileso, tassa vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā. Diṭṭhiyeva yathāvuttanayena saṃkileso, tassa samucchedavasena pahānaṃ vuttaṃ paññāya attādivinimuttasabhāva dhammappakāsanato.
“于每一者中”,即在此三藏中的每一藏中。此处的“ca”字,用于句首发语,或表示另一侧面。“pi”字或“api”字用于摄集部分,由此它统摄了:不仅四种甚深性本身,而且它们各自的部分也具有甚深性。此理于此类情形皆同。现在为显示其具体情形,而说“其中”等。其中,“经”即巴利圣典。因它能令增上戒等义得以了知,具有自性词源,且由佛陀等所宣说,是殊胜言语的排列、行列,故称为“巴利”。显示巴利原文
Ekamekasmiñcetthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu ekamekasmiṃ piṭake, ca-saddo vākyārambhe, pakkhantare vā. Pi-saddo, api-saddo vā avayavasampiṇḍane, tena na kevalaṃ catubbidhasseva gambhīrabhāvo, atha kho paccekaṃ tadavayavānampīti sampiṇḍanaṃ karoti. Esa nayo īdisesu. Idāni te sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tantīti pāḷi. Sā hi ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato, sabhāvaniruttibhāvato, buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanānaṃ āḷi pantīti ‘‘pāḷī’’ti vuccati.
然而在此,依律藏复注师等声论派的主张,先前由心意所确立的、作为胜义音声相续的经,名为“法”。“iti”之字,便用于“名为”义,或者被称为“法”。“即彼之”义,即如前所述之经本身之义。“以心意确立者”,即通过以讽诵、忆持等方式运作的心,而先前所确立的。如前所述的、作为胜义音声相续的经。“说法”,即是后来为了令他人得以解了,而作为说法的、作为胜义音声相续的经本身。或者,能生起如前所述经声的心,即是说法。应知“经与经义”义,即对如前所述的两种经,及其义,如实地解了。因为他们如此说:能照亮、显了世尊所宣说之义及世俗称谓的音声本身,即名为经。若问:在他们主张中,法亦具有音声自性,那么法与说法有何差别?答:以能令知种种义的方式被觉了,且通过讽诵等方式先前所确立的胜义音声相续,是法;后来为了令他人生起解了而转起的、能开显彼彼义的声音,是说法——此是二者的差别。或者,能生起如前所述声音的心,是说法,因为“说法”即是“依此而宣说、生起声音”之义,如同妄语等;在那里,能生起妄语等的思,也以妄语等音声来称呼。显示巴利原文
Idha pana vinayagaṇṭhipadakārādīnaṃ saddavādīnaṃ matena pubbe vavatthāpitā paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtā tanti dhammo nāma. Iti-saddo hi nāmatthe, ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā vuccati. Tassāyevāti tassā yathāvuttāya eva tantiyā attho. Manasā vavatthāpitāyāti uggahaṇa-dhāraṇādivasappavattena manasā pubbe vavatthāpitāya yathāvuttāya paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtāya tassā tantiyā. Desanāti pacchā paresamavabodhanatthaṃ desanāsaṅkhātā paramatthasaddappabandhabhūtā tantiyeva. Apica yathāvuttatanti saṅkhātasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā. Tantiyā, tantiatthassa cāti yathāvuttāya duvidhāyapi tantiyā, tadatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodhoti attho veditabbo. Te hi bhagavatā vuccamānassa atthassa, vohārassa ca dīpako saddoyeva tanti nāmāti vadanti. Tesaṃ pana vāde dhammassāpi saddasabhāvattā dhammadesanānaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ bodhakabhāvena ñāto, uggahaṇādivasena ca pubbe vavatthāpito paramatthasaddappabandho dhammo, pacchā paresaṃ avabodhanatthaṃ pavattito taṃ tadatthappakāsako saddo desanāti ayamimesaṃ visesoti. Atha vā yathāvuttasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā desīyati samuṭṭhāpīyati saddo etenāti katvā musāvādādayo viya tatthāpi hi musāvādādisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādādisaddehi voharīyatīti. Kiñcāpi akkharāvalibhūto paññattisaddoyeva atthassa ñāpako, tathāpi mūlakāraṇabhāvato ‘‘akkharasaññāto’’tiādīsu viya tassāyeva atthoti paramatthasaddoyeva atthassa ñāpakabhāvena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tassā tantiyā desanā’’ti ca sadisavohārena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘uppannā ca kusalādhammā bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya saṃvattantī’’ti.
然而,依阿毗达摩复注师等施设论派的主张,以与世俗谛、胜义谛所差别之义相称的能诠方式,在胜义音声中,由世尊以心意唯一确定的、作为名施设相续的经,名为“法”,或被称为“法”。“即彼之”义,即彼作为名施设的经本身之义。“以心意确定者”,即以与世俗谛、胜义谛所差别之义相称的能诠方式,在胜义音声中,由世尊以心意确定的、作为名施设相续的经。“说法”,即通过令他人生起觉了而施设,或以言语开示,作为语表、作为胜义音声相续的经。应知“经与经义”义,即对如前所述的两种经,及其义,如实地解了。因为他们如此说:与自性义及自性称谓相称地,由世尊以心意确定的施设,在此名为“经”。如果依照声论派的主张,唯有音声在此方名为经,那么经与说法应有差别;但除了将心意所确定的经作成语表之外,说法与经并无差别。因为,在显示说法时,说“心意所确定的经的说法”,即除了作成语表之外,说法与经被说为无别。而且,下文说“说法即施设”,由此,以与说法无别的方式,亦说明了经的施设性。显示巴利原文
Abhidhammagaṇṭhipadakārādīnaṃ pana paṇṇattivādīnaṃ matena sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassa anurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu ekantena bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā nāmapaññattipabandhabhūtā tanti dhammo nāma, ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā vuccati. Tassāyevāti tassā nāmapaññattibhūtāya tantiyā eva attho. Manasā vavatthāpitāyāti sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassānurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitāya nāmapaṇṇattipabandhabhūtāya tassā tantiyā. Desanāti paresaṃ pabodhanena atisajjanā vācāya pakāsanā vacībhedabhūtā paramatthasaddappabandhasaṅkhātā tanti. Tantiyā, tantiatthassa cāti yathāvuttāya dubbidhāyapi tantiyā, tadatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodhoti attho. Te hi evaṃ vadanti – sabhāvatthassa, sabhāvavohārassa ca anurūpavaseneva bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā paṇṇatti idha ‘‘tantī’’ti vuccati. Yadi ca saddavādīnaṃ matena saddoyeva idha tanti nāma siyā. Tantiyā, desanāya ca nānattena bhavitabbaṃ, manasā vavatthāpitāya ca tantiyā vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ ṭhapetvā desanāya nānattaṃ natthi. Tathā hi desanaṃ dassentena manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanāti vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ vinā tantiyā saha desanāya anaññatā vuttā. Tathā ca upari ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti vuttattā desanāya anaññabhāvena tantiyāpi paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hoti.
再者,若教示与圣典是各不相同者,则应表述为“如实了知圣典、圣典之义及教示”。然而,他并未如此说,而是说了“如实了知圣典及圣典之义”,由此便已显示教示与圣典并无不同。如此作已,上文中开示“教示即施设”者,也就说明了因教示无异于圣典,故教示即是圣典的施设。然而,此二者在胜义上皆只是“声”,因为脱离了胜义的世俗是不存在的。把握了这一原则,有些阿阇梨说“法与教示在胜义上唯是声”,他们也是无可指摘的。正如欲界结生果报被称为“小所缘”,此理亦应如是观之。因为,欲界结生果报不能说“唯以生起的胜义为所缘”,这是由于它也能以先前曾思惟男女等相的贪等不善法,以及慈等善法为所缘而生起。然而,由于该分别以胜义法为基,故可安立其以胜义为所缘,此处亦应如是看待。且让施设论者持此观点吧,而在声论者的观点中,法与教示的差别,也早已由阿阇梨法护长老依前述方法阐明。此处的偈颂为:显示巴利原文
Apica yadi tantiyā aññāyeva desanā siyā, ‘‘tantiyā ca tantiatthassa ca desanāya ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Evaṃ pana avatvā ‘‘tantiyā ca tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vuttattā tantiyā, desanāya ca anaññabhāvo dassito hoti. Evañca katvā upari ‘‘desanā nāma paññattī’’ti dassentena desanāya anaññabhāvato tantiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hotīti. Tadubhayampi pana paramatthato saddoyeva paramatthavinimuttāya sammutiyā abhāvā, imameva ca nayaṃ gahetvā keci ācariyā ‘‘dhammo ca desanā ca paramatthato saddo evā’’ti voharanti, tepi anupavajjāyeva. Yathā kāmāvacarapaṭisandhivipākā ‘‘parittārammaṇā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi kāmāvacarapaṭisandhivipākā ‘‘nibbattitaparamatthavisayāyevā’’ti sakkā vattuṃ itthipurisādiākāraparivitakkapubbakānaṃ rāgādiakusalānaṃ, mettādikusalānañca ārammaṇaṃ gahetvāpi samuppajjanato. Paramatthadhammamūlakattā panassa parikappassa paramatthavisayatā sakkā paññapetuṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbanti ca. Evampi paṇṇattivādīnaṃ mataṃ hotu, saddavādīnaṃ matepi dhammadesanānaṃ nānattaṃ vuttanayeneva ācariyadhammapālattherā dīhi pakāsitanti. Hoti cettha –
有诸长老说:“声即是法,亦是教示”;
又有诸长老说:“法即是施设,声或为教示。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saddo dhammo desanā ca, iccāhu apare garū; Dhammo paṇṇatti saddo tu, desanā vāti cāpare’’ti.
在这三句偈中,“这些即是法、义、教示的通达”一句,其含义为:圣典之义、圣典之教示、圣典之通达,这三者属于圣典的范畴。那么,律藏等依于义之通达与教示之通达便为合理;然而,诸藏即是圣典本身,它们又如何依于法呢?答曰:因为作为圣典总体的组成部分,这些分支圣典即是所依。正如“树有枝”的说法一样,总体是依于仅借假名施设而成的部分而被说为所依。在此,由于法等极难把握,律等因那些法等而深奥,故而宣说了律等四种深奥性。因此,正是由于法等极难把握,法才被称为深奥,并非律等本身——不应如此草率地提出质疑。因为深奥性是依所缘与能缘的角度,唯独针对律等而说的。法,恰恰就是律等本身,并无差别。它们的所缘是义,因为作为能诠的它们即是以义为境;能缘则是教示与通达,它们即以法与义为所缘。其中,由于通达法义极为困难,由于教示之智极难成就,故教示极难把握;应知由于通达不能生起,以及证得其境的智慧极为难得,故通达也极难把握。因为法、义、教示深奥,作为其范畴的通达亦复深奥,犹如欲测量深水之量,必须使用长尺一样。金刚智长老说:“如是理当知。”当作为藏之分支的法等被称为深奥时,作为其总体的藏也被说为深奥,因此说道不应作如是质疑。然而,此事应加审察,因为……显示巴利原文
Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhāti ettha tantiattho, tantidesanā, tantiatthapaṭivedho cāti ime tayo tantivisayā hontīti vinayapiṭakādīnaṃ atthadesanāpaṭivedhādhārabhāvo yutto, piṭakāni pana tantiyevāti tesaṃ dhammādhārabhāvo kathaṃ yujjeyyāti? Tantisamudāyassa avayavatantiyā ādhārabhāvato. Samudāyo hi avayavassa parikappanāmattasiddhena ādhārabhāvena vuccati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Ettha ca dhammādīnaṃ dukkhogāhabhāvato tehi dhammādīhi vinayādayo gambhīrāti vinayādīnampi catubbidho gambhīrabhāvo vuttoyeva, tasmā dhammādayo eva dukkhogāhattā gambhīrā, na vinayādayoti na codetabbametaṃ samukhena, visayavisayīmukhena ca vinayādīnaññeva gambhīrabhāvassa vuttattā. Dhammo hi vinayādayo eva abhinnattā. Tesaṃ visayo attho vācakabhūtānaṃ tesameva vāccabhāvato, visayino desanāpaṭivedhā dhammatthavisayabhāvatoti. Tattha paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya ca dukkhogāhabhāvo veditabbo, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Dhammatthadesanānaṃ gambhīrabhāvato tabbisayo paṭivedhopi gambhīro yathā taṃ gambhīrassa udakassa pamāṇaggahaṇe dīghena pamāṇena bhavitabbaṃ, evaṃsampadamidanti (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vajirabuddhitthero. Piṭakāvayavānaṃ dhammādīnaṃ vuccamāno gambhīrabhāvo taṃsamudāyassa piṭakassāpi vuttoyeva, tasmā tathā na codetabbantipi vadanti, vicāretabbametaṃ sabbesampi tesaṃ piṭakāvayavāsambhavato. Mahāsamuddo dukkhogāho, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho viya cāti sambandho. Atthavasā hi vibhattivacanaliṅgapariṇāmoti. Dukkhena ogayhanti, dukkho vā ogāho anto pavisanametesūti dukkhogāhā. Na labhitabboti alabbhanīyo, soyeva alabbhaneyyo, labhīyate vā labbhanaṃ, taṃ nārahatīti alabbhaneyyo. Patiṭṭhahanti ettha okāseti patiṭṭho, patiṭṭhahanaṃ vā patiṭṭho, alabbhaneyyo so yesu te alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā. Ekadesena ogāhantehipi mandabuddhīhi patiṭṭhā laddhuṃ na sakkāyevāti dassetuṃ etaṃ puna vuttaṃ. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
现在,为显示因、果等层面的深奥性,他说了“另一种理路”等。其中,“因”即是缘。因执取并安立自己的果,故名为“法”(dhamma),这是将da音节转变为dha音节。那么,“法”一词在此如何被理解为因的含义呢?他解释说:“所谓‘已说’”等。此义已说于《无碍解分别》(Vibha. 718)。然而,从“知因是法无碍解”这一语句,如何能理解“法即是因”呢?在解释“法无碍解”这一复合词的词义时,说了“知因”。因为在“于法无碍解是法无碍解”中,解释“于法”之义时说的是“于因”,解释“无碍解”之义时说的是“智”。因此,“因”与“法”二词同义,“智”与“无碍解”二词同义。宣说此义者,便成立了“法即是因”。同样,从“知因果是义无碍解”这一语句应知,成立了“义即是因果”。因之果即“因果”,那随顺于因而被通达、被证得者,即称为“义”。显示巴利原文
Idāni hetuhetuphalādīnampi vasena gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādimāha. Tattha hetūti paccayo. So ca attano phalaṃ dahati vidahatīti dhammo da-kārassa dha-kāraṃ katvā. Dhammasaddassa cettha hetupariyāyatā kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāvibhaṅge (vibha. 718). Nanu ca ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena dhammassa hetubhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti? ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Dhamme paṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘dhamme’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti. Tasmā hetudhammasaddā ekatthā, ñāṇapaṭisambhidā saddā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito dhammassa hetubhāvoti. Tathā ‘‘hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena sādhito atthassa hetuphalabhāvoti daṭṭhabbo. Hetuno phalaṃ hetuphalaṃ, tañca hetuanusārena arīyati adhigamīyatīti atthoti vuccati.
在“教说、施设”一词中,依声论者的主张,具有义与文、无颠倒的称述、法之词源所成的胜义音声相续,即所谓“经教”,被称为“教说”,或意为“名为教说”。因为通过它,义理被开示,故为“教说”。通过方式,义理被令知,或从方式上令知,故为“施设”。为了从自性上显示这一点,说“意为如法之法称述”。在“如法”一词中,“法”之声则摄取了因,以及因与果的一切。因为此“法”之声是自性之言,非教理、因等之言,故其义为:凡是无明、行等诸法,即于彼彼之中。或者,与彼彼无明、行等诸法相顺,即为“如法”。因为教说也像证悟一样,由于显示无颠倒的境域,而随顺于法地转起,正因如此,被称为“无颠倒的称述”。所谓“法称述”,即具有义与文、无颠倒的称述、成为法之词源、名为经教的胜义音声相续。因为此被称述、被发出,故为“称述”;法,即无颠倒、自性所成的称述,被称为“法称述”。以此显示《分别论》中“在那里,于法之词源、称述上的智为词无碍解”所说的法之词源,因为教说以音声为自性。正如在《无碍解分别》的巴利中,说到了词无碍解的有限所缘等状态。其注释书中,以“以那自性词源之声为所缘”等,显示了它以声为所缘。因为确定了“此义以此声为能诠”的能诠与所诠之义后,依显示彼彼能诠义之力用而转起的音声,被称为“教说”。以“意”一词,显示“教说即施设”这句话是就法之词源、称述而说,并非就离此之外的施设而说,因为在多种义理可能的情况下,只说了自己所意趣的义理。以上是依声论者之主张的决断。显示巴利原文
Desanātipaññattīti ettha saddavādīnaṃ vāde atthabyañjanakā aviparītābhilāpadhammaniruttibhūtā paramatthasaddappabandhasaṅkhātā tanti ‘‘desanā’’ti vuccati, desanā nāmāti vā attho. Desīyati attho etāyāti hi desanā. Pakārena ñāpīyati attho etāya, pakārato vā ñāpetīti paññatti. Tameva sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathādhammanti ettha pana dhammasaddo hetuṃ, hetuphalañca sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvavācako hesa dhammasaddo, na pariyattihetuādivācako, tasmā yo yo avijjāsaṅkhārādidhammo, tasmiṃ tasminti attho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādidhammānaṃ anurūpaṃ vā yathādhammaṃ. Desanāpi hi paṭivedho viya aviparītasavisayavibhāvanato dhammānurūpaṃ pavattati, tatoyeva ca aviparītābhilāpoti vuccati. Dhammābhilāpoti hi atthabyañjanako aviparītābhilāpo dhammaniruttibhūto tantisaṅkhāto paramatthasaddappabandho. So hi abhilappati uccārīyatīti abhilāpo, dhammo aviparīto sabhāvabhūto abhilāpo dhammābhilāpoti vuccati, etena ‘‘tatra dhammaniruttābhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718) ettha vuttaṃ dhammaniruttiṃ dasseti saddasabhāvattā desanāya. Tathā hi niruttipaṭisambhidāya parittārammaṇādibhāvo paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 718) vutto. Tadaṭṭhakathāya ca ‘‘taṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādinā (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) tassā saddārammaṇatā dassitā. ‘‘Imassa atthassa ayaṃ saddo vācako’’ti hi vacanavacanatthe vavatthapetvā taṃ taṃ vacanatthavibhāvanavasena pavattito saddo ‘‘desanā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Adhippāyo’’ti etena ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ dhammaniruttābhilāpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tato vinimuttaṃ paññattiṃ sandhāyāti dasseti anekadhā atthasambhave attanā adhippetatthasseva vuttattāti ayaṃ saddavādīnaṃ vādato vinicchayo.
然而,在施设论者的主张中,依随顺于世俗谛与胜义谛之区分的义理而成为能诠的胜义音声中,由世尊以意安立、名为经教的名施设,即是教说,或被称为“教说”,这是其义。为了以显示作为根本因的音声的方式,通过因的转喻来显示,而说“意为如法之法称述”。因为虽然“法称述”中,被称述、被发出者称为“称述”,是指音声,而非施设,然而当音声被说时,取随顺于它的惯用语,由于了知以彼惯用语所指示的义理,当音声被讲述时,随顺于它的施设也通过因的转喻而被讲述了。再者,由于不说“法称述为义”,而说“法称述为意”,已显示教说并非音声。因为通过此,仅以根本因之音声的方式讲述了意趣而已,不应在这里将“教说”执取为此词之义。以上是依施设论者之主张的决断。他说了另外的义理:“随顺……宣说”,以此显示前面所说的令教说生起的心念。因为通过它,义理被宣说,故为“宣说”。以“等”字,摄取了所引导、应引导等的巴利语源,以及一性等、欢喜转起等依止于巴利的理趣。显示巴利原文
Paññattivādīnaṃ vāde pana sammutiparamatthabhedassa atthassānurūpavācakabhāvena paramatthasaddesu bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā tantisaṅkhātā nāmapaññatti desanā nāma, ‘‘desanā’’ti vā vuccatīti attho. Tadeva mūlakāraṇabhūtassa saddassa dassanavasena kāraṇūpacārena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi ‘‘dhammābhilāpo’’ti ettha abhilappati uccārīyatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati, na paṇṇatti, tathāpi sadde vuccamāne tadanurūpaṃ vohāraṃ gahetvā tena vohārena dīpitassa atthassa jānanato sadde kathite tadanurūpā paṇṇattipi kāraṇūpacārena kathitāyeva hoti. Apica ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti attho’’ti avatvā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttattā desanā nāma saddo na hotīti dīpitameva. Tena hi adhippāyamattameva mūlakāraṇasaddavasena kathitaṃ, na idha gahetabbo ‘‘desanā’’ti etassa atthoti ayaṃ paññattivādīnaṃ vādato vinicchayo. Atthantaramāha ‘‘anuloma…pe… kathana’’nti, etena heṭṭhā vuttaṃ desanāsamuṭṭhāpakaṃ cittuppādaṃ dasseti. Kathīyati attho etenāti hi kathanaṃ. Ādisaddena nītaneyyādikā pāḷigatiyo, ekattādinandiyāvattādikā pāḷinissitā ca nayā saṅgahitā.
亲自证悟,或依此而证悟,故称为“证悟”,也就是智。或本身现观,或依此而现观,故也称为“现观”。现在,为了从现观的分类、现观的行相、所缘及自性方面令此证悟明了,而说“而此……”等。因为在那里,以世间与出世间为分类,以境域为行相,以不痴为行相,以诸法、诸义、诸施设为所缘,以随顺于义、随顺于法、随顺于施设之路为自性,而令其明了。在那里,以境域而言,随顺于义等而对诸法等通达,即是以无明等法为所缘、以行等义为所缘、以彼二者之令知为所缘的世间现观。以不痴而言,随顺于义等而对诸法等通达,即是以涅槃为所缘、与道相应、破除对如前所述之法、义、施设之痴的出世间现观。正如这样:“此是因,此是其果,此是随顺于彼二者的惯用语”,如此以作所缘的方式,世间智以境域而证悟;而出世间智则由于以智断除了对他们因、因果等的痴,故以不痴而证悟。然而,有些人说:出世间的证悟,以境域而言,是指涅槃;以不痴而言,则是指其余诸法。显示巴利原文
Sayameva paṭivijjhati, etena vā paṭivijjhantīti paṭivedho, ñāṇaṃ. Tadeva abhisameti, etena vā abhisamentīti abhisamayotipi vuccati. Idāni taṃ paṭivedhaṃ abhisamayappabhedato, abhisamayākārato, ārammaṇato, sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘so cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hi lokiyalokuttaroti pabhedato, visayato, asammohatoti ākārato, dhammesu, atthesu, paññattīsūti ārammaṇato, atthānurūpaṃ, dhammānurūpaṃ, paññattipathānurūpanti sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ karoti. Tattha visayato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma avijjādidhammārammaṇo, saṅkhārādiatthārammaṇo, tadubhayapaññāpanārammaṇo ca lokiyo abhisamayo. Asammohato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma nibbānārammaṇo maggasampayutto yathāvuttadhammatthapaññattīsu sammohaviddhaṃsano lokuttaro abhisamayo. Tathā hi ‘‘ayaṃ hetu, idamassa phalaṃ, ayaṃ tadubhayānurūpo vohāro’’ti evaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokiyañāṇaṃ visayato paṭivijjhati, lokuttarañāṇaṃ pana tesu hetuhetuphalādīsu sammohassañāṇena samucchinnattā asammohato paṭivijjhati. Lokuttaro pana paṭivedho visayato nibbānassa, asammohato ca itarassātipi vadanti eke.
“随顺于义而于诸法中”:即“无明为因,诸行由因所生,无明令诸行生起”,如此随顺于果而于诸因中,这是其义。或者,“在福行、非福行、不动行三者中,无明对非福行是相应缘,对其余二者则如其所宜”等,随顺于果而于诸因中的证悟,这也是其义。“随顺于法而于诸义中”:即“以无明为缘而有诸行”等,随顺于因而于诸果中。“六种施设”之路即是施设之路,随顺于彼,即随顺于施设所言之法而于诸施设中的通达,这是其义。为了显示从现观而言的另一种证悟义,而说“他们……”等。因为是“被证悟”,故为“证悟”,这是指彼彼色等诸法的无颠倒自性。“于彼彼处”:即于彼彼藏中,或巴利语段中。“名为自相”:即名为恼坏、感知、触等各自的自相。显示巴利原文
Atthānurūpaṃ dhammesūti ‘‘avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, saṅkhāre uppādeti avijjā’’ti evaṃ kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesūti attho. Atha vā ‘‘puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāresu tīsu apuññābhisaṅkhārassa avijjā sampayuttapaccayo, itaresaṃ yathānurūpa’’ntiādinā kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesu paṭivedhotipi attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ atthesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) kāraṇānurūpaṃ kāriyesu. Chabbidhāya paññattiyā patho paññattipatho, tassa anurūpaṃ tathā, paññattiyā vuccamānadhammānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodhoti attho. Abhisamayato aññampi paṭivedhatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādimāha. Paṭivijjhīyatīti paṭivedhoti hi taṃtaṃrūpādidhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo vuccati. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ piṭake, pāḷipadese vā. Salakkhaṇasaṅkhātoti ruppananamanaphusanādisakasakalakkhaṇasaṅkhāto.
为了显示如前所述诸法等的诸藏之深奥性,而说“现在”等语。“法生”:指原因的类别,或即原因本身。“义生”:指结果的类别,或即结果本身。而“此宣说”为连接词。以通达其义而成为现前。而“此处之通达”,是指在那些各各藏中所包含的法与义的宣说中的通达,以及在这些藏中,各各法的无颠倒自性,这是其义。由于应被积聚,故善法本身就是资粮;那些正确地令此资粮增长者,称为“已增长善资粮者”。由此,他们与劣慧者、无慧者相反,这是其义。因为对有慧者而言,或对慧本身而言,恶劣性与被染污性是不可能存在的;因此,正是由于无慧,才成为劣慧,如同“恶戒者”的说法。在此,由于无明、行等法义难以通达,故难以深入;由于对它们的说明是难事,故其宣说难以深入;由于无法将称为现观的通达作为生起之境,以及由于称为无颠倒自性的通达难以了知,故应知为难以深入。如此,“亦”字汇集了前文所说的其他方式。为了显示如此在第一偈中已无缺、圆满地阐明了义理,而说“至此”等语。因为“在已成就的情况下,再次开始是为了说明其他义理,或为了确定”,通过这再次开始的……显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttehi dhammādīhi piṭakānaṃ gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idānī’’tiādimāha. Dhammajātanti kāraṇappabhedo, kāraṇameva vā. Atthajātanti kāriyappabhedo, kāriyameva vā. Yā cāyaṃ desanāti sambandho. Tadatthavijānanavasena abhimukho hoti. Yo cetthāti yo etāsu taṃ taṃ piṭakāgatāsu dhammatthadesanāsu paṭivedho, yo ca etesu piṭakesu tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvoti attho. Sambharitabbato kusalameva sambhāro, so sammā anupacito yehi te anupacitakusalasambhārā, tatova duppaññehi, nippaññehīti attho. Na hi paññavato, paññāya vā duṭṭhubhāvo dūsitabhāvo ca sambhavatīti nippaññattāyeva duppaññā yathā ‘‘dussīlo’’ti (a. ni. 5.213; 10.75; pārā. 295; dha. pa. 308). Ettha ca avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ dhammatthānaṃ duppaṭivijjhatāya dukkhogāhatā, tesaṃ paññāpanassa dukkarabhāvato taṃdesanāya, abhisamayasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa uppādanavisayīkaraṇānaṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, aviparītasabhāvasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa dubbiññeyyatāya dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Evampīti pi-saddo pubbe vuttaṃ pakārantaraṃ sampiṇḍeti. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya anūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ paridīpitatthabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Siddhe hi satyārambho atthantaraviññāpanāya vā hoti, niyamāya vā’’ti iminā punārambhavacanena anūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ paridīpitatthabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ettāvatāti paricchedatthe nipāto, ettakena vacanakkamenāti attho. Etaṃ vā parimāṇaṃ yassāti ettāvaṃ, tena, etaparimāṇavatā saddatthakkamenāti attho. ‘‘Sadde hi vutte tadatthopi vuttoyeva nāmā’’ti vadanti. Vutto saṃvaṇṇito attho yassāti vuttatthā.
“在此”指在这首偈颂中。这样一来,所谓“其义”或“抉择”便是其余部分。“在三藏中”这一句里的“各各”,应从增补或从上下文而得知,因为前文已有“在此各各中”的表述。或者,由于语言表达本身就有一定的次序,此处不打算作出简别,而只是指出所依之处。有人可能会责难:“难道不应只说‘在三藏中,见到三种教说分类’吗?”对此不应责难,因为即使是从整体上作的表述,也可能意在部分——就像“让婆罗门等用餐”这类语句中,可以见到部分语句的成立一样。因此不必多费言辞,应当以不违义理的方式来理解。一切处都是这样。所谓“教说分类”:学习,就叫作教说。这里,“教说”一词是表示学习这个行为,而不是圣典的同义词,所以它的意思是学习的方式。或者,应当以三种方式来学习的圣典本身,也称之为“教说”。《阿毗达摩注释》中所记载的锡兰古注也是这么说的。正因为如此,也可以根据其与“蛇喻学习”的关系,把这部圣典称为“蛇喻教说”。这样称说之后,后面解释里的“被恶持的、为了指责等目的而学习的蛇喻”这句话,也就说得通了,因为在这里,把圣典本身说成是“被恶持的”“被学习的”,才恰如其分。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etissā gāthāya. Evaṃ attho, vinicchayoti vā seso. Tīsu piṭakesūti ettha ‘‘ekekasmi’’nti adhikārato, pakaraṇato vā veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekamekasmiñcetthā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) hi heṭṭhā vuttaṃ. Atha vā vatticchānupubbikattā saddapaṭipattiyā niddhāraṇamidha avattukāmena ādhāroyeva vutto. Na cettha codetabbaṃ ‘‘tīsuyeva piṭakesu tividho pariyattibhedo daṭṭhabbo siyā’’ti samudāyavasena vuttassāpi vākyassa avayavādhippāyasambhavato. Dissati hi avayavavākyanipphatti ‘‘brāhmaṇādayo bhuñjantū’’tiādīsu, tasmā alamatipapañcena. Yathā attho na virujjhati, tathāyeva gahetabboti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Pariyattibhedoti pariyāpuṇanaṃ pariyatti. Pariyāpuṇanavācako hettha pariyattisaddo, na pana pāḷipariyāyo, tasmā pariyāpuṇanappakāroti attho. Atha vā tīhi pakārehi pariyāpuṇitabbā pāḷiyo eva ‘‘pariyattī’’ti vuccanti. Tathā ceva abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade vuttanti vadanti. Evampi hi alagaddūpamāpariyāpuṇanayogato ‘‘alagaddūpamā pariyattī’’ti pāḷipi sakkā vattuṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti parato niddesavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Tattha hi pāḷiyeva ‘‘duggahitā, pariyāpuṭā’’ti ca vattuṃ yuttā.
所谓“蛇喻”:蛇的抓取是它的比喻,所以名为“蛇喻”。在这里要明白,蛇的抓取是用“蛇”这个词来表达的。就像说到“卖饼者”时,用“饼”字来表示吃饼这件事;说到“弹琴者”时,用“琴”字来表示弹琴这件事一样。这里,圣典是被比喻为抓蛇,而不是被比喻为蛇。本应说是“抓蛇喻”,但省略了中间词,就成了“蛇喻”,就像说“唇口”(意为唇如口岸)之类的说法。而所谓“蛇”,指的是毒蛇。“毒”是毒的名称,因为它对那条蛇来说是具足圆满的,所以叫“具足圆满之毒者”,也就是蛇,这其中省略了一个鼻音并插入了“da”音;或者,拥有足以夺人性命的毒,所以叫蛇,这在前文已经说过。以出离轮回之苦为义利、为目的,所以叫作“以出离为目的”。被委任守护库藏的人就是库藏官,如同守护国王宝物的人;同样地,守护法宝的漏尽者也是如此。不顾虑其他义利,唯独像库藏官一样取用,这样的教说,就是“库藏官教说”。显示巴利原文
Alagaddo alagaddaggahaṇaṃ upamā etissāti alagaddūpamā. Alagaddassa gahaṇañhettha alagaddasaddena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āpūpikoti ettha āpūpa-saddena āpūpakhādanaṃ viya, veṇikoti ettha vīṇāsaddena vīṇāvādanaggahaṇaṃ viya ca. Alagaddaggahaṇena hi pariyatti upamīyati , na alagaddena. ‘‘Alagaddaggahaṇūpamā’’ti vā vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya. Alagaddoti ca āsīviso vuccati. Gadoti hi visassa nāmaṃ, tañca tassa alaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ atthi, tasmā alaṃ pariyatto paripuṇṇo gado assāti alagaddo anunāsikalopaṃ, da-kārāgamañca katvā, alaṃ vā jīvitaharaṇe samattho gado yassāti alagaddo vuttanayena. Vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ attho payojanametissāti nissaraṇatthā. Bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, rājaratanānupālako, so viyāti tathā, dhammaratanānupālako khīṇāsavo. Aññamatthamanapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti.
“被恶持的”:即被恶劣地持取。为了从自性上确定它,而说“为了指责等目的而学习的”,其义为:为了指责、论诤、逃脱等目的而学习的。应知,为了利养、恭敬等目的而学习也包含在此中。这在《蛇喻经注释》中已说。显示巴利原文
Duggahitāti duṭṭhu gahitā. Tadeva sarūpato niyametuṃ ‘‘upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā’’ti āha, upārambhaitivādappamokkhādihetu uggahitāti attho. Lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇanampi ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ alagaddasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
若有人学习佛语后,心想“如此我将获得衣服等物,或将在四众中为人所知”,便为了利养与恭敬而修学,他的这种教说即名蛇教说。以如此方式修学,实不如不学佛语而默然离去为胜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā ‘evaṃ cīvarādīni vā labhissāmi, catuparisamajjhe vā maṃ jānissantī’ti lābhasakkārahetu pariyāpuṇāti, tassa sā pariyatti alagaddapariyatti nāma. Evaṃ pariyāpuṇanato hi buddhavacanaṃ apariyāpuṇitvā niddokkamanaṃ varatara’’nti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.239).
抓蛇喻的教说不是被称为“蛇喻”吗?若是如此,善持的教说亦可称为“蛇喻”,因为经中以抓蛇为譬喻也已作了宣说。此已说:显示巴利原文
Nanu ca alagaddaggahaṇūpamā pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuccati, evañca sati suggahitāpi pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tatthāpi alagaddaggahaṇassa upamābhāvena pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,譬如有个人需要蛇、寻找蛇,正四处搜寻蛇。他看见一条大蛇,便用叉柄杖牢牢地按住它;用叉柄杖牢牢按住后,紧抓住它的颈部。诸比丘,即使那条蛇用身体缠绕那人的手、臂或任何其他肢节,他也不会因此而死,或遭受濒死的痛苦。这是什么原因呢?诸比丘,因为那条蛇已被牢牢抓住了。同样地,诸比丘,于此教法中,有些善男子学习法——契经、应颂……”等等(《中部·根本五十篇·蛇喻经》)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramāno, so passeyya mahantaṃ alagaddaṃ, tamenaṃ ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇheyya , ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggahitvā gīvāya suggahitaṃ gaṇheyya. Kiñcāpi so bhikkhave, alagaddo tassa purisassa hatthaṃ vā bāhaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ bhogehi paliveṭheyya . Atha kho so neva tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu, suggahitattā bhikkhave, alagaddassa. Evameva kho bhikkhave, idhekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.239).
又若多义项只是别的宣说,则须论及“多义项及其义理真实之宣说”的情况。如此论述后,“多义项及其义理真实的宣说”表为多义项,宣说中无差异的表现显现。由此,前述“宣说即是约定”的表述,进一步显现出无差异性,由此多义项作为约定名称的属性获得表明。由双方所言,上述究竟义音节,无论作为究竟义音节而言,都不存在于共识之中,故二者从本质上均非共识,依此原则,某些师长以为“法与宣说从究竟义音节本质而论,乃是一体的”,他们的说法同样无过错。比如说,如“欲界所生之果报,称为‘防护’,此说即应如是看。实际上不可仅言性好之果报而足以称为‘防护’。同样地,对于名称的争议者和论者而言,世尊也表明了律藏中有关法之教判上的不同之处。佛音长老在此阐明说:“有时音节为法及宣说,有时为名称和多义项。”就此而言,包含三者——多义项的义理发显、多义项宣说、对多义项义理之诠释——是法藏的意义阐明起点。至于律藏是否仅为多义项,法藏本身即多义项之表现。如此,世尊的教判方言绝非可谓仅指律藏裁说,应综合看待律藏等诸藏的深义。法即律藏者,依律藏所载之深义,正合于多义项以义理及宣说三重关系,故不应仅以律藏为名指法藏。义理所在之事,表达之事,名所蕴含之事三者必然相互结合而不相离。因而律藏为“法”之所训,故称为“法”,此理如水源流注谓之大江一般。显示巴利原文
Tasmā idha duggahitā eva pariyatti alagaddūpamāti ayaṃ viseso kuto viññāyati, yena duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuccatīti? Saccametaṃ, idaṃ pana pārisesañāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi nissaraṇatthabhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīnaṃ visuṃ gahitattā pārisesato alagaddassa duggahaṇūpamāyeva pariyatti ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti viññāyati. Alagaddassa suggahaṇūpamā hi pariyatti nissaraṇatthā vā hoti, bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti vā. Tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘duggahitā…pe… pariyattī’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā sādhento ‘‘yaṃ sandhāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yanti yaṃ pariyattiduggahaṇaṃ. Majjhimanikāye mūlapaṇṇāsake alagaddasutte (ma. ni. 1.239) bhagavatā vuttaṃ.
“需要蛇者”:即需要毒蛇,或需求一条毒蛇。“寻蛇者”:指习性使然,四处寻找、搜寻蛇。“正在四处搜寻蛇”:为了搜寻毒蛇而行进。此处是就其目的而言的主格用法,或是对格用法,又或是行于搜寻蛇之处。因为人们在彼处搜寻蛇,故称“搜寻蛇之处”。“那条”:指那条蛇。“身体”:指其躯体。因为此处所说的,正是蛇的躯体。“身体”之所以被称为“弯曲”,是其被弯曲、被盘卷之故。“他的”:指那个人的。“手或臂”:此为关联。从腕至指尖称为“手”。连同大臂的其余部分称为“臂”,但在某些情境下,从肘至指尖被称为“手”,此时“臂”被单独排除。除上述特征的手与臂之外,其余的身体部分称为“肢节”。“因此”:即以此为由、以此作因的意思。手上等处的咬伤,正是那种遭遇(死亡或痛苦)的因、缘故。本应说“以此为因”,却说“因此”,这是将前词作具格义,省略其音而转为从格来表述,并用于表因。也有人称此为表原因的质词。再者,于此处,“因此”正如所说方式,是修饰“死亡或濒死之苦”的。“那是什么原因呢?”:所说的手上等处的咬伤,以及由此而来的死亡等遭遇,那究竟是什么原因、什么因缘呢?因为那……显示巴利原文
Alagaddatthikoti āsīvisena, āsīvisaṃ vā atthiko, alagaddaṃ gavesati pariyesati sīlenāti alagaddagavesī. Alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramānoti āsīvisapariyesanatthaṃ caramāno. Tadatthe hetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, upayogavacanaṃ vā, alagaddapariyesanaṭṭhānaṃ vā caramāno. Alagaddaṃ pariyesanti etthāti hi alagaddapariyesanaṃ. Tamenanti taṃ alagaddaṃ. Bhogeti sarīre. ‘‘Bhogo tu phaṇino tanū’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Bhujīyati kuṭilaṃ karīyatīti bhogo. Tassāti purisassa. Hatthe vā bāhāya vāti sambandho. Maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā hattho. Saddhiṃ aggabāhāya avasesā bāhā, katthaci pana kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā ‘‘hattho’’ti vuttaṃ bāhāya visuṃ anāgatattā. Vuttalakkhaṇaṃ hatthañca bāhañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ. Tatonidānanti tannidānaṃ, taṃkāraṇāti attho. Taṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti ‘‘tannidāna’’nti hi vattabbe ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti purimapade paccattatthe nissakkavacanaṃ katvā, tassa ca lopamakatvā niddeso, hetvatthe ca paccattavacanaṃ. Kāraṇatthe nipātapadametantipi vadanti. Apica ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti etaṃ ‘‘maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’nti ettha vuttanayena visesanaṃ. Taṃkissa hetūti yaṃ vuttaṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ, tannidānañca maraṇādiupagamanaṃ , taṃ kissa hetu kena kāraṇenāti ce? Tassa purisassa alagaddassa duggahitattā.
“在此”:指在此教法中。“愚人”:因缺乏功德精髓而空虚的人。“法”:指经藏之法。“学习”:即掌握,既诵习又令熟诵而持守,这是所说的意思。以“契经”等显示“法”的具体形式,因为除了契经等九分教之外,并没有别的法。正如所说:“那些法”。“义”:此处这是关联性表述,“义”指如实所说的意义及目的意义,是以总括表述或省略方式说的。凡一个词因音声共通用多种方式阐明意义,应知一切处皆以总括表述或省略方式。“不审察”:即不把握、不简择。因为“见”这个词在“见”等义中,此处唯取“见”义,而在“把握”与“眼”中唯取“把握”,此又以简择与遍取分为两种,唯取“简择”,而简择即是审察。所谓审察,即对所说话语的审察和对目的意义的审察,此处即指这两种。他们不作这样的审察:“此处说戒,此处说定,此处说慧,我们将圆满它们”——这是对所说话语的审察;也不作“戒是定的因,定是观的因”等对目的意义的审察,这是意思。“不审察”:指那些不审察的愚人。“不堪忍洞察”:不堪忍洞察,即不能承受无余地观察的智慧。此处“jhā”音唯取“见”义,而非“思惟”或“燃烧”义,且唯是智见,非眼见,或唯是所缘审察,非相审察。因此应知,意思是:不能以智慧见后、认可后而把握。因为无余地观察、见,故为“洞察”。依连声规则,随韵脱落,为“不堪忍洞察”,也有读作“堪忍洞察”,以此显示此义:“由于他们不以智慧审察意义,那些法不现前,不能如此了知:此处说戒、定、观、道、流转、还灭。”显示巴利原文
Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Moghapurisāti guṇasārarahitatāya tucchapurisā. Dhammanti pāḷidhammaṃ. Pariyāpuṇantīti uggaṇhanti, sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggataṃ karontā dhārenti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Dhamma’’nti sāmaññato vuttameva sarūpena dasseti ‘‘sutta’’ntiādinā. Na hi suttādinavaṅgato añño dhammo nāma atthi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ dhammāna’’nti. Atthanti cettha sambandhīniddeso eso, atthanti ca yathābhūtaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ, payojanatthañca sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā vuttaṃ. Yañhi padaṃ sutisāmaññena anekadhā atthaṃ dīpeti, taṃ sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vāti sabbattha veditabbaṃ. Na upaparikkhantīti na pariggaṇhanti na vicārenti. Ikkhasaddassa hi dassanaṅkesu idha dassanameva attho, tassa ca pariggaṇhanacakkhulocanesu pariggaṇhanameva, tañca vicāraṇā pariyādānavasena dubbidhesu vicāraṇāyeva, sā ca vīmaṃsāyeva, na vicāro, vīmaṃsā ca nāmesā bhāsitatthavīmaṃsā, payojanatthavīmaṃsā cāti idha dubbidhāva adhippetā, tāsu ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, imasmiṃ samādhi, imasmiṃ paññā, mayañca taṃ pūressāmā’’ti evaṃ bhāsitatthavīmaṃsañceva ‘‘sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyā’’tiādinā payojanatthavīmaṃsañca na karontīti attho. Anupaparikkhatanti anupaparikkhantānaṃ tesaṃ moghapurisānaṃ. Na nijjhānakkhamantīti nijjhānaṃ nissesena pekkhanaṃ paññaṃ na khamanti. Jhe-saddo hi idha pekkhaneyeva, na cintanajhāpanesu, tañca ñāṇapekkhanameva, na cakkhupekkhanaṃ, ārammaṇūpanijjhānameva vā, na lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, tasmā paññāya disvā rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo veditabbo. Nissesena jhāyate pekkhateti hi nijjhānaṃ. Sandhivasena anusvāralopo nijjhānakkhamantīti, ‘‘nijjhānaṃ khamantī’’tipi pāṭho, tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘tesaṃ paññāya atthassa anupaparikkhanato te dhammā na upaṭṭhahanti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ, samādhi, vipassanā, maggo, vaṭṭaṃ, vivaṭṭhaṃ kathitanti evaṃ jānituṃ na sakkā hontī’’ti.
“以挑剔为利益”和“以摆脱言论为利益”的意思是:以在他人言论中寻找过失为利益,以及以从言论中解脱为利益。因为,在他人言论中极力寻找过失,即是挑剔;依凭教法贬低他人,即为此义。正如所说,这被说为“以寻找他人过失为特征”。如此,“以摆脱言论为利益”是说:依此教法,以摆脱言论为利益——即为了从他人加诸自身的言论、谴责中,或从自己的言论中获得解脱的利益。“iti”一词在此义上使用,因此它指涉“学习”中的学习行为。所谓“言论”,即以此谴责他人;过失;解脱或使解脱称为“摆脱”;那些以从加诸自身的言论中获得解脱为利益者,即是如此。被加诸的言论称为“言论”,如同“天授”被称为“授”一样。或者,“言论”指非难、指责,依前述方式构成复合词。这是所说义:当他人对自己的言论提出过失,或提出指责时,心想“我将以种种方式从彼过失或指责中解脱”,以此为因而学习。或者,各个言论称为“iti言论”,因为“iti”一词与“ta”词义相连,带有分别义。依前述方式。显示巴利原文
Upārambhānisaṃsā cevāti paresaṃ vāde dosāropanānisaṃsā ca hutvā. Bhuso ārambhanañhi paresaṃ vāde dosāropanaṃ upārambho, pariyattiṃ nissāya paravambhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hesa ‘‘paravajjānupanayanalakkhaṇo’’ti vutto. Iti vādappamokkhānisaṃsā cāti iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā attano upari parehi āropitassa vādassa niggahassa attato, sakavādato vā pamokkhapayojanā ca hutvā. Iti saddo idamatthe, tena ‘‘pariyāpuṇantī’’ti ettha pariyāpuṇanaṃ parāmasati. Vadanti niggaṇhanti etenāti vādo, doso, pamuccanaṃ, pamuccāpanaṃ vā pamokkho, attano upari āropitassa pamokkho ānisaṃso yesaṃ tathā. Āropitavādo hi ‘‘vādo’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘devena datto datto’’ti. Vādoti vā upavādonindā yathāvuttanayeneva samāso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parehi sakavāde dose āropite, nindāya vā āropitāya taṃ dosaṃ, nindaṃ vā evañca evañca mocessāmāti iminā ca kāraṇena pariyāpuṇantīti. Atha vā so so vādo iti vādo iti-saddassa saha vicchāya ta-saddatthe pavattattā. Itivādasa pamokkho yathāvuttanayena, so ānisaṃso yesaṃ tathā, taṃ taṃ vādapamocanānisaṃsā hutvāti attho. Yassa catthāyāti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇassa, maggaphalanibbānabhūtassa vā anupādāvimokkhassa atthāya. Abhedepi bhedavohāro eso yathā ‘‘paṭimāya sarīra’’nti, bhedyabhedakaṃ vā etaṃ yathā ‘‘kathinassatthāya ābhataṃ dussa’’nti. ‘‘Tañcassa attha’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Ca-saddo avadhāraṇe, tena tadatthāya eva pariyāpuṇanaṃ sambhavati, nāññatthāyāti vinicchinoti. Dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti hi jātiācāravasena duvidhāpi kulaputtā ñāyena dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhontīti assa dhammassa sīlādipūraṇasaṅkhātaṃ, maggaphalanibbānabhūtaṃ vā anupādāvimokkhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ ete duggahitagāhino nānubhonti na vindantiyeva.
另一种解释:那些愚人为了挑剔,或为了摆脱言论而学习法,当他人说“此义并非如此”时,由于恶取,他们并不能证明“此义正是如此”;因此,他们既不能对他人言论加以挑剔,也不能使自己的言论摆脱过失,他们并未获得、并未证得彼利益——应如此看待此处的意义。因为这里“ca”一词也表限定义。在“那些”等句中,意思是:由于那些法被他们恶取,以挑剔、慢、欺诳、覆等为因,长夜导致不利与痛苦。因为“恶取”是含因之词。因此说:“诸比丘,由于法的恶取”。这里,基于因中施设果的用法,说“那些法导致不利与痛苦”,如同说“酥油是寿命,酪是力量”。同样,虽然那些法并不导致不利与痛苦,但依前述方式,由于在学习时、争论时,以彼为根的挑剔等诸多不善法可能生起,故说“那些……导致”。在“那是什么原因”中,“那”指前述义的未获得,以及那些法导致不利与痛苦。“什么”是属格,表原因义;同样,“原因”是主格。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – yassa upārambhassa, itivādappamokkhassa vā atthāya ye moghapurisā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, te parehi ‘‘ayamattho na hotī’’ti vutte duggahitattāyeva ‘‘tadatthova hotī’’ti paṭipādanakkhamā na honti, tasmā parassa vāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ attano vādaṃ pamocetuñca asakkontāpi taṃ atthaṃ nānubhonti ca na vindantiyevāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Idhāpi hi ca-saddo avadhāraṇatthova. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādīsu tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitattā upārambhamānadabbamakkhapalāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantīti attho. Duggahitāti hi hetugabbhavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘duggahitattā bhikkhave, dhammāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.238). Ettha ca kāraṇe phalavohāravasena ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘ghatamāyu, dadhi bala’’nti. Tathā hi kiñcāpi na te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, tathāpi vuttanayena pariyāpuṇantānaṃ sajjhāyanakāle, vivādakāle ca tammūlakānaṃ upārambhādīnaṃ anekesaṃ akusalānaṃ uppattisambhavato ‘‘te…pe… saṃvattantī’’ti vuccati. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha nti yathāvuttassatthassa ananubhavanaṃ, tesañca dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanaṃ parāmasati. Kissāti sāmivacanaṃ hetvatthe, tathā hetūti paccattavacanañca.
“维持”在此处,应依据所述方式,从作用或圣典文句来理解其义。其中,在作用方面,“善取”虽非所依,却以“所依”称说,如“行游而行”、“正行游而行”等。他开显此义说“以戒蕴等”,此中“等”字含摄定、观等。因为,若有人学习佛语后,于戒出现之处圆满戒,于定出现之处令定入胎,于观出现之处安立观,于道果出现之处心想“我将修道、我将证果”而学习,则此教法对他来说,即名为“出离义”。“那”指教法的善取。这在《蛇喻经》中说过。“长夜导致利益与安乐”的意思是:在戒等出现之处圆满戒等,乃至证得阿罗汉后,于众中说法,受用由对说法生信者供养的四资具;或对他人言论依法加以挑剔;或避开他人对自己言论所加的过失——这些皆长夜导致利益与安乐。同样,不仅依凭善取教法而有修道、证果等,而且对他人言论的降伏、自己言论的安立也能成就。正如在《般涅槃经》等中所说:“降伏已生的外道言论,依法善加降伏后,将宣说具神变的法”等。显示巴利原文
Yāpanāti ettha kiriyā pāḷivasena vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Tattha kiriyāpakkhe yā suggahitāti abhedepi bhedavohāro ‘‘cārikaṃ pakkamati, cārikaṃ caramāno’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.254, 300) viya. Tadevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘sīlakkhandhādī’’tiādinā, ādisaddena cettha samādhivipassanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā, samādhino āgataṭṭhāne samādhiṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā, vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā, maggaphalānaṃ āgataṭṭhāne ‘‘maggaṃ bhāvessāmi, phalaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti uggaṇhāti, tasseva sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthā nāma hoti. Yanti yaṃ pariyattisuggahaṇaṃ. Vuttaṃ alagaddasutte. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne sīlādīni pūrentānampi arahattaṃ patvā parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desetvā dhammadesanāya pasannehi upanīte cattāro paccaye paribhuñjantānampi paresaṃ vāde sahadhammena upārambhaṃ āropentānampi sakavādato parehi āropitadosaṃ pariharantānampi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti attho. Tathā hi na kevalaṃ suggahitapariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādīniyeva, api tu paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanānipi ijjhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ parinibbānasuttā dīsu ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.68).
此中的“Yaṃpanā”一词,此处也依前述方式有两种含义:由遍知苦而遍知的蕴;由断除集而断除的烦恼;由证悟阿罗汉果性而证悟的不动。“不动”也是阿罗汉果的名称。虽然四道与四果皆具不灭坏的性质,但七种有学由于舍弃各自名称而获得更上的名称,故其道果不被称为“不动”。然而,阿罗汉无论何时都只是阿罗汉,因此其果便依补特伽罗之名而名为“不动”。由此也显示了这样的含义:“唯有漏尽者的教理学习才称为库藏教理。”因为对他而言,没有未遍知、未断除、未修习或未证得者,所以他学习佛语时,只是作为持经者、传承守护者、世系守护者而学习,因此说“为守护传承”等。此处的“传承”即是法的相续,也就是法无间断地流传。“佛陀世尊的世系”也就是上述的传承。显示巴利原文
Yaṃpanāti etthāpi vuttanayena duvidhena attho. Dukkhaparijānena pariññātakkhandho. Samudayappahānena pahīnakileso. Paṭividdhārahattaphalatāya paṭividdhākuppo.Akuppanti ca arahattaphalassetaṃ nāma. Satipi hi cattunnaṃ maggānaṃ, catunnañca phalānaṃ avinassanabhāve sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ sakasakanāmapariccāgena uparūpari nāmantarappattito tesaṃ maggaphalāti ‘‘akuppāmi’’ti na vuccanti. Arahā pana sabbadāpi arahāyeva nāmāti tasseva phalaṃ puggalanāmavasena ‘‘akuppa’’nti vuttaṃ, iminā ca imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘khīṇāsavasseva pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāmā’’ti. Tassa hi apariññātaṃ, appahīnaṃ abhāvitaṃ, asacchikataṃ vā natthi, tasmā so buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇantopi tantidhārako paveṇīpālako vaṃsānurakkhakova hutvā pariyāpuṇāti, tenevāha ‘‘paveṇīpālanatthāyā’’tiādi. Paveṇī cettha dhammasantati dhammassa avicchedena pavatti. Buddhassa bhagavato vaṃsoti ca yathāvuttapaveṇīyeva.
若为守护传承而学习佛语即是库藏教理,那为何特别说“漏尽者”呢?因为某些凡夫也有这种方式。确实,有些凡夫比丘因害怕饥荒等,在无法安住于经教事务中的某一处时,自己因托钵乞食而过于疲劳,心想:“极为甘美的佛语不要消失,我将持守经典,安立世系,守护传承”,而学习经典。那么,为何他的教理学习不也称为库藏教理呢?答曰:即使如此,凡夫的教理学习也不名为库藏教理。因为凡夫虽以“我将守护传承”的意乐而学习,但由于他尚未超越对有的爱乐,其教理学习实际上只是为出离而作,因此凡夫的教理学习或是蛇喻式的,或是为出离的。七种有学的教理学习唯是为出离。漏尽者的教理学习才应知为库藏教理。因为漏尽者与库藏官相似,故被称为“库藏官”。正如库藏官收存装饰宝物后,在庄严之时,将适合的装饰宝物呈献给国王并为其庄严;同样,漏尽者领受法宝之藏后,见到有因缘、堪能证得解脱的众生,便增长相应的说法,以道支、觉支等称为出世间的庄严而为之庄严。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca yadi paveṇīpālanatthāya buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, atha kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Ekaccassa hi puthujjanassāpi ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tathā hi ekacco puthujjano bhikkhu chātakabhayādinā ganthadhuresu ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasitumasakkontesu sayaṃ bhikkhācārena atikilamamāno ‘‘atimadhuraṃ buddhavacanaṃ mā nassatu, tantiṃ dhāressāmi, vaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti pariyāpuṇāti. Tasmā tassāpi pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma kasmā na hotīti? Vuccate – evaṃ santepi hi puthujjanassa pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma na hoti. Kiñcāpi hi puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti, attano pana bhavakantārato avitiṇṇattā tassa sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthāyeva nāma hoti, tasmā puthujjanassa pariyatti alagaddupamā vā hoti, nissaraṇatthā vā. Sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ nissaraṇatthāva. Khīṇāsavānaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavo hi bhaṇḍāgārika sadisattā ‘‘bhaṇḍāgāriko’’ti vuccati. Yathā hi bhaṇḍāgāriko alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā pasādhanakāle tadupiyaṃ alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ rañño upanāmetvā taṃ alaṅkaroti, evaṃ khīṇāsavopi dhammaratanabhaṇḍaṃ sampaṭicchitvā mokkhādhigamāya bhabbarūpe sahetuke satte passitvā tadanurūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaṅgabojjhaṅgādisaṅkhātena lokuttarena alaṅkārena alaṅkarotīti.
如此分别三种教理之后,现在为了在三藏中随宜抉择成就与退失而分别说明,说“然而在律中”等。在“依戒成就而证得三明”等句中,因为戒在净化时,依念与正知之力、依业自性智之力而从杂染垢秽中净化,并达到圆满,所以戒成就得以成就时,以亲依止成就的状态,现起念力与智力,因此应知戒成就为三明的亲依止,由同分因的成就故。因为依念力而成就宿住随念明;依正知力,由一切事务中善见所作性的熟练,而成就与死生智相连的第二明;由无违犯而存在断除杂染,依还灭亲依止之力,由意乐清净而成就第三明。先前已成就的定与慧若不圆满,戒为漏尽智亲依止的性质,应由纯观漏尽者来显示。由“得定者如实知”之语,定成就为六通之亲依止。由“从瑜伽确实生起智慧”之语,依前分修习、亲近师长、地方语言善巧、领受、遍问等所培育的慧成就,为无碍解差别之亲依止。此处,由于说“依戒成就”,若有人未成就以定为开展的、无余的六通,以最胜分齐而言,则他无定成就,因此虽明为通的一部分,仍只取由戒成就所生的三明;又如由慧成就所生的四无碍解,于亲依止具足者唯依道而成就,因为它们在道刹那即已获得。如是,由戒成就所生的三明,以及由定成就所生的六通,于亲依止具足者唯依道而成就,故应知它们唯由证道而证得。因为对于独觉与正等觉者,这些圣者的这些殊胜证得,与独觉菩提、正等菩提的证得是相似的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tisso pariyattiyo vibhajitvā idāni tīsupi piṭakesu yathārahaṃ sampattivipattiyo niddhāretvā vibhajanto ‘‘vinaye panā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Sīlasampadaṃ nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu yasmā sīlaṃ visujjhamānaṃ satisampajaññabalena, kammassakatāñāṇabalena ca saṃkilesamalato visujjhati, pāripūriñca gacchati, tasmā sīlasampadā sijjhamānā upanissayasampattibhāvena satibalaṃ, ñāṇabalañca paccupaṭṭhapetīti tassā vijjattayūpanissayatā veditabbā sabhāgahetusampādanato. Satibalena hi pubbenivāsavijjāsiddhi. Sampajaññabalena sabbakiccesu sudiṭṭhakāritāparicayena cutūpapātañāṇānubaddhāya dutiyavijjāya siddhi. Vītikkamābhāvena saṃkilesappahānasabbhāvato vivaṭṭūpanissayatāvasena ajjhāsayasuddhiyā tatiyavijjāsiddhi. Puretarasiddhānaṃ samādhipaññānaṃ pāripūriṃ vinā sīlassa āsavakkhayañāṇūpanissayatā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavehi dīpetabbā. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 5.1071; netti. 40; mi. pa. 14) vacanato samādhisampadā chaḷabhiññatāya upanissayo. ‘‘Yogā ve jāyate bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato pubbayogena garuvāsadesabhāsākosallauggahaṇaparipucchādīhi ca paribhāvitā paññāsampadā paṭisambhidāppabhedassa upanissayo. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlasampadaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttattā yassa samādhivijambhanabhūtā anavasesā cha abhiññā na ijjhanti, tassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena na samādhisampadā atthīti satipi vijjānaṃ abhiññekadesabhāve sīlasampadāsamudāgatā eva tisso vijjā gahitā, yathā ca paññāsampadāsamudāgatā catasso paṭisambhidā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhanti maggakkhaṇeyeva tāsaṃ paṭiladdhattā. Evaṃ sīlasampadāsamudāgatā tisso vijjā, samādhisampadāsamudāgatā ca cha abhiññā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhantīti maggādhigameneva tāsaṃ adhigamo veditabbo. Paccekabuddhānaṃ, sammāsambuddhānañca paccekabodhisammāsambodhisamadhigamasadisā hi imesaṃ ariyānaṃ ime visesādhigamāti.
“即他们之分说言说”一句中,“即他们”这一简别,是针对应证得的六神通与四无碍解在律藏中未作分说而说的。因为在《毗兰若品》中,仅仅分别了三明。至于“且”字,则是就他们在此处有部分言说而作合集,这意味着神通与无碍解的一部分在律中已有提及。第二处,“即他们”的简别,是着眼于四无碍解而作,并非指三明。因为三明已含摄于六神通中,且在经藏中已作分别。此处的“且”字,则是合集了无碍解的部分言说。第三处,“且他们”中的“且”字,是显示其余诸法亦存在于彼处。因为在阿毗达摩中,三明、六神通及四无碍解皆已说到。然而,为了显示无碍解在他处未作分说,唯独于此处被善加分别,故不依前面所说的道理来作简别,转而以“即于彼处”来确立简别。金刚觉长老说:“然在阿毗达摩中,三明、六神通、四无碍解,以及其他如正勤等殊胜功德,俱已分别。虽已作分别,但为了显示唯属慧性、堪能证得的四无碍解,故作简别,倒说为‘且他们即于彼处’。”“如是”等句为结语。显示巴利原文
Tāsaṃyevaca tattha pabhedavacanatoti ettha ‘‘tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ pāpuṇitabbānaṃ chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidānaṃ vinaye pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Verañjakaṇḍe (pārā. 12) hi tisso vijjāva vibhattāti. Casaddena samuccinanañca tāsaṃ ettha ekadesavacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ abhiññāpaṭisambhidānampi ekadesānaṃ tattha vuttattā. Dutiye ‘‘tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ catasso paṭisambhidā apekkhitvā kataṃ, na tisso vijjā. Tā hi chasu abhiññāsu antogadhattā sutte vibhattāyevāti. Ca-saddena ca paṭisambhidānamekadesavacanaṃ samuccinoti. Tatiye ‘‘tāsañcā’’ti ca-saddena sesānampi tattha atthibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Abhidhamme hi tisso vijjā, cha abhiññā, catasso ca paṭisambhidā vuttāyeva. Paṭisambhidānaṃ pana aññattha pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ, tattheva ca sammā vibhattabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmo heṭṭhā vuttanayena avadhāraṇamakatvā ‘‘tatthevā’’ti parivattetvā avadhāraṇaṃ ṭhapeti. ‘‘Abhidhamme pana tisso vijjā, cha abhiññā, catasso ca paṭisambhidā aññe ca sammappadhānādayo guṇavisesā vibhattā. Kiñcāpi vibhattā, visesato pana paññājātikattā catassova paṭisambhidā pāpuṇātīti dassanatthaṃ ‘tāsañca tatthevā’ti avadhāraṇavipallāso kato’’ti vajirabuddhitthero. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
“乐触”,意谓这些能带来乐之触。如已得到许可的敷具、覆具等,因其所触的共同特征,故而说为乐,或如其触是乐的;而享用这些已被许可之触的人,便称为“受用已许可乐触者”。此即指敷具、覆具等此类物品,以其触的同类性而说。“执取触”即指女人触,也就是淫欲法。这是由一位名叫阿利咤、过去世曾为鹰猎人的比丘所说。他是一位多闻的说法者,但在业、烦恼、异熟、诽谤、违教这五种障碍中,不了知“违教障”,仅知其余四种障碍。因此,当他独自静处时,便如是思惟:“这些在家众受用五种欲乐功德,尚能证得须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含;比丘们亦能见可意之色……触可触之触,受用柔软的敷具、覆具,这一切都是可行的。为何唯独女人的色、声、香、味、触不可行?这些理应也是可行的。”他将无罪资具的受用之味,与有罪欲乐的受用之味混为一谈,将尚有欲贪的受用与离欲贪的受用等同视之,犹如以粗线穿极细的针,又如以芥子与须弥山相提并论。由此,他生起邪恶见,说道:“世尊为何费尽极大努力,来制立这第一波罗夷?这好比要束缚大海。此行并无过失。”他与一切知智相违,拒斥无畏智,向圣道投掷荆棘,说出“淫欲法中无有过失”这样的话,打击了胜者的法轮。因此,说“如彼所说”等语。显示巴利原文
Sukho samphasso etesanti sukhasamphassāni, anuññātāniyeva tādisāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni, tesaṃ phassasāmaññato sukho vā samphasso tathā, anuññāto so yesanti anuññātasukhasamphassāni, tādisāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni tesaṃ phassena samānatāya. Upādinnakaphasso itthiphasso, methunadhammoyeva. Vuttaṃ ariṭṭhena nāma gaddhabādhipubbena bhikkhunā (ma. ni. 234; pāci. 417). So hi bahussuto dhammakathiko kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu āṇāvītikkamantarāyikaṃ na jānāti, sesantarāyikeyeva jānāti, tasmā so rahogato evaṃ cintesi ‘‘ime agārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti, bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti …pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇāni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbampi vaṭṭati, kasmā itthīnaṃyeva rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā na vaṭṭanti, etepi vaṭṭantiyevā’’ti anavajjena paccayaparibhogarasena sāvajjaṃ kāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ saṃsanditvā sachandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thullavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ ghaṭento viya, sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruno sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ca pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīni pakkhipanto ‘‘methunadhamme doso natthī’’ti jinacakke pahāramadāsi, tenāha ‘‘tathāha’’ntiādi.
因不可逾越之义而系属于障碍,或应得障碍之果报,或有造作障碍的习性,故称为“障碍法”,即是指那些能为生天与解脱带来障碍的法。这些障碍法依业、烦恼、异熟、诽谤、违教的不同,而有五种类型。其详细说明,应取自《阿利咤学处注释》等。而此处,其句义关联如下:对于世尊所说、所开示、所制立的“这些法是障碍法”,若有人在如法行持时,认为这些法并不能如其理应成为生天与解脱的障碍,那么,我便是如此了知世尊所说的法。由此,他成就了恶戒。也就是说,以此无罪想为因,违犯之后,他便成就了恶戒。显示巴利原文
Anatikkamanatthena antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā, saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Vitthāro ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanādīsu (pāci. aṭṭha. 417) gahetabbo. Ayaṃ panettha padatthasambandho – ye ime dhammā antarāyikā iti bhagavatā vuttā desitā ceva paññattā ca, te dhamme paṭisevato paṭisevantassa yathā yena pakārena te dhammā antarāyāya saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ nālaṃ samatthā na honti, tathā tena pakārena ahaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ ājānāmīti. Tato dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti tato anavajjasaññibhāvahetuto vītikkamitvā dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti.
“四种……等”中,此处以“等”字——显示巴利原文
Cattāro…pe…ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena –
“诸比丘!世间有这四类人存在。哪四类?一类为自利行道而不为利他,一类为利他行道而不为自利,一类既不为自利行道也不为利他,一类既为自利行道也为利他……诸比丘!这些便是……世间。”——显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame cattāro? Attahitāya paṭipanno no parahitāya, parahitāya paṭipanno no attahitāya, nevattahitāya paṭipanno no parahitāya, attahitāya ceva paṭipanno parahitāya ca…pe… ime kho bhikkhave…pe… lokasmi’’nti (a. ni. 4.96) –
以如是等方式,指示与补特伽罗施设相应的经典正文。所谓意趣,即“这是依于补特伽罗施设的惯用说法,并非依于胜义”,这便是世尊的意趣。因为曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
Evamādinā puggaladesanāpaṭisaññuttasuttantapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Adhippāyanti ‘‘ayaṃ puggaladesanāvohāravasena, na paramatthato’’ti evaṃ bhagavato adhippāyaṃ. Vuttañhi –
能说者中最胜者——正自觉者,说示二谛;
世俗谛与胜义谛,第三谛则不可得。
约定俗成的言辞是真实的,因为这是世间共同认可的缘故;
胜义谛的言辞是真实的,因诸法具有真实因的缘故。
因此,对于善用世俗言辞的那位世间导师、世尊,
运用世俗共许的言辞,便不会导致妄语。”(中部尼柯耶注 1.57;增支部尼柯耶注 1.1.170;如是语注 24)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; itivu. aṭṭha. 24);
因为诸佛世尊不舍世间共许,他们正是安住在世间的称呼、世间的语言、世间的表达上来说法。而且,“为了显示惭愧,为了显示业归自作等”(《中部》注释 1.57;《增支部》注释 1.1.202;《如是语》注释 24;《论事》复注 1),世尊也是基于这八种原因而说“人施设论”——不知此意者,便会产生误解。此义在下文中将会显明。“错误把握”指的是:如“我这样理解世尊所说的法:这个识流转、轮回,而非其他”(《中部》 1.144)等,作了错误的把握,即颠倒了把握,说的正是这个意思。所谓“错误把握”,是就其行为被动名词的性质,以中性单数体格来表示。因为这种行为被动名词的通例,正是以中性体格来表示,它源于被动、含有“自作”及“他作”动词的随转,是一种反身作用的表达。因此说“作了错误把握”。“所把握”即错误的把握。在《中部·根本五十篇·大爱尽经》中,世尊正是针对一位名叫沙地的比丘,他持有这样的观点,而作了开示。“以自己错误把握的法”是剩余部分的读法,意思是:以邪妄的体性。或者说,“错误把握”即“被错误把握的”,自身显示巴利原文
Na hi lokasammutiṃ buddhā bhagavanto vijahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Apica ‘‘hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanattha’’nti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.202; itivu. aṭṭha. 24; kathā. anuṭī. 1) evamādīhipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ kathetī’’ti evaṃ adhippāyamajānanto. Ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati. Duggahitaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.144) duggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, viparītaṃ gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Duggahitanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso kiriyāyavisesanabhāvena napuṃsakaliṅgena niddisitabbattā. Ayañhi bhāvanapuṃsakapadassa pakati, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgena niddisitabbattā, bhāvappaṭṭhānatā, sakammākammakiriyānuyogaṃ paccattopayogavacanatā ca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘duggahitaṃ katvā’’ti. Yanti duggahitagāhaṃ. Majjhimanikāye mūlapaṇṇāsake mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasutte (ma. ni. 1.144) tathāvādīnaṃ sādhināmakaṃ kevaṭṭaputtaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Attanā duggahitena dhammenāti pāṭhaseso, micchāsabhāvenāti attho. Atha vā duggahaṇaṃ duggahitaṃ, attanāti ca sāmiatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, vibhattiyantapatirūpakaṃ vā abyayapadaṃ, tasmā attano duggahaṇena viparītagāhenāti attho. Abbhācikkhatīti abbhakkhānaṃ karoti. Attano kusalamūlāni khananto attānaṃ khanati nāma. Tatoti duggahitabhāvahetuto.
“思惟法”,即思惟诸法的自性。“过度奔越”,即不安住于应遵守的界限,而是以这样的方式越过界限在转起:“仅凭心生起便能成办布施,心本身就是自己的所缘,一切心都只以自性法为所缘”等等。那些无法思惟,或者说不相应、无利益的事,就被称为“不应思惟”。为了显示这一点,所以说“故说”等等。这其中,“不应思惟”是在显示它们的自性;“不应思惟它”是在显示对此不应有任何作为。“哪些”等语是在显示其原因。思惟哪些事会招致狂乱、心乱、恼害、恼损,这四种就是不应思惟的,或者说这四种被称为不应思惟,就不应去思惟;又或者说,思惟哪些会招致这些结果,因此不应思惟,这四种就被称为不应思惟——道理正是如此。而“此”字——显示巴利原文
Dhammacintanti dhammasabhāvavicāraṃ. Atidhāvantoti ṭhātabbamariyādāyaṃ aṭṭhatvā ‘‘cittuppādamattenapi dānaṃ hoti, sayameva cittaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ hoti, sabbampi cittaṃ sabhāvadhammārammaṇameva hotī’’ti ca evamādinā atikkamitvā pavattayamāno. Cintetumasakkuṇeyyāni , anaraharūpāni vā acinteyyāni nāma, tāni dassento ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha acinteyyānīti tesaṃ sabhāvadassanaṃ. Nacintetabbānīti tattha kattabbakiccadassanaṃ. ‘‘Yānī’’tiādi tassa hetudassanaṃ. Yāni cintento ummādassa cittakkhepassa, vighātassa vihesassa ca bhāgī assa, acinteyyāni imāni cattāri na cintetabbāni, imāni vā cattāri acinteyyāni nāma na cintetabbāni, yāni vā…pe… assa, tasmā na cintetabbāni acintetabbabhūtāni imāni cattāri acinteyyāni nāmāti yojanā. Iti-saddena pana –
“哪四种呢?诸比丘,诸佛的境界是不可思议的,不应思惟,思惟它的人会招致狂乱与恼害。诸比丘,禅那的境界是不可思议的……乃至……诸比丘,业的异熟是不可思议的……乃至……诸比丘,世间的思惟是不可思议的……乃至……这些……会招致”》(《增支部》 4.77)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamāni cattāri? Buddhānaṃ bhikkhave buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Jhāyissa bhikkhave jhānavisayo acinteyyo…pe… kammavipāko bhikkhave acinteyyo…pe… lokacintā bhikkhave acinteyyā…pe… imāni…pe… assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77) –
以《增支部》中所说《不思议经》为首,它汇聚了一切阐明不可议状态的经典。六种不可议(如不共智等)虽确实不可思议,但对于随念它们的人来说,由于能成为善法生起之因,故是应当思惟的;但这里所说的情况并非如此,因为没有结果,所以不应思惟。通过“破戒……差别”等语句,依自性显示了退失;通过“如何?依藏”等语句的连接,则显示了前后的关联,因此说“如此以种种方式”等。因为缺乏前后关联的言说是混乱的,不能令听众领悟含义,唯有通晓前后文者,经过如此审察的言说,才是其领域。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Caturaṅguttare vuttaṃ acinteyyasuttaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ acinteyyabhāvadīpakaṃ pāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kāmaṃ acinteyyāni cha asādhāraṇañāṇādīni, tāni pana anussarantassa kusaluppattihetubhāvato cintetabbāni, imāni pana evaṃ na honti aphalabhāvato, tasmā na cintetabbāni. ‘‘Dussīlya…pe… pabheda’’nti iminā vipattiṃ sarūpato dasseti. ‘‘Kathaṃ? Piṭakavasenā’’tiādivacanasambajjhanena pubbāparasambandhaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ nānappakārato’’tiādimāha. Pubbāparasambandhavirahitañhi vacanaṃ byākulaṃ. Sotūnañca atthaviññāpakaṃ na hoti, pubbāparaññūnameva ca tathāvicāritavacanaṃ visayo. Yathāha –
“通晓前后文,了知义理,精通词句及其分析;善持所持,复审其义。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pubbāparaññū atthaññū, niruttipadakovido; Suggahītañca gaṇhāti, atthañco’ paparikkhatī’’ti. (theragā. 1031);
“它们”指三藏,“此”指佛语。显示巴利原文
Tesanti piṭakānaṃ. Etanti buddhavacanaṃ.
这些经典由《戒蕴品》《大品》《波提迦品》三品所摄,故称“三品所摄”。然依偈颂计,此部类恰好有三十四部经。依品摄而言,此结集有三品,故为“三品摄”。这第一部类即《长部》,其名随顺义理而非对立,或因随顺义理而称“随顺义理”,或即“随义之名”,此即其义。其中,“三品摄”这一表述,即使中间有“其”字隔开,也仅是复合词而非句子,应如“然,比丘以得新衣……”(《波逸提》368)中的“以得新衣”一词看待。正如注释书师们所释:“‘不得’即得,得即是得。不得何物?衣。何等衣?新者。故当说‘以得新衣’时,未行鼻音省略而说为‘以得新衣’,义为‘以所得之新衣’。而中间之‘然’是不变词,‘比丘’是所得者的例示。”于此,无论从音声还是意义,句子皆不合逻辑,唯以复合词方为合理。因“三品”一词若在“摄”中为工具格,便只能作工具格词;若此二者为同格关系,则应如“三界”等词般作中性。同样,“三品”一词若无“摄”字,便无法与其他词构成复合词。显示巴利原文
Sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggapāthikavaggasaṅkhātehi tīhi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti tivaggasaṅgahāni. Gāthāya pana yassa nikāyassa suttagaṇanato catuttiṃseva suttantā. Vaggasaṅgahavasena tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti tivaggo saṅgaho. Paṭhamo esa nikāyo dīghanikāyoti anulomiko apaccanīko, atthānulomanato atthānulomanāmiko vā, anvatthanāmoti attho. Tattha ‘‘tivaggo saṅgaho’’ti etaṃ ‘‘yassā’’ti antarikepi samāsoyeva hoti, na vākyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘navaṃ pana bhikkhunā cīvaralābhenā’’ti (pāci. 368) ettha ‘‘navaṃcīvaralābhenā’’ti padaṃ viya. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathācariyā vaṇṇayanti ‘‘alabbhīti labho, labho eva lābho. Kiṃ alabbhi? Cīvaraṃ. Kīdisaṃ? Navaṃ, iti ‘navacīvaralābhenā’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā ‘navaṃcīvaralābhenā’ti vuttaṃ, paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho. Majjhe ṭhitapadadvaye panāti nipāto. Bhikkhunāti yena laddhaṃ, tassa nidassana’’nti (pāci. aṭṭha. 368). Idhāpi saddato, atthato ca vākye yuttiyāabhāvato samāsoyeva sambhavati. ‘‘Tivaggo’’ti padañhi ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti ettha yadi karaṇaṃ, evaṃ sati karaṇavacanantameva siyā. Yadi ca padadvayametaṃ tulyādhikaraṇaṃ, tathā ca sati napuṃsakaliṅgameva siyā ‘‘tiloka’’ntiādipadaṃ viya. Tathā ‘‘tivaggo’’ti etassa ‘‘saṅgaho’’ti padamantarena aññatthāsambandho na sambhavati, tattha ca tādisena vākyena sambajjhanaṃ na yuttaṃ, tasmā samānepi padantarantarike saddatthāvirodhabhāvoyeva samāsatākāraṇanti samāso eva yutto. Tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti hi tivaggosaṅgaho akārassa okārādesaṃ, okārāgamaṃ vā katvā yathā ‘‘sattāhaparinibbuto, acirapakkanto, māsajāto’’tiādi, assa saṅgahassāti ca saṅgahitassa assa nikāyassāti attho. Apare pana ‘‘tayo vaggā yassāti katvā ‘saṅgaho’ti padena tulyādhikaraṇameva sambhavati, saṅgahoti ca gaṇanā. Ṭīkācariyehi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) pana ‘tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassā’ti padadvayassa tulyādhikaraṇatāyeva dassitā’’ti vadanti, tadayuttameva saṅkhyāsaṅkhyeyyānaṃ missakattā, apākaṭattā ca.
为阐明“随顺义理”义,故说“为何”等。由功德借代或派生词缀,以“长”字独指篇幅长之经;“部类”一词则依惯例用于集合、住处等义,故以“篇幅长的”等语显示。由于能诠与所诠之约定已成,由运用而告知其于彼义之约定已成,故说“非”等。“一部类”即一集合。“如此种种”即如此种种差别。“如”即如彼诸畜生类。“波尼迦”“奇迦利迦”为刹帝利,他们住处即称“波尼迦部类”“奇迦利迦部类”。此处,“部类”一词乃集合、住处之能诠。“能证者”,因能证成所意指之义而称例证。“已集合”为剩余之读法,与此相关,或为依所述方式能证成者。凡能简择而证成所意指之义者,称为“证者”。正如《满足希求》中所说:“而《五师本生》应引为证者而说”,从教说之用,或于教说中;从世间之用,或于世间中。然此于《三藏》中并不存在,故如是说。此中,第一例证应视为从教说而来之证语,第二例证从世间而来。显示巴利原文
Atthānulomikattaṃ vibhāvetumāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Guṇopacārena, taddhitavasena vā dīgha-saddena dīghappamāṇāni suttāniyeva gahitāni , nikāyasaddo ca ruḷhivasena samūhanivāsatthesu vattatīti dasseti ‘‘dīghappamāṇāna’’ntiādinā. Saṅketasiddhattā vacanīyavācakānaṃ payogato tadatthesu tassa saṅketasiddhataṃ ñāpento ‘‘nāha’’ntiādimāha. Ekanikāyampīti ekasamūhampi. Evaṃ cittanti evaṃ vicittaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā ime tiracchānagatā pāṇā. Poṇikā, cikkhallikā ca khattiyā, tesaṃ nivāso ‘‘poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyo’’ti vuccati. Etthāti nikāyasaddassa samūhanivāsānaṃ vācakabhāve. Sādhakānīti adhippetassatthassa sādhanato udāharaṇāni vuccanti. ‘‘Samānītānī’’ti pāṭhasesena cetassa sambandho, sakkhīni vā yathāvuttanayena sādhakāni. Yañhi niddhāretvā adhippetatthaṃ sādhenti , taṃ ‘‘sakkhī’’ti vadanti. Tathā hi manorathapūraṇiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcagarujātakaṃ (jā. 1.1.132) pana sakkhibhāvatthāya āharitvā kathetabba’’nti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.5) sāsanatoti sāsanapayogato, sāsane vā. Lokatoti lokiyapayogato, loke vā. Idaṃ pana piṭakattaye na vijjati, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti vadanti. Ettha ca paṭhamamudāharaṇaṃ sāsanato sādhakavacanaṃ, dutiyaṃ lokatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
依《根本法门》等品,共有十五品所摄。所谓“一半的第二、一又二分之一”,正是指一百,即一百五十部经。“于彼处”:即于此部类中。“十五品所摄”:即由十五品所摄持、所包含。显示巴利原文
Mūlapariyāya vaggādivasena pañcadasavaggasaṅgahāni. Aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, tadeva sataṃ, ekasataṃ, paññāsa ca suttānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yatthāti yasmiṃ nikāye. Pañcadasavaggapariggahoti pañcadasahi vaggehi pariggahito saṅgahito.
“相应”者,于其中相连接之义。何者相应?经与品相应。正如字母之合集称为“词”,词之合集称为“句”,句之合集称为“经”,经之合集称为“品”,同样,品之合集则称为“相应”。以天人所问而说的经、品等,由于相互连接,故有《天相应》等名,因此说“依《天相应》等”。所谓“经有七千七百”的读法,应连接为“经有七千,又七百经”。亦有“七千经,又七百经”的读法。“相应摄”即《相应部》的摄集、计数。显示巴利原文
Saṃyujjanti etthāti saṃyuttaṃ, kesaṃ saṃyuttaṃ? Suttavaggānaṃ. Yathā hi byañjanasamudāye padaṃ, padasamudāye ca vākyaṃ, vākyasamudāye suttaṃ, suttasamudāye vaggoti samaññā, evaṃ vaggasamudāye saṃyuttasamaññā. Devatāya pucchitena kathitasuttavaggādīnaṃ saṃyuttattā devatāsaṃyuttādibhāvo (saṃ. ni. 1.1), tenāha ‘‘devatāsaṃyuttādivasenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Suttantānaṃ sahassāni satta suttasatāni cā’’ti pāṭhe suttantānaṃ satta sahassāni, satta suttasatāni cāti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Satta suttasahassāni, satta suttasatāni cā’’tipi pāṭho. Saṃyuttasaṅgahoti saṃyuttanikāyassa saṅgaho gaṇanā.
由于每一支都更增上、更殊胜,故称“增支”,因此说“以每一支增多的方式”等。其中,从一支开始,乃至十一支皆有说明。“支”即法的部分。显示巴利原文
Ekekehi aṅgehi uparūpari uttaro adhiko etthāti aṅguttaroti āha ‘‘ekekaaṅgātirekavasenā’’tiādi. Tattha hi ekekato paṭṭhāya yāva ekādasa aṅgāni kathitāni. Aṅganti ca dhammakoṭṭhāso.
约定俗成的真理,是世间共许之因。显示巴利原文
Pubbeti suttantapiṭakaniddese. Vuttameva pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā avisesetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādinā vuttameva hi iminā pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā dasseti. Apica yathāvuttato avasiṭṭhaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā dinnanaye ṭhatvā desitaṃ, bhagavatā ca anumoditaṃ nettipeṭakopadesādikaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ettheva pariyāpannanti anavasesapariyādānavasena dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttantipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Siddhepi hi sati ārambho atthantaraviññāpanāya vā hoti, niyamāya vāti. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘dīghappamāṇāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘khuddakappamāṇāna’’ntiādimavatvā sarūpasseva kathanaṃ vinayābhidhammādīnaṃ dīghappamāṇānampi tadantogadhatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tena ca viññāyati ‘‘na sabbattha khuddakapariyāpannesu tassa anvatthasamaññatā, dīghanikāyādisabhāvaviparītabhāvasāmaññena pana katthaci tabbohāratā’’ti. Tadaññanti tehi catūhi nikāyehi aññaṃ, avasesanti attho.
关于‘九种分类’,这里如何成为九种分类呢?因为它应当由九支来确立,且彼此不相混杂。若是那样,祇夜等支就会具有非契经的自性,或者契经的自性就是祇夜等支。若是那样,则‘契经’就不会单独作为契经支而存在;如此一来,教法便成了八支。又,注释书中说:‘有偈颂的经是祇夜,无偈颂的经是记说。’而所谓契经,或是有偈颂的,或是无偈颂的。因此,仅此两支便包含了那两者。所以,并不存在既非有偈颂、亦非无偈颂,而又不名为优陀那等特殊名称的契经,可以作为契经支。即使勉强有单独的契经支,像《吉祥经》等,由于没有偈颂,就不会被归入契经支,如同《法句》等一样。或者,由于是有偈颂的,就会被归入祇夜支,如同《有偈品》一样。同样,在《两分别》等之中,那些有偈颂的部分又应如何归类?答曰:显示巴利原文
Navappabhedanti ettha kathaṃ panetaṃ navappabhedaṃ hoti. Tathā hi navahi aṅgehi vavatthitehi aññamaññasaṅkararahitehi bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati asuttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni siyuṃ, atha suttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni, evaṃ sati suttanti visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyā, evaṃ sante aṭṭhaṅgaṃ sāsananti āpajjati. Apica ‘‘sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha., pārā. aṭṭha. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttañca nāma sagāthakaṃ vā siyā, niggāthakaṃ vā, tasmā aṅgadvayeneva tadubhayaṃ saṅgahitanti tadubhayavinimuttaṃ suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññārahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, athāpi kathañci visuṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ (khu. pā. 1; su. ni. 261) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya. Geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthāvaggassa viya. Tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare; Sanimittā niruḷhattā, sahatāññena nāññato. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā); Yathāvuttassa dosassa, natthi etthāvagāhaṇaṃ; Tasmā asaṅkaraṃyeva, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā);
的确,对于一切佛语,‘契经’是总称。正如‘这么多是彼世尊的契经所摄、包含于契经中的’、‘在舍卫城的经分别中’、‘在自说中有五百经’等语所示,即使在律藏、阿毗达摩藏这些别别教法中,也可见到‘经’的称呼。正因如此,尊者大迦旃延在《指导论》中说:‘九种契经之寻求’。在那里,以经等九分教为对象的寻求、探寻与义之审察,被称为‘九种契经之寻求’。然而,在部分经中,祇夜等其他分类,由于具有各自的因相,便依彼彼因相安立为别称。例如,祇夜以有偈颂为其成立之因相。即使在世间,也将有偈颂、有诗律的著作称为‘祇夜’。而在无偈颂的情况下,以提问而作解答的状态,是记说成立之因相。因为问答被称为‘记说’,记说即是‘记别’。若是如此,有偈颂等的经文,若以问答方式展开,是否也应成为记说?不会,因为祇夜等名称已无安立之余地。有安立余地的法则,比无安立余地的法则更强。再者,由于特别说明了‘在无偈颂的情况下’。因为简别是为了将非所欲之义从所欲之义中排除。正如在《法句》等纯粹偈颂结集中,虽是有偈颂的,但安立了‘偈颂’之称;在与喜悦、显示巴利原文
Sabbassāpi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tathā hi ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ, (pāci. aṭṭha. 655, 1242) sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge, (cūḷava. 456) sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’tiādi (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) vacanato vinayābhidhammapariyatti visesesupi suttavohāro dissati. Teneva ca āyasmā mahākaccāyano nettiyaṃ āha ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti (netti. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) tattha hi suttādivasena navaṅgassa sāsanassa pariyeṭṭhi pariyesanā atthavicāraṇā ‘‘navavidha suttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti vuttā. Tadekadesesu pana pare geyyādayo sanimittā visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti, gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati, byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato. Saokāsavidhito hi anokāsavidhi balavā. Apica ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā. Yathādhippetassa hi atthassa anadhippetato byavacchedakaṃ visesanaṃ. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalagāthābandhesu, sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaññuttesu, ‘‘vuttaṃ heta’’ntiādivacana sambandhesu, abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthāudānaitivuttaka abbhutadhammasaññā patiṭṭhitā. Ettha hi satipi saññāntaranimittayoge anokāsasaññānaṃ balavabhāveneva gāthādisaññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā patiṭṭhitā, satipi pañhāvissajjanabhāve , sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitā, evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo, yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgameva visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanato. Nanu ca evaṃ santepi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti tadubhayavinimuttassa suttassa abhāvato visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyāti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti.
又,所谓“由于是偈颂体,吉祥经等不应归入契经分”,此亦不然,因为已约定俗成。吉祥经等确实已约定俗成为契经体。因为它们并非如《法句经》、《佛种姓经》等那样以偈颂体而得名,而是以契经体而得名。正因如此,在无可争议的情况下,才以“名为经”来取名。又,所谓“由于带有偈颂,或应归入应颂分”,此亦不然。何以故?因为与另一者共存。所谓共存,是指与自身之外的另一者共同存在。而“带有偈颂”是指与偈颂共存,但在吉祥经等之中,并没有任何一段脱离偈颂的契经文句,可以被说为“与偈颂共存”。难道不是偈颂的集合体,与其作为部分的那些偈颂不同,而可依此集合体说“与偈颂共存”吗?并非如此。因为并不存在脱离其组成部分的所谓集合体,能与那些部分共存。然而,在某些地方,如“长部经标记”等说法中,将集合体与部分加以区分而说,仅是随顺世俗言说的权宜说法而已,而此处是依究竟义显示分类差别的论述。又,所谓“在《分别论》等之中,带有偈颂的段落应归入应颂分”,此亦不然,因为另有归属。那些偈颂实属不同,因为它们显示巴利原文
Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ (khu. pā. 1; su. ni. 261) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti, tampi na, niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena saññitāni, atha kho suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi akathāyaṃ ‘‘suttanāmaka’’nti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yañca pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā’’ti, tampi natthi. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā sahatāññena, tasmā. Sahabhāvo hi nāma attato aññena hoti. Saha gāthāhīti ca sagāthakaṃ, na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttapadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya, nanu ca gāthāsamudāyo tadekadesāhi gāthāhi añño hoti, yassa vasena ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti sakkā vattunti? Taṃ na. Na hi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci atthi, yo tadekadesehi saha bhaveyya. Katthaci pana ‘‘dīghasuttaṅkitassā’’tiādīsu samudāyekadesānaṃ vibhāgavacanaṃ vohāramattaṃ pati pariyāyavacanameva, ayañca nippariyāyena pabhedavibhāgadassanakathāti . Yampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi na, aññato. Aññāyeva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā. Tādisāyeva hi kāraṇānurūpena tattha desitā, ato na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti. Evaṃ suttādinavaṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabboti.
现在,为了分别显示这九分教,说“其中”等语。所谓“义释”,在《经集》中——显示巴利原文
Idāni etāni navaṅgāni vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Niddeso nāma suttanipāte –
若有希求欲乐者,所愿得以成就,
他必定心生喜悦,得获所求之乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa ce taṃ samijjhati; Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’tiādinā. (su. ni. 772); –
已引用的《八颂品》。显示巴利原文
Āgatassa aṭṭhakavaggassa;
是什么遮蔽了世间?(具寿阿耆多请问)
因何而不能显耀?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito); Kenassu na pakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’ntiādinā. (su. ni. 1038); –
关于传来的《彼岸道品》;显示巴利原文
Āgatassa pārāyanavaggassa;
“于一切有情,放下刀杖,”
不伤害其中任何一个;
不希求子嗣,何况伴侣?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesaṃ; Na puttamiccheyya kuto sahāyaṃ, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’tiādinā. (su. ni. 35); –
对于传来的《犀牛角经》,具寿法将舍利弗长老以与师无别的方式,依义分别而作之义释,是为《大义释》与《小义释》。在此,尊者觉音论师已显示义释归入契经分;同样,在《律藏注释》等其他处,尊者法护长老在《导论注释》中也如此显示。然而,另有论师主张义释归入偈颂与记说二分。此实为优波西那长老在《义释注释》中所说:显示巴利原文
Āgatassa khaggavisāṇasuttassa ca atthavibhāgavasena satthukappena āyasmatā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherena kato niddeso, yo ‘‘mahāniddeso, cūḷaniddeso’’ti vuccati. Evamidha niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho bhadantabuddhadhosācariyena dassito, tathā aññatthāpi vinayaṭṭhakathādīsu , ācariyadhammapālattherenāpi nettippakaraṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Apare pana niddesassa gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgesu dvīsu saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ niddesaṭṭhakathāyaṃ upasenattherena –
“而此《义释》,收于经藏……乃至……论藏三藏之中,属于经藏;于长部……乃至……小部五部之中,属于小部及大部;于契经……乃至……方广九分教之中,随其所应,归入偈颂与记说二分。”显示巴利原文
‘‘So panesa vinayapiṭakaṃ…pe… abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpanno, dīghanikāyo…pe… khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu nikāyesu khuddakamahānikāyapariyāpanno, suttaṃ…pe… vedallanti navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ gāthaṅgaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahito’’ti (mahāni. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
此处首先应审察:由于某些地方存在问答,义释的部分归入记说分尚可成立;但义释并无偈颂,归入偈颂分又如何能成立?因为,如同《法句》等,纯粹以偈颂结集的形式,才是偈颂分成立的根据。在《法句》等纯粹以偈颂结集的经典中,确立了“偈颂”之名;然而在义释中,全无纯以偈颂结集的部分。因为,法将(舍利弗)只是对正自觉者所说、包含于《八颂品》等中的偈颂作了分别解释。那些为辨明义理而引用的根本偈颂,虽出自《八颂品》等,但因属于《经集》,自成他经,故不纳入义释之数;正如《二部分别》等中出现的、本属《本生》等中的偈颂,不归入该处之名一样。因此,应另寻他据,或采纳更为浅明的解释。显示巴利原文
Ettha tāva katthaci pucchāvissajjanasabbhāvato niddesekadesassa veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho yujjatu, agāthābhāvato gāthaṅgasaṅgaho kathaṃ yujjeyyāti vīmaṃsitabbametaṃ. Dhammāpadādīnaṃ viya hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhabhāvo gāthaṅgassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Dhammapadādīsu hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu gāthāsamaññā patiṭṭhitā, niddese ca na koci kevalo gāthābandappadeso upalabbhati. Sammāsambuddhena bhāsitānaṃyeva hi aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitānaṃ gāthānaṃ niddesamattaṃ dhammasenāpatinā kataṃ. Atthavibhajanatthaṃ ānītāpi hi tā aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitā niddisitabbā mūlagāthāyo suttanipātapariyāpannattā aññāyevāti na niddesasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu āgatāpi taṃ vohāramalabhamānā jātakādipariyāpannā gāthāyo viya, tasmā kāraṇantaramettha gavesitabbaṃ, yuttataraṃ vā gahetabbaṃ.
名为《那罗迦经》者,是世尊于转法轮日后第七日,对那罗迦长老所说、阐明牟尼行道的经,以‘我将为你开示牟尼行……’等偈(《经集》706偈)作为开端。名为《迅速经》者,是世尊为了让那些在大集会经说法时聚集的诸天中,生起‘证得阿罗汉果的行道是什么?’之心的一类天众了知此义,令化佛向自己发问后,以‘了知戏论之根……’等偈(《经集》922偈)所说之经。如此,此处便指出了《经集》中所收的《吉祥经》等经,归属于经分;也将指出在该处所收、不名为经的纯粹偈颂,归属于偈颂分。既是如此,在《经集》注释的开端——显示巴利原文
Nālakasuttaṃ nāma dhammacakkappavattita divasato sattame divase nālakattherassa ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 706) bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ moneyya paṭipadāparidīpakaṃ suttaṃ. Tuvaṭṭakasuttaṃ nāma mahāsamayasuttantadesanāya sannipatitesu devesu ‘‘kā nu kho arahattappattiyā paṭipattī’’ti uppannacittānaṃ ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ nimmitabuddhena attānaṃ pucchāpetvā ‘‘mūlaṃ papañcasaṅkhāyā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 922) bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ. Evamidha suttanipāte āgatānaṃ maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho dassito, tattheva āgatānaṃ asuttanāmikānaṃ suddhikagāthānaṃ gāthaṅgasaṅgahañca dassayissati, evaṃ sati suttanipātaṭṭhakathārambhe –
‘缀以数百偈颂,兼具应颂与记说;
为何称为《经集》?因它以此名流传于世。’(《经集》注释 1. 著作起始语);——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gāthāsatasamākiṇṇo, geyyabyākaraṇaṅkito; Kasmā suttanipātoti, saṅkhamesa gatoti ce’’ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā); –
问:为何整个《经集》被责难为摄属于应颂分与记说分?答:这并无矛盾。只是因为在那时,责难者仅执取“具有偈颂”以及某处存在问答,便作了责难而已。否则,由于《经集》中并没有无偈颂的经,就不应责难它属于记说分。因此,责难者的话在此不足为凭。而在其他如律藏注释等处,已依所述之理显示了该经的经分与偈颂分摄属。“经”指长行。“特别地”指以积聚的状态而住立。“有偈品是应颂”——这是句子的连接。显示巴利原文
Sakalassāpi suttanipātassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho kasmā coditoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Kevalañhi tattha codakena sagāthakattaṃ, katthaci pucchāvissajjanattañca gahetvā codanāmattaṃ kataṃ, aññathā suttanipāte niggāthakassa suttasseva abhāvato veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho na codetabbo siyā, tasmā codakassa vacanametaṃ appamāṇanti idha, aññāsu ca vinayaṭṭhakathādīsu vuttanayeneva tassa suttaṅgagāthaṅgasaṅgaho dassitoti. Suttanti cuṇṇiyasuttaṃ. Visesenāti rāsibhāvena ṭhitaṃ sandhāyāha. Sagāthāvaggo geyyanti sambandho.
据说在三部《结节》中都说:“不被八支所摄的,名为无碍解等。”然而,另一些人说《无碍解道》摄属应颂与记说二分。因为在其注释中这样说:“在九分教法中,随其所应,摄属应颂与记说二分。”(《无碍解道》注释 1. 著作起始语)在此,其摄属应颂分的情形也应依所述之理审察。“不名为经”指的是在结集时未被赋予“经”的名称。据说在三部《结节》中都说:“纯粹偈颂名为事偈。”所谓“事偈”,是指在结集时,具寿阿难陀长老在安立《彼岸品》的序言时所说的五十六偈,以及在安立《那罗迦经》的序言时他当时所说的二十余偈。然而,在《经集》注释中说:“在世尊般涅槃后,进行结集时,具寿大迦叶向具寿阿难询问彼牟尼行道,阿难为清楚显示:何时、如何劝导那罗迦长老向世尊发问等一切,讲述了‘阿难生起……’等二十事偈后作了解答,这一切都称为‘那罗迦经’。”因此,由于《那罗迦经》的事偈已随《那罗迦经》的取摄而被取摄,故在此应将《彼岸品》的事偈视为纯粹偈颂。而且,就在该《显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma paṭisambhidādī’’ti tīsupi kira gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Apare pana paṭisambhidāmaggassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā), etthāpi geyyaṅgasaṅgahitabhāvo vuttanayena vīmaṃsitabbo. No suttanāmikāti asuttanāmikā saṅgītikāle suttasamaññāya apaññātā. ‘‘Suddhikagāthā nāma vatthugāthā’’ti tīsupi kira gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, vatthugāthāti ca pārāyanavaggassa nidānamāropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena saṅgītikāle vuttā chappaññāsa gāthāyo, nālakasuttassa nidānamāropentena teneva tadā vuttā vīsatimattā gāthāyo ca vuccanti. Suttanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.685) pana ‘‘parinibbute bhagavati saṅgītiṃ karontenāyasmatā mahākassapena tameva moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭho āyasmā ānando yena, yadā ca samādapito nālakatthero bhagavantaṃ pucchi, taṃ sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetukāmo ‘ānandajāte’tiādikā (su. ni. 684) vīsati vatthugāthāyo vatvā vissajjesi, taṃ sabbampi ‘nālakasutta’’nti vuccatī’’ti āgatattā nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttaggahaṇeneva gahitāti pārāyanavaggassa vatthugāthāyo idha suddhikagāthāti gahetabbaṃ. Tattheva ca pārāyanavagge ajitamāṇavakādīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pucchāgāthā, bhagavato vissajjanagāthā ca pāḷiyaṃ suttanāmena avatvā ‘ajitamāṇavakapucchā, tissametteyyamāṇavakapucchā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 1038) āgatattā, cuṇṇiyaganthe hi asammissattā ca ‘‘no suttanāmikā suddhikagāthā nāmā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
“与喜俱、智所成的偈颂相应”——由此显示,依“因喜悦而发出”的语源义,故称“优陀那”。这“优陀那”是什么?是由喜悦之冲动所发起的言说。正如油等应被量度的物品,量器不能容纳而溢出流走,便称为“残余”;又如水不被池塘容纳而溢出流走,便称为“大洪水”;同样,由喜悦之冲动所发起的寻思波动,内心无法容纳,变得过剩,不在内部停留,便经由语门向外发出,不期待倾听者,这种特殊的言说,即名为“优陀那”。因为文字学家说:“uda 字根用于欢喜、游戏等义。”而且,这大多是由法之悚惧而发出的情况,因为“若你们怖畏苦……”等优陀那也出现在《优陀那》圣典中。同样,“与偈颂相应”也大多是就常见情况而言,因为“诸比丘,有彼处,其中无地、无水……”等以长行语句发出的情况也出现在那里。问:难道“优陀那”不是指由喜俱或由法之悚惧所发起、不期待倾听者、以偈颂结集或以长行语句结集吗?显示巴利原文
‘‘Somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti etena udānaṭṭhena udānanti anvatthasaññataṃ dasseti (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) kimidaṃ udānaṃ nāma? Pītivegasamuṭṭhāpito udāhāro. Yathā hi yaṃ telādi minitabbavatthu mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘avasesako’’ti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘mahogho’ti vuccati, evameva yaṃ pītivegasamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vitakkavipphāraṃ antohadayaṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, so adhiko hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi vacīdvārena nikkhanto paṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāraviseso ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) ‘‘uda mode kīḷāyañcā’’ti hi akkharacintakā vadanti, idañca yebhuyyena vuttaṃ dhammasaṃvegavasena uditassāpi ‘‘sace bhāyatha dukkhassā’’tiādiudānassa (udā. 44) udānapāḷiyaṃ āgatattā, tathā‘‘gāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti idampi yebhuyyeneva ‘‘atthi bhikkhave, tadāyatanaṃ, yattha neva pathavī, na āpo’’tiādikassa (udā. 71) cuṇṇiyavākyavasena uditassāpi tattha āgatattā. Nanu ca udānaṃ nāma pītisomanassasamuṭṭāpito, dhammasaṃvegasamuṭṭhāpito vā dhammapaṭiggāhakanirapekkho gāthābandhavasena, cuṇṇiyavākyavasena ca pavatto udāhāro, tathā ceva sabbattha āgataṃ, idha kasmā ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantanaṃ vuttanti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saññāpanatthaṃ eva, na paṭiggāhakakaraṇatthaṃ. Nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttañhi bhagavā dhammaṃ desetvā nibbānaguṇānussaraṇena uppannapītisomanassena udānaṃ udānento ‘‘ayaṃ nibbānadhammo kathamapaccayo upalabbhatī’’ti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cetoparivitakkamaññāya tesaṃ tamatthaṃ ñāpetukāmena ‘‘tadāyatana’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana ekantato te paṭiggāhake katvāti veditabbanti.
此教法有三种:遍正觉者所说、独觉所说、声闻所说。其中,独觉所说——显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ sabbaññubuddhabhāsitaṃ paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ sāvakabhāsitanti tibbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ –
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesa’’nti. ādinā (su. ni. 35) –
此句出自《犀牛角经》,亦为声闻所说——显示巴利原文
Khaggavisāṇasutte āgataṃ. Sāvakabhāsitampi –
我已断尽一切贪欲,
我已根除一切嗔恚;
我已断除一切愚痴。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbo rāgo pahīno me, Sabbo doso samūhato; Sabbo me vihato moho, Sītibhūtosmi nibbuto’’ti. ādinā (theragā. 79) –
在《长老偈》中显示巴利原文
Theragāthāsu,
我以身、语、意而防护;
连根拔除了渴爱,我已清凉,已般涅槃。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāyena saṃvutā āsiṃ, vācāya uda cetasā; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, sītibhūtāmhi nibbutā’’ti. (therīgā. 15); –
《长老尼偈》中也有记载。此外,还有诸天如帝释天等所说的,如“啊!布施是最上布施,于迦叶处善为安立”等(《优陀那》27)。由人类如种德婆罗门等所说的,如“礼敬彼世尊”等(《长部》2.371;《中部》1.290;2.290, 357;《相应部》1187;2.38;《增支部》5.194),这些确实被收入三次结集的优陀那中,但所有这些在此处并非所指。然而,唯有由正自觉者亲自直接宣说、成为胜者之语的,才被结集者结集为“优陀那”,而且世尊将教法分为九分而开示时,正是针对此而宣说“优陀那”。至于“历经多生轮回”等(《法句》153)偈颂,是世尊在菩提树下以优陀那方式宣说的,也是无数百千位正自觉者的优陀那,这些后来因世尊为执持法藏者宣说,结集者未将其收入《优陀那》集,而收入了《法句》。又如“确实了知了,尊者憍陈如!确实了知了,尊者憍陈如!”(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》17;《无碍解道》2.30)这一优陀那语,是世尊所宣说,其音声遍满一万世界,令诸天与人得以听闻。但这如同“诸比丘确实成就了我,于一时”等语(《中显示巴利原文
Therīgāthāsu ca āgataṃ. Aññānipi sakkādīhi devehi bhāsitāni ‘‘aho dānaṃ paramadānaṃ, kassape suppatiṭṭhita’’ntiādīni (udā. 27). Soṇadaṇḍabrāhmaṇādīhi manussehi ca bhāsitāni ‘‘namo tassa bhagavato’’tiādīni (dī. ni. 2.371; ma. ni. 1.290; 2.290, 357; saṃ. ni. 1187; 2.38; a. ni. 5.194) tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni udānāni santi eva, tāni sabbānipi idha na adhippetāni. Yaṃ pana sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ āhaccabhāsitaṃ jinavacanabhūtaṃ, tadeva dhammasaṅgāhakehi ‘‘udāna’’nti saṅgītaṃ, tadeva ca sandhāya bhagavatā pariyattidhammaṃ navadhā vibhajitvā uddisantena ‘‘udāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yā pana ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādikā (dha. pa. 153) gāthā bhagavatā bodhimūle udānavasena pavattitā, anekasatasahassānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ udānabhūtā ca, tā aparabhāge dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa bhagavatā desitattā dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ anāropetvā dhammapade saṅgahitā, yañca ‘‘aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 17; paṭi. ma. 2.30) udānavacanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuyā devamanussānaṃ pavedanasamatthanigghosavipphāraṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, tadapi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ sabbesaṃ eva bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattipaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata maṃ bhikkhū ekaṃ samaya’’ntiādivacanaṃ (ma. ni. 1.225) viya dhammacakkappavattanasuttantadesanāpariyosāne attanāpi adhigatadhammekadesassa yathādesitassa ariyamaggassa sabbapaṭhamaṃ sāvakesu therena adhigatattā attano parissamassa saphalabhāvapaccavekkhaṇahetutaṃ pītisomanassajanitaṃ udāhāramattaṃ, na pana ‘‘yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’tiādivacanaṃ viya (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) pavattiyā, nivattiyā vā pakāsananti dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ na saṅgītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Udānapāḷiyaṃ pana aṭṭhasu vaggesu dasa dasa katvā asītiyeva suttantā saṅgītā. Tathā hi tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ –
总计八十经,结为八品。显示巴利原文
‘‘Asītiyeva suttantā, vaggā aṭṭha samāsato’’ti. (Udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
但此处说“八十二经”,与《自说》集不符,因此应以“八十经”的文本为准。不仅此处如此,在其他律藏与论藏的注释书中也这样说,因此可能是依“少许增减不计入总数”的原则,从不同角度而说。又或者,那些地方只是依约略计数而有所增减;若非如此,连那些说法也都不会出现。也有人这样说,或者这仅是后期抄写错误所致。显示巴利原文
Idha pana ‘‘dveasīti suttantā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ udānapāḷiyā na sameti, tasmā ‘‘asīti suttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Apica na kevalaṃ idheva, atha kho aññāsupi (vi. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) vinayābhidhammaṭṭhakathāsu (dha. saṃ. nidānakathā) tathāyeva vuttattā ‘‘appakaṃ pana ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotī’’ti pariyāyena anekaṃsena vuttaṃ siyā. Yathā vā tathā vā anumānena gaṇanameva hi tattha tattha ūnādhikasaṅkhyā, itarathā tāyeva na siyuntipi vadanti, pacchā pamādalekhavacanaṃ vā etaṃ.
以“此是世尊所说”等句为开端的,此处“等”字包含了“此是世尊所说,我闻是阿罗汉所说。诸比丘,应断一法,我为你们保证不还果。哪一法?诸比丘,应断贪这一法,我为你们保证不还果”(《如是语》1)等,以单法、二法、三法、四法的方式宣说,结集了一百一十二经的集合。正如《如是语》集是以自说偈颂来计数的,结集了一百一十二经,其注释书也如此说。因此应以“一百一十二经”的文本为准,或者依前述方式,也可说为从多方面而说。但在此处显示权威性时,应如实确定而显示,因此“一百一十经”的说法只是后来抄写错误,应如此理解,有人这样说。如此,由世尊所说的是“如是语”。被结集为“如是语”的即是《如是语》。或者这是惯用名称,如“耶瓦帕那卡”、“非汝等品”等。以“此是世尊所说,我闻是阿罗汉所说”为缘起语而结集的,就是前述诸经的集合。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatātiādinayappavattāti ettha ādisaddena ‘‘vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamarahatāti me sutaṃ. Ekadhammaṃ bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāya. Katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ? Lobhaṃ bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti (itivu. 1) evamādinā ekadukatikacatukkanipātavasena vuttaṃ dvādasuttarasatasuttasamūhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi itivuttakapāḷiyameva udānagāthāhi dvādasuttarasatasuttāni gaṇetvā saṅgītāni, tadaṭṭhakathāyampi (itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) tathāyeva vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ icceva pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, yathāvuttanayena vā anekaṃsato vuttantipi vattuṃ sakkā, tathāpi īdise ṭhāne pamāṇaṃ dassentena yāthāvatova niyametvā dassetabbanti ‘‘dasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti idaṃ pacchā pamādalekhamevāti gahetabbanti vadanti. Iti evaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ itivuttaṃ. Itivuttanti saṅgītaṃ itivuttakaṃ. Ruḷhināmaṃ vā etaṃ yathā ‘‘yevāpanakaṃ, natumhākavaggo’’ti, vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamarahatāti me sutanti nidānavacanena saṅgītaṃ yathāvuttasuttasamūhaṃ.
所谓“本生”,即以此讲述、宣说、阐明世尊过去已生、已成、往昔所行的宿世行迹。为说明这些本生,他说“无戏论本生等”。其中,“五百又五十本生”这一说法,因稍有增减并不计入确切数目,故为不定之说,且仅是方便称呼而已。若严格来说,的确只有五百四十七则,比前述数目少了三则。具体而言:一集有一百五十则,二集有一百则,三集有五十则,四集亦然,五集有二十五则,六集有二十则,七集有二十一则,八集有十则,九集有十二则,十集有十六则,十一集有九则,十二集有十则,十三集亦然,杂集有十三则,二十集有十四则,三十集有十则,四十集有五则,五十集有三则,六十集有二则,七十集亦然,八十集有五则,大集有十则。如是,结集的本生的确只有五百四十七则。显示巴利原文
Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ purāvutthaṃ bhagavato pubbacaritaṃ kāyati katheti pakāseti etenāti jātakaṃ, taṃ pana imānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘apaṇṇakajātakādīnī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘paññāsādhikāni pañcajātakasatānī’’ti idaṃ appakaṃ pana ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā anekaṃsena, vohārasukhatāmattena ca vuttaṃ. Ekaṃsato hi sattacattālīsādhikāniyeva yathāvuttagaṇanato tīhi ūnattā. Tathā hi ekanipāte paññāsasataṃ, dukanipāte sataṃ, tikanipāte paññāsa, tathā catukkanipāte, pañcakanipāte pañcavīsa, chakkanipāte vīsa, sattanipāte ekavīsa, aṭṭhanipāte dasa, navanipāte dvādasa, dasanipāte soḷasa, ekādasanipāte nava, dvādasanipāte dasa, tathā terasanipāte, pakiṇṇakanipāte terasa, vīsatinipāte cuddasa, tiṃsanipāte dasa, cattālīsanipāte pañca, paṇṇāsanipāte tīṇi, saṭṭhinipāte dve, tathā sattatinipāte, asītinipāte pañca, mahānipāte dasāti sattacattālīsādhikāneva pañca jātakasatāni saṅgītānīti.
所谓“未曾有法”,是指其中所述之法具有稀有、本然的性质。为说明此点,他说“有四种”等。此处以“等”字……显示巴利原文
Abbhuto dhammo sabhāvo vutto yatthāti abbhutadhammaṃ, taṃ panidanti āha ‘‘cattārome’’tiādi. Ādisaddena cettha –
“诸比丘,于阿难有四种稀有、未曾有法。哪四种?诸比丘,若有比丘众前来见阿难,彼众因得见而心生喜悦;若阿难于彼处说法,彼众因所说法而心生喜悦。诸比丘,比丘众尚未满足,阿难已默然。诸比丘,若有比丘尼众……乃至……优婆塞众……乃至……优婆夷众,前来见阿难,彼众因得见而心生喜悦;若阿难于彼处说法,彼众因所说法而心生喜悦。诸比丘,彼众尚未满足,阿难已默然。诸比丘,此即为……于阿难……”(《增支部》4.129)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Katame cattāro? Sace bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando, dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva bhikkhave bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Sace bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā…pe… upāsakaparisā…pe… upāsikā – parisā…pe… tuṇhī bhavati. Ime kho bhikkhave…pe… ānande’’ti (a. ni. 4.129) –
凡以如此方式展开、于各处所宣说的一切,皆摄集了与稀有未曾有法相关的经典。显示巴利原文
Evamādinayappavattaṃ tattha tattha bhāsitaṃ sabbampi acchariyabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suttantaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在《小有明》等中,由一位名叫毗舍佉的优婆塞提问、一位名叫法施的比丘尼所说的经,名为《小有明》。由大拘絺罗长老提问、尊者舍利弗长老所说的,名为《大有明》。《正见经》也是由比丘们提问、由同一位舍利弗所说,这些都属于《中部》。而《帝释所问》是由帝释提问、世尊所说,属于《长部》。《大满月经》则是在当月十五布萨日满月之夜,由一位比丘提问、世尊所说,属于《中部》。应知,凡如上述这般于各处在获得智与喜之后而提问的经典,皆名为‘有明’。‘明’即智。‘喜’即了知如所说法之教说后,以‘善哉,圣尼!善哉,贤友!’等方式生起的随喜之喜悦。‘获得获得’即一再获得之义。由此显示,‘明’一词依省略或通称的方式,兼指智与喜悦二者;而‘有明’则意为依止于明,或令获得明与喜悦者。显示巴利原文
Cūḷavedallādīsu (ma. ni. 1.460) visākhena nāma upāsakena puṭṭhāya dhammadinnāya nāma bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ cūḷavedallaṃ nāma. Mahākoṭṭhikattherena pucchitena āyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ mahāvedallaṃ (ma. ni. 1.449) nāma. Sammādiṭṭhisuttampi (ma. ni. 1.89) bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena teneva bhāsitaṃ, etāni majjhimanikāyapariyāpannāni. Sakkapañhaṃ (dī. ni. 2.344) pana sakkena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi, taṃ dīghanikāyapariyāpannaṃ. Mahāpuṇṇamasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.85) pana tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇamāya rattiyā aññatarena bhikkhunā puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ majjhimanikāyapariyāpannaṃ. Evamādayo sabbepi tattha tatthāgatā vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitasuttantā ‘‘vedalla’’nti veditabbaṃ.Vedanti ñāṇaṃ. Tuṭṭhinti yathābhāsitadhammadesanaṃ viditvā ‘‘sādhu ayye sādhāvuso’’tiādinā abbhanumodanavasappavattaṃ pītisomanassaṃ. Laddhā laddhāti labhitvā labhitvā, punappunaṃ labhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, etena vedasaddo ñāṇe, somanasse ca ekasesanayena, sāmaññaniddesena vā pavattati, vedamhi nissitaṃ tassa labhāpanavasenāti vedallanti ca dasseti.
如此依分教分析一切佛语后,今欲依法蕴之数而分析,故说‘如何’等语。其中,‘依法蕴之数’即依法蕴的数量。‘八万二千’这一偈颂,其义已明。如此,依所阐明的法蕴之数,即由一位名叫瞿默目犍连的婆罗门提问,在《瞿默目犍连经》中,或为显示自身功德,在《长老偈》中由尊者阿难长老从各方面所阐明的法蕴之数;以此方式,他表明:即使未被阿难阐明的法蕴之数亦复存在。因此,当知依《论事》《蜜丸经》《天宫事》等中的某些偈颂,法蕴之数甚至超过八万四千。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aṅgavasena sakalampi buddhavacanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhammakkhandhavasena vibhajitukāmo ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dhammakkhandhavasenāti dhammarāsivasena. ‘‘Dvāsītī’’ti ayaṃ gāthā vuttatthāva. Evaṃ paridīpitadhammakkhandhavasenāti gopakamoggallānena nāma brāhmaṇena puṭṭhena gopakamoggallānasutte (ma. ni. 3.79) attano guṇappakāsanatthaṃ vā theragāthāyaṃ (theragā. 1017 ādayo) āyasmatā ānandattherena samantato dīpitadhammakkhandhavasena iminā evaṃ tena aparidīpitāpi dhammakkhandhā santīti pakāseti, tasmā kathāvatthuppakaraṇa mādhuriyasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 2.317) vimānavatthādīsu kesañci gāthānañca vasena caturāsītisahassatopi dhammakkhandhānaṃ adhikatā veditabbā.
在此,有一个问题:《须跋经》(《长部》1.444)与《瞿巴迦·目犍连经》是世尊般涅槃后由阿难长老所说的,它们是否包含在八万四千法蕴之中?关于这一点,《无碍解道义释》中曾有说明:'应将比丘自己所说的法蕴也视为摄取自佛语而收摄,故有此说,应作此观。'然而,既然这些经文是依于世尊所传授的教法而说,那么更确切的说法应当是:'这两部经虽是(阿难)自己所说,但也是摄集于佛语之中而宣说的。'因为弟子们正是依于世尊所传授的教法而说法,也正因如此,弟子所说的《论事》等也被视同佛语。同样基于这个原因,阿难长老在将他亲口所说的《须跋经》等收入结集时,也宣称'如是我闻'。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444), gopakamoggallānasuttañca parinibbute bhagavati ānandattherena bhāsitattā caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu antogadhaṃ hoti, na hotīti? Paṭisambhidāgaṇṭhipade tāva idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānampi bhikkhuto gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā evamāhāti daṭṭhabba’’nti, bhagavatā pana dinnanaye ṭhatvā bhāsitattā ‘‘sayaṃ vuttampi cetaṃ suttadvayaṃ bhagavato gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā vutta’’nti evampi vattuṃ yuttataraṃ viya dissati. Bhagavatā hi dinnanaye ṭhatvā sāvakā dhammaṃ desenti, teneva sāvakabhāsitampi kathāvatthādikaṃ buddhabhāsitaṃ nāma jātaṃ , tatoyeva ca attanā bhāsitampi subhasuttādikaṃ saṅgītimāropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vuttaṃ.
单一连贯的经,例如《念处经》等。因为《念处经》以'诸比丘,此是唯一道路,为令众生清净……'等语(《长部》2.373;《中部》1.106;《相应部》3.367-384)为开端,在举出四念处之后,便纯粹为了显示其具体内容而展开,故称'单一连贯'。多种连贯的经,例如《般涅槃经》等(《长部》2.131以下)。因为《般涅槃经》是依于不同地点和各种法义次第展开的,故称'多种连贯'。显示巴利原文
Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ satipaṭṭhānādi. Satipaṭṭhānasuttañhi ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.106; saṃ. ni. 3.367-384) cattāro satipaṭṭhāne ārabhitvā tesaṃyeva vibhāgadassanavasena pavattattā ‘‘ekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Anekānusandhikaṃ parinibbānasuttādi (dī. ni. 2.131 ādayo) parinibbānasuttañhi nānāṭhānesu nānādhammadesanānaṃ vasena pavattattā ‘‘anekānusandhika’’nti vuccati.
比丘超越多少结缚,才被称为‘渡暴流者’?(《相应部》1.5)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kati chinde kati jahe, kati cuttari bhāvaye; Kati saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5); –
如此以提问方式出现在偈颂中的,为一法蕴。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā pañhāpucchanaṃ gāthābandhesu eko dhammakkhandho.
应断五,应舍五,应更修习五;
比丘超越五结缚,即称为‘渡越暴流者’。”(《相应部》1.5);
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pañca chinde pañca jahe, pañca cuttari bhāvaye; Pañca saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5); –
如此这般以解答的方式来宣说的,即为一法蕴。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā ca vissajjanaṃ eko dhammakkhandho.
《法集论》中的三法二法分别,应依据摄品与注释篇来掌握。因此,关于善三法论母的条目,在摄品中依分别方式所说如下——显示巴利原文
Tikadukabhājanaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍaaṭṭhakathākaṇḍavasena gahetabbaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kusalattikamātikāpadassa (dha. sa. 1) vibhajanavasena nikkhepakaṇḍe vuttaṃ –
“哪些法是善的?三善根……乃至……这些法是善的。哪些法是不善的?三不善根……乃至……这些法是不善的。哪些法是无记的?善法与不善法的异熟……乃至……这些法是无记的。”(《法集论》187)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Tīṇi kusalamūlāni…pe… ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni…pe… ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā’’? Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipākā…pe… ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti (dha. sa. 187),
这是一个法蕴。其余三法与二法论母的分别亦同此理。而在义注篇中曾说:显示巴利原文
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Esa nayo sesattikadukapadavibhajanesupi. Yadapi aṭṭhakathākaṇḍe vuttaṃ –
“哪些法是善的?四地中的善法,这些法是善。哪些法是不善的?十二不善心生,这些法是不善。哪些法是无记的?四地中的异熟、三地中的唯作无记,以及色和涅槃,这些法是无记。”(《法集论》1386)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Dvādasa akusalacittuppādā. Ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā? Catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ rūpañca nibbānañca. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1386),
这是依善三法论母的分别而展开的一个法蕴。其余各处亦然。而心转的分别,则应依《心生起品》来把握。因为在彼处,为分别善心而说——显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kusalattikamātikāpadassa vibhajanavasena pavatto eko dhammakkhandho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Cittavārabhājanaṃ pana cittuppādakaṇḍa vasena (dha. sa. 1) gahetabbaṃ. Yañhi tattha vuttaṃ kusalacittavibhajanatthaṃ –
“哪些法是善?于某时,生起欲界善心,与喜俱、与智相应,以色等为所缘……乃至……尔时有触……乃至……有不散乱。”(《法集论》1)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1),
这是一个法蕴。其余的心转分别也是如此。“一个法蕴”的意思,即是每一个法蕴(有六个或八个)。因为从“一一的三法与二法之分别、一一的心转之分别”这样的措辞来看,即便未说出“一一”,依其义理,这一含义也自然得以了知。显示巴利原文
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Evaṃ sesacittavāravibhajanesu. Eko dhammakkhandhoti (ekameko dhammakkhandho chaḷa aṭṭha.) ca ekeko dhammakkhandhoti attho. ‘‘Ekamekaṃ tikadukabhājanaṃ, ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājana’’nti ca vacanato hi ‘‘ekeko’’ti avuttepi ayamattho sāmatthiyato viññāyamānova hoti.
事,即苏丁那篇等。母,即“若复有比丘,已具足比丘之学与活命……”等针对每一种违犯所制定的巴帝摩卡学处。句分别,即对每一学处,依“若复者,谓无论何人……”等方式展开的词句辨析。中间罪,即依“若舞弄炽热铁器,恶作”等,于学处之间所制定的罪。罪,即符合该学处所述,依三截方式开示的罪品。无罪,即依“无知者无罪、不欲者无罪、心狂乱者无罪、受苦痛者无罪、最初犯者无罪”等方式展开的无罪品。三截,即依“过十日,想为过十日,舍堕;过十日,有疑……乃至……过十日,想为未过十日,舍堕”等方式展开的三波逸提、三恶作等分类的三重章节。此中,即指在那些事、母等之中。显示巴利原文
Vatthu nāma sudinnakaṇḍādi. Mātikā nāma ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ajjhācāre paññattaṃ uddesa sikkhāpadaṃ. Padabhājaniyanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘yo panāti yo yādiso’’tiādi (pārā. 45) nayappavattaṃ padavibhajanaṃ. Antarāpattīti ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evamādinā sikkhāpadantaresu paññattā āpatti. Āpattīti taṃtaṃsikkhāpadānurūpaṃ vutto tikacchedamutto āpattivāro. Anāpattīti ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikassā’’tiādi (pārā. 66) nayappavatto anāpattivāro. Tikacchedoti ‘‘dasāhātikkante atikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante vematiko…pe… dasāhātikkante anatikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 468) evamādinayappavatto tikapācittiya-tika-dukkaṭādibhedo tikaparicchedo. Tatthāti tesu vatthumātikādīsu.
如是由大迦叶尊者为首的圣众僧团,显示了如此以种种理则所庄严的结集方式后,将佛语“此是法,此是律……乃至……此八万四千法蕴”,依法与律等差别加以确定并进行结集。为显示以种种稀有瑞相所庄严的结集,方确定了此《长部》之法性与《中部》等佛语之性,故说“如是等”。虽以共通之语标示,但诸阿阇梨说其关联如下:“为赞颂彼目的而始作此事,彼目的即是依其主要着力处所显示。”又一种理则:为显示在下文将述的单一等分类类别中,法与律等性在结集者结集之时便已确定,并非后来仅由安立而成,故说“如是等”,也应作此解说。为显示“并非仅依如上所说类别确定而结集,尚有其他”,故说“非唯”等。自摄,即于初波罗夷等中所出的事等,法集论师为要略显示其摄集而设立——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anekanayasamalaṅkataṃ saṅgītippakāraṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo…pe… imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayādibhedena vavatthapetvā saṅgāyantena mahākassapappamukhena vasīgaṇena anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitāya saṅgītiyā imassa dīghāgamassa dhammabhāvo, majjhimabuddhavacanādibhāvo ca vavatthāpitoti dassento ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāha. Sādhāraṇavacanena dassitepi hi ‘‘yadatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetuṃ idamārabhati, soyeva padhānavasena dassito’’ti ācariyehi ayaṃ sambandho vutto. Aparo nayo – heṭṭhā vuttesu ekavidhādibhedabhinnesu pakāresu dhammavinayādibhāvo saṅgītikārake heva saṅgītikāle vavatthāpito, na pacchā kappanamattasiddhoti dassento ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāhātipi vattabbo. Na kevalaṃ yathāvuttappakārameva vavatthāpetvā saṅgītaṃ, atha kho aññampīti dasseti ‘‘na kevalañcā’’tiādinā. Udānasaṅgaho nāma paṭhamapārājikādīsu āgatānaṃ vinītavatthuādīnaṃ saṅkhepato saṅgahadassanavasena dhammasaṅgāhakehi ṭhapitā –
‘‘Makkaṭī vajjiputtā ca, gihī naggo ca titthiyā; Dārikuppalavaṇṇā ca, byañjanehi pare duve’’ti. ādikā (pārā. 66); –
偈颂。对于正在宣说或已宣说的义理,不令其流散,而是向上摄持、守护——这即是“优陀那”,意为摄取之语。依《戒蕴品》《根本法门品》等分类,即是“品”的结集。“品”是结集者对诸经集合所安立的名称。依《上人篇》《青莲篇》等分类,即是“篇”的结集。“篇”(peyyāla)意为守护或开示,即省略之语。在《增支部》等中,有“集”的结集,以偈颂等支分编集。“集”即是合集。依《天相应》等分类,即是“相应”的结集。“相应”是结集者对品群所安立的名称。依《根本五十经》等分类,即是“五十经”的结集,意谓计五十经、五十经而结集。“等”字即含摄于各该圣典中所见的结集者之言。如此,由优陀那结集……乃至……五十经结集等,有多种方式。“以七个月”是具格,用于表示动作完成,例如“仅一日即往波罗奈”、“以九月完成精舍”。所谓动作完成,即是指动作的究竟完成。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyo. Vuccamānassa hi vuttassa vā atthassa vippakiṇṇabhāvena pavattituṃ adatvā uddhaṃ dānaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ udānaṃ, saṅgahavacananti attho. Sīlakkhandhavaggamūlapariyāyavaggādivasena vaggasaṅgaho. Vaggoti hi dhammasaṅgāhakeheva katā suttasamudāyassa samaññā. Uttarimanussapeyyālanīlapeyyālādivasena peyyālasaṅgaho. Pātuṃ rakkhituṃ, vitthārituṃ vā alanti hi peyyālaṃ, saṅkhipitvā dassanavacanaṃ. Aṅguttaranikāyādīsu nipātasaṅgaho, gāthaṅgādivasena nipātanaṃ. Samudāyakaraṇañhi nipāto. Devatāsaṃyuttādivasena (saṃ. ni. 1.1) saṃyuttasaṅgaho. Vaggasamudāye eva dhammasaṅgāhakehi katā saṃyuttasamaññā. Mūlapaṇṇāsakādivasena paṇṇāsasaṅgaho, paññāsa paññāsa suttāni gaṇetvā saṅgahoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ādisaddena tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ dissamānaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Udānasaṅgaha…pe… paṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhi anekavidhaṃ tathā. Sattahi māsehīti kiriyāpavagge tatiyā ‘‘ekāheneva bārāṇasiṃ pāyāsi. Navahi māsehi vihāraṃ niṭṭhāpesī’’tiādīsu viya. Kiriyāya āsuṃ pariniṭṭhāpanañhi kiriyāpavaggo.
以此类比,问答偈语在偈颂集中即是一法蕴。显示巴利原文
Tadā anekacchariyapātubhāvadassanena sādhūnaṃ pasādajananatthamāha ‘‘saṅgītipariyosāne cassā’’tiādi. Assa buddhavacanassa saṅgītipariyosāne sañjātappamodā viya, sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viya ca saṅkampi…pe… pāturahesunti sambandho. Viyāti hi ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ. Pavattane, pavattanāya vā samatthaṃ pavattanasamatthaṃ. Udakapariyantanti pathavīsandhārakaudakapariyosānaṃ katvā, saha tena udakena, taṃ vā udakaṃ āhaccāti vuttaṃ hoti, tena ekadesakampanaṃ nivāreti. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhamadho ca gacchantī sammā pakārena kampi. Sampavedhīti catūsu disāsu gacchantī suṭṭhu bhiyyo pavedhi. Evaṃ etena padattayena chappakāraṃ pathavīcalanaṃ dasseti. Atha vā puratthimato, pacchimato ca unnamanaonamanavasena saṅkampi. Uttarato, dakkhiṇato ca unnamanaonamanavasena sampakampi. Majjhimato, pariyantato ca unnamanaonamanavasena sampavedhi. Evampi chappakāraṃ pathavīcalanaṃ dasseti, yaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ –-
东方隆起,西方下沉;西方隆起,东方下沉;北方隆起,南方下沉;南方隆起,北方下沉;中央隆起,边际下沉;边际隆起,中央下沉——大地以如是六种……震动。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puratthimato unnamati pacchimato onamati, pacchimato unnamati puratthimato onamati, uttarato unnamati dakkhiṇato onamati, dakkhiṇato unnamati uttarato onamati , majjhimato unnamati pariyantato onamati, pariyantato unnamati majjhimato onamatīti evaṃ chappakāraṃ…pe… akampitthā’’ti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 71).
值得弹指惊叹之事,即是“希有之事”。为了说明花雨、振衣等事也以此名而为人所知,故说“凡于世中”等句。所谓“第一次大结集”,是由结集法的五百位长老,即以大迦叶等为首而举行的结集;因为参与其中的有五百位,故于世中称为“五百众”,又因为唯由长老们所举行,大迦叶等长老即是结集者,故也称为“长老之说”。这就是所谓的第一次大结集。这是衔接。显示巴利原文
Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttāni acchariyāni, pupphavassacelukkhepādīni aññāyapi sā samaññāya pākaṭāti dassento āha ‘‘yā loke’’tiādi. Yā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dhammasaṅgāhakehi mahākassapādīhi pañcahi satehi yena katā saṅgītā, tena pañca satāni etissāti ‘‘pañcasatā’’ti ca thereheva katattā therā mahākassapādayo etissā, therehi vā katāti ‘‘therikā’’ti ca loke pavuccati, ayaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāmāti sambandho.
如此明示第一次大结集之后,为了显示在此处叙述它的目的,如今以归结的方式说明其缘起,而作“于此”等说。“为最初之部类”,是指在收录于经藏的五部之中,作为最初的《长部》。因为包含了小部的律藏,是最初结集的。正如所说“在经藏中”。因此缘故,如前所说,我即依此第一次大结集的如是之说而作如是说,这便是前后的关联;或者,这是为了显示如前述那般的广说功德。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha dassitā, idāni taṃ nidānaṃ nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha. Ādinikāyassāti suttantapiṭakapariyāpannesu pañcasu nikāyesu ādibhūtassa dīghanikāyassa. Khuddakapariyāpanno hi vinayo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘suttanta piṭake’’ti. Tenāti tathāvuttattā, iminā yathāvuttapaṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ tathāvacanameva sandhāya mayā heṭṭhā evaṃ vuttanti pubbāparasambandhaṃ, yathāvuttavitthāravacanassa vā guṇaṃ dassetīti.
以上是《长部》注释书《吉祥悦美》中,由大导师、大语法家、名为智胜法军论师的尊者大法王增上尊重所造,阐明隐晦义理的《外序分注》——名为《善悦》——至此结束。这位论师具足正直、柔和、惭耻、信、念、慧、忍、精进等法,精通有注释的三藏,以无滞无畏之智而行,深入自他种种宗派教义的稠林。显示巴利原文
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhanti vīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmatherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā bāhiranidānavaṇṇanāya līnatthapakāsanā.